P. 1
48554217 Theory of Vortex Sound Cambridge Texts in Applied Mathematics by M S Howe

48554217 Theory of Vortex Sound Cambridge Texts in Applied Mathematics by M S Howe

|Views: 119|Likes:
Published by jnattia

More info:

Published by: jnattia on Oct 22, 2011
Copyright:Attribution Non-commercial

Availability:

Read on Scribd mobile: iPhone, iPad and Android.
download as PDF, TXT or read online from Scribd
See more
See less

11/11/2012

pdf

text

original

This page intentionally left blank

Theory of Vortex Sound
Theory of Vortex Sound is an introduction to the theory of sound generated by
hydrodynamic flows. Starting with a reviewof elementary theoretical acoustics,
the book proceeds to a unified treatment of low Mach number vortex-surface
interaction noise in terms of the compact Green’s function. Problems are pro-
vided at the end of each chapter, many of which can be used for extended student
projects, and a whole chapter is devoted to worked examples.
It is designed for a one-semester introductory course at the advanced un-
dergraduate or graduate levels. Great care is taken to explain underlying fluid
mechanical and acoustic concepts, and to describe as fully as possible the steps
in a complicated derivation.
M.S. Howe has been Professor in the Department of Aerospace and Mechanical
Engineering at Boston University since 1992. He is a Fellow of the Institute of
Acoustics (U.K.) and of the Acoustical Society of America.
Cambridge Texts in Applied Mathematics
Maximum and Minimum Principles
M. J. Sewell
Solitons
P. G. Drazin and R. S. Johnson
The Kinematics of Mixing
J. M. Ottino
Introduction to Numerical Linear Algebra and Optimisation
Philippe G. Ciarlet
Integral Equations
David Porter and David S. G. Stirling
Perturbation Methods
E. J. Hinch
The Thermomechanics of Plasticity and Fracture
Gerard A. Maugin
Boundary Integral and Singularity Methods for Linearized Viscous Flow
C. Pozrikidis
Nonlinear Wave Processes in Acoustics
K. Naugolnykh and L. Ostrovsky
Nonlinear Systems
P. G. Drazin
Stability, Instability, and Chaos
Paul Glendinning
Applied Analysis of the Navier–Stokes Equations
C. R. Doering and J. D. Gibbon
Viscous Flow
H. Ockendon and J. R. Ockendon
Scaling, Self-Similarity, and Intermediate Asymptotics
G. I. Barenblatt
A First Course in the Numerical Analysis of Differential Equations
Arieh Iserles
Complex Variables: Introduction and Applications
Mark J. Ablowitz and Athanassios S. Fokas
Mathematical Models in the Applied Sciences
A. C. Fowler
Thinking About Ordinary Differential Equations
Robert E. O’Malley
A Modern Introduction to the Mathematical Theory of Water Waves
R. S. Johnson
Rarefied Gas Dynamics
Carlo Cercignani
Symmetry Methods for Differential Equations
Peter E. Hydon
High Speed Flow
C. J. Chapman
Wave Motion
J. Billingham and A. C. King
An Introduction to Magnetohydrodynamics
P. A. Davidson
Linear Elastic Waves
John G. Harris
Vorticity and Incompressible Flow
Andrew J. Majda and Andrea L. Bertozzi
Infinite Dimensional Dynamical Systems
James C. Robinson
An Introducion to Symmetry Analysis
Brian J. Cantwell
Backlund and Darboux Transformations
C. Rogers and W. K. Schief
Finite-Volume Methods for Hyperbolic Problems
Randall J. LeVeque
Introduction to Hydrodynamic Stability
P. G. Drazin
Theory of Vortex Sound
M. S. Howe
Theory of Vortex Sound
M. S. HOWE
Boston University
caxniioci uxiviisir\ iiiss
Cambridge, New York, Melbourne, Madrid, Cape Town, Singapore, São Paulo
Cambridge University Press
The Edinburgh Building, Cambridge cn: :iu, United Kingdom
First published in print format
isnx-:, ,;ï-c-,::-ï::ï:-ï
isnx-:, ,;ï-c-,::-c:::,-:
isnx-:, ,;ï-c-,::-c;ï:¡-,
© Cambridge University Press 2003
2002
Information on this title: www.cambridge.org/9780521812818
This book is in copyright. Subject to statutory exception and to the provision of
relevant collective licensing agreements, no reproduction of any part may take place
without the written permission of Cambridge University Press.
isnx-:c c-,::-c;ï:¡-,
isnx-:c c-,::-ï::ï:-x
isnx-:c c-,::-c:::,-o
Cambridge University Press has no responsibility for the persistence or accuracy of
uiis for external or third-party internet websites referred to in this book, and does not
guarantee that any content on such websites is, or will remain, accurate or appropriate.
Published in the United States of America by Cambridge University Press, New York
www.cambridge.org
hardback
paperback
paperback
eBook (NetLibrary)
eBook (NetLibrary)
hardback
To Shˆ on Ffowcs Williams
Contents
Preface page xiii
1 Introduction 1
1.1 What is Vortex Sound? 1
1.2 Equations of Motion of a Fluid 2
1.3 Equation of Linear Acoustics 4
1.4 The Special Case of an Incompressible Fluid 7
1.5 Sound Produced by an Impulsive Point Source 10
1.6 Free-Space Green’s Function 12
1.7 Monopoles, Dipoles, and Quadrupoles 13
1.8 Acoustic Energy Flux 18
1.9 Calculation of the Acoustic Far Field 20
Problems 1 23
2 Lighthill’s Theory 25
2.1 The Acoustic Analogy 25
2.2 Lighthill’s :
8
Law 29
2.3 Curle’s Theory 32
2.4 Sound Produced by Turbulence Near a Compact Rigid Body 36
2.5 Radiation from a Noncompact Surface 37
Problems 2 39
3 The Compact Green’s Function 41
3.1 The Influence of Solid Boundaries 41
3.2 The Helmholtz Equation 44
3.3 The Reciprocal Theorem 46
3.4 Time-Harmonic Compact Green’s Function 49
ix
x Contents
3.5 Compact Green’s Function for a Rigid Sphere 53
3.6 Compact Green’s Function for Cylindrical Bodies 58
3.7 Symmetric Compact Green’s Function 63
3.8 Low-Frequency Radiation from a Vibrating Body 65
3.9 Compact Green’s Function Summary and Special Cases 70
Problems 3 79
4 Vorticity 82
4.1 Vorticity and the Kinetic Energy of Incompressible Flow 82
4.2 The Vorticity Equation 84
4.3 The Biot–Savart Law 88
4.4 Surface Force in Incompressible Flow Expressed in Terms
of Vorticity 93
4.5 The Complex Potential 100
4.6 Motion of a Line Vortex 106
Problems 4 112
5 Vortex Sound 114
5.1 The Role of Vorticity in Lighthill’s Theory 114
5.2 The Equation of Vortex Sound 116
5.3 Vortex–Surface Interaction Noise 124
5.4 Radiation from an Acoustically Compact Body 128
5.5 Radiation from Cylindrical Bodies of Compact Cross Section 130
5.6 Impulse Theory of Vortex Sound 131
Problems 5 132
6 Vortex–Surface Interaction Noise in Two Dimensions 136
6.1 Compact Green’s Function in Two Dimensions 136
6.2 Sound Generated by a Line Vortex Interacting with
a Cylindrical Body 139
6.3 Influence of Vortex Shedding 145
6.4 Blade–Vortex Interaction Noise in Two Dimensions 150
Problems 6 154
7 Problems in Three Dimensions 156
7.1 Linear Theory of Vortex–Airfoil Interaction Noise 156
7.2 Blade–Vortex Interactions in Three Dimensions 158
7.3 Sound Produced by Vortex Motion near a Sphere 162
7.4 Compression Wave Generated When a Train Enters a Tunnel 166
Problems 7 172
Contents xi
8 Further Worked Examples 175
8.1 Blade–Vortex Interactions in Two Dimensions 175
8.2 Parallel Blade–Vortex Interactions in Three Dimensions 186
8.3 Vortex Passing over a Spoiler 191
8.4 Bluff Body Interactions: The Circular Cylinder 194
8.5 Vortex Ring and Sphere 199
8.6 Vortex Pair Incident on a Wall Aperture 204
Bibliography 209
Index 213
Preface
Vortex sound is the branch of fluid mechanics concerned with the conversion
of hydrodynamic (rotational) kinetic energy into the longitudinal disturbances
we call sound. The subject is itself a subsection of the theory of aerodynamic
sound, which encompasses a much wider range of problems also involving, for
example, combustion and ‘entropy’ sources of sound. The book is based on an
introductory one-semester graduate level course given on several occasions at
Boston University. Most students at this level possess an insufficient grasp of
basic principles to appreciate the subtle coupling of the hydrodynamic and
acoustic fields, and many are ill-equipped to deal with the novel analytical
techniques that have been developed to investigate the coupling. Great care
has therefore been taken to discuss underlying fluid mechanical and acoustic
concepts, andtoexplainas fullyas possible the steps ina complicatedderivation.
A considerable number of practical problems occur at low Mach numbers
(say, less than about 0.4). It seems reasonable, therefore, to confine an intro-
ductory discussion specifically to low Mach number flows. It is then possible
to investigate a number of idealized hydrodynamic flows involving elementary
distributions of vorticity adjacent to solid boundaries, and to analyze in detail
the sound produced by these vortex–surface interactions. For a broad range of
such problems, and a corresponding broad range of noise problems encountered
in industrial applications, the effective acoustic sources turn out to be localized
to one or more regions that are small compared to the acoustic wavelength. This
permits the development of a unified theory of sound production by vortex–
surface interactions in terms of the compact Green’s function, culminating in a
routine procedure for estimating the sound, and providing, at the same time, an
easy identification of those parts of a structure that are likely to be important
sources of sound. Many examples of this type are discussed, and they are simple
enough for the student to acquire an intuitive understanding of the method of
xiii
xiv Preface
solution and the underlying physics. By these means the reader is encouraged to
investigate both the hydrodynamics and the sound generated by a simple flow.
Experience has shown that the successful completion of this kind of project,
involving the implementation of a widely applicable yet standard procedure for
the prediction of sound generation at low Mach numbers, motivates a student
to understand the ostensibly difficult parts of the theory. One or more of the
problems appended to some of the later chapters can formthe basis of a project.
The final chapter contains a set of worked examples that have been investi-
gated by students at Boston University. I wish to thank my former students
H. Abou-Hussein, A. DeBenedictis, N. Harrison, M. Kim, M. A. Rodrigues,
and F. Zagadou for their considerable help in preparing that chapter.
The mathematical ability assumed of the reader is roughly equivalent to
that taught in an advanced undergraduate course on Engineering Mathematics.
In particular, the reader should be familiar with basic vector differential and in-
tegral calculus and with the repeated suffix summation convention of Cartesian
tensors (but a detailed knowledge of tensor calculus is not required). An el-
ementary understanding of the properties of the Dirac δ function is desir-
able (Lighthill, 1958), including its interpretation as the formal limit of an
c-sequence, such as
δ(x) =
c
π(x
2
÷c
2
)
. c →÷0.
Much use is made of the formula
δ( f (x)) =

n
δ(x − x
n
)
[ f
/
(x
n
)[
.
where the summation is over real simple roots of f (x) =0.
M. S. Howe
1
Introduction
1.1 What is Vortex Sound?
Vortex sound is the sound produced as a by-product of unsteady fluid mo-
tions (Fig. 1.1.1). It is part of the more general subject of aerodynamic sound.
The modern theory of aerodynamic sound was pioneered by James Lighthill
in the early 1950s. Lighthill (1952) wanted to understand the mechanisms of
noise generation by the jet engines of new passenger jet aircraft that were
then about to enter service. However, it is now widely recognized that any
mechanism that produces sound can actually be formulated as a problem of
aerodynamic sound. Thus, apart from the high speed turbulent jet – which may
be regarded as a distribution of intense turbulence velocity fluctuations that gen-
erate sound by converting a tiny fraction of the jet rotational kinetic energy into
the longitudinal waves that constitute sound – colliding solid bodies, aeroengine
rotor blades, vibrating surfaces, complex fluid–structure interactions in the lar-
ynx (responsible for speech), musical instruments, conventional loudspeakers,
crackling paper, explosions, combustion and combustion instabilities in rock-
ets, and so forth all fall within the theory of aerodynamic sound in its broadest
sense.
In this book we shall consider principally the production of sound by un-
steady motions of a fluid. Any fluid that possesses intrinsic kinetic energy, that
is, energy not directly attributable to a moving boundary (which is largely with-
drawn fromthe fluid when the boundary motion ceases), must possess vorticity.
We shall see that in a certain sense and for a vast number of flows vorticity may
be regarded as the ultimate source of the sound generated by the flow. Our
objective, therefore, is to simplify the general aerodynamic sound problem to
obtain a thorough understanding of how this happens, and of how the sound
can be estimated quantitatively.
1
2 1 Introduction
Fig. 1.1.1. Typical vortex sound problems.
1.2 Equations of Motion of a Fluid
At time t and position x = (x
1
. x
2
. x
3
), the state of a fluid is defined when the
velocity v and any two thermodynamic variables are specified. Five scalar
equations are therefore required to determine the motion. These equations are
statements of the conservation of mass, momentum, and energy.
1.2.1 Equation of Continuity
Conservation of mass requires the rate of increase of the fluid mass within a
fixed region of space V to be equal to the net influx due to convection across the
boundaries of V. The velocity v and the fluid density ρ must therefore satisfy
1.2 Equations of Motion of a Fluid 3
the equation of continuity, which has the following equivalent forms
∂ρ
∂t
÷div(ρv) = 0.
1
ρ

Dt
÷div v = 0.
div v = ρ
D
Dt
_
1
ρ
_
_
¸
¸
¸
¸
¸
¸
¸
_
¸
¸
¸
¸
¸
¸
¸
_
. (1.2.1)
where
D
Dt
=

∂t
÷v · ∇ ≡

∂t
÷:
j

∂x
j
(1.2.2)
is the material derivative; the repeated suffix j implies summation over j =
1. 2. 3. The last of Equations (1.2.1) states that div v is equal to the rate of
change of fluid volume per unit volume following the motion of the fluid. For
an incompressible fluid this is zero, i.e., div v = 0.
1.2.2 Momentum Equation
The momentumequation is also called the Navier–Stokes equation; it expresses
the rate of change of momentum of a fluid particle in terms of the pressure p,
the viscous or frictional force, and body forces F per unit volume. We consider
only Stokesian fluids (most liquids and monatomic gases, but also a good ap-
proximation in air for calculating the frictional drag at a solid boundary) for
which the principal frictional forces are expressed in terms of the shear coeffi-
cient of viscosity η, which we shall invariably assume to be constant. Then the
momentum equation is
ρ
Dv
Dt
= −∇p ÷η
_

2
v ÷
1
3
∇(div v)
_
÷F. (1.2.3)
Values of ρ. η and ν = η,ρ (the ‘kinematic’ viscosity) for air and water at
10

C and one atmosphere pressure are given in the Table 1.2.1:
Table 1.2.1. Density and viscosity
ρ, kg/m
3
η, kg/ms ν. m
2
/s
Air 1.23 1.764 10
−5
1.433 10
−5
Water 1000 1.284 10
−3
1.284 10
−6
4 1 Introduction
1.2.3 Energy Equation
This equation must be used in its full generality in problems where energy is
transferred by heat conduction, where frictional dissipation of sound is occur-
ring, when shock waves are formed by highly nonlinear events, or when sound
is being generated by combustion and other heat sources. For our purposes it
will usually be sufficient to suppose the flow to be homentropic; namely, the
specific entropy s of the fluid is uniform and constant throughout the fluid, so
that the energy equation becomes
s = constant. (1.2.4)
We may then assume that the pressure and density are related by an equation
of the form
p = p(ρ. s). s = constant. (1.2.5)
This equation will be satisfied by both the mean (undisturbed) and unsteady
components of the flow. Thus, for an ideal gas
p = constant ρ
γ
. γ = ratio of specific heats. (1.2.6)
1.3 Equation of Linear Acoustics
The intensity of a sound pressure p in air is usually measured on a decibel scale
by the quantity
20 log
10
_
[ p[
p
ref
_
.
where the reference pressure p
ref
=2 10
−5
N/m
2
. Thus, p = p
0
≡1 atmo-
sphere ( =10
5
N/m
2
) is equivalent to 194 dB. A very loud sound ∼120 dB
corresponds to
p
p
0

2 10
−5
10
5
10
(
120
20
)
= 2 10
−4
_1.
Similarly, for a ‘deafening’ sound of 160 dB, p,p
0
∼ 0.02. This corresponds
to a pressure of about 0.3 lbs/in
2
and is loud enough for nonlinear effects to
begin to be important.
The passage of a sound wave in the form of a pressure fluctuation is, of
course, accompanied by a back-and-forth motion of the fluid at the acoustic
1.3 Equation of Linear Acoustics 5
particle velocity :, say. We shall see later that
acoustic particle velocity ≈
acoustic pressure
mean density speed of sound
.
In air the speed of sound is about 340 m/sec. Thus, at 120 dB : ∼ 5 cm/sec; at
160 dB : ∼ 5 m/sec.
In most applications the acoustic amplitude is very small relative to the mean
pressure p
0
, and sound propagation may be studied by linearizing the equations.
To do this we shall first consider sound propagating in a stationary inviscid fluid
of mean pressure p
0
and density ρ
0
; let the departures of the pressure and density
from these mean values be denoted by p
/
, ρ
/
, where p
/
,p
0
_1, ρ
/

0
_1. The
linearized momentum equation (1.2.3) becomes
ρ
0
∂v
∂t
÷∇p
/
= F. (1.3.1)
Before linearizing the continuity equation (1.2.1), we introduce an artificial
generalization by inserting a volume source distribution q(x. t ) on the right-
hand side
1
ρ

Dt
÷div v = q. (1.3.2)
where q is the rate of increase of fluid volume per unit volume of the fluid, and
might represent, for example, the effect of volume pulsations of a small body
in the fluid. The linearized equation is then
1
ρ
0
∂ρ
/
∂t
÷div v = q. (1.3.3)
Now eliminate v between (1.3.1) and (1.3.3):

2
ρ
/
∂t
2
−∇
2
p
/
= ρ
0
∂q
∂t
−div F. (1.3.4)
An equation determining the pressure p
/
alone in terms of q and Fis obtained
by invoking the homentropic relation (1.2.5). In the undisturbed and disturbed
states we have
p
0
= p(ρ
0
. s). p
0
÷ p
/
= p(ρ
0
÷ρ
/
. s) ≈ p(ρ
0
. s) ÷
_
∂p
∂ρ
(ρ. s)
_
0
ρ
/
.
s = constant. (1.3.5)
6 1 Introduction
The derivative is evaluated at the undisturbed values of the pressure and density
( p
0
. ρ
0
). It has the dimensions of velocity
2
, and its square root defines the speed
of sound
c
0
=
_
_
∂p
∂ρ
_
s
. (1.3.6)
where the derivative is taken with the entropy s held fixed at its value in the
undisturbed fluid. The implication is that losses due to heat transfer between
neighboring fluid particles by viscous and thermal diffusion are neglected
during the passage of a sound wave (i.e., that the motion of a fluid particle
is adiabatic).
From (1.3.5): ρ
/
= p
/
,c
2
0
. Hence, substituting for ρ
/
in (1.3.4), we obtain
_
1
c
2
0

2
∂t
2
−∇
2
_
p = ρ
0
∂q
∂t
−div F. (1.3.7)
where the prime (
/
) on the acoustic pressure has been discarded. This equation
governs the production of sound waves by the volume source q and the force
F. When these terms are absent the equation describes sound propagation
from sources on the boundaries of the fluid, such as the vibrating cone of a
loudspeaker.
The volume source q and the body force F would never appear in a complete
description of sound generation within a fluid. They are introduced only when
we think we understand how to model the real sources of sound in terms of
volume sources and forces. In general this can be a dangerous procedure be-
cause, as we shall see, small errors in specifying the sources of sound in a fluid
can lead to very large errors in the predicted sound. This is because only a tiny
fraction of the available energy of a vibrating fluid or structure actually radiates
away as sound.
When F = 0, Equation (1.3.1) implies the existence of a velocity potential
ϕ such that v = ∇ϕ, in terms of which the perturbation pressure is given by
p = −ρ
0
∂ϕ
∂t
. (1.3.8)
It follows from this and (1.3.7) (with F = 0) that the velocity potential is the
solution of
_
1
c
2
0

2
∂t
2
−∇
2
_
ϕ = −q(x. t ). (1.3.9)
This is the wave equation of classical acoustics.
1.4 The Special Case of an Incompressible Fluid 7
Table 1.3.1. Speed of sound and acoustic wavelength
c
0
λ at 1 kHz
m/s ft/s km/h mi/h m ft
Air 340 1100 1225 750 0.3 1
Water 1500 5000 5400 3400 1.5 5
For future reference, Table 1.3.1 lists the approximate speeds of sound in air
and in water, and the corresponding acoustic wavelength λ at a frequency of
1 kHz (sound of frequency f has wavelength λ = c
0
,f ).
1.4 The Special Case of an Incompressible Fluid
Small (adiabatic) pressure and density perturbations δp and δρ satisfy
δp
δρ
≈ c
2
0
.
In an incompressible fluid the pressure can change by the action of external
forces (moving boundaries, etc.), but the density must remain fixed. Thus,
c
0
= ∞, and Equation (1.3.9) reduces to

2
ϕ = q(x. t ). (1.4.1)
1.4.1 Pulsating Sphere
Consider the motion produced by small amplitude radial pulsations of a sphere
of mean radius a. Let the center of the sphere be at the origin, and let its normal
velocity be :
n
(t ). There are no sources within the fluid, so that q ≡ 0. Therefore,

2
ϕ = 0. r >a.
∂ϕ,∂r = :
n
(t ). r =a
_
where r = [x[.
The motion is obviously radially symmetric, so that

2
ϕ =
1
r
2

∂r
_
r
2

∂r
_
ϕ = 0. r >a.
Hence,
ϕ =
A
r
÷ B.
8 1 Introduction
where A ≡ A(t ) and B ≡ B(t ) are functions of t . B(t ) can be discarded be-
cause the pressure fluctuations (∼ −ρ
0
∂ϕ,∂t ) must vanish as r →∞. Apply-
ing the condition ∂ϕ,∂r = :
n
at r = a, we then find
ϕ = −
a
2
:
n
(t )
r
. r >a. (1.4.2)
Thus, the pressure
p = −ρ
0
∂ϕ
∂t
= ρ
0
a
2
r
d:
n
dt
(t )
decays as 1,r with distance from the sphere, and exhibits the unphysical char-
acteristic of changing instantaneously everywhere when d:
n
,dt changes its
value. For any time t , the volume flux q(t ) of fluid is the same across any closed
surface enclosing the sphere. Evaluating it for any sphere S of radius r >a, as
shown in Fig. 1.4.1, we find
q(t ) =
_
S
∇ϕ · dS = 4πa
2
:
n
(t ).
and we may also write
ϕ =
−q(t )
4πr
. r >a. (1.4.3)
Fig. 1.4.1.
1.4 The Special Case of an Incompressible Fluid 9
1.4.2 Point Source
The incompressible motion generated by a volume point source of strength q(t )
at the origin is the solution of

2
ϕ = q(t )δ(x). where δ(x) = δ(x
1
)δ(x
2
)δ(x
3
). (1.4.4)
The solution must be radially symmetric and given by
ϕ =
A
r
for r >0. (1.4.5)
To find A, we integrate (1.4.4) over the interior of a sphere of radius r = R >0,
and use the divergence theorem
_
r-R

2
ϕ d
3
x =
_
S
∇ϕ · dS, where S is the
surface of the sphere. Then
_
S
∇ϕ · dS ≡
_
−A
R
2
_
(4π R
2
) = q(t ).
Hence, A = −q(t ),4π and ϕ = −q(t ),4πr, which agrees with the solution
(1.4.3) for the sphere with the same volume outflowin the regionr >a = radius
of the sphere. This indicates that when we are interested in modelling the effect
of a pulsating sphere at large distances r ¸a, it is permissible to replace the
sphere by a point source (a monopole) of the same strength q(t ) = rate of
change of the volume of the sphere. This conclusion is valid for any pulsating
body, not just a sphere. However, it is not necessarily a good model (especially
when we come to examine the production of sound by a pulsating body) in the
presence of a mean fluid flow past the sphere.
The Solution (1.4.5) for the point source is strictly valid only for r >0,
where it satisfies ∇
2
ϕ =0. What happens as r →0, where its value is actually
undefined? To answer this question, we write the solution in the form
ϕ = lim
c→0
−q(t )
4π(r
2
÷c
2
)
1
2
. c >0. in which case ∇
2
ϕ = lim
c→0
3c
2
q(t )
4π(r
2
÷c
2
)
5
2
.
The last limit is just equal to q(t )δ(x). Indeed when c is small 3c
2
,4π(r
2
÷c
2
)
5
2
is also small except close to r = 0, where it attains a large maximum∼3,4πc
3
.
Therefore, for any smoothly varying test function f (x) and any volume V
10 1 Introduction
enclosing the origin
lim
c→0
_
V
3c
2
f (x) d
3
x
4π(r
2
÷c
2
)
5
2
= f (0) lim
c→0
_

−∞
3c
2
d
3
x
4π(r
2
÷c
2
)
5
2
= f (0)
_

0
3c
2
r
2
dr
(r
2
÷c
2
)
5
2
= f (0).
where the value of the last integral is independent of c. This is the defining
property of the three-dimensional δ function.
Thus, the correct interpretation of the solution
ϕ =
−1
4πr
of ∇
2
ϕ = δ(x) (1.4.6)
for a unit point source (q = 1) is
−1
4πr
= lim
c→0
−1
4π(r
2
÷c
2
)
1
2
. r ≥ 0. (1.4.7)
where

2
_
−1
4πr
_
= lim
c→0

2
_
−1
4π(r
2
÷c
2
)
1
2
_
= lim
c→0
3c
2
4π(r
2
÷c
2
)
5
2
= δ(x). (1.4.8)
1.5 Sound Produced by an Impulsive Point Source
The sound generated by the unit, impulsive point source δ(x)δ(t ) is the solution
of
_
1
c
2
0

2
∂t
2
−∇
2
_
ϕ = δ(x)δ(t ). (1.5.1)
The source exists only for an infinitesimal instant of time at t = 0; therefore at
earlier times ϕ(x. t ) = 0 everywhere.
It is evident that the solution is radially symmetric, and that for r = [x[ >0
we have to solve
1
c
2
0

2
ϕ
∂t
2

1
r
2

∂r
_
r
2

∂r
_
ϕ = 0. r >0. (1.5.2)
The identity
1
r
2

∂r
_
r
2

∂r
_
ϕ ≡
1
r

2
∂r
2
(rϕ) (1.5.3)
1.5 Sound Produced by an Impulsive Point Source 11
permits us to write Equation (1.5.2) in the form of the one-dimensional wave
equation for rϕ:
1
c
2
0

2
∂t
2
(rϕ) −

2
∂r
2
(rϕ) = 0. r >0. (1.5.4)
This has the general solution rϕ = +(t −r,c
0
) ÷ +(t ÷r,c
0
), where + and
+ are arbitrary functions. Hence, the general solution of (1.5.2) is
ϕ =
+
_
t −
r
c
0
_
r
÷
+
_
t ÷
r
c
0
_
r
. r >0. (1.5.5)
The first termon the right represents a spherically symmetric disturbance that
propagates in the direction of increasing values of r at the speed of sound c
0
as t
increases, whereas the second represents an incoming wave converging toward
x = 0. We must therefore set + = 0, since it represents sound waves generated
at r = ∞that approach the source rather than sound waves generated by the
source and radiating away from the source. This is a causality or radiation
condition, that (in the absence of boundaries) sound produced by a source
must radiate away from the source. It is also consistent with the Second Law
of Thermodynamics, which requires natural systems to change in the more
probable direction. An event in which sound waves converge on a point from
all directions at infinity is so unlikely as to be impossible in practice; it would be
the acoustic analogue of the far-scattered pieces of a broken cup spontaneously
reassembling.
To complete the solution it remains to determine the function +. We do this
by extending the solution down to the source at r = 0 by writing (c.f., (1.4.7))
ϕ =
+
_
t −
r
c
0
_
r
= lim
c→0
+
_
t −
r
c
0
_
(r
2
÷c
2
)
1
2
. r ≥ 0. (1.5.6)
Let us substitute this into Equation (1.5.1) and examine what happens as c →0.
By direct calculation we find

2
ϕ =
1
r

2
∂r
2
(rϕ) = −
3c
2
+(t −r,c
0
)
(r
2
÷c
2
)
5
2

2c
2
+
/
(t −r,c
0
)
c
0
r(r
2
÷c
2
)
3
2
÷
+
//
(t −r,c
0
)
c
2
0
(r
2
÷c
2
)
1
2
1
c
2
0

2
ϕ
∂t
2
=
+
//
(t −r,c
0
)
c
2
0
(r
2
÷c
2
)
1
2
12 1 Introduction
Therefore,
1
c
2
0

2
ϕ
∂t
2
−∇
2
ϕ =
3c
2
+(t −r,c
0
)
(r
2
÷c
2
)
5
2
÷
2c
2
+
/
(t −r,c
0
)
c
0
r(r
2
÷c
2
)
3
2
→4π+(t )δ(x) ÷0 as c →0. (1.5.7)
where the δ function in the last line follows from (1.4.8), and the ‘÷ 0’ is
obtained by noting that for any smoothly varying test function f (x) and any
volume V enclosing the origin
_
V
2c
2
f (x) d
3
x
r(r
2
÷c
2
)
3
2
≈ f (0)
_

−∞
2c
2
d
3
x
r(r
2
÷c
2
)
3
2
= f (0)
_

0
8πc
2
r dr
(r
2
÷c
2
)
3
2
= 8πc f (0) →0 as c →0.
Hence, comparing (1.5.7) with the inhomogeneous wave equation (1.5.1),
we find
+(t ) =
1

δ(t ).
and the Solution (1.5.6) becomes
ϕ(x. t ) =
1
4πr
δ
_
t −
r
c
0
_

1
4π[x[
δ
_
t −
[x[
c
0
_
. (1.5.8)
This represents a spherical pulse that is nonzero only on the surface of the
sphere r = c
0
t >0, whose radius increases at the speed of sound c
0
; it vanishes
everywhere for t -0, before the impulsive source is triggered.
1.6 Free-Space Green’s Function
The free-space Green’s function G(x. y. t −τ) is the causal solution of the wave
equation generated by the impulsive point source δ(x − y)δ(t − τ), located at
the point x = y at time t = τ. The formula for G is obtained from the solution
(1.5.8) for a source at x = 0 at t = 0 simply by replacing x by x −y and t by
t −τ. In other words, if
_
1
c
2
0

2
∂t
2
−∇
2
_
G =δ(x −y)δ(t −τ). where G =0 for t -τ. (1.6.1)
then
G(x. y. t −τ) =
1
4π[x −y[
δ
_
t −τ −
[x −y[
c
0
_
. (1.6.2)
1.7 Monopoles, Dipoles, and Quadrupoles 13
This represents an impulsive, spherically symmetric wave expanding from the
source at y at the speed of sound. The wave amplitude decreases inversely with
distance [x −y[ from the source point y.
Green’s function is the fundamental building block for forming solutions of
the inhomogeneous wave equation (1.3.7) of linear acoustics. Let us write this
equation in the form
_
1
c
2
0

2
∂t
2
−∇
2
_
p = F(x. t ). (1.6.3)
where the generalized source F(x. t ) is assumed to be generating waves that
propagate away from the source region, in accordance with the radiation
condition.
This source distribution can be regarded as a distribution of impulsive point
sources of the type on the right of Equation (1.6.1), because
F(x. t ) =
__

−∞
F(y. τ) δ(x −y) δ(t −τ) d
3
y dτ.
The outgoing wave solution for each constituent source of strength
F(y. τ)δ(x −y)δ(t −τ) d
3
y dτ is F(y. τ)G(x. y. t −τ) d
3
y dτ.
so that by adding up these individual contributions we obtain
p(x. t ) =
__

−∞
F(y. τ)G(x. y. t −τ) d
3
y dτ (1.6.4)
=
1

__

−∞
F(y. τ)
[x −y[
δ
_
t −τ −
[x −y[
c
0
_
d
3
y dτ (1.6.5)
i.e., p(x. t ) =
1

_

−∞
F
_
y. t −
[x−y[
c
0
_
[x −y[
d
3
y. (1.6.6)
The integral formula (1.6.6) is called a retarded potential; it represents the
pressure at position x and time t as a linear superposition of contributions from
sources at positions y, which radiated at the earlier times t −[x−y[,c
0
, [x−y[,c
0
being the time of travel of sound waves from y to x.
1.7 Monopoles, Dipoles, and Quadrupoles
Avolume point source q(t )δ(x) of the type considered in Section 1.4 as a model
for a pulsating sphere is also called a monopole point source. For a compressible
14 1 Introduction
medium the corresponding velocity potential it produces is the solution of the
equation
_
1
c
2
0

2
∂t
2
−∇
2
_
ϕ = −q(t )δ(x). (1.7.1)
The solution can be written down by analogy with the Solution (1.6.6) of
Equation (1.6.3) for the acoustic pressure. Replace p by ϕ in (1.6.6) and set
F(y. τ) = −q(τ)δ(y). Then,
ϕ(x. t ) =
−q
_
t −
[x[
c
0
_
4π[x[

−q
_
t −
r
c
0
_
4πr
. (1.7.2)
This differs from the corresponding solution (1.4.3) for a pulsating sphere
or volume point source in an incompressible fluid by the dependence on the
retarded time t −
r
c
0
. This is physically more realistic; any effects associated
with changes in the motion of the sphere (i.e., in the value of the volume out-
flow rate q(t )) are now communicated to a fluid element at distance r after
an appropriate time delay r,c
0
required for sound to travel outward from the
source.
1.7.1 The Point Dipole
Let f = f(t ) be a time-dependent vector. Then a source on the right of the
acoustic pressure equation (1.6.3) of the form
F(x. t ) = div(f(t )δ(x)) ≡

∂x
j
( f
j
(t )δ(x)) (1.7.3)
is called a point dipole (located at the origin). As explained in the Preface, a
repeated italic subscript, such as j in this equation, implies a summation over
j = 1. 2. 3. Equation (1.3.7) shows that the point dipole is equivalent to a force
distribution F(t ) = −f(t )δ(x) per unit volume applied to the fluid at the origin.
The sound produced by the dipole can be calculated from (1.6.6), but it is
easier to use (1.6.5):
p(x. t ) =
1

__

−∞

∂y
j
( f
j
(τ)δ(y))
δ
_
t −τ −
[x−y[
c
0
_
[x −y[
d
3
y dτ.
Integrate by parts with respect to each y
j
(recalling that δ(y) = 0 at y
j
= ±∞),
and note that

∂y
j
δ
_
t −τ −
[x−y[
c
0
_
[x −y[
= −

∂x
j
δ
_
t −τ −
[x−y[
c
0
_
[x −y[
.
1.7 Monopoles, Dipoles, and Quadrupoles 15
Then,
p(x. t ) =
1

__

−∞
f
j
(τ)δ(y)

∂x
j
_
δ
_
t −τ −
[x−y[
c
0
_
[x −y[
_
d
3
y dτ
=
1


∂x
j
__

−∞
f
j
(τ)δ(y)
_
δ
_
t −τ −
[x−y[
c
0
_
[x −y[
_
d
3
y dτ.
Thus,
p(x. t ) =

∂x
j
_
f
j
_
t −
[x[
c
0
_
4π[x[
_
. (1.7.4)
The same procedure shows that for a distributed dipole source of the type
F(x. t ) = div f(x. t ) on the right of Equation (1.6.3), the acoustic pressure
becomes
p(x. t ) =
1


∂x
j
_

−∞
f
j
_
y. t −
[x−y[
c
0
_
[x −y[
d
3
y. (1.7.5)
A point dipole at the origin orientated in the direction of a unit vector n
is entirely equivalent to two point monopoles of equal but opposite strengths
placed a short distance apart (much smaller than the acoustic wavelength) on
opposite sides of the origin on a line through the origin parallel to n. For
example, if n is parallel to the x axis, and the sources are distance c apart, the
two monopoles would be
q(t )δ
_
x −
c
2
_
δ(y)δ(z) −q(t )δ
_
x ÷
c
2
_
δ(y)δ(z)
≈−cq(t )δ
/
(x)δ(y)δ(z) ≡ −

∂x
(cq(t )δ(x)).
This is a fluid volume dipole. The relation p = −ρ
0
∂ϕ,∂t implies that the
equivalent dipole source in the pressure equation (1.3.7) or (1.6.3) is
−ρ
0

∂x
(c ˙ q(t )δ(x)).
where the dot denotes differentiation with respect to time.
1.7.2 Quadrupoles
A source distribution involving two space derivatives is equivalent to a combi-
nation of four monopole sources (whose net volume source strength is zero),
16 1 Introduction
and is called a quadrupole. A general quadrupole is a source of the form
F(x. t ) =

2
T
i j
∂x
i
∂x
j
(x. t ) (1.7.6)
in Equation (1.6.3). The argument above leading to Expression (1.7.5) can be
applied twice to show that the corresponding acoustic pressure is given by
p(x. t ) =
1


2
∂x
i
∂x
j
_

−∞
T
i j
(y. t −[x −y[,c
0
)
[x −y[
d
3
y. (1.7.7)
1.7.3 Vibrating Sphere
Let a rigid sphere of radius a execute small amplitude oscillations at speed U(t )
in the x
1
direction (Fig. 1.7.1a). Take the coordinate origin at the mean position
of the center. In Section 3.5, we shall prove that the motion induced in an ideal
fluid when the sphere is small is equivalent to that produced by a point volume
dipole of strength 2πa
3
U(t ) at its center directed along the x
1
axis, determined
Fig. 1.7.1.
1.7 Monopoles, Dipoles, and Quadrupoles 17
by the solution of
_
1
c
2
0

2
∂t
2
−∇
2
_
ϕ =

∂x
1
(2πa
3
U(t )δ(x)). (1.7.8)
By analogy with (1.7.3) and (1.7.4), we have
ϕ(x. t ) =

∂x
1
_
2πa
3
U
_
t −
[x[
c
0
_
4π[x[
_
. (1.7.9)
Now,

∂x
j
[x[ =
x
j
[x[
. (1.7.10)
Applying this formula for j = 1, we find (putting r = [x[ and x
1
= r cos θ)
ϕ =−
a
3
cos θ
2r
2
U
_
t −
r
c
0
_

a
3
cos θ
2c
0
r
∂U
∂t
_
t −
r
c
0
_
.
near field far field
The near-field term is dominant at sufficiently small distances r from the origin
such that
1
r
¸
1
c
0
1
U
∂U
∂t

f
c
0
.
where f is the characteristic frequency of the oscillations of the sphere. But,
sound of frequency f travels a distance
c
0
,f =λ ≡one acoustic wavelength
in one period of oscillation 1,f . Hence, the near-field term is dominant when
r _λ.
The motion becomes incompressible when c
0
→∞. In this limit the solution
reduces entirely to the near-field term, which is also called the hydrodynamic
near field; it decreases in amplitude like 1,r
2
as r →∞.
The far field is the acoustic region that only exists when the fluid is com-
pressible. It consists of propagating sound waves, carrying energy away from
the sphere, and takes over from the near field when r ¸λ. There is an interme-
diate zone where r ∼ λ in which the solution is in a state of transition from the
near to the far field. The analytical model (1.7.8), in which the sphere is replaced
by a point dipole at its center, involves the implicit assumption that the motion
18 1 Introduction
close to the sphere is essentially the same as if the fluid is incompressible. It fol-
lows from what we have just said that a _λ, that is, the diameter of the sphere
is much smaller than the acoustic wavelength. In general, a body is said to be
acoustically compact when its characteristic dimension is small compared to
the wavelengths of the sound waves it is producing or with which it interacts.
The intensity of the sound generated by the sphere in the far field is propor-
tional to ϕ
2
:
ϕ
2

a
6
4c
2
0
r
2
_
∂U
∂t
_
t −
r
c
0
__
2
cos
2
θ.
The dependence on θ determines the directivity of the sound. For the dipole it
has the figure of eight pattern illustrated in Fig. 1.7.1b, with peaks in directions
parallel to the dipole axis (θ = 0. π); there are radiation nulls at θ =
π
2
(the
curve should be imagined to be rotated about the x
1
axis).
1.8 Acoustic Energy Flux
At large distances r from a source region we generally have
p(x. t ) ∼
ρ
0
+
_
θ. φ. t −
r
c
0
_
r
. r →∞. (1.8.1)
where the function + depends on the nature of the source distribution, and θ
and φ are polar angles determining the directivity of the sound. From the radial
component of the linearized momentum equation
∂:
r
∂t
= −
1
ρ
0
∂p
∂r

1
r
2
+
_
θ. φ. t −
r
c
0
_
÷
1
c
0
r
∂+
∂t
_
θ. φ. t −
r
c
0
_
. (1.8.2)
The first term in the second line can be neglected when r →∞, and therefore
:
r

1
c
0
r
+
_
θ. φ. t −
r
c
0
_

p
ρ
0
c
0
. (1.8.3)
By considering the θ and φ components of the momentumequation we can show
that the corresponding velocity components :
θ
. :
φ
, say, decrease faster than 1,r
as r →∞. We therefore conclude fromthis and (1.8.3) that the acoustic particle
velocity is normal to the acoustic wavefronts (the spherical surfaces r = c
0
t ).
In other words, sound consists of longitudinal waves in which the fluid particles
oscillate backwards and forwards along the local direction of propagation of
the sound.
1.8 Acoustic Energy Flux 19
The acoustic power H radiated by a source distribution can be computed
from the formula
H =
_
S
p:
r
dS =
_
S
p
2
ρ
0
c
0
dS. (1.8.4)
where the integration is over the surface S of a large sphere of radius r centered
on the source region. Because the surface area = 4πr
2
, we only need to know
the pressure and velocity correct to order 1,r on S in order to evaluate the
integral. Smaller contributions (such as that determined by the first term in
the second line of (1.8.2)) decrease too fast as r increases to supply a finite
contribution to the integral as r →∞.
In acoustic problems we are therefore usually satisfied if we can calculate
the pressure and velocity in the acoustic far field correct to order 1,r; this will
always enable us to determine the radiated sound power. The formula :
r
=
p,ρ
0
c
0
is applicable at large distances from the sources, where the wavefronts
can be regarded as locally plane, but it is true identically for plane sound waves.
In the latter case, and for spherical waves on the surface of the large sphere of
Fig. 1.8.1, the quantity
I = p:
r
=
p
2
ρ
0
c
0
(1.8.5)
is called the acoustic intensity. It is the rate of transmission of acoustic energy
per unit area of wavefront.
Fig. 1.8.1.
20 1 Introduction
Fig. 1.9.1.
1.9 Calculation of the Acoustic Far Field
We now discuss the approximations necessary to evaluate the sound in the far
field from the retarded potential representation:
p(x. t ) =
1

_

−∞
F
_
y. t −
[x−y[
c
0
_
[x −y[
d
3
y. (1.9.1)
We assume that F(x. t ) ,= 0 only within a finite source region (Fig. 1.9.1), and
take the coordinate origin O within the region.
When [x[ →∞and y lies within the source region (so that [x[ ¸[y[)
[x −y[ ≡ ([x[
2
−2x · y ÷[y[
2
)
1
2
= [x[
_
1 −
2x · y
[x[
2
÷
[y[
2
[x[
2
_
1
2
≈ [x[
_
1 −
x · y
[x[
2
÷ O
_
[y[
2
[x[
2
__
Then,
[x −y[ ≈ [x[ −
x · y
[x[
when
[y[
[x[
_1. (1.9.2)
Also,
1
[x −y[

1
_
[x[ −
x · y
[x[
_ ≈
1
[x[
_
1 ÷
x · y
[x[
2
_
Therefore,
1
[x −y[

1
[x[
÷
x · y
[x[
3
when
[y[
[x[
_1. (1.9.3)
The Approximation (1.9.3) shows that, in order to obtain the far-field approx-
imation of the Solution (1.9.1) that behaves like 1,r = 1,[x[ as [x[ →∞, it is
sufficient to replace [x−y[ in the denominator of the integrand by [x[. However,
in the argument of the source strength F it is important to retain possible phase
1.9 Calculation of the Acoustic Far Field 21
differences between the sound waves generated by components of the source
distribution at different locations y; we therefore replace [x −y[ in the retarded
time by the right-hand side of (1.9.2). Hence,
p(x. t ) ≈
1
4π[x[
_

−∞
F
_
y. t −
[x[
c
0
÷
x · y
c
0
[x[
_
d
3
y. [x[ →∞. (1.9.4)
This is called the Fraunhofer approximation.
The source region may extend over many characteristic acoustic wavelengths
of the sound. By retaining the contribution x · y,c
0
[x[ to the retarded time we
ensure that any interference between waves generated at different positions
within the source region is correctly described by the far-field approximation.
In Fig. 1.9.1 the acoustic travel time from a source point y to the far field point
x is equal to that from the point labelled A to x when [x[ →∞. The travel time
over the distance OA is just x · y,c
0
[x[, so that [x[,c
0
− x · y,c
0
[x[ gives the
correct value of the retarded time when [x[ →∞.
1.9.1 Dipole Source Distributions
By applying the far-field formula (1.9.4) to a dipole source F(x. t ) = div f(x. t )
we obtain (from (1.7.5))
p(x. t ) ≈
1


∂x
j
_
1
[x[
_

−∞
f
j
_
y. t −
[x[
c
0
÷
x · y
c
0
[x[
_
d
3
y
_

1
4π[x[

∂x
j
_

−∞
f
j
_
y. t −
[x[
c
0
÷
x · y
c
0
[x[
_
d
3
y. [x[ →∞. (1.9.5)
because the differential operator ∂,∂x
j
need not be applied to 1,[x[ as this would
give a contribution decreasing like 1,r
2
at large distances from the dipole.
However, it is useful to make a further transformation that replaces ∂,∂x
j
by
the time derivative ∂,∂t , which is usually more easily estimated in applications.
To do this, we observe that
∂ f
j
∂x
j
_
y. t −
[x[
c
0
÷
x · y
c
0
[x[
_
=
∂ f
j
∂t
_
y. t −
[x[
c
0
÷
x · y
c
0
[x[
_

∂x
j
_
t −
[x[
c
0
÷
x · y
c
0
[x[
_
=
∂ f
j
∂t
_
y. t −
[x[
c
0
÷
x · y
c
0
[x[
__

x
j
c
0
[x[
÷
y
j
c
0
[x[

(x · y)x
j
c
0
[x[
3
_
≈ −
x
j
c
0
[x[
∂ f
j
∂t
_
y. t −
[x[
c
0
÷
x · y
c
0
[x[
_
as [x[ →∞.
22 1 Introduction
Hence, the far fieldof a distributionof dipoles F(x. t ) = div f(x. t ) is givenby
p(x. t ) =
−x
j
4πc
0
[x[
2

∂t
_

−∞
f
j
_
y. t −
[x[
c
0
÷
x · y
c
0
[x[
_
d
3
y. (1.9.6)
Note that
x
j
[x[
2
=
x
j
[x[
1
[x[
.
where x
j
,[x[ is the j th component of the unit vector x,[x[. Thus, the additional
factor of x
j
,[x[ in (1.9.6) does not change the rate of decay of the sound with
distance from the source (which is still like 1,r), but it does have an influence
on the acoustic directivity.
A comparison of (1.9.5) and (1.9.6) leads to the following rule for inter-
changing space and time derivatives in the acoustic far field:

∂x
j
←→−
1
c
0
x
j
[x[

∂t
. (1.9.7)
1.9.2 Quadrupole Source Distributions
For the Quadrupole (1.7.6)
F(x. t ) =

2
T
i j
∂x
i
∂x
j
(x. t ).
and
p(x. t ) =
1


2
∂x
i
∂x
j
_

−∞
T
i j
(y. t −[x −y[,c
0
)
[x −y[
d
3
y.
By applying (1.9.4) and the rule (1.9.7), we find that the acoustic far field is
given by
p(x. t ) ≈
x
i
x
j
4πc
2
0
[x[
3

2
∂t
2
_

−∞
T
i j
_
y. t −
[x[
c
0
÷
x · y
c
0
[x[
_
d
3
y. [x[ →∞.
(1.9.8)
1.9.3 Example
For the (1, 2) point quadrupole
F(x. t ) =

2
∂x
1
∂x
2
(T(t )δ(x))
Problems 1 23
Fig. 1.9.2.
Equation (1.9.8) shows that in the acoustic far field
p(x. t ) ≈
x
1
x
2
4πc
2
0
[x[
3

2
T
∂t
2
_
t −
[x[
c
0
_
. [x[ →∞.
If we use spherical polar coordinates, such that
x
1
= r cos θ. x
2
= r sin θ cos φ. x
3
= r sin θ sin φ.
we can write the pressure in the form
p(x. t ) ≈
sin 2θ cos φ
8πc
2
0
[x[

2
T
∂t
2
_
t −
[x[
c
0
_
. [x[ →∞.
The directivity of the sound (∝ p
2
) is therefore represented by sin
2
2θ cos
2
φ.
Its shape is plotted in Fig. 1.9.2 for radiation in the x
1
. x
2
plane (φ = 0. π). The
four-lobe cloverleaf pattern is characteristic of a quadrupole T
i j
for whichi ,= j .
Problems 1
1. A plane sound wave propagating parallel to the x axis satisfies the equation
_
1
c
2
0

2
∂t
2


2
∂x
2
_
ϕ = 0.
24 1 Introduction
with general solution
ϕ = +
_
t −
x
c
0
_
÷+
_
t ÷
x
c
0
_
.
where +and + are arbitrary functions respectively representing waves pro-
pagating in the positive and negative x directions.
Showthat for a wave propagating in the positive x direction in an ideal gas
: =
p
ρ
0
c
0
. ρ =
p
c
2
0
. T =
p
ρ
0
c
p
.
where : is the acoustic particle velocity; p, ρ, and T are respectively the
acoustic pressure, density, and temperature variations, and c
p
is the specific
heat at constant pressure.
2. Calculate the acoustic power (1.8.4) radiated by an acoustically compact
sphere of radius R executing small amplitude translational oscillations of
frequency ω and velocity U(t ) = U
0
cos(ωt ), where U
0
= constant.
3. As for Problem 2, when the sphere executes small amplitude radial oscilla-
tions at normal velocity :
n
= U
0
cos(ωt ), U
0
= constant.
4. A volume point source of strength q
0
(t ) translates at constant, subsonic ve-
locity U. The velocity potential ϕ(x. t ) of the radiated sound is determined
by the solution of
_
1
c
2
0

2
∂t
2
−∇
2
_
ϕ = −q
0
(t )δ(x −Ut ).
Show that
ϕ(x. t ) =
−q
0
(t − R,c
0
)
4π R(1 − M cos O)
. M =
U
c
0
.
where R is the distance of the reception point x from the source position at
the time of emission of the sound received at x at time t , and O is the angle
between U and the direction of propagation of this sound.
2
Lighthill’s Theory
2.1 The Acoustic Analogy
The sound generated by turbulence in an unbounded fluid is usually called
aerodynamic sound. Most unsteady flows of technological interest are of high
Reynolds number and turbulent, and the acoustic radiation is a very small by-
product of the motion. The turbulence is usually produced by fluid motion
over a solid boundary or by flow instability. Lighthill (1952) transformed the
Navier–Stokes and continuity equations to forman exact, inhomogeneous wave
equation whose source terms are important only within the turbulent region.
He argued that sound is a very small component of the whole motion and that,
once generated, its back-reaction on the main flow can usually be ignored. The
properties of the unsteady flow in the source region may then be determined
by neglecting the production and propagation of the sound, a reasonable ap-
proximation if the Mach number M is small, and there are many important
flows where the hypothesis is obviously correct, and where the theory leads to
unambiguous predictions of the sound.
Lighthill was initially interested in solving the problem, illustrated in
Fig. 2.1.1a, of the sound produced by a turbulent nozzle flow. However, his
original theory actually applies to the simpler situation shown in Fig. 2.1.1b, in
which the sound is imagined to be generated by a finite region of rotational flow
in an unbounded fluid. This avoids complications caused by the presence of the
nozzle. The fluid is assumed to be at rest at infinity, where the mean pressure,
density, and sound speed are respectively equal to p
0
. ρ
0
. c
0
. Lighthill com-
pared the equations for the production of acoustic density fluctuations in the
real flow with those in an ideal linear acoustic medium that coincides with the
real fluid at large distances from the sources.
25
26 2 Lighthill’s Theory
Fig. 2.1.1.
Todothis, bodyforces are neglected, andthe i thcomponent of the momentum
equation (1.2.3) is cast in the form
ρ
∂:
i
∂t
÷ρ:
j
∂:
i
∂x
j
= −
∂p
∂x
i
÷
∂σ
i j
∂x
j
≡ −

∂x
j
( pδ
i j
−σ
i j
). (2.1.1)
δ
i j
is the Kronecker delta (= 1 for i = j. and 0 for i ,= j ), and σ
i j
is the
viscous stress tensor defined (for a Stokesian fluid) by
σ
i j
= 2η
_
e
i j

1
3
e
kk
δ
i j
_
. (2.1.2)
where
e
i j
=
1
2
_
∂:
i
∂x
j
÷
∂:
j
∂x
i
_
(2.1.3)
2.1 The Acoustic Analogy 27
is the rate of strain tensor. Next multiply the continuity equation (1.2.1) by :
i
:
:
i
∂ρ
∂t
÷:
i
∂(ρ:
j
)
∂x
j
= 0.
By adding this to Equation (2.1.1), we obtain the Reynolds form of the momen-
tum equation
∂(ρ:
i
)
∂t
= −
∂π
i j
∂x
j
. (2.1.4)
where
π
i j
= ρ:
i
:
j
÷( p − p
0

i j
−σ
i j
. (2.1.5)
is called the momentum flux tensor, and the constant pressure p
0
is inserted
for convenience.
In an ideal, linear acoustic medium, the momentum flux tensor contains only
the pressure
π
i j
→π
0
i j
= ( p − p
0

i j
≡ c
2
0
(ρ −ρ
0

i j
. (2.1.6)
and the momentum equation then reduces to
∂(ρ:
i
)
∂t
÷

∂x
i
_
c
2
0
(ρ −ρ
0
)
_
= 0. (2.1.7)
If the continuity equation (1.2.1) is written in the slightly modified form

∂t
(ρ −ρ
0
) ÷
∂(ρ:
i
)
∂x
i
= 0. (2.1.8)
we can eliminate the momentum density ρ:
i
between (2.1.7) and (2.1.8) to
obtain the equation of linear acoustics satisfied by the perturbation density
ρ −ρ
0
_
1
c
2
0

2
∂t
2
−∇
2
_
_
c
2
0
(ρ −ρ
0
)
_
= 0. (2.1.9)
Because the turbulence is neglected in this approximation, and there are no
externally applied forces or moving boundaries, the unique solution of this
equation that satisfies the radiation condition of outgoing wave behavior is
simply ρ −ρ
0
= 0.
It can now be asserted that the sound generated by the turbulence in the
real fluid is exactly equivalent to that produced in the ideal, stationary acoustic
28 2 Lighthill’s Theory
medium (which is governed by (2.1.9) in turbulence-free regions) forced by the
stress distribution
T
i j
= π
i j
−π
0
i j
= ρ:
i
:
j
÷
_
( p − p
0
) −c
2
0
(ρ −ρ
0
)
_
δ
i j
−σ
i j
. (2.1.10)
where T
i j
is called the Lighthill stress tensor. This is Lighthill’s acoustic
analogy.
Indeed, we can rewrite (2.1.4) as the momentum equation for an ideal, sta-
tionary acoustic medium of mean density ρ
0
and sound speed c
0
subject to the
externally applied stress T
i j
∂(ρ:
i
)
∂t
÷
∂π
0
i j
∂x
j
= −

∂x
j
_
π
i j
−π
0
i j
_
.
or
∂(ρ:
i
)
∂t
÷

∂x
i
_
c
2
0
(ρ −ρ
0
)
_
= −
∂T
i j
∂x
j
. (2.1.11)
By eliminating the momentum density ρ:
i
between this and the continuity
equation (2.1.8) (the same procedure used above for the linear problem), we
obtain Lighthill’s equation
_
1
c
2
0

2
∂t
2
−∇
2
_
_
c
2
0
(ρ −ρ
0
)
_
=

2
T
i j
∂x
i
∂x
j
. (2.1.12)
This is the exact, nonlinear counterpart of (2.1.9). The problem of calculating
the turbulence generated sound is therefore equivalent to solving this equation
for the radiation into a stationary, ideal fluid produced by a distribution of
quadrupole sources whose strength per unit volume is the Lighthill stress tensor
T
i j
. The quadrupole character of the turbulence sources is one of the most
important conclusions of Lighthill’s theory; it implies (see Section 2.2) that
free-field turbulence is an extremely weak sound source, and that in a typical
low Mach number flow only a tiny fraction of the available flow energy is
converted into sound.
In the definition (2.1.10) of T
i j
, the term ρ:
i
:
j
is called the Reynolds stress.
For the simplified problem of Fig. 2.1.1b it is a nonlinear quantity that can be
neglected except where the motion is turbulent. The second term represents
the excess of momentum transfer by the pressure over that in the ideal (linear)
fluid of density ρ
0
and sound speed c
0
. This is produced by wave amplitude
nonlinearity, and by mean density variations in the source flow. The viscous
2.2 Lighthill’s :
8
Law 29
stress tensor σ
i j
is linear in the perturbation quantities, and properly accounts
for the attenuation of the sound; in most applications the Reynolds number
in the source region is very large, and σ
i j
can be neglected, and the viscous
attenuation of the radiating sound is usually ignored.
2.2 Lighthill’s v
8
Law
The formal solution of Lighthill’s equation (2.1.12) with outgoing wave be-
havior is given by (1.7.7) with p(x. t ) replaced by c
2
0
(ρ −ρ
0
)
c
2
0
(ρ −ρ
0
)(x. t ) =
1


2
∂x
i
∂x
j
_

−∞
T
i j
(y. t −[x −y[,c
0
)
[x −y[
d
3
y. (2.2.1)
This is strictly an alternative, integral equation representation of Equation
(2.1.12); it provides a useful prediction of the sound only when T
i j
is known
or has been determined by some other means. This is because the terms in the
definition (2.1.10) of T
i j
not only account for the generation of sound, but also
govern acoustic self-modulation caused by acoustic nonlinearity, the convec-
tion of sound waves by the turbulent velocity, refraction caused by sound speed
variations, and attenuation due to thermal and viscous actions. The influence
of acoustic nonlinearity and of thermoviscous dissipation is usually sufficiently
weak to be neglected within the source region, although they may affect prop-
agation to a distant observer. Convection and refraction of sound within and
near the source flow can be important, for example in the presence of a mean
shear layer (when the Reynolds stress will include terms like ρU
i
u
j
, where U
and u respectively denote the mean and fluctuating components of v), or when
there are large variations in the mean thermodynamic properties of the medium
within the source region; such effects are described by the presence of unsteady
linear terms in T
i j
(Ffowcs Williams, 1974).
Thus, to predict the radiated sound from Lighthill’s equation (2.2.1) it is
usually necessary to suppose that all of these acoustic effects in the source flow
(which really depend on fluid compressibility) are in some sense negligible.
This means that in practice it must be possible to derive a good approximation
for T
i j
by taking the source flow to be effectively incompressible. This is often
possible when the characteristic Mach number M ∼ :,c
0
is small (specifically,
when M
2
_1), and when the wavelength of the sound is much larger than the
size of the source region.
Consider the particular but important case in which the mean density and
sound speed are uniform throughout the fluid. The variations in the density
ρ within a low Mach number, high Reynolds number source flow are then of
30 2 Lighthill’s Theory
order ρ
0
M
2
(Batchelor, 1967). Thus, ρ:
i
:
j
= ρ
0
(1 ÷ O(M
2
)):
i
:
j
≈ ρ
0
:
i
:
j
.
Similarly, if c(x. t ) is the local speed of sound in the source region, it may also
be shown that c
2
0
,c
2
= 1 ÷O(M
2
), so that
p − p
0
−c
2
0
(ρ −ρ
0
) ≈ ( p − p
0
)
_
1 −c
2
0
_
c
2
_
∼ O(ρ
0
:
2
M
2
).
Hence, if viscous dissipation is neglected we make the approximation
T
i j
≈ ρ
0
:
i
:
j
. provided that M
2
_1. (2.2.2)
In the acoustic region outside the source flow c
2
0
(ρ − ρ
0
) = p − p
0
. If the
irrelevant constant pressure p
0
is suppressed, the Solution (2.2.1) of Lighthill’s
equation therefore becomes
p(x. t ) ≈

2
∂x
i
∂x
j
_
ρ
0
:
i
:
j
(y. t −[x −y[,c
0
)
4π[x −y[
d
3
y

x
i
x
j
4πc
2
0
[x[
3

2
∂t
2
_
ρ
0
:
i
:
j
_
y. t −
[x[
c
0
÷
x · y
c
0
[x[
_
d
3
y. [x[ →∞.
(2.2.3)
where in the second line we have used the formula (1.9.8) for the far field
of a quadrupole distribution. Quantitative predictions can be made from this
formula provided the behavior of the Reynolds stress ρ
0
:
i
:
j
is known.
To determine the order of magnitude of p, we introduce a characteristic
velocity : and length scale ¹ (of the energy-containing eddies) of the turbulence
sources. The value of ¹ depends on the mechanism responsible for turbulence
production, suchas the widthof a jet mixinglayer. Fluctuations in:
i
:
j
occurring
in different regions of the turbulent flowseparated by distances >O(¹) will tend
to be statistically independent, and the sound may be considered to be generated
by a collection of V
0

3
independent eddies, where V
0
is the volume occupied
by the turbulence (Fig. 2.2.1). The characteristic frequency of the turbulent
fluctuations f ∼ :,¹, so that the wavelength (c
0
,f ) of the sound ∼¹,M ¸ ¹
(because M = :,c
0
_ 1). Hence, we arrive at the important conclusion that
the turbulence eddies are each acoustically compact. This means that when
the integral in (2.2.3) is confined to a single eddy, the retarded time variations
x · y,c
0
[x[ across that eddy can be neglected; that is, if the coordinate origin
is temporarily placed at O within the eddy, we can set x · y,c
0
[x[ = 0 in the
integration over that eddy. The value of the integral over the eddy then may be
estimated to be of order ρ
0
:
2
¹
3
.
2.2 Lighthill’s :
8
Law 31
Fig. 2.2.1.
The order of magnitude of the time derivative for changes in the source region
is

∂t

:
¹
.
Therefore, it follows from (2.2.3) that, for one eddy, the far-field acoustic pres-
sure satisfies
p ∼
¹
[x[
ρ
0
:
4
c
2
0
=
¹
[x[
ρ
0
:
2
M
2
. (2.2.4)
The acoustic power radiated by the eddy is determined by the surface inte-
gral (1.8.4) taken over a large sphere centered on the eddy. Thus, in order of
magnitude,
acoustic power radiated by one eddy ∼4π[x[
2
p
2
ρ
0
c
0

¹
2
ρ
0
:
8
c
5
0
= ¹
2
ρ
0
:
3
M
5
.
(2.2.5)
This is Lighthill’s ‘eighth power’ law.
The total power radiated from the whole of the turbulent region of volume
V
0
, containing V
0

3
independent eddies, is
H
q

V
0
¹
3

2
ρ
0
:
3
M
5
) =
:
¹
ρ
0
:
2
M
5
V
0
.
32 2 Lighthill’s Theory
Dimensional arguments and experiment indicate that the rate H
0
, say, at which
energy must be supplied by the action of external forces to maintain the kinetic
energy of a statistically steady turbulent field occupying a volume V
0
is given
in order of magnitude by
H
0

:
¹
ρ
0
:
2
V
0
.
Therefore, the mechanical efficiency with which turbulence kinetic energy is
converted into sound is
H
q
H
0
∼ M
5
. (2.2.6)
This is smaller than about 0.01 for Mach numbers M - 0.4, confirming
Lighthill’s hypothesis that the flow generated sound is an infinitesimal by-
product of the turbulent motion.
2.3 Curle’s Theory
In most applications of Lighthill’s theory it is necessary to generalize the so-
lution (2.2.1) to account for the presence of solid bodies in the flow. Indeed,
turbulence is frequently generated in the boundary layers and wakes of flow
past such bodies (airfoils, flow control surfaces, etc.), and the unsteady surface
forces (dipoles) that arise are likely to make a significant contribution to the
production of sound. The procedure in such cases is to introduce a system of
mathematical control surfaces that can be deformed to coincide with the sur-
faces of the different moving or stationary bodies, although for the moment
we shall discuss only cases involving stationary bodies. Before doing this we
establish an integral transformation formula that is used repeatedly in problems
of this kind.
2.3.1 Volume and Surface Integrals
Let V be the fluid outside a closed control surface S (Fig. 2.3.1) defined by the
equation
f (x) = 0. where
_
f (x) > 0 for x in V.
f (x) - 0 for x within S.
(2.3.1)
and consider the Heaviside unit function
H( f ) =
_
1 for x in V.
0 for x within S.
2.3 Curle’s Theory 33
Fig. 2.3.1.
Then, for an arbitrary function +(x) defined in V and on S,
_

−∞
+(x)∇H d
3
x =
_
S
+(x) ndS ≡
_
S
+(x) dS. (2.3.2)
or
_

−∞
+(x)
∂ H
∂x
j
d
3
x =
_
S
+(x) n
j
dS ≡
_
S
+(x) dS
j
. (2.3.3)
where H ≡ H( f ) and n is the unit normal on S directed into V.
Proof
∇H( f ) ≡ δ( f ) ∇ f (2.3.4)
is nonzero only on S, where ∇ f is in the direction of n. The volume integral
is therefore confined to the region between the inner and outer faces of a shell
of infinitesimal thickness (between the broken line surfaces in Fig. 2.3.1) that
just encloses S, and in which the volume element is
d
3
x = ds

dS.
where s

= 0 on S and s

is measured parallel to n. Because f = 0 on S we
can write, for small values of s

,
f =
_
∂ f
∂s

_
S
s

.
where (∂ f ,∂s

)
S
≡ [∇ f [ > 0 is evaluated on S.
34 2 Lighthill’s Theory
Therefore,
δ( f ) = δ([∇ f [s

) ≡
δ(s

)
[∇ f [
.
Hence,
_

−∞
+(x)∇H d
3
x ≡
_

−∞
+(x)∇ f δ( f ) d
3
x =
_

−∞
+(x)
∇ f
[∇ f [
δ(s

) ds

dS
=
_
S
+(x)ndS. because n =
∇ f
[∇ f [
.
2.3.2 Curle’s Equation
Curle (1955) has derived a formal solution (called Curle’s equation) of
Lighthill’s equation (2.1.12) for the sound produced by turbulence in the vicin-
ity of an arbitrary, fixed surface S, defined as above by an equation f (x) = 0
(Fig. 2.3.2). This surface may either enclose a solid body, or merely constitute
a control surface used to isolate a fixed region of space containing both solid
bodies and fluid or just fluid.
To derive Curle’s equation, multiply the momentum equation (2.1.11) by
H ≡ H( f ), and use the definition (2.1.10) of T
i j
to obtain

∂t
(ρ:
i
H) ÷

∂x
i
_
Hc
2
0
(ρ −ρ
0
)
_
= −

∂x
j
(HT
i j
) ÷(ρ:
i
:
j
÷ p
/
i j
)
∂ H
∂x
j
.
(2.3.5)
Fig. 2.3.2.
2.3 Curle’s Theory 35
where
p
/
i j
= ( p − p
0

i j
−σ
i j
(2.3.6)
is the compressive stress tensor. Repeat this operationfor the continuityequation
(2.1.8):

∂t
(H(ρ −ρ
0
)) ÷

∂x
i
(Hρ:
i
) = (ρ:
i
)
∂ H
∂x
i
. (2.3.7)
The Formula (2.3.4), ∇H = ∇ f δ( f ), shows that Equations (2.3.5) and (2.3.7)
formally determine the momentum density ρ:
i
and the density fluctuation
(ρ − ρ
0
) in the exterior region V (where H( f ) ≡ 1) in terms of the Lighthill
stresses T
i j
in V and sources distributed over the control surface.
An analog of Lighthill’s equation (2.1.12) can now be obtained by eliminat-
ing Hρ:
i
between (2.3.5) and (2.3.7). This is the differential form of Curle’s
equation
_
1
c
2
0

2
∂t
2
−∇
2
_
_
Hc
2
0
(ρ −ρ
0
)
_
=

2
(HT
i j
)
∂x
i
∂x
j


∂x
i
_
(ρ:
i
:
j
÷ p
/
i j
)
∂ H
∂x
j
_
÷

∂t
_
ρ:
j
∂ H
∂x
j
_
. (2.3.8)
The equation is valid throughout all space, including the region enclosed by
S where H( f ) vanishes. The second and third terms on the right-hand side
respectively represent dipole and monopole sources distributed over S. They
have the following interpretations:
1. If S is merely an artificial control surface it will enclose fluid, possibly also
solid bodies, and may or may not contain turbulence; the surface dipole and
monopole sources then represent the influence of this region on the sound
radiated in V; in other words the aggregate effect of the dipole and monopole
sources accounts for the presence of solid bodies and turbulence within S
(when T
i j
,= 0 in S) and also for the interaction of sound generated outside
S with the fluid and solid bodies in S.
2. If S is the boundary of a solid body, the surface dipole represents the pro-
duction of sound by the unsteady surface force that the body exerts on the
exterior fluid, whereas the monopole is responsible for the sound produced
by volume pulsations (if any) of the body.
Because Curle’s formof Lighthill’s equation is valid throughout all space, the
outgoing wave solution is found from the general solution (1.6.6) of the wave
36 2 Lighthill’s Theory
equation (1.6.3), as before, using the special form (1.7.5) for dipole sources.
When account is taken of the transformation formula (2.3.3) this yields Curle’s
equation
Hc
2
0
(ρ −ρ
0
) =

2
∂x
i
∂x
j
_
V
[T
i j
]
d
3
y
4π[x −y[


∂x
i
_
S
[ρ:
i
:
j
÷ p
/
i j
]
dS
j
(y)
4π[x −y[
÷

∂t
_
S
[ρ:
j
]
dS
j
(y)
4π[x −y[
. (2.3.9)
where the square bracket notation such as [T
i j
] ≡ T
i j
(y. t −[x −y[,c
0
) implies
evaluation at the retarded time. Note that, because H( f ) ≡ 0 inside S, the sum
of the three integrals on the right-hand side must also vanish when the field
point x is within S.
2.4 Sound Produced by Turbulence Near a Compact Rigid Body
When the surface S (in Fig. 2.3.2) is rigid, Curle’s equation (2.3.9) reduces to
Hc
2
0
(ρ −ρ
0
) =

2
∂x
i
∂x
j
_
V
[T
i j
]
d
3
y
4π[x −y[


∂x
i
_
S
[ p
/
i j
]
dS
j
(y)
4π[x −y[
. (2.4.1)
We now use this solution to determine the order of magnitude of the sound gen-
erated by an acoustically compact body within a turbulent flow. Compactness
usually requires the Mach number M ∼ :,c
0
_1, and we shall assume this to
be the case in the following.
The contribution from the quadrupole integral in (2.4.1) is estimated as in
Section 2.2. To deal with the surface dipole, note first that for turbulence of
velocity : and correlation scale ¹, the orders of magnitude of the pressure and
viscous components of the compressive stress tensor
p
/
i j
= ( p − p
0

i j
−σ
i j
are
( p − p
0
) ∼ ρ
0
:
2
. σ ∼ η
:
¹
;
that is,
( p − p
0
)
σ

ρ
0

η
=

ν
.
where ν = η,ρ
0
is the kinematic viscosity. The dimensionless ratio Re = :¹,ν
is the Reynolds number and is always very large (∼10
4
or more) in turbulent
flow. This means that viscous contributions to the surface force can be neglected.
2.5 Radiation from a Noncompact Surface 37
In the far field the pressure p(x. t ) = c
2
0
(ρ −ρ
0
)(x. t ), and H( f ) = 1. Thus,
applying the far-field dipole approximation (1.9.6), and neglecting retarded time
variations x · y,c
0
[x[ because S is compact, the dipole sound pressure p
d
, say,
can be written
p
d

x
i
4πc
0
[x[
2

∂t
_
S
( p − p
0
)
_
y. t −
[x[
c
0
_
dS
i
=
x
i
4πc
0
[x[
2
dF
i
dt
_
t −
[x[
c
0
_
.
[x[ →∞. (2.4.2)
where F(t ) is the unsteady force exerted on the fluid by the body. The contri-
bution to p
d
from a surface element of diameter ¹ within which the turbulence
surface pressure fluctuations are correlated is evidently of order
1
c
0
[x[
:
¹

0
:
2
¹
2
) =
¹
[x[
ρ
0
:
2
M.
which exceeds by an order of magnitude (1,M ¸1) the sound pressure (2.2.4)
produced by a quadrupole in V of length scale ¹. If A is the total surface area
wetted by the turbulent flow, there are A,¹
2
independently radiating surface
elements, and the total power radiated by the dipoles is
H
d
∼ 4π[x[
2

_
p
2
d
ρ
0
c
0
_
∼ Aρ
0
:
3
M
3
. (2.4.3)
The direct power radiated by quadrupoles occupying a volume V
0
is H
q

(V
0
,¹)ρ
0
:
3
M
5
, the same as in the absence of the body (see Section 2.2). The
sound produced by the turbulence near S is therefore dominated by the dipole
when M is small, and as M →0 the acoustic power exceeds the quadrupole
power by a factor ∼1,M
2
¸ 1. Precisely how small M should be for this to
be true depends on the details of the flow, which determine the appropriate
values of A and V
0
,¹.
This increase in acoustic efficiency brought about by surface dipoles on an
acoustically compact body occurs also for arbitrary, noncompact bodies when
turbulence interacts with compact structural elements, such as edges, corners,
and protuberances.
2.5 Radiation from a Noncompact Surface
Consider a compact turbulent eddy in x
2
> 0 adjacent to an infinite, plane rigid
wall at x
2
= 0 (Fig. 2.5.1). Let us apply the rigid surface form(2.4.1) of Curle’s
equation to calculate the radiation. At high Reynolds numbers and at x in the
38 2 Lighthill’s Theory
Fig. 2.5.1.
acoustic far field (where p(x. t ) ≡ c
2
0
(ρ −ρ
0
) and H( f ) ≡ H(x
2
) = 1) we find
p(x. t ) ≈
x
i
x
j
4πc
2
0
[x[
3

2
∂t
2
_
T
i j
_
y. t −
[x[
c
0
_
d
3
y
÷
x
2
4πc
0
[x[
2

∂t
_
y
2
=0
( p − p
0
)
_
y. t −
[x[
c
0
÷
x
1
y
1
÷ x
3
y
3
c
0
[x[
_
dy
1
dy
3
.
[x[ →∞. (2.5.1)
Retarded time variations have been neglected in the integral over the volume
of the compact turbulent eddy. We have not done this in the surface pressure
integral, because this tends to extend over a larger region than the Reynolds
stress fluctuations responsible for it (indeed, the acoustic component of the
pressure, as opposed to the near field hydrodynamic pressure, extends out to
infinity on the wall, decaying only very slowly like 1,[x[).
The value of the surface integral cannot be estimated by a naive order-of-
magnitude calculation of the kind performed in Section 2.4 for a compact body,
because for an infinite plane wall the domain of integration includes the acoustic
region, and therefore involves an unknown and possibly important contribution
from the acoustic pressure that we are trying to calculate! The difficulty was
resolved by Powell (1960) by the ingenious device of applying Curle’s solution
Problems 2 39
(2.4.1) at the image ¯ x = (x
1
. −x
2
. x
3
) in the wall of the far field observation
point x. At the image point H( f ) = H(x
2
) ≡ 0, and therefore
0 ≈
¯ x
i
¯ x
j
4πc
2
0
[x[
3

2
∂t
2
_
T
i j
_
y. t −
[x[
c
0
_
d
3
y

x
2
4πc
0
[x[
2

∂t
_
y
2
=0
( p − p
0
)
_
y. t −
[x[
c
0
÷
x
1
y
1
÷ x
3
y
3
c
0
[x[
_
dy
1
dy
3
.
[x[ →∞. (2.5.2)
The surface integral term in this formula is equal but opposite in sign to that
in the original solution (2.5.1), which is now seen to exactly represent the
quadrupole sound generated by a system of image quadrupoles in the wall!
Adding (2.5.1) and (2.5.2), we find
p(x. t ) ≈
(x
i
x
j
÷ ¯ x
i
¯ x
j
)
4πc
2
0
[x[
3

2
∂t
2
_
T
i j
_
y. t −
[x[
c
0
_
d
3
y

(x
i
x
j
÷ ¯ x
i
¯ x
j
)
4πc
2
0
[x[
3

2
∂t
2
_
ρ
0
:
i
:
j
_
y. t −
[x[
c
0
_
d
3
y. [x[ →∞. (2.5.3)
Therefore, the apparently strong contribution from the surface pressure di-
poles actually integrates to a termof quadrupole strength. This is a consequence
of the Kraichnan–Phillips theorem (see Howe, 1998a), according to which the
net unsteady component of the normal force between an infinite plane wall and
an incompressible fluid must vanish identically
_
y
2
=0
( p − p
0
)(y. t ) dy
1
dy
3
≡ 0. (2.5.4)
Thus, extreme care must be exercised when using Curle’s equation to estimate
the sound produced by turbulence interacting with large surfaces. As a general
rule, the surface contribution will be comparable to that from the turbulence
quadrupoles whenever the characteristic wavelength of the sound is smaller
than the radius of curvature of the surface.
Problems 2
1. Show that the acoustic efficiency of a compact sphere of radius R executing
small amplitude translational oscillations at velocity U = U
0
sin(ωt ) is
H
a
H
0

_
ωR
c
0
_
3
.
40 2 Lighthill’s Theory
where
H
a
=
πωR
3
6
ρ
0
U
2
0
_
ωR
c
0
_
3
. H
0
=
2ωR
3
3
ρ
0
U
2
0
are respectively the average acoustic and hydrodynamic powers fed into the
fluid during the quarter cycle 0 - ωt - π,2.
Explain the significance of averaging only over 0 - ωt - π,2.
2. What is the efficiency in Problem 1 when the sphere pulsates with small
amplitude normal velocity :
n
= U
0
sin(ωt )?
3. The wake behind a bluff body fixed in a nominally steady, lowMach number
flow at speed U produces a drag force equal to C
D
A
1
2
ρ
0
U
2
, where C
D
is the drag coefficient (which may be regarded as constant), and A is the
projected cross-sectional area of the body in the flow direction. Derive an
approximate formula for the far-field acoustic pressure radiated by the body
when U contains a small amplitude, time-harmonic component such that
U = U
0
÷u cos(ωt ), where U
0
and u are constant and u _U
0
.
4. Show that Powell’s solution (2.5.3) for the sound generated by turbulence
adjacent to a rigid plane wall is identical with the solution of Curle’s differ-
ential equation (2.3.8) determined by the modified Green’s function
G(x. y. t −τ) =
1
4π[x −y[
δ
_
t −τ −
[x −y[
c
0
_
÷
1
4π[¯ x −y[
δ
_
t −τ −
[¯ x −y[
c
0
_
.
where ¯ x = (x
1
. −x
2
. x
3
). G(x. y. t − τ) is the solution of what problem of
linear acoustics?
3
The Compact Green’s Function
3.1 The Influence of Solid Boundaries
Let us return to the general problem of linear acoustics. To fix ideas, we shall
frame the present discussion in terms of Equation (1.3.9)
_
1
c
2
0

2
∂t
2
−∇
2
_
ϕ = −q(x. t ) (3.1.1)
for the velocity potential, but our conclusions will be applicable quite generally.
This equation determines ϕ in terms of a specified source distribution q(x. t ). In
the absence of solid boundaries (in free space) the results of Section 1.6 enable
us to represent ϕ in the form
ϕ(x. t ) =
__

−∞
−q(y. τ)G(x. y. t −τ) d
3
y dτ. (3.1.2)
where G(x. y. t −τ) is the free space Green’s function
G(x. y. t −τ) =
1
4π[x −y[
δ
_
t −τ −
[x −y[
c
0
_
. (3.1.3)
that is, G(x. y. t −τ) is the outgoing wave solution of
_
1
c
2
0

2
∂t
2
−∇
2
_
G = δ(x−y)δ(t −τ). where G = 0 for t - τ. (3.1.4)
In our discussion of Curle’s extension of Lighthill’s theory in Chapter 2, it
was found that the presence of a solid boundary S in the vicinity of the tur-
bulence quadrupole sources T
i j
resulted in the appearance of additional dipole
and monopole sources distributed over S. represented by the second and third
terms on the right-hand side of Equation (2.3.8). Curle’s solution (2.3.9) of this
41
42 3 The Compact Green’s Function
Fig. 3.1.1.
equation was derived by using the retarded potential formula (1.6.6), obtained
by use of the free space Green’s function (3.1.3). A similar representation in-
volving surface distributions of dipoles and monopoles is obtained for ϕ when
we attempt to solve Equation (3.1.1) using Green’s function (3.1.3) in the sit-
uation illustrated in Fig. 3.1.1, where the source distribution q(x. t ) is adjacent
to a rigid boundary S on which the normal derivative ∂ϕ,∂x
n
= 0.
It would be very convenient if we could modify the functional form of
G(x. y. t − τ) so that it automatically takes account of the contributions from
the dipole and monopole sources on S, inasmuch that no surface integrals occur
in the final solution. To do this, we must find a solution of Green’s function
equation (3.1.4) that satisfies appropriate boundary conditions on S. The so-
lution ϕ of (3.1.1) is then once again given by Formula (3.1.2) in terms of
the modified Green’s function, there being no additional surface integrals to
evaluate.
The main practical difficulty is the calculation of the modified Green’s func-
tion. Although it is always possible in principle, exact analytical representations
are known only for solid bodies of very simple shapes (such as spheres, circular
cylinders, and half-planes). However, it turns out that a relatively simple and
general approximate formula can be found for the modified Green’s function
for those problems where it is known that the typical wavelength of the sound
produced by the source distribution q(x. t ) is large compared to one or more
principal dimensions of the solid body S. This is called the compact Green’s
function.
3.1 The Influence of Solid Boundaries 43
To simplify the calculation of the compact Green’s function, we use the
Fourier integral formula
δ(t −τ) =
1

_

−∞
e
−i ω(t −τ)
dω. (3.1.5)
which expresses the δ function as a linear combination of time-harmonic os-
cillations of frequency ω. The formula is proved by observing that no real
system can oscillate at infinitely large frequencies, and therefore in all practical
problems e
−i ω(t −τ)
can be replaced by e
−i ω(t −τ)−c[ω[
for arbitrarily small c >0.
Then,
1

_

−∞
e
−i ω(t −τ)
dω ≡ lim
c→÷0
1

_

−∞
e
−i ω(t −τ)−c[ω[

= lim
c→÷0
c
π[c
2
÷(t −τ)
2
]
.
The final term on the right is the usual definition of δ(t −τ) as the limit of an
‘c-sequence’ (Lighthill, 1958).
If we now put
G(x. y. t −τ) =
−1

_

−∞
ˆ
G(x. y. ω)e
−i ω(t −τ)
dω. (3.1.6)
then the substitution of this and (3.1.5) into the Green’s function equation (3.1.4)
shows that, for each frequency ω,
ˆ
G(x. y. ω) is the solution of
_

2
÷κ
2
0
_
ˆ
G(x. y. ω) = δ(x −y). (3.1.7)
where κ
0
= ω,c
0
is called the acoustic wave number. Sound of frequency ω
has wavelength
λ =

κ
0
.
Thus, a solid body of characteristic dimension ¹ is compact for waves of
frequency ω provided that
¹
λ
=
κ
0
¹

_1. (3.1.8)
This condition will be used below in Section 3.4 to calculate the compact
Green’s function.
44 3 The Compact Green’s Function
3.2 The Helmholtz Equation
The equations
_

2
÷κ
2
0
_
ˆ ϕ = 0.
_

2
÷κ
2
0
_
ˆ ϕ = ˆ q(x. ω) (3.2.1)
are known respectively as the Helmholtz equation and the inhomogeneous
Helmholtz equation. The source term ˆ q(x. ω) represents one frequency com-
ponent of the source q(x. t ) of Equation (3.1.1), so that
q(x. t ) =
_

−∞
ˆ q(x. ω)e
−i ωt
dω. (3.2.2)
Therefore, because (differentiating under the integral sign)
1
c
2
0

2
∂t
2
_

−∞
ˆ ϕ(x. ω)e
−i ωt
dω=
1
c
2
0
_

−∞
−ω
2
ˆ ϕ(x. ω)e
−i ωt

≡−
_

−∞
κ
2
0
ˆ ϕ(x. ω)e
−i ωt
dω.
the solution ˆ ϕ(x. ω) of the inhomogeneous equation is related to the solution of
(3.1.1) by
ϕ(x. t ) =
_

−∞
ˆ ϕ(x. ω)e
−i ωt
dω. (3.2.3)
3.2.1 The Point Source
Equation (3.1.7) determines Green’s function
ˆ
G(x. y. ω) for the inhomoge-
neous Helmholtz equation. The free space Green’s function can be found by
the method used in Section 1.5 for the wave equation. If we temporarily set
y = 0, we have to find the radially symmetric solution of
_

2
÷κ
2
0
_
ˆ
G = δ(x). (3.2.4)
In the usual way (see Section 1.5), we have

2
∂r
2
(r
ˆ
G) ÷κ
2
0
(r
ˆ
G) = 0 for r = [x[ > 0.
and therefore
ˆ
G =
Ae
i κ
0
r
r
÷
Be
−i κ
0
r
r
. (3.2.5)
where A. B remain to be determined.
3.2 The Helmholtz Equation 45
To do this recall that our solution represents one component of a time-
dependent acoustic problem of frequency ω. Since the time factor is e
−i ωt
,
the two terms on the right-hand side of (3.2.5) correspond to propagating sound
waves of the form
Ae
−i ω
_
t −
r
c
0
_
r
÷
Be
−i ω(t ÷
r
c
0
)
r
.
the second of which represents waves converging on the source from infinity,
and must therefore be rejectedbecause of the radiationcondition. Hence, B = 0.
The value of the remaining constant A is found by extending the solution to
include the region occupied by the source at r = 0 by writing
ˆ
G = lim
c→0
Ae
i κ
0
r
(r
2
÷c
2
)
1
2
.
By substituting the solution into (3.2.4) and using the Formula (1.4.8) we find
A = −1,4π.
The free space Green’s function for the inhomogeneous Helmholtz equation
(the solution of (3.1.7)) is now obtained by replacing r = [x[ by [x −y[
ˆ
G(x. y. ω) =
−e
i κ
0
[x−y[
4π[x −y[
. (3.2.6)
Because the source ˆ q(x. ω) in the second of Equations (3.2.1) can be ex-
pressed as a superposition of point sources by means of
ˆ q(x. ω) =
_

−∞
ˆ q(y. ω)δ(x −y) d
3
y.
the solution of the inhomogeneous Helmholtz equation in an unbounded me-
dium can be written
ϕ(x. ω) =
_

−∞
ˆ
G(x. y. ω) ˆ q(y. ω) d
3
y ≡
−1

_

−∞
ˆ q(y. ω)e
i κ
0
[x−y[
[x −y[
d
3
y.
(3.2.7)
3.2.2 Dipole and Quadrupole Sources
The method of integration by parts described in Section 1.7 can be used to show
that the corresponding solutions for the dipole and quadrupole sources
ˆ q(x. ω) =
∂ f
j
∂x
j
(x. ω) and ˆ q(x. ω) =

2
T
i j
∂x
i
∂x
j
(x. ω) (3.2.8)
46 3 The Compact Green’s Function
are respectively
ˆ ϕ(x. ω) =
−1


∂x
j
_

−∞
f
j
(y. ω)e
i κ
0
[x−y[
[x −y[
d
3
y.
and
ˆ ϕ(x. ω) =
−1


2
∂x
i
∂x
j
_

−∞
T
i j
(y. ω)e
i κ
0
[x−y[
[x −y[
d
3
y. (3.2.9)
Example For a point dipole at the origin orientated in the x
1
direction
ˆ q(x. ω) =

∂x
1
( f
1
δ(x)).
Therefore,
ˆ ϕ(x. ω) =
−1


∂x
1
_

−∞
f
1
δ(y)e
i κ
0
[x−y[
[x −y[
d
3
y ≈
−i κ
0
x
1
f
1
e
i κ
0
[x[
4π[x[
2
. [x[ →∞.
(3.2.10)
3.2.3 Green’s Function for the Wave Equation
Let us verify the general relation (3.1.6) between the Green’s functions G(x. y.
t −τ) and
ˆ
G(x. y. ω), respectively, for the wave equationandthe inhomogeneous
Helmholtz equation in the special case in which there are no solid boundaries.
According to this formula we find, using the expression (3.2.6) for the free
space Green’s function
ˆ
G,
G(x. y. t −τ) =
−1

_

−∞
ˆ
G(x. y. ω)e
−i ω(t −τ)

=
1

2
[x −y[
_

−∞
e
−i ω(t −τ−
[x−y[
c
0
)

=
1
4π[x −y[
δ
_
t −τ −
[x −y[
c
0
_
.
which is precisely Equation (3.1.3).
3.3 The Reciprocal Theorem
The calculation of the compact Green’s function is greatly simplified by appli-
cation of the reciprocal theorem. We need to consider only a special case of
3.3 The Reciprocal Theorem 47
Fig. 3.3.1.
this very general theorem of mechanics, which was first used with great effect
in acoustics by Lord Rayleigh (1945).
Consider the two acoustic problems indicated in Fig. 3.3.1, in which sound
of frequency ω is generated by two unit point sources at x = x
A
and x = x
B
in
the presence of a solid body S. We denote the functional forms of the respective
velocity potentials generated by these sources by
ˆ
G(x. x
A
. ω) and
ˆ
G(x. x
B
. ω),
where
_

2
÷κ
2
0
_
ˆ
G(x. x
A
. ω) = δ(x −x
A
). (3.3.1)
_

2
÷κ
2
0
_
ˆ
G(x. x
B
. ω) = δ(x −x
B
). (3.3.2)
In addition
ˆ
G(x. x
A
. ω) and
ˆ
G(x. x
B
. ω) must satisfy appropriate mechani-
cal boundary conditions on S. We take these to have the same general linear
form

ˆ
G
∂x
n
(x. x
A
. ω) =
ˆ
G(x. x
A
. ω)
Z(x. ω)
.

ˆ
G
∂x
n
(x. x
B
. ω) =
ˆ
G(x. x
B
. ω)
Z(x. ω)
.
for x on S. (3.3.3)
48 3 The Compact Green’s Function
where x
n
is measured in the normal direction from S into the fluid and Z(x. ω)
is the surface impedance. For a rigid surface, Z(x. ω) = ∞.
At large distances from S, in the acoustic far field, both solutions are assumed
to exhibit the characteristics of outgoing sound waves, such that (with implicit
time dependence e
−i ωt
)
ˆ
G(x. x
A
. ω) ∼
f
A
(θ. φ)e
i κ
0
r
r
.
ˆ
G(x. x
B
. ω) ∼
f
B
(θ. φ)e
i κ
0
r
r
.
r ≡ [x[ →∞. (3.3.4)
where it may be supposed that the coordinate origin is in the neighborhood of
S. The angular dependencies of the far-field radiations from the two sources
are determined by the factors f
A
(θ. φ) and f
B
(θ. φ), which are functions of the
polar angles θ. φ defining the orientation of the far field point x, and generally
depend strongly on the details of the interaction of the volume flows from each
source with S.
The reciprocal theorem states that
ˆ
G(x
A
. x
B
. ω) =
ˆ
G(x
B
. x
A
. ω). (3.3.5)
That is, the potential at x
A
produced by the point source at x
B
is equal to the
potential at x
B
produced by an equal point source at x
A
.
Proof. Multiply Equation (3.3.1) by
ˆ
G(x. x
B
. ω) and Equation (3.3.2) by
ˆ
G(x. x
A
. ω), subtract the resulting equations and integrate over the volume
bounded by the surface S and by a large surface Y in the acoustic far field.
Green’s identity
ˆ
G(x. x
B
. ω)∇
2
ˆ
G(x. x
A
. ω) −
ˆ
G(x. x
A
. ω)∇
2
ˆ
G(x. x
B
. ω)
= div(
ˆ
G(x. x
B
. ω)∇
ˆ
G(x. x
A
. ω) −
ˆ
G(x. x
A
. ω)∇
ˆ
G(x. x
B
. ω)).
and the divergence theorem permit the volume integral of the term obtained
from the left-hand sides to be expressed as surface integrals over S and Y,
whereas the integrals involving the δ functions can be evaluated explicitly. This
procedure gives
_
S÷Y
_
ˆ
G(x. x
A
. ω)

ˆ
G
∂x
n
(x. x
B
. ω) −
ˆ
G(x. x
B
. ω)

ˆ
G
∂x
n
(x. x
A
. ω)
_
dS
=
ˆ
G(x
B
. x
A
. ω) −
ˆ
G(x
A
. x
B
. ω).
3.4 Time-Harmonic Compact Green’s Function 49
The surface integral over S vanishes because of the impedance conditions
(3.3.3). The surface integral over Y vanishes because of conditions (3.3.4) and
because ∂θ,∂x
n
and ∂φ,∂x
n
are each of order 1,r as r →∞, and therefore

ˆ
G
∂x
n
(x. x
A
. ω) ∼ f
A
(θ. φ)
i κ
0
e
i κ
0
r
r
∂r
∂x
n
.

ˆ
G
∂x
n
(x. x
B
. ω) ∼ f
B
(θ. φ)
i κ
0
e
i κ
0
r
r
∂r
∂x
n
. as r →∞.
This proves the theorem.
The result is usually expressed as the simple reciprocal relation
ˆ
G(x. y. ω) =
ˆ
G(y. x. ω). (3.3.6)

3.4 Time-Harmonic Compact Green’s Function
We are now ready to derive the compact Green’s function
ˆ
G(x. y. ω) for the
problem depicted in Fig. 3.4.1. We have to solve
_

2
÷κ
2
0
_
ˆ
G(x. y. ω) = δ(x −y).

ˆ
G
∂x
n
= 0 on S. (3.4.1)
where the rigid body S is assumed to be acoustically compact. The influence of
Fig. 3.4.1.
50 3 The Compact Green’s Function
a solid body on the production of sound by neighboring sources is equivalent to
an additional distribution of monopoles and dipoles on S. The compact Green’s
function includes a first approximation for the net effect of these monopole and
dipole distributions, obviating the need to evaluate surface integrals.
In practice, we are interested primarily in calculating the sound in the far
field of the body. Let ¹ denote the characteristic diameter of the body, and take
the coordinate origin at O within S. The source point y is assumed to be close
to S (so that [y[ ∼ ¹) and the observer at x is taken to be in the acoustic far
field. The compactness condition (3.1.8) therefore implies that
κ
0
¹ _1 and κ
0
[y[ _1.
In these circumstances the compact approximation for
ˆ
G(x. y. ω) can be
found very easily from the solution of the reciprocal problem:
_

2
∂y
2
1
÷

2
∂y
2
2
÷

2
∂y
2
3
÷κ
2
0
_
ˆ
G(y. x. ω) = δ(y −x).

ˆ
G
∂y
n
= 0 on S.
(3.4.2)
where the source is at the far-field point x, and
ˆ
G(y. x. ω) is determined as a
function of y close to S. The solution of (3.4.1) is then given by the reciprocal
theorem (Section 3.3)
ˆ
G(x. y. ω) =
ˆ
G(y. x. ω) (the potential
ˆ
G(x. y. ω) at the
far-field point x produced by the point source at y is exactly equal to the potential
ˆ
G(y. x. ω) produced at the near-field point y by an equal point source at the
far-field point x).
To solve (3.4.2), we put
ˆ
G(y. x. ω) =
ˆ
G
0
(y. x. ω) ÷
ˆ
G
/
(y. x. ω)

−e
i κ
0
[x−y[
4π[x −y[
÷
ˆ
G
/
(y. x. ω)
where
ˆ
G
0
(y. x. ω) is the spherically spreading wave generated by the point
source at x when the presence of the solid is ignored. The term
ˆ
G
/
(y. x. ω)
is the velocity potential of the motion produced in the fluid when this wave
impinges on S.
When [x[ →∞, the approximations
[x −y[ ≈ [x[ −
x · y
[x[
≡ [x[ −
x
j
y
j
[x[
and
1
[x −y[

1
[x[
÷
x · y
[x[
3

1
[x[
3.4 Time-Harmonic Compact Green’s Function 51
and the condition κ
0
y
j
∼ κ
0
¹ _1 imply that
ˆ
G
0
(y. x. ω) ≡
−e
i κ
0
[x−y[
4π[x −y[

−e
i κ
0
[x[
4π[x[
e

i κ
0
x
j
y
j
[x[

−e
i κ
0
[x[
4π[x[
_
1 −
i κ
0
x
j
y
j
[x[
÷O(κ
0
¹)
2
_
(3.4.3)
The linear dependence on y
j
in the second line of this formula represents the first
approximation (of order κ
0
¹) in a power series expansion of rapidly decreasing
terms that describes the variation of the incident spherical wave close to the
body. Thus, regarded as a function of y, the terms shown explicitly in
ˆ
G
0
(y. x. ω) =
−e
i κ
0
[x[
4π[x[
÷
e
i κ
0
[x[
4π[x[
i κ
0
x
j
y
j
[x[
÷· · · ≡ constant ÷U
j
y
j
÷· · · .
where U
j
=
e
i κ
0
[x[
4π[x[
i κ
0
x
j
[x[
. (3.4.4)
can be regarded as the velocity potential of a uniform flow at velocity U
j
im-
pinging on the solid.
At distances [y[ ¸¹ from S, the distortion of this flow produced by the body
must be small. Let it be represented by the velocity potential
ˆ
G
/
(y. x. ω) = −U
j
ϕ

j
(y) ÷O(κ
0
¹)
2
. where ϕ

j
(y) →0 when [y[ ¸¹.
The function ϕ

j
has the dimensions of length and ∼¹ in order of magnitude
(Batchelor 1967). Then,
ˆ
G(y. x. ω) =
ˆ
G
0
(y. x. ω) ÷
ˆ
G
/
(y. x. ω) =
−e
i κ
0
[x[
4π[x[
÷U
j
(y
j
−ϕ

j
(y)) ÷· · · .
(3.4.5)
where the terms shown explicitly represent a potential flow past the body.
Near the body
ˆ
G(y. x. ω) satisfies (3.4.2) with the right-hand side replaced
by zero (because the source is in the far field). Hence,
U
j

2
(y
j
−ϕ

j
(y)) ÷O(κ
0
¹)
2
= 0.
But U
j
(y
j
− ϕ

j
(y)) = O(κ
0
¹), and therefore, correct to the neglect of small
terms of order O(κ
0
¹)
2
,

2
(y
j
−ϕ

j
(y)) = 0. i.e. ∇
2
ϕ

j
(y) = 0.
52 3 The Compact Green’s Function
where the rigid surface condition requires

∂y
n
(y
j
−ϕ

j
(y)) = 0 on S. (3.4.6)
Summarizing our conclusions from Equations (3.4.4)–(3.4.6): When x is in
the acoustic far field, and y is close to the body
ˆ
G(x. y. ω) =
−e
i κ
0
[x[
4π[x[
_
1 −
i κ
0
x
j
[x[
(y
j
−ϕ

j
(y)) ÷O(κ
0
¹)
2
_
.
y ∼ O(¹). [x[ →∞. (3.4.7)
The first termin the large brackets represents the contribution fromthe spherical
wave
ˆ
G
0
(x. y. ω) evaluatedat y =0. The next termis O(κ
0
¹) andincludes a com-
ponent −i κ
0
x
j
y
j
,[x[ from the incident wave plus a correction i κ
0
x
j
ϕ

j
(y),[x[
produced by S.
The vector field
Y(y) ≡ y −ϕ

(y) (3.4.8)
is called the Kirchhoff vector for the body; the j th component
Y
j
(y) ≡ y
j
−ϕ

j
(y)
satisfies Laplace’s equation ∇
2
Y
j
= 0 with ∂Y
j
,∂y
n
= 0 on S, and can be
interpreted as the velocity potential of an incompressible flow past S that has
unit speed in the j direction at large distances from S. The function ϕ

j
(y) decays
with distance from S, and satisfies
∂ϕ

j
∂y
n
(y) = n
j
on S. (3.4.9)
because ∂y
j
,∂y
n
≡ n
i
∂y
j
,∂y
i
= n
i
δ
i j
= n
j
. Hence, ϕ

j
(y) is just the instanta-
neous velocity potential of the motion that would be produced by translational
motion of S as a rigid body at unit speed in the j direction.
Definition
ˆ
G(x. y. ω) =
−e
i κ
0
[x[
4π[x[
_
1 −
i κ
0
x
j
[x[
(y
j
−ϕ

j
(y))
_
. y ∼ O(¹). [x[ →∞.
(3.4.10)
is called the compact Green’s function for source points y near the body and
observer positions x in the acoustic far field.
3.5 Compact Green’s Function for a Rigid Sphere 53
In Section 3.7, we shall introduce a very much more elegant representation
of the compact Green’s function that greatly expands its utility.
3.5 Compact Green’s Function for a Rigid Sphere
Let the sphere have radius a and take the coordinate origin O at its center, as
illustrated in Fig. 3.5.1. We have to determine the Kirchhoff vector whose j th
component
Y
j
(y) = y
j
−ϕ

j
(y) for j = 1. 2. 3
is equal to the velocity potential of incompressible flow past the sphere having
unit speed in the j direction at large distances from the sphere.
Consider the case j = 1 shown in the figure. The flowis evidently symmetric
about the y
1
axis. Take spherical polar coordinates (r. ϑ. φ) with ϑ measured
from the positive y
1
axis. Then, y
1
= r cos ϑ and the condition (3.4.9) to be
satisfied on the sphere is
∂ϕ

1
∂r
= cos ϑ at r = a. (3.5.1)
The axisymmetry of the problem suggests that we look for a solution of
Laplace’s equation in the form
ϕ

1
= +(r) cos ϑ.
which satisfies the axisymmetric form of Laplace equation
_
1
r
2

∂r
_
r
2

∂r
_
÷
1
r
2
sin ϑ

∂ϑ
_
sin ϑ

∂ϑ
__
+(r) cos ϑ = 0.
Fig. 3.5.1.
54 3 The Compact Green’s Function
provided that
r
2
d
2
+
dr
2
÷2r
d+
dr
−2+ = 0.
The solutions of this equation are proportional to r
n
where n is a root of the
quadratic equation
n
2
÷n −2 = 0. i.e.. n = −2. 1.
Hence,
Y
1
≡ y
1
−ϕ

1
= r cos ϑ −
_
Ar ÷
B
r
2
_
cos ϑ.
where A and B are constants. The condition that ϕ

1
→ 0 as r → ∞implies
that A = 0, and condition (3.5.1) supplies B = −a
3
,2. Therefore,
Y
1
= r cos ϑ ÷
a
3
2r
2
cos ϑ ≡ y
1
_
1 ÷
a
3
2r
3
_
.
Because of the symmetry of the sphere it is clear that we also have
Y
2
= y
2
_
1 ÷
a
3
2r
3
_
. Y
3
= y
3
_
1 ÷
a
3
2r
3
_
. r = [y[.
Thus, the compact Green’s function (3.4.10) for the sphere is
ˆ
G(x. y. ω) =
−e
i κ
0
[x[
4π[x[
_
1 −
i κ
0
x
j
y
j
[x[
_
1 ÷
a
3
2[y[
3
__
. y ∼ O(a).
[x[ →∞. (3.5.2)
This represents the far-field acoustic potential produced by a point source at y
close to the sphere. Because κ
0
[y[ is small the second term in the brace brackets
is always small compared to 1. This appears to suggest that, after all, the sphere
has a relatively small effect on the production of sound! This is certainly true
for monopole sources, but most sources of interest in applications are dipoles or
quadrupoles, and in these circumstances we shall see that it is the small, second
term that determines the leading order approximation for the far-field sound.
3.5.1 Radiation from a Dipole Adjacent to a Compact Sphere
Let us apply the compact Green’s function (3.5.2) to determine the far-field
sound generated by a dipole source close to a sphere of radius a _λ =acoustic
3.5 Compact Green’s Function for a Rigid Sphere 55
Fig. 3.5.2.
wavelength. With the origin at the center of the sphere, we consider the outgoing
wave solution of
_

2
÷κ
2
0
_
ˆ ϕ = f
1

∂x
1
{δ(x
1
− L)δ(x
2
)δ(x
3
)]. where
∂ ˆ ϕ
∂x
n
= 0 on [x[ = a.
The dipole is orientated in the x
1
direction and lies on the x
1
axis at (L. 0. 0),
as in Fig. 3.5.2. The solution is given by
ˆ ϕ(x. ω) =
_
f
1

∂y
1
{δ(y
1
− L)δ(y
2
)δ(y
3
)]
ˆ
G(x. y. ω) d
3
y.
where the integration is over the fluid, and ∂
ˆ
G,∂x
n
= 0 on the sphere. The
source term is zero everywhere except at (L. 0. 0). To evaluate the integral we
write
ˆ ϕ(x. ω) = f
1
_

∂y
1
{
ˆ
G(x. y. ω)δ(y
1
− L)δ(y
2
)δ(y
3
)] d
3
y
−f
1
_
δ(y
1
− L)δ(y
2
)δ(y
3
)

ˆ
G
∂y
1
(x. y. ω) d
3
y.
The first integral is zero because δ(y
1
−L) = 0 on the boundaries of the region
of integration, so that
ˆ ϕ(x. ω) = −f
1
_

ˆ
G
∂y
1
(x. y. ω)
_
y=(L.0.0)
. (3.5.3)
Thus far the calculation is exact. To determine the solution in the far field
given that the sphere is acoustically compact we use the compact approxima-
tion (3.5.2) for
ˆ
G(x. y. ω). We see immediately that the differentiation with
respect to y
1
will be applied only to the small second term in the braces
56 3 The Compact Green’s Function
of (3.5.2), giving
ˆ ϕ(x. ω) =
−i κ
0
f
1
x
j
e
i κ
0
[x[
4π[x[
2
_

∂y
1
_
y
j
_
1 ÷
a
3
2[y[
3
___
y=(L.0.0)
=
−i κ
0
f
1
x
1
e
i κ
0
[x[
4π[x[
2
_
1 −
a
3
L
3
_
=
−i κ
0
f
1
cos θ e
i κ
0
[x[
4π[x[
_
1 −
a
3
L
3
_
. [x[ →∞. κ
0
a _1.
where θ is the angle between the x
1
axis and the x direction (so that x
1
=
[x[ cos θ).
By setting a = 0 in this formula, we recover the far field (3.2.10) of a dipole
source in the absence of the sphere. The presence of the sphere accordingly
reduces the amplitude of the sound relative to that produced by a free-field
dipole. The amplitude is zero when L → a, because in this limit the surface
of the sphere is effectively plane in the vicinity of the dipole and an equal and
opposite image dipole is formed in the sphere. The net radiation is therefore
equivalent to that produced by a quadrupole source, and to calculate the sound
in this case it would be necessary to use a more accurate approximation to
ˆ
G(x. y. ω). This conclusion applies only to dipoles orientated radially with
respect to the sphere (see Problem 1), but it is also true for any compact rigid
surface when a dipole orientated in the direction of the local surface normal
approaches the surface.
3.5.2 Sound Produced by a Vibrating Sphere
Let the surface S of a fixed body execute small amplitude vibrations with normal
velocity :
n
(x. ω) (Fig. 3.5.3). The fluid motion is the same as that generated by
a distribution of monopoles of strength :
n
(x. ω) per unit area of S when S is
Fig. 3.5.3.
3.5 Compact Green’s Function for a Rigid Sphere 57
assumed to be stationary (rigid). The corresponding source strength ˆ q(x. ω) in
the inhomogeneous Helmholtz equation (3.2.1) is
ˆ q(x. ω) = :
n
(x. ω)δ(s

−c). (c →÷0).
where s

is distance measured in the normal direction from S into the fluid,
and c > 0 places the sources just within the fluid adjacent to S. The velocity
potential ˆ ϕ(x. ω) is therefore
ˆ ϕ(x. ω) =
_
fluid
:
n
(y. ω)δ(s

−c)
ˆ
G(x. y. ω) d
3
y (c →÷0)
=
_
S
:
n
(y. ω)
ˆ
G(x. y. ω) dS(y) where

ˆ
G
∂x
n
(x. y. ω) = 0 on S.
(3.5.4)
Consider the sound produced when the sphere of Fig. 3.5.1 vibrates with
small amplitude about its undisturbed position centred at the origin with velocity
ˆ
U(ω)e
−i ωt
along the x
1
axis. Then,
:
n
(y. ω) =
ˆ
U(ω) cos ϑ.
If the vibrations are at sufficiently low frequency, the sphere will be compact,
and when the observer at x is in the acoustic far field the integral in (3.5.4) can
be evaluated using the compact approximation (3.5.2) for
ˆ
G(x. y. ω):
ˆ ϕ(x. ω)

−e
i κ
0
[x[
4π[x[
__
S
:
n
(y. ω) dS(y) −
i κ
0
x
j
[x[
_
S
y
j
_
1 ÷
a
3
2[y[
3
_
:
n
(y. ω) dS(y)
_
.
The first integral represents the net volume flux through S and vanishes identi-
cally for rigid body translational motion. The second integral is nonzero only
for j = 1, when y
1
= a cos ϑ and [y[ = a on S, and we can take dS = 2πa
2
sin ϑ dϑ (so that the surface integral becomes 3πa
3
ˆ
U(ω)
_
π
0
cos
2
ϑ sin ϑ dϑ =
2πa
3
ˆ
U(ω)). Hence,
ˆ ϕ(x. ω) ≈
i κ
0
ˆ
U(ω)a
3
x
1
e
i κ
0
[x[
2[x[
2

i ω
ˆ
U(ω)a
3
cos θe
i κ
0
[x[
2c
0
[x[
. [x[ →∞.
where θ is the angle between the x
1
axis and the radiation direction x (see
Fig. 1.7.1).
The solution for a sphere oscillating at an arbitrary time dependent velocity
U(t ) can be derived from this result provided the sphere remains compact. This
58 3 The Compact Green’s Function
means that if we write
U(t ) =
_

−∞
ˆ
U(ω)e
−i ωt
dω.
then
ˆ
U(ω) ,= 0 only for κ
0
a _ 1. If this condition is satisfied we can use the
Formulae (3.2.2) and (3.2.3) to obtain the time-dependent velocity potential in
the form
ϕ(x. t ) ≈
a
3
cos θ
2c
0
[x[
_

−∞
i ω
ˆ
U(ω)e
−i ω(t −[x[,c
0
)

=
−a
3
cos θ
2c
0
[x[

∂t
_

−∞
ˆ
U(ω)e
−i ω(t −[x[,c
0
)

=
−a
3
cos θ
2c
0
[x[
∂U
∂t
(t −[x[,c
0
). [x[ →∞.
This agrees with the far-field result obtained in Section 1.7, and confirms the
model used there in which the vibrating sphere was replaced by a point dipole
of strength 2πa
3
U(t ) at its center.
3.6 Compact Green’s Function for Cylindrical Bodies
The reciprocal calculation of the Green’s function described in Section 3.4 for
the compact body in Fig. 3.4.1 can be immediately extended to the case of a
cylindrical body of compact cross section.
Figure 3.6.1 illustrates the situation for an infinite circular cylinder of radius
a whose axis lies along the y
3
axis, and whose diameter 2a ∼ ¹ is acoustically
compact. The source point y is adjacent to the cylinder and for the moment
(see Section 3.7) is assumed to be within an axial distance [y
3
[ _ λ from
the coordinate origin O. In this region the Expansion (3.4.7) remains valid
with ϕ

3
(y) ≡0, because the impinging flow described by the velocity potential
(3.4.4) for j = 3 is unaffected by the cylinder. Hence, we can take
ˆ
G(x. y. ω) =
−e
i κ
0
[x[
4π[x[
_
1 −
i κ
0
x
j
Y
j
[x[
_
. y ∼ O(¹). [x[ →∞. (3.6.1)
where the Kirchhoff vector Y has the components
Y
1
= y
1
−ϕ

1
(y). Y
2
= y
2
−ϕ

2
(y). Y
3
= y
3
. (3.6.2)
3.6.1 Circular Cylinder
The potentials ϕ

1
(y). ϕ

2
(y) for the circular cylinder of radius a can be found
by the method of Section 3.5.
3.6 Compact Green’s Function for Cylindrical Bodies 59
Fig. 3.6.1.
For j =1 the flow is symmetric about the y
1
axis and is independent of
the spanwise coordinate y
3
(Fig. 3.6.2). Using polar coordinates (y
1
. y
2
) =
r(cos ϑ. sin ϑ), the condition (3.4.9) to be satisfied on the cylinder is
∂ϕ

1
∂r
= cos ϑ at r = a. (3.6.3)
Fig. 3.6.2.
60 3 The Compact Green’s Function
As in the case of the sphere, we try a solution of the form
ϕ

1
= +(r) cos ϑ.
which satisfies the polar form of Laplace’s equation
_
1
r

∂r
_
r

∂r
_
÷
1
r
2

2
∂ϑ
2
_
+(r) cos ϑ = 0.
provided that
r
2
d
2
+
dr
2
÷r
d+
dr
−+ = 0.
The general solution is + = Ar ÷ B,r. The component Ar must be rejected
because it does not decay as r →∞. Therefore,
Y
1
≡ y
1
−ϕ

1
= r cos ϑ −
B
r
cos ϑ.
and condition (3.6.3) yields B = −a
2
. Therefore,
Y
1
= r cos ϑ ÷
a
2
r
cos ϑ ≡ y
1
_
1 ÷
a
2
r
2
_
.
Similarly,
Y
2
= y
2
_
1 ÷
a
2
r
2
_
.
Hence, the compact Green’s function for a circular cylinder, with source
near the origin, is
ˆ
G(x. y. ω) =
−e
i κ
0
[x[
4π[x[
_
1 −
i κ
0
x
j
Y
j
[x[
_
. y ∼ O(¹). [x[ →∞. (3.6.4)
where
Y
j
= y
j
_
1 ÷
a
2
y
2
1
÷ y
2
2
_
. j = 1. 2; Y
3
= y
3
. (3.6.5)
3.6.2 Rigid Strip
The rigid strip of chord 2a and infinite span provides a simple model of a
sharp-edged airfoil. In Fig. 3.6.3 the airfoil occupies −a - y
1
- a. y
2
= 0.
−∞- y
3
- ∞. The airfoil has no influence on a uniform mean flow in the y
1
-
direction, nor on one in the y
3
-direction, so that potential functions ϕ

1
(y) ≡ 0
and ϕ

3
(y) ≡ 0.
3.6 Compact Green’s Function for Cylindrical Bodies 61
Fig. 3.6.3.
The potential ϕ

2
(y) ≡ ϕ

2
(y
1
. y
2
) can be determined by the method of con-
formal transformation. (Readers unfamiliar with this procedure should consult
Section 4.5.) If z = y
1
÷ i y
2
, the cross section of the airfoil in the z plane is
mapped onto the circular cylinder [Z[ = a in the Z plane by the transformation
Z = z ÷
_
z
2
−a
2
.
Because Z ∼ 2z as [z[ → ∞a uniform flow at unit speed in the y
2
direction
in the z plane at large distances from the airfoil corresponds to a uniform
flow at speed
1
2
in the direction of the imaginary Z axis at large distances
from the cylinder. This flow can be found by the method discussed above
for the circular cylinder (or see Example 3 of Section 4.5), and determines
Y
2
= y
2
−ϕ

2
(y
1
. y
2
) = Re[n(z)], where n is the complex potential
n(z) = −
i
2
_
Z −
a
2
Z
_
= −
i
2
_
z ÷
_
z
2
−a
2

a
2
z ÷

z
2
−a
2
_
= −i
_
z
2
−a
2
.
Thus, the compact Green’s function for a strip, with source near the origin,
is given by
ˆ
G(x. y. ω) =
−e
i κ
0
[x[
4π[x[
_
1 −
i κ
0
x
j
Y
j
[x[
_
. y ∼ O(a). [x[ →∞. (3.6.6)
where the components of the Kirchhoff vector are
Y
1
= y
1
. Y
2
= Re(−i
_
z
2
−a
2
). Y
3
= y
3
. z = y
1
÷i y
2
. (3.6.7)
62 3 The Compact Green’s Function
Fig. 3.6.4.
Figure 3.6.4 depicts the streamline pattern of the flow past the strip defined
by the velocity potential Y
2
(y). The streamlines crowd together and change very
rapidly near the sharp edges. This is an indication that edges can be important
sources of noise when located in the near field of a dipole or quadrupole (or
any higher order multipole) source, because ∇Y
2
becomes very large there.
Example Calculate the far-field velocity potential when
_

2
÷κ
2
0
_
ˆ ϕ = f
2

∂x
2
[δ(x
1
− L)δ(x
2
)δ(x
3
)] . L > a. κ
0
L _1.
where
∂ ˆ ϕ
∂x
2
= 0 on the airfoil −a - x
1
- a. x
2
= 0. −∞- x
3
- ∞.
The dipole source is orientated in the x
2
direction and is positioned just to the
right of the edge at y
1
= a in Fig. 3.6.3. The solution is given by the following
form of Equation (3.5.3)
ˆ ϕ(x. ω) = −f
2
_

ˆ
G
∂y
2
(x. y. ω)
_
y=(L.0.0)
≈ −
i f
2
κ
0
x
2
e
i κ
0
[x[
4π[x[
2
_
∂Y
2
∂y
2
_
y=(L.0.0)
where, from (3.6.7),
∂Y
2
∂y
2
= Re
_
−i

∂y
2
_
z
2
−a
2
_
. z = y
1
÷i y
2
= Re
_
z

z
2
−a
2
_
.
3.7 Symmetric Compact Green’s Function 63
Therefore,
ˆ ϕ(x. ω) ≈ −
i f
2
κ
0
x
2
e
i κ
0
[x[
4π[x[
2
L

L
2
−a
2
= −
i f
2
κ
0
L cos Oe
i κ
0
[x[
4π[x[

L
2
−a
2
. [x[ →∞.
where O = cos
−1
(x
2
,[x[) is the angle between the normal to the strip and the
radiation direction (x,[x[) indicated in Fig. 3.6.3.
The amplitude of the sound is increased by a factor L,

L
2
−a
2
relative to
that produced by the same dipole in free space, and is unbounded as L →a,
when the dipole approaches the edge.
3.7 Symmetric Compact Green’s Function
The definition (3.4.10) of the compact Green’s function can be recast to exhibit
the reciprocal nature of the source and observer positions y and x. To do this
we first observe that, for a body of characteristic diameter ¹,
Y
j
(y) = y
j
−ϕ

j
(y) ∼ O(¹).
and, therefore, that κ
0
Y
j
_1. Hence,
ˆ
G(x. y. ω) ≈
−e
i κ
0
[x[
4π[x[
_
1 −
i κ
0
x
j
Y
j
[x[
_
=
−e
i κ
0
[x[
4π[x[
_
1 −
i κ
0
x · Y
[x[
_

−1
4π[x[
e
i κ
0
[x[−
i κ
0
x·Y
[x[
.

−e
i κ
0
[x−Y[
4π[x[
. Y ∼ O(¹). [x[ →∞. (3.7.1)
where on the last line we have used the usual far-field approximation (1.9.2)
[x −Y[ ≈ [x[ −
x · Y
[x[
. [x[ →∞.
Now let X(x) denote the Kirchhoff vector for the body expressed in terms of x,
i.e., let
X
j
(x) = x
j
−ϕ

j
(x). (3.7.2)
64 3 The Compact Green’s Function
Then, because ϕ

j
(x) → 0 as [x[ → ∞, we also have [X[ ∼ [x[ as [x[ → ∞,
and, therefore, from (1.9.2) and (1.9.3)
[X −Y[ ≈ [x[ −
x · Y
[x[
1
[X −Y[

1
[x[
÷
x · Y
[x[
3

1
[x[
_
¸
¸
_
¸
¸
_
when [x[ →∞. (3.7.3)
Thus, to the same approximation, (3.7.1) can be written
ˆ
G(x. y. ω) ≈
−e
i κ
0
[X−Y[
4π[X −Y[
. Y ∼ O(¹). [x[ →∞.
This result is the basis of our revised definition of the
Compact Green’s Function for the Inhomogeneous Helmholtz Equation
ˆ
G(x. y. ω) =
−e
i κ
0
[X−Y[
4π[X −Y[
. (3.7.4)
where X = x −ϕ

(x). Y = y −ϕ

(y) are the Kirchhoff vectors for the body
expressed respectively in terms of x and y. The components X
j
and Y
j
are the
velocity potential of incompressible flow past the body having unit speed in
the j direction at large distances from the body; ϕ

j
is the velocity potential of
the incompressible flow that would be produced by rigid body motion of S at
unit speed in the j direction.
Our generalized definition clearly satisfies the reciprocal theorem. Also, be-
cause of the symmetrical way in which x and y enter this formula we may now
remove any restriction on the position of the coordinate origin. The approxima-
tion is valid for arbitrary source and observer locations provided that at least
one of them lies in the far field of the body. When both x and y are in the far
field (so that X ∼ x and Y ∼ y) predictions made with the compact Green’s
function will be the same as when the body is absent. This is because for dis-
tant sources the amplitude of the sound scattered by a compact rigid object is
O((κ
0
¹)
2
) smaller than the incident sound, that is, is of quadrupole intensity
(Lighthill 1978; Howe 1998a). When x is close to the body the source must be
in the far field;
ˆ
G(x. y. ω) then determines the modification by the body of low
frequency sound received by an observer near the body.
The definition (3.7.4) is easily recalled because it is an obvious generaliza-
tion of the free space Green’s function (3.2.6). In applications it is necessary
to remember also that it is valid for determining only the leading order ap-
proximation to the surface monopole and dipole sources induced on the body
3.8 Low-Frequency Radiation from a Vibrating Body 65
by neighboring sources in the fluid. In practice this means that when used in
calculations
ˆ
G(x. y. ω) will normally be expanded only to first order in the
Kirchhoff source vector Y(y).
We can go further and use the formula (3.1.6) relating Green’s functions for
the wave equation and the Helmholtz equation to derive the compact approxi-
mation for Green’s function of the wave equation:
G(x. y. t −τ) =
−1

_

−∞
ˆ
G(x. y. ω)e
−i ω(t −τ)


1

2
[X −Y[
_

−∞
e
−i ω(t −τ−
[X−Y[
c
0
)

=
1
4π[X −Y[
δ
_
t −τ −
[X −Y[
c
0
_
.
This remarkable result is formally identical with the classical free space Green’s
function (1.6.2) with X. Y substituted for x. y. However, its use is subject
to the same restrictions as (3.7.4), and it will be valid only when applied to
time-dependent source terms producing sound whose wavelength is large com-
pared to the characteristic body dimension ¹. With this understanding we can
define the
Compact Green’s Function for the Wave Equation
G(x. y. t −τ) =
1
4π[X −Y[
δ
_
t −τ −
[X −Y[
c
0
_
. (3.7.5)
where X = x −ϕ

(x). Y = y −ϕ

(y) are Kirchhoff vectors for the body. The
components X
j
and Y
j
are the velocity potential of incompressible flow past
the body having unit speed in the j direction at large distances from the body;
ϕ

j
is the velocity potential of the incompressible flow that would be produced
by rigid body motion of S at unit speed in the j direction.
3.8 Low-Frequency Radiation from a Vibrating Body
The compact Green’s function (3.7.5) for the wave equation will now be used
to give a complete theory of the low-frequency sound produced by a vibrating
body. The maximum frequency of the vibrations must be small enough to
ensure that the body (or its cross section, in the case of vibrating a cylinder)
is acoustically compact. The argument follows closely the discussion of the
vibrating sphere in Section 3.5, except that we now work directly with time
dependent quantities.
66 3 The Compact Green’s Function
Fig. 3.8.1.
Let the closed surface S (Fig. 3.8.1) vibrate with normal velocity :
n
(x. t ). As
before, the velocity potential in the fluid (governed by Equation (3.1.1)) is the
same as that generated by the distribution of volume sources
q(x. t ) = :
n
(x. t )δ(s

−c) (c →÷0) (3.8.1)
distributed over S regarded as a rigid, stationary surface, where s

is distance
measured in the normal direction from S into the fluid. The velocity potential
ϕ(x. t ) is given exactly by
ϕ(x. t ) = −
_

−∞
_
fluid
:
n
(y. τ)δ(s

−c)G(x. y. t −τ) d
3
y dτ (c →÷0)
= −
_

−∞
_
S
:
n
(y. τ)G(x. y. t −τ) dS(y) dτ.
where
∂G
∂x
n
(x. y. t −τ) = 0 on S. (3.8.2)
At low frequencies the first approximation to the far-field sound is obtained
by replacing G(x. y. t − τ) in (3.8.2) by its compact approximation (3.7.5).
The details are given below; they illustrate the general procedure that should be
adopted when using the compact Green’s function (in particular, the technique
of expanding to first order in Y):
ϕ(x. t ) ≈ −
_

−∞
_
fluid
:
n
(y. τ)δ(s

−c)
4π[X −Y[
δ
_
t −τ −
[X −Y[
c
0
_
d
3
y dτ
(c →÷0). [x[ →∞
= −
_

−∞
_
S
:
n
(y. τ)
4π[X −Y[
δ
_
t −τ −
[X −Y[
c
0
_
dS(y) dτ.
= −
1
4π[x[
_

−∞
_
S
:
n
(y. τ)δ
_
t −τ −
[x[
c
0
÷
x · Y
c
0
[x[
_
dS(y) dτ
(X ∼ x as [x[ →∞)
3.8 Low-Frequency Radiation from a Vibrating Body 67
= −
1
4π[x[
_

−∞
_
S
:
n
(y. τ)
_
δ
_
t −τ −
[x[
c
0
_
÷δ
/
_
t −τ −
[x[
c
0
_
x
j
Y
j
c
0
[x[
_
dS(y) dτ.
where the prime denotes differentiation with respect to time. Performing the
integration with respect to τ:
ϕ(x. t ) ≈ −
1
4π[x[
_
S
:
n
_
y. t −
[x[
c
0
_
dS(y)

x
j
4πc
0
[x[
2

∂t
_
S
:
n
_
y. t −
[x[
c
0
_
Y
j
(y) dS(y).
The first integral represents an omnidirectional monopole sound wave, and is
nonzero only if the volume enclosed by S changes with time (i.e., only for a
pulsating body). It is then the most important component of the far field sound –
the second integral is smaller by a factor ∼O(ω¹,c
0
) _ 1 (because ∂,∂t ∼ ω
and Y
j
∼ ¹).
The monopole term vanishes for a rigid body executing small amplitude
translational oscillations at velocity U(t ), say. Then,
:
n
(y. τ) = n(y) · U(τ) = n
i
(y)U
i
(τ).
where n(y) is the surface normal directed into the fluid. Making the substitution
Y
j
= y
j
− ϕ

j
(y) in the second integral we obtain an acoustic field of dipole
type, given by
ϕ(x. t ) ≈ −
x
j
4πc
0
[x[
2
∂U
i
∂t
_
t −
[x[
c
0
__
S
n
i
(y)Y
j
(y) dS(y) (3.8.3)
= −
x
j
4πc
0
[x[
2
∂U
i
∂t
_
t −
[x[
c
0
__
S
[n
i
y
j
−n
i
ϕ

j
] dS. [x[ →∞.
(3.8.4)
Example: The vibrating sphere Consider a rigid sphere of radius a centred at
the origin and oscillating in the x
1
direction at velocity U(t ) (Fig. 3.8.2). Then
U = (U. 0. 0), and it is only necessary to take i = 1 in (3.8.3) or (3.8.4).
In terms of spherical polar coordinates (r. ϑ. φ) we have
y = r(cos ϑ. sin ϑ cos φ. sin ϑ sin φ)
68 3 The Compact Green’s Function
Fig. 3.8.2.
Therefore,
Y ≡ y
_
1 ÷
a
3
2[y[
3
_
=
3a
2
(cos ϑ. sin ϑ cos φ. sin ϑ sin φ)
on the sphere and n
1
= cos ϑ
Hence,
_
S
n
1
Y
j
dS =
3a
3
2
_
S
(cos ϑ. sin ϑ cos φ. sin ϑ sin φ) cos ϑ sin ϑ dϑ dφ
=
_
2πa
3
. j = 1.
0. j = 2. 3
and, therefore, (3.8.3) becomes
ϕ(x. t ) ≈
−a
3
cos θ
2c
0
[x[
∂U
∂t
(t −[x[,c
0
). [x[ →∞. and
x
1
[x[
= cos θ.
(3.8.5)
which is the result already obtained in Section 3.5 using the solution derived
from the Helmholtz equation.
3.8.1 Far Field Pressure Produced by a Vibrating Body
A more general and illuminating discussion of the low-frequency sound pro-
duced by a vibrating rigid body can be given in terms of the added mass tensor
M
i j
(Batchelor 1967), defined by the surface integral
M
i j
= −ρ
0
_
S
n
i
ϕ

j
dS.
3.8 Low-Frequency Radiation from a Vibrating Body 69
The Condition (3.4.9) satisfied by ϕ

j
on S implies that M
i j
= M
j i
, because n
i
can be replaced in the integrand by ∂ϕ

i
,∂y
n
, and
M
i j
= −ρ
0
_
S
n
i
ϕ

j
dS = −ρ
0
_
S
∂ϕ

i
∂y
n
ϕ

j
dS ≡ −ρ
0
_
S
ϕ

i
∂ϕ

j
∂y
n
dS = M
j i
.
(3.8.6)
The final integral is deduced fromthe second by referring to Fig. 3.3.1, recalling
that ∇
2
ϕ

j
= ∇
2
ϕ

i
= 0, and applying the divergence theorem as follows:
_
S÷Y
_
∂ϕ

i
∂y
n
ϕ

j
−ϕ

i
∂ϕ

j
∂y
n
_
dS =
_
fluid


i

2
ϕ

j
−ϕ

j

2
ϕ

i
) d
3
y ≡ 0.
The integration over Y vanishes as the surface recedes to infinity (Batchelor
1967) because
ϕ

i. j
(y) ∼ O
_
1
[y[
2
_
as [y[ →∞.
By evaluating the net force on S produced by the unsteady surface pressure
(or by the method described below in Section 4.4) it can be verified that when
the body translates at velocity U(t ) without rotation in an ideal, incompressible
fluid, it exerts a force on the fluid in the i direction given by
F
i
(t ) = M
i j
dU
j
dt
. (3.8.7)
For a body of mass m, this means that when an external force F
i
acts through
its centre of mass, the equation of motion of the body can be written
(mδ
i j
÷ M
i j
)
dU
j
dt
= F
i
.
The added mass tensor determines the effective mass of fluid dragged along by
the body in its accelerated motion. The inertia of this fluid, in addition to that
of the body, must also be overcome by the force F when the body accelerates.
In general, however, a couple must also be applied to the translating body to
counter a rotational torque also exerted on the body by the fluid (see Batchelor
(1967) for further discussion).
Let us now apply these concepts to determine from (3.8.4) the sound pres-
sure produced by a rigid compact body executing small amplitude translational
oscillations at velocity U(t ). The acoustic pressure is given in the far field by
p = −ρ
0
∂ϕ,∂t (see Section 1.3), and therefore
p(x. t ) =
x
j
4πc
0
[x[
2

2
U
i
∂t
2
_
t −
[x[
c
0
__
ρ
0
_
S
n
i
y
j
dS −ρ
0
_
S
n
i
ϕ

j
dS
_
.
[x[ →∞. (3.8.8)
70 3 The Compact Green’s Function
The first integral is evaluated by applying the divergence theorem, which trans-
forms it into an integral over the volume V
s
of the body:
ρ
0
_
S
n
i
y
j
dS = ρ
0
_
V
s
∂y
j
∂y
i
d
3
y = ρ
0
V
s
δ
i j
≡ m
0
δ
i j
. (3.8.9)
where m
0
is the mass of the fluid displaced by the body. The second term in the
brace brackets of (3.8.8) is just the added mass tensor M
i j
.
Thus, the acoustic pressure can be expressed in either of the forms
p(x. t ) ≈
x
i
4πc
0
[x[
2
(m
0
δ
i j
÷ M
i j
)

2
U
j
∂t
2
_
t −
[x[
c
0
_
=
x
i
4πc
0
[x[
2
_
m
0

2
U
i
∂t
2
÷
∂ F
i
∂t
__
t −
[x[
c
0
_
. [x[ →∞. (3.8.10)
where the second line follows from (3.8.7), where F
i
is the force exerted by the
body on the fluid in the i direction.
For a sphere of radius a oscillating at speed U(t ) in the x
1
direction
m
0
=
4
3
πa
3
ρ
0
and M
i j
=
1
2
m
0
δ
i j
Therefore,
p(x. t ) ≈
x
i
4πc
0
[x[
2
_
m
0
δ
i j
÷
1
2
m
0
δ
i j
_

2
U
j
∂t
2
_
t −
[x[
c
0
_
. [x[ →∞.
=
ρ
0
a
3
cos θ
2c
0
[x[

2
U
∂t
2
_
t −
[x[
c
0
_
.
which is equivalent to (3.8.5).
3.9 Compact Green’s Function Summary and Special Cases
3.9.1 Compact Bodies and Cylindrical Bodies of Compact Cross Section
General Form
G(x. y. t −τ) =
1
4π[X −Y[
δ
_
t −τ −
[X −Y[
c
0
_
(3.9.1)
X = x −ϕ

(x)
_
Kirchhoff vectors for the body.
Y = y −ϕ

(y)
The vector components X
j
(x) and Y
j
(y) are the velocity potentials of
3.9 Compact Green’s Function Summary and Special Cases 71
Table 3.9.1. Standard Special Cases
Body X
1
X
2
X
3
Sphere of radius a, with
centre at origin
x
1
_
1 ÷
a
3
2[x[
3
_
x
2
_
1 ÷
a
3
2[x[
3
_
x
3
_
1 ÷
a
3
2[x[
3
_
Circular cylinder of radius a
coaxial with the x
3
-axis
x
1
_
1 ÷
a
2
x
2
1
÷x
2
2
_
x
2
_
1 ÷
a
2
x
2
1
÷x
2
2
_
x
3
Strip airfoil
−a - x
1
- a. x
2
= 0.
−∞- x
3
- ∞
x
1
x
3
Re(−i

z
2
−a
2
)
z = x
1
÷i x
2
incompressible flow past the body having unit speed in the j direction at large
distances fromthe body (special cases are listed in Table 3.9.1); ϕ

j
is the veloc-
ity potential of the incompressible flow that would be produced by rigid body
motion of S at unit speed in the j direction. For a cylindrical body of compact
cross section parallel to the x
3
direction, we take
X
3
= x
3
. Y
3
= y
3
.
3.9.2 Airfoil of Variable Chord
The compact Green’s function defined by (3.6.6) and (3.6.7) for a rigid strip
can be generalized to include the finite span, variable chord airfoil illustrated in
Fig. 3.9.1. The coordinate axes are orientated as in Fig. 3.6.3 for the strip airfoil,
with y
2
normal to the plane of the airfoil and y
3
in the spanwise direction. The
airfoil span is assumed to be large, and the chord 2a ≡ 2a(y
3
) is a slowly varying
function of y
3
. The potential Y
2
of flow past the airfoil in the y
2
direction may
then be approximated locally by the formula for an airfoil of uniform chord
2a(y
3
).
Fig. 3.9.1.
72 3 The Compact Green’s Function
Therefore, a first approximation to the compact Green’s function (3.9.1) for an
airfoil of span L occupying the interval −
1
2
L - y
3
-
1
2
L is obtained by taking
Y
1
= y
1
. Y
2
=
_
Re
_
−i
_
z
2
−a(y
3
)
2
_
. [y
3
[ -
1
2
L
y
2
. [y
3
[ >
1
2
L
.
Y
3
= y
3
. z = y
1
÷i y
2
. (3.9.2)
This model has been found to give predictions within a few percent of those
based on the exact value of Y
2
(y) in the case of an airfoil of elliptic planform
whose
aspect ratio =
airfoil span
midchord
> 5.
3.9.3 Projection or Cavity on a Plane Wall
Let the plane wall be rigid and coincide with x
2
= 0 (Fig. 3.9.2). When the pro-
jection or cavity is absent the Green’s function with vanishing normal derivative
on the wall is
G
0
(x. y. t −τ) =
1
4π[x −y[
δ
_
t −τ −
[x −y[
c
0
_
÷
1
4π[¯ x −y[
δ
_
t −τ −
[¯ x −y[
c
0
_
.
Fig. 3.9.2.
3.9 Compact Green’s Function Summary and Special Cases 73
where ¯ x = (x
1
. −x
2
. x
3
) is the image of the observer position x in the plane
wall.
The figure illustrates the case for a projection, but the following discussion
applies without change to compact (but nonresonant) wall cavities. Assume first
that the origin is close to the projection. Let [x[ →∞(noting that [¯ x[ = [x[) and
expand G
0
near the projection to first order in y (i.e., correct to dipole order)
G
0
(x. y. t −τ)

1
4π[x[
_
δ
_
t −τ −
[x[
c
0
÷
x · y
c
0
[x[
_
÷δ
_
t −τ −
[x[
c
0
÷
¯ x · y
c
0
[x[
__

1
4π[x[
_

_
t −τ −
[x[
c
0
_
÷
2(x
1
y
1
÷ x
3
y
3
)
c
0
[x[
δ
/
_
t −τ −
[x[
c
0
__
.
We require a corrected expression that has vanishing normal derivative (as a
function of y) on the wall and on the projection. By inspection, this is obtained
simply by replacing the factor
2(x
1
y
1
÷ x
3
y
3
)
c
0
[x[
by
2(x
1
Y
1
÷ x
3
Y
3
)
c
0
[x[
.
where Y
1
= y
1
−ϕ

1
(y). Y
3
= y
3
−ϕ

3
(y) are the velocity potentials of hori-
zontal flows past the projection that are parallel to the wall and have unit speeds
respectively in the y
1
and y
3
-directions as [y[ →∞.
It may now be verified that (in the usual notation) the required compact
Green’s function is
G(x. y. t −τ) =
1
4π[X −Y[
δ
_
t −τ −
[X −Y[
c
0
_
÷
1
4π[
¯
X −Y[
δ
_
t −τ −
[
¯
X −Y[
c
0
_
. (3.9.3)
where
Y
1
=y
1
−ϕ

1
(y). Y
2
=y
2
. Y
3
=y
3
−ϕ

3
(y)
X
1
=x
1
−ϕ

1
(x). X
2
=x
2
. X
3
=x
3
−ϕ

3
(x)
_
. (3.9.4)
and
¯
X = (X
1
. −X
2
. X
3
).
These formulae can be used also for a two-dimensional projection or cavity
that is uniform, say, in the x
3
direction simply by setting Y
3
= y
3
. X
3
= x
3
.
To complete this discussion of compact Green’s function, we now give with-
out proofs a selection of useful examples.
74 3 The Compact Green’s Function
Fig. 3.9.3.
3.9.4 Green’s Function for a Half-Plane (Howe, 1975a)
Analytical representations of the exact Green’s function
ˆ
G(x. y. ω) are known
for a rigid half-plane x
1
-0. x
2
= 0 (which is infinite in the x
3
direction,
Fig. 3.9.3) but are of limited use in applications. However, we can define a
compact Green’s function for a source at y whose distance from the edge is
small compared to the acoustic wavelength, that is, for κ
0
(y
2
1
÷ y
2
2
)
1
2
_ 1. To
do this, we introduce cylindrical polar coordinates
x = (r cos θ. r sin θ. x
3
). y = (r
0
cos θ
0
. r
0
sin θ
0
. y
3
).
Then, if i
3
is a unit vector in the x
3
direction (parallel to the edge),
ˆ
G(x. y. ω) =
ˆ
G
0
(x. y. ω) ÷
ˆ
G
1
(x. y. ω) ÷· · · . (3.9.5)
where, for [x − y
3
i
3
[ →∞and κ
0
_
y
2
1
÷ y
2
2
_1,
ˆ
G
0
(x. y. ω) =
−1
4π[x − y
3
i
3
[
e
i κ
0
[x−y
3
i
3
[
.
(3.9.6)
ˆ
G
1
(x. y. ω) =
−1
π

2πi

κ
0
ϕ

(x)ϕ

(y)
[x − y
3
i
3
[
3,2
e
i κ
0
[x−y
3
i
3
[
.
and
ϕ

(x) =

r sin(θ,2). ϕ

(y) =

r
0
sin(θ
0
,2). (3.9.7)
3.9 Compact Green’s Function Summary and Special Cases 75
ϕ

(x) is a velocity potential of incompressible flow around the edge of the half-
plane expressed in terms of polar coordinates (x
1
. x
2
) = r(cos θ. sin θ) (and
similarly for ϕ

(y)). The component
ˆ
G
0
of
ˆ
G represents the radiation from a
point source at y when scattering is neglected;
ˆ
G
1
is the first correction due to
presence of the half-plane.
3.9.5 Two-Dimensional Green’s Function for a Half-Plane
(Howe, 1975a)
The Green’s function for the wave equation in two dimensions, where conditions
are uniform in the x
3
direction, satisfies
_
1
c
2
0

2
∂t
2
−∇
2
_
G = δ(x
1
− y
1
)δ(x
2
− y
2
)δ(t −τ).
where G = 0 for t - τ. (3.9.8)
When a line source at y = (y
1
. y
2
) is close to the edge of the half-plane in
Fig. 3.9.3 the corresponding compact Green’s function is obtained by integrat-
ing (3.9.6) over −∞ - y
3
- ∞, using the method of stationary phase for
κ
0
_
x
2
1
÷ x
2
2
→∞(see Example 2 of Section 5.2), and then using the Formula
(3.1.6) to calculate G(x. y. t − τ) ≈ G
0
(x. t − τ) ÷ G
1
(x. y. t − τ) ÷ · · ·. In
particular G
1
(x. y. t −τ) is the first term in the expansion that involves y, and
is found to be
G
1
(x. y. t −τ) ≈
ϕ

(x)ϕ

(y)
π[x[
δ(t −τ −[x[,c
0
). [x[ →∞. (3.9.9)
where x = (x
1
. x
2
). y = (y
1
. y
2
) and ϕ

is defined as in (3.9.7).
3.9.6 Two-Dimensional Green’s Function for a Plane with an Aperture
A rigid plane x
1
= 0 is pierced by a two-dimensional aperture occupying
−a - x
2
- a (Fig. 3.9.4). The two-dimensional compact Green’s function (the
solution of (3.9.8)) is applicable for a source at y = (y
1
. y
2
) well within an
acoustic wavelength of the aperture on either side of the plane. The observer at
x = (x
1
. x
2
) is in the acoustic far field. The y-dependent part of the compact
Green’s function is
G(x. y. t −τ) ≈−

c
0
sgn(x
1
)
π

2π[x[
χ(t −τ −[x[,c
0
)

t −τ −[x[,c
0
Re
_
ln
_
Z
a
÷
_
Z
2
a
2
−1
__
.
Z = y
2
÷i y
1
. (3.9.10)
76 3 The Compact Green’s Function
Fig. 3.9.4.
where
χ(t ) = H(t )
_

0
ln(maξ
2
,4c
0
t )e
−ξ
2

[ln(maξ
2
,4c
0
t )]
2
÷π
2
.
and m = 1.781072. . . . Note the definition Z = y
2
÷i y
1
.
3.9.7 Green’s Function for Long Waves in a Rigid Walled Duct
(Howe, 1975b)
Only plane waves can propagate in a cylindrical duct of cross-sectional area
A when the characteristic wavelength of sound is large compared with the
diameter ∼

A, even if the source region is highly three dimensional. When this
condition is satisfied the corresponding compact Green’s function satisfies the
one-dimensional wave equation, provided the cross-sectional area is uniform.
Taking the x
1
direction along the axis of the duct (Fig. 3.9.5a), we have
G(x. y. t −τ) =
c
0
2A
H
_
t −τ −
[x
1
− y
1
[
c
0
_
. [x −y[ ¸

A. (3.9.11)
where H is the Heaviside step function. For a uniformduct with an acoustically
3.9 Compact Green’s Function Summary and Special Cases 77
Fig. 3.9.5.
compact section of variable cross section, such as the neck in Fig. 3.9.5b, the
compact Green’s function becomes
G(x. y. t −τ) =
c
0
2A
H
_
t −τ −
[X
1
−Y
1
[
c
0
_
. [x −y[ ¸

A. (3.9.12)
where X
1
(x) and Y
1
(y) are the velocity potential of incompressible flow in the
duct having unit speed at large distances from the neck.
3.9.8 Compact Green’s Function for a Duct Entrance (Howe, 1998a,b)
The typical geometry is illustrated in Fig. 3.9.6a. Within the duct, several
diameters from the entrance, the cross-sectional area is uniform and equal to
A. However, the geometry of the entrance can be arbitrary, and not necessarily
that of the uniform cylinder shown in the figure. Take the coordinate origin in
the entrance plane of the duct, with the negative x
1
axis lying along the axis of
the duct. Then, there are two cases:
(i) Propagation within the Duct
This is applicable for the case shown in Fig. 3.9.6a, involving a source at y near
the duct entrance and an observer at x within the duct (or vice versa), when the
78 3 The Compact Green’s Function
Fig. 3.9.6.
characteristic acoustic wavelength is large compared to the duct diameter.
G(x. y. t −τ) ≈
c
0
2A
_
H
_
t −τ −


(x) −ϕ

(y)[
c
0
_
−H
_
t −τ ÷
ϕ

(x) ÷ϕ

(y)
c
0
__
. (3.9.13)
where the velocity potential ϕ

(y) describes incompressible flowfromthe duct,
and satisfies
ϕ

(x) ≈x
1
−¹
/
when [x
1
[ ¸

A within the duct.
≈−A,4π[x[ when [x[ ¸

A outside the duct. (3.9.14)
in which ¹
/
is the end correction (Rayleigh, 1945) of the duct opening (≈0.61R
for an unflanged circular cylinder of radius R =

A,π).
(ii) Propagation in Free Space (Fig. 3.9.6b)
When either the source or observer is located at a large distance from the duct
entrance in free space
G(x. y. t −τ) =
1
4π[X −Y[
δ
_
t −τ −
([X(x) −Y(y)[ −[ϕ

(x) ÷ϕ

(y)])
c
0
_
.
(3.9.15)
where ϕ

is defined as in (3.9.14), and X(x). Y(y) denote the Kirchhoff vector
whose i component is the velocity potential of flow past the stationary surface
formed by the duct entrance having unit speed in the i direction at large dis-
tances from the entrance outside the duct (they become exponentially small
Problems 3 79
with distance [x
1
[ or [y
1
[ into the duct). The terms ϕ

(x). ϕ

(y) account for the
additional, weak monopole sound generated by a source near the duct entrance;
the source compresses the fluid in the duct mouth producing a sound wave in the
duct whose reaction on the mouth causes a volume flux equal to the monopole
source strength. The amplitude of this monopole is of the same order as the
usual dipole sound determined by the compact Green’s function.
For a uniform, thin-walled cylindrical duct we can take
X(x) ≡ (x
1
−ϕ

(x). X
2
(x). X
3
(x)). Y(y) ≡ (y
1
−ϕ

(y). Y
2
(y). Y
3
(y)).
If the source coordinate y
1
→−∞within the duct,
G(x. y. t −τ) =
1
4π[x[
δ(t −τ −([x[ − y
1
),c
0
). [x[ →∞. (3.9.16)
This represents a monopole wave centered on the duct entrance. This limiting
form of G can be used to calculate the low-frequency free space radiation
generated by internal sources far from the entrance.
Problems 3
1. Use the compact Green’s function to solve
_

2
÷κ
2
0
_
ˆ ϕ = f
2

∂x
2
[δ(x
1
− L)δ(x
2
)δ(x
3
)] .
where
∂ϕ
∂x
n
= 0 on [x[ = a.
for the sound radiated by an azimuthally orientated dipole adjacent to a
compact, rigid sphere.
2. Use the compact Green’s function to solve
_

2
÷κ
2
0
_
ˆ ϕ = f
1

∂x
1
[δ(x
1
− L)δ(x
2
)δ(x
3
)].
where
∂ϕ
∂x
n
= 0 on
_
x
2
1
÷ x
2
2
_1
2
= a.
for the sound radiated by a radially orientated dipole adjacent to a rigid
circular cylinder of compact cross section.
80 3 The Compact Green’s Function
3. Repeat Question 2 for the dipoles
f
2

∂x
2
[δ(x
1
− L)δ(x
2
)δ(x
3
)] . f
3

∂x
3
[δ(x
1
− L)δ(x
2
)δ(x
3
)].
4. The constant strength dipole
q(x. t ) = f
2

∂x
2
(δ(x
1
−Ut )δ(x
2
−h)δ(x
3
)). f
2
= constant
translates at constant velocity U past a fixed rigid cylinder of radius a - h
whose axis coincides with the x
3
axis. Show that when M = U,c
0
_1, the
far-field acoustic potential determined by Equation (3.1.1) is given by
ϕ ≈
f
2
Ma
2
2π[x[(h
2
÷U
2
[t ]
2
)
3
_
x
1
h
[x[
(3U
2
[t ]
2
−h
2
) ÷
x
2
U[t ]
[x[
(3h
2
−U
2
[t ]
2
)
_
.
where
[t ] = t −
[x[
c
0
.
5. The volume source
q(x. t ) = q
0
δ(x
1
−Ut )δ(x
2
−h)δ(x
3
). q
0
= constant
translates at constant velocity U past a fixed rigid sphere of radius a - h
whose center is at the origin. Determine from Equation (3.1.1) the far field
acoustic pressure p = −ρ
0
∂ϕ,∂t given that M = U,c
0
_1.
6. The point source q(x. t ) = q
0
δ(x
1
−Ut )δ(x
2
)δ(x
3
). (q
0
= constant) convects
along the axis of symmetry of the necked duct shown in Fig. 3.9.5 at constant,
low Mach number speed U. If the cross-sectional area of the duct is denoted
by S(x
1
), where S(x
1
) → A. x
1
→±∞, use the approximations
X
1
= A
_
x
1
0

S(ξ)
. Y
1
= A
_
y
1
0

S(ξ)
.
to calculate the acoustic pressure radiated from the neck during the passage
of the source.
7. In incompressible flow the velocity potential generated by a distribution of
sources q(x. t ) near a rigid body is determined by the solution of

2
ϕ = q(x. t ).
Problems 3 81
Show that the monopole and dipole components of the solution at large
distances from the body (in the hydrodynamic far field) can be calculated
using the following incompressible limit of the compact Green’s function
G(x. y. t −τ) =
−δ(t −τ)
4π[X −Y[
.
8. A rigid body translates without rotation in the j direction at velocity U
j
(t )
in an ideal, incompressible fluid at rest at infinity. Show that the velocity
potential of the fluid motion is
+ = U
j
ϕ

j
.
In a fixed reference frame, the pressure can be calculated from Bernoulli’s
equation:
∂+
∂t
÷
p
ρ
0
÷
1
2
(∇+)
2
= 0.
Use these results to prove formula (3.8.7) for the force exerted on the fluid
by the body.
9. A compact rigid disc of radius a executes small amplitude vibrations at
velocity U(t ) normal to itself. In the undisturbed state it lies in the plane
x
1
=0 with its center at the origin. If ϕ

1
(x) = ∓(2,π)
_
a
2
− x
2
2
− x
2
3
on the
faces x
1
= ±0.
_
x
2
2
÷ x
2
3
- a of the disc, show that the acoustic pressure
generated by the motion is given by
p(x. t ) ≈

0
a
3
cos θ
3πc
0
[x[

2
U
∂t
2
(t −[x[,c
0
). [x[ →∞. cos θ =
x
1
[x[
.
4
Vorticity
4.1 Vorticity and the Kinetic Energy of Incompressible Flow
4.1.1 Kelvin’s (1867) Definition
Kelvin was responsible for much of the pioneering work on the mechanics of
incompressible flow. He gave the following definition of a vortex in a homo-
geneous incompressible fluid,
. . . a portion of fluid having any motion that it could not acquire by fluid pressure
transmitted from its boundary.
To understand this consider the ideal (i.e., inviscid) incompressible flow
produced by arbitrary motion of a solid body with surface S (Fig. 4.1.1). The
motion generated from rest by ‘fluid pressure transmitted from its boundary’
can be described by a velocity potential ϕ such that
v(x. t ) = ∇ϕ.
∂ϕ
∂x
n
= U
n
on S.
where U
n
is the normal component of velocity on S.
There are no sources within the instantaneous region V occupied by the fluid,
where ∇
2
ϕ = 0. Therefore, the kinetic energy T
0
of the flow is
T
0
=
1
2
ρ
0
_
V
(∇ϕ)
2
d
3
x =
1
2
ρ
0
_
V
(div(ϕ∇ϕ) −ϕ∇
2
ϕ) d
3
x
= −
1
2
ρ
0
_
S
ϕ
∂ϕ
∂x
n
dS ≡ −
1
2
ρ
0
_
S
ϕU
n
dS. (4.1.1)
where the divergence theorem has been used to obtain the second line (there
is no contribution from the surface Y at infinity in Fig. 4.1.1, where ϕ ∼
O(1,[x[
2
)). This formula implies that if S is suddenly brought to rest (U
n
→0)
the motion everywhere in the fluid ceases instantaneously, because
_
V
(∇ϕ)
2
d
3
x
82
4.1 Vorticity and the Kinetic Energy of Incompressible Flow 83
Fig. 4.1.1.
can vanish only if ∇ϕ ≡ 0. This unphysical behavior is never observed in a
real fluid because (i) no fluid is perfectly incompressible, and signals generated
by changes in the boundary conditions propagate at the finite speed of sound,
and (ii) diffusion of vorticity from the boundary supplies irrecoverable kinetic
energy to the fluid.
For an incompressible, real fluid we write
v = ∇ϕ ÷u.
and define the vorticity ω by
ω = curl u ≡ curl v.
If ϕ is taken to be defined as above (for ideal flow) then, because div u = 0 and
the normal component u
n
= n· u = 0 on S, the kinetic energy becomes
T =
1
2
ρ
0
_
V
(∇ϕ ÷u)
2
d
3
x =
1
2
ρ
0
_
V
((∇ϕ)
2
÷2∇ϕ · u ÷u
2
) d
3
x
=
1
2
ρ
0
_
V
((∇ϕ)
2
÷u
2
) d
3
x ÷ρ
0
_
V
div(ϕu) d
3
x
=
1
2
ρ
0
_
V
((∇ϕ)
2
÷u
2
) d
3
x −ρ
0
_
S
ϕu
n
dS
= −
1
2
ρ
0
_
S
ϕU
n
dS ÷
1
2
ρ
0
_
V
u
2
d
3
x ≡ T
0
÷
1
2
ρ
0
_
V
u
2
d
3
x. (4.1.2)
84 4 Vorticity
When the surface motion is arrested, the flow described by the velocity poten-
tial ϕ stops instantaneously, but that associated with the rotational velocity u
persists. The crucial difference between rotational and irrotational flows is that,
once established, vortical motions proceed irrespective of whether or not the
fluid continues to be driven by moving boundaries or other external agencies.
Equation (4.1.2) also establishes Kelvin’s theorem that T ≥ T
0
: the kinetic
energy of the real flow(for which u ,= 0) always exceeds that of the correspond-
ing ideal, irrotational flow. In other words, the irrotational motion represents
the least possible disturbance that can be produced in the fluid by the moving
boundary.
4.2 The Vorticity Equation
Let v
A
denote the fluid velocity at a point A at x. The velocity v
B
at a neigh-
bouring point B at x ÷δx can then be written (Goldstein, 1960)
v
B
≈ v
A
÷(δx · ∇)v
= v
A
÷
1
2
ω ∧ δx ÷
1
2
∇(e
i j
δx
i
δx
j
).
where e
i j
is the rate-of-strain tensor (2.1.3) and the gradient in the second line
is taken with respect to δx. The first two terms on the second line represent
motion of A and B as a rigid body, consisting of a translation at velocity v
A
together with a rotation at angular velocity
1
2
ω; the last term, being a gradient,
represents an irrotational distortion of the fluid in the neighborhood of A.
If we consider a small spherical fluid particle with center at A, the distortion
corresponds to a deformation into an ellipsoid whose principal axes correspond
to the principal axes of e
i j
. If a spherical fluid particle is suddenly solidified
without change of angular momentum, it will rotate at angular velocity ω,2, so
that ω may be defined as twice the initial angular velocity of the solid sphere
when an infinitesimally small sphere of fluid with center at A is suddenly solid-
ified without change of angular momentum (but this is not true for arbitrarily
shaped volume elements). The vorticity may therefore be regarded as a measure
of the angular momentum of a fluid particle. This is consistent with our conclu-
sion above regarding kinetic energy, inasmuch as the conservation of angular
momentum suggests that vorticity is associated the intrinsic kinetic energy of
the flow, and determines the motion that persists in an incompressible fluid
when the boundaries are brought to rest.
Avortex line is tangential to the vorticity vector at all points along its length.
Vortex lines that pass through every point of a simple closed curve define the
boundary of a vortex tube. For a tube of small cross-sectional area δS the product
4.2 The Vorticity Equation 85
ωδS is called the tube strength, and is constant because
div ω = div(curl v) ≡ 0.
and the divergence theorem therefore implies that
_
ω· dS = 0 for any closed
surface, and in particular for the surface formed by two cross sections of the
tube and the tube wall separating them, on the latter of which ω· dS = 0. It
follows that vortex tubes and lines cannot begin or end within the fluid. The
no-slip condition (Batchelor 1967) requires the velocity at a boundary to be the
same as that of the boundary. A vortex line must therefore form a closed loop,
or end on a rotating surface S at which
n· ω = 2n· Ω. (4.2.1)
where Ω is the angular velocity of S.
We shall show that vorticity is transported by convection and molecular
diffusion. Therefore an initially confined region of vortex loops can frequently
be assumed to remain within a bounded region. In the absence of body forces F,
we first use the identity curl curl A = grad div A−∇
2
Ato write the momentum
equation (1.2.3) for homentropic flow in the form
∂v
∂t
÷(v · ∇)v ÷∇
__
dp
ρ
_
= −ν
_
curl ω −
4
3
∇(div v)
_
.
By using the vector identity
(v · ∇)v = ω ∧ v ÷∇
_
1
2
:
2
_
. (4.2.2)
the momentum equation can be cast into Crocco’s form
∂v
∂t
÷ω ∧ v ÷∇B = −ν
_
curl ω −
4
3
∇(div v)
_
. (4.2.3)
where
B =
_
dp
ρ
÷
1
2
:
2
(4.2.4)
is the total enthalpy in homentropic flow. The vector ω ∧ v is sometimes
called the Lamb vector. When the fluid is incompressible (or when the term
in div v representing the small effect of compressibility on viscous dissipation
is neglected) Crocco’s equation reduces to
∂v
∂t
÷ω ∧ v ÷∇B = −ν curl ω. (4.2.5)
in which case dissipation occurs only where ω ,= 0.
86 4 Vorticity
The curl of (4.2.3) and the relation curl curl ω ≡ −∇
2
ω yield the vorticity
equation for a Stokesian fluid of constant shear viscosity:
∂ω
∂t
÷curl(ω ∧ v) = ν∇
2
ω. (4.2.6)
For an incompressible fluid div ω = div v = 0, and
curl(ω∧v) ≡ (v · ∇)ω ÷ωdiv v −(ω· ∇)v −v div ω = (v · ∇)ω −(ω· ∇)v.
therefore the vorticity equation can also be written

Dt
= (ω· ∇)v ÷ν∇
2
ω. (4.2.7)
The terms on the right represent the mechanisms that change the vorticity of a
moving fluid particle in incompressible flow:
(i) (ω· ∇)v.
Consider a fluid particle at A in Fig. 4.2.1 with velocity v at time t . Let the
vorticity at A be ω = ωn, where n is a unit vector, and consider a neighboring
particle at B a small distance s from Ain the direction n; that is, snis the position
of B relative to A. At time t the points A and B lie on the vortex line through
A, and the velocity at B is v ÷s(n· ∇)v. After a short time δt , A has moved a
vector distance v δt to A
/
and B has moved to B
/
whose position relative to A
/
is s(n÷(n· ∇)v δt ). During this time, the term(ω· ∇)v in the vorticity equation
causes the vorticity of the fluid particle initially at A to change fromωn at A to
ω(n ÷(n· ∇)v δt ) at A
/
. Thus, the vortex line through A
/
lies along the relative
vector s(n ÷ (n· ∇)v δt ) from A
/
to B
/
. Therefore, the fluid particles and the
vortex line through A and B have deformed and convected in the flow in the
Fig. 4.2.1.
4.2 The Vorticity Equation 87
same way; in their new positions A and B continue to lie on the same vortex
line. In the absence of viscosity (when ν∇
2
ω does not appear on the right of
(4.2.7)) vortex lines are therefore said to move with the fluid; they are rotated
and stretched in a manner determined entirely by the relative motions of A and
B. The magnitude of ω increases in direct proportion to the stretching of vortex
lines. When a vortex tube is stretched, the cross-sectional area δS decreases and
therefore ω must increase to preserve the strength of the tube.
(ii) ν∇
2
ω: Molecular Diffusion of Vorticity
This term is important only in regions of high shear, in particular near solid
boundaries. Very close to a stationary wall the velocity becomes small and non-
linear terms in the vorticity equation (4.2.7) can be neglected. The equation then
reduces to the classical diffusion equation
∂ω
∂t
= ν∇
2
ω.
Vorticity is generated at solid boundaries, and viscosity is responsible for its
diffusion into the body of the fluid, where it can subsequently be convected by
the flow.
It should be understood that viscosity merely serves to diffuse the vorticity
into the fluid from the surface, and does not generate the vorticity. In an ideal
fluid the slipping of the flowover the surface creates a singular layer of vorticity
at the surface called a vortex sheet whose strength is determined by the tan-
gential velocity difference between the surface and the ideal exterior flow. This
vorticity stays on the surface; it would start to diffuse into the fluid if the fluid
were suddenly endowed with viscosity. The rate of diffusion would depend on
the value of ν, but the amount of the vorticity available for diffusion from the
surface is independent of ν.
The circulation I with respect to a closed material contour C is defined by
I =
_
C
v · dx =
_
S
/
curl v · dS ≡
_
S
/
ω· dS.
where S
/
is any two-sided surface bounded by C. When ν = 0 the motion in
homentropic flow evolves in such a way that the circulation around the moving
contour remains constant:
DI
Dt
=
D
Dt
_
C
v · dx =
_
C

_

_
dp
ρ
÷
1
2
:
2
_
· dx ≡ 0. (4.2.8)
This is Kelvin’s circulation theorem. It follows that vorticity can neither be
created nor destroyed in a body of inviscid and homentropic fluid.
88 4 Vorticity
Fig. 4.2.2.
4.2.1 Vortex Sheets
A vortex sheet is a useful model of a thin layer of vorticity when viscous diffu-
sion can be neglected. Imagine a thin shear layer (Fig. 4.2.2) across which the
velocity changes rapidly from v

to v
÷
. We approximate the layer by a surface
f (x. t ) = 0 with unit normal n across which the normal components of veloc-
ity are equal (n· v

= n· v
÷
), but the tangential components are discontinuous
(n ∧ v

,= n ∧ v
÷
). Let f
>
-
0 respectively on the ± sides of the surface. Near
the sheet, on either side, it can be assumed that curl v
±
= 0, and we can set
v = H( f )v
÷
÷ H(−f )v

Hence,
ω = ∇H ∧ (v
÷
−v

) = n ∧ (v
÷
−v

)δ(s

). (4.2.9)
where ∇H ≡∇H( f ) =−∇H(−f ) =nδ(s

), and s

is distance measured in
the normal direction from the sheet.
In a real fluid the vorticity would diffuse out from the sheet and it could
not therefore persist indefinitely. In an ideal fluid the sheet is subject only to
convection and stretching by the flow at the local mean velocity, which is
v =
1
2
(v
÷
÷v

). (4.2.10)
where v
±
are evaluated just above and below the sheet.
4.3 The Biot–Savart Law
In an unbounded fluid the velocity v can always be expressed in terms of scalar
and vector potentials ϕ and A such that
v = ∇ϕ ÷curl A. where div A = 0.
The equations determining ϕ and A are found by taking in turn the divergence
4.3 The Biot–Savart Law 89
and curl (using the formula curl curl A = grad div A −∇
2
A):

2
ϕ = div v. ∇
2
A = −curl v ≡ −ω.
We can take ϕ =0 for incompressible, unbounded flow which is at rest at in-
finity. To find A we use the Green’s function for Laplace’s equation determined
by (1.4.6) (i.e., by the incompressible limit of (3.2.6), when κ
0
= 0) to obtain
A =
_
ω(y. t ) d
3
y
4π[x −y[
.
The velocity is then given by the Biot–Savart formula
v(x. t ) = curl
_
ω(y. t ) d
3
y
4π[x −y[
. (4.3.1)
This is a purely kinematic relation between a vector v that vanishes at infinity
and ω = curl v.
Because vorticity is transported by convection and diffusion, an initially
confined region of vorticity will tend to remain within a bounded domain, so
that it may be assumed that ω →0 as [x[ →∞. The divergence theorem then
shows that
_
ω
i
(y. t ) d
3
y = −
_
Y
y
i
ω
j
(y. t )n
j
dS(y) ≡ 0.
where the surface Y (with inward normal n) is large enough to contain all the
vorticity. By using this result and the expansion (1.9.3) for [x[ →∞we derive
from (4.3.1) the following approximation in the hydrodynamic far field:
v(x. t ) ≈ curl
_
x
j
4π[x[
3
_
y
j
ω(y. t ) d
3
y
_
∼O
_
1
[x[
3
_
. [x[ →∞. (4.3.2)
Furthermore, the divergence theorem also implies that
_
div(y
i
y
j
ω(y. t )) d
3
y = 0.
and therefore that
_
(y
i
ω
j
(y. t ) ÷ y
j
ω
i
(y. t )) d
3
y = 0.
This can be used to express (4.3.2) in either of the following equivalent forms
v(x. t ) ≈ curl curl
_
I
4π[x[
_
= grad div
_
I
4π[x[
_
. [x[ →∞.
where I =
1
2
_
y ∧ ω(y. t ) d
3
y. (4.3.3)
90 4 Vorticity
(see Question 2 of Problems 4). The vector I is called the impulse of the vortex
system, and is an absolute constant in an unbounded flow (see Section 4.4).
These formulae supply alternative representations of v in the hydrodynamic far
field (where the motion is entirely irrotational) in terms of either the vector po-
tential A = curl (I,4π[x[) or the scalar potential ϕ = div (I,4π[x[). (Batchelor
(1967) denotes I by P,ρ
0
; Lighthill (1978, 1986) uses G.)
4.3.1 Kinetic Energy
Using the Biot–Savart formula it can be verified that the kinetic energy of an
unbounded (three-dimensional) incompressible flow is given in terms of the
vorticity by
T =
ρ
0

__
ω(x. t ) · ω(y. t )
[x −y[
d
3
x d
3
y. (4.3.4)
The following representation can also be derived (using (4.2.2))
T = ρ
0
_
x · (ω ∧ v)(x. t ) d
3
x. (4.3.5)
4.3.2 Incompressible Flow with an Internal Boundary
Let the rigid body in Fig. 4.1.1 have volume L and move in an incompressible
fluid at rest at infinity with velocity
U = U
0
÷Ω∧ (x −x
0
(t )). (4.3.6)
where U
0
= dx
0
,dt is the velocity of its center of volume x
0
(t ), and Ω(t ) is its
angular velocity.
In the usual waylet f (x. t ) vanishon S, with f >0inthe fluid. Then H( f )v ÷
H(−f )Uis the velocity everywhere, in both the fluid and solid (where it equals
U(x. t )). But
H( f )v ÷ H(−f )U = ∇ϕ ÷curl A. (div A = 0).
The body has constant volume (div U = 0), but curl U = 2Ω. Now, the no-slip
condition on S implies that
div(H( f )v ÷ H(−f )U) = ∇H( f ) · (v −U) ≡ 0
curl(H( f )v ÷ H(−f )U) = H( f )ω ÷ H(−f )2Ω.
4.3 The Biot–Savart Law 91
Hence, ϕ ≡0, and the velocity everywhere is given by the following modifica-
tion of the Biot–Savart formula (4.3.1):
v(x. t ) = curl
_
V
ω(y. t ) d
3
y
4π[x −y[
÷curl
_
L
2Ω(t ) d
3
y
4π[x −y[
. (4.3.7)
where V is the volume occupied by the fluid. This formula predicts that v =
U when x lies in the region L occupied by the body. Vortex lines may be
imagined to continue into the solid. As for an unbounded flow, the identity
_
curl (H( f )v ÷ H(−f )U) d
3
x =0 implies that v ∼O(1,[x[
3
) as [x[ →∞.
Similarly, the asymptotic representations (4.3.3) remain valid provided the inte-
gration includes the region occupied by the body (where ω = 2Ω). The formula
is also applicable in inviscid flow, but the contribution from the bound vorticity
in the vortex sheet on the surface of the body must be included in the integrals.
4.3.3 Blowing Out a Candle (Lighthill 1963)
An amusing illustration of the significance of vorticity is depicted in Fig. 4.3.1,
where a puff of air is ejected from the tube and directed at the flame of a candle.
Suppose the tube has radius R, and that the air is forced out at constant speed
V by impulsive movement of the piston over an axial distance L. In an ideal
fluid the motion outside is irrotational and resembles at large distances from
the exit a radially symmetric source flow. This flowpersists only while the piston
is moving, during which time the velocity potential at a large distance r fromthe
Fig. 4.3.1.
92 4 Vorticity
exit resembles that produced by a monopole of strength q = π R
2
V:
ϕ ∼ −
V R
2
4r
.
so that the air blows against the flame at distance ¹ at speed
V
ϕ

V
4
R
2
¹
2
.
In reality, vorticity is generated at the tube wall. The air leaves the tube in the
form of a jet, and the exiting fluid is initially contained within a cylindrical slug
of air of length L, whose displacement from the tube forces the potential flow
ϕ. In addition, however, vorticity leaves the tube within a circular cylindrical
vortex sheet at the periphery of the slug, across which the axial velocity changes
from V within the jet to 0 outside. The sheet may be pictured as a succession
of vortex rings of radius R and infinitesimal core radii. The circulation of these
rings per unit length of the jet is V, and they translate at the local mean air
velocity on the sheet equal to
1
2
V. The total circulation ejected from the tube
during the time L,V in which the piston moves is therefore I =
1
2
LV.
Shortly after leaving the tube the cylindrical vortex rolls up to form a vortex
ring of circulation I which translates by self-induction (as determined by the
Biot–Savart law (4.3.1)) at speed estimated by Kelvin to equal
V
t

I
4π R
0
_
ln
_
8R
0
σ
_

1
4
_

V L
8π R
0
_
ln
_
8R
0
σ
_

1
4
_
.
where R
0
∼ 1.2R is the radius of the vortex ring and σ ∼ 0.2R
0
is the radius of
its core (assumed to be of circular cross section). The ring arrives at the flame
after a time t
¹
∼ ¹,V
t
.
The air on the axis of the vortex ring at its center forms a localized jet with
velocity on the centerline equal to
V
j

V L
4R
0
.
If the flame is extinguished it is because the vortex jet blows away the hot
combusting gases from newly vaporized wax.
According to this sequence of events, the candle is only blown out because of
the presence of the vortex. In its absence the flame would barely flicker under the
influence of blowing by the potential velocity field V
ϕ
. The following numeri-
cal estimates confirmthis conclusion. Take V = 10m/s, L = 1cm, R = 0.5cm,
and¹ =0.3m. Then, R
0
≈0.6 cm. σ ≈0.12 cm. V
ϕ
≈0.0007 m/s. V
t
≈2.4 m/s.
V
j
≈4.2 m/s. and t
¹
≈0.13 s.
4.4 Surface Force in Incompressible Flow 93
4.4 Surface Force in Incompressible Flow Expressed
in Terms of Vorticity
We now derive the following formula for the force F exerted on an incompress-
ible fluid by a rigid body with surface S whose centre of volume has velocity
U
0
:
F ÷m
0
dU
0
dt
= ρ
0
dI
dt

ρ
0
2
d
dt
_
x ∧ ω(x. t ) d
3
x. (4.4.1)
where I is the impulse defined by the integral in (4.3.3), including any contri-
butions from bound vorticity within S, and m
0
is the mass of fluid displaced by
the body.
With reference to Fig. 4.1.1, let
F = external force applied to the body to maintain its motion,
m = mass of the body.
The fluid is assumed to be at rest at infinity. Let V denote the fluid between a
large closed surface Y containing all of the vorticity and the surface S of the
body, and let V
÷
denote the interior of Y including the volume L of the body.
The center of volume of the body is assumed to be in motion at velocity U
0
(t ),
but in general the body may also be rotating at some time dependent angular
velocity Ω. The global equations of motion are
m
dU
dt
÷ρ
0
d
dt
_
V
v(x. t ) d
3
x = F ÷
_
Y
p(x. t ) dS
m
dU
dt
= F −F
where U is the velocity of the centre of mass of the body. Subtracting these
equations and extending the volume integral to include the volume Loccupied
by the rigid body (where
_
L
v d
3
x = LU
0
), we can also write
F ÷m
0
dU
0
dt
= ρ
0
d
dt
_
V
÷
v(x. t ) d
3
x −
_
Y
p(x. t ) dS. (4.4.2)
Now let v(x. t ) = curl A, where the vector potential A(x. t ) is defined by the
Biot–Savart integral (4.3.1) taken over V
÷
, which includes the region occupied
by the body. Then, (4.3.3) implies that A = curl(I(t ),4π[x[) on Y, so that
_
V
÷
v(x. t ) d
3
x =
_
V
÷
curl Ad
3
x =−
_
Y
n∧AdS →−
_
Y
n∧curl
_
I(t )
4π[x[
_
dS.
94 4 Vorticity
Similarly, p →−ρ
0
∂ϕ,∂t onY, where ϕ =div(I(t ),4π[x[) (see (4.3.3)). Hence,

_
Y
p(x. t ) dS →ρ
0
d
dt
_
Y
ϕndS = ρ
0
d
dt
_
Y
ndiv
_
I(t )
4π[x[
_
dS.
The right-hand side of (4.4.2) can therefore be written
ρ
0
d
dt
_
Y
_
−n ∧ curl
_
I(t )
4π[x[
_
÷ndiv
_
I(t )
4π[x[
__
dS.
By the divergence theorem, the integral in this expression over the large, but
arbitrary surface Y can be replaced by an integration over the surface of a large
sphere [x[ = R, because
{curl curl −∇div](I(t ),4π[x[) = −∇
2
(I(t ),4π[x[) ≡ 0 for [x[ >0.
On the sphere n = −x,[x[, and the integrand equals I(t ),4π R
2
; the integral is
therefore just equal to I(t ). Thus, (4.4.2) reduces to the desired representation
(4.4.1).
4.4.1 Bound Vorticity and the Added Mass
Consider the particular case of a rigid body accelerating without rotation at
velocity U(t ) in an otherwise unbounded, ideal incompressible fluid in the
absence of vorticity (Fig. 4.4.1). We have seen previously (Section 3.8) that
force exerted on the fluid can be written
F
i
= M
i j
dU
j
dt
.
Fig. 4.4.1.
4.4 Surface Force in Incompressible Flow 95
where M
i j
is the added mass tensor (3.8.6). This result will now be derived
from the integral formula (4.4.1).
There is no vorticity in the fluid, but the slipping of the ideal flow over S
generates a singular distribution (a vortex sheet) of bound vorticity that must
be used to evaluate the integral. To calculate the bound vorticity we need an
expression for the velocity everywhere in space, including the region occupied
by the body, where v ≡ U.
In the fluid, we can take
v = U
j
∇ϕ

j
.
Therefore, by introducing a control surface f (x. t ) = 0 that coincides with the
surface S of the body, with f >0 in the fluid and f -0 within S, the required
formula for the velocity is
v = U
j
H( f )∇ϕ

j
÷U
j
H(−f )∇x
j
.
and the vorticity is
ω = curl{U
j
H( f )∇ϕ

j
÷U
j
H(−f )∇x
j
]
= −U
j
∇H ∧ ∇(x
j
−ϕ

j
) (where ∇H = ∇H( f ) = −∇H(−f ))
≡ curl {U
j
(x
j
−ϕ

j
)∇H].
Equation (4.4.1) accordingly gives the force in the form
F = −m
0
dU
dt
÷
ρ
0
2
d
dt
_
x ∧ curl{U
j
(x
j
−ϕ

j
)∇H] d
3
x.
Now the vector A=U
j
(x
j
−ϕ

j
)∇H vanishes except on the surface S of the
body. The identities
x ∧ curl A = 2A ÷∇(x · A) −

∂x
j
(x
j
A).
_
(·)∇H d
3
x =
_
S
(·) dS
(4.4.3)
therefore imply that
F
i
= −m
0
dU
i
dt
÷ρ
0
d
dt
_
U
j
(x
j
−ϕ

j
)
∂ H
∂x
i
d
3
x
= −m
0
dU
i
dt
÷ρ
0
d
dt
_
S
U
j
(x
j
−ϕ

j
)n
i
dS.
But
ρ
0
_
S
x
j
n
i
dS = ρ
0

i j
≡ m
0
δ
i j
.
96 4 Vorticity
where L = volume contained by S, and
ρ
0
_
S
−ϕ

j
n
i
dS = M
i j
.
where M
i j
is the added mass tensor (3.8.8). Therefore, force on fluid in irrota-
tional flow ≡ F
i
= M
i j
dU
j
dt
.
4.4.2 Force Exerted on an Incompressible Fluid by a Moving Body
The integral in (4.4.1) defining the value of dI,dt can be transformed to remove
the strongdependence of the integrandonthe boundvorticityon S. This vorticity
is produced both by motion of S and by relative motion between S and the fluid
induced by free vorticity in the flow. Thus, any attempt to recast dI,dt must
be strongly influenced by both the shape and motion of S. We consider only
the important special case of a body in translational motion without rotation at
velocity U(t ), and show that the i th component of the force F exerted on the
fluid can also be written
F
i
=M
i j
dU
j
dt
−ρ
0
_
V
∇X
i
· ω∧v
rel
d
3
x −η
_
S
∇X
i
· ω∧dS. v
rel
= v −U.
(4.4.4)
where v
rel
is the fluid velocity relative to the translational velocity of S, X
i
=
x
i
−ϕ

i
(x. t ) is the Kirchhoff vector already encountered in the definition of the
compact Green’s function (Section 3.4), and M
i j
= M
j i
= −ρ
0
_
S
n
j
ϕ

i
dS is
the added mass tensor. X
i
represents the velocity potential of an ideal flow past
S that has unit speed in the i direction at large distances from S (it depends on
t because a fixed coordinate system is being used).
The first term on the right of (4.4.4) represents the inviscid component of the
force, associated with the added mass. The contribution from free vorticity is
furnished by the volume integral; the final term arises from frictional effects on
S, which are relatively small at large Reynolds numbers. Now v
rel
= 0 on S,
and therefore the contribution to the volume integral from vorticity close to and
on S is negligible; indeed, even in the inviscid limit there is no contribution to
the integral from the surface vortex sheet forming the bound vorticity, because
∇X
i
and the relative Lamb vector ω ∧ v
rel
are orthogonal on S.
To derive this formula from (4.4.1) we introduce the usual control surface
f (x. t ) = 0 enclosing S, with f >0 in the outer fluid region, multiply Crocco’s
homentropic momentum equation (4.2.5) by H ≡ H( f ), and take the curl of
the resulting equation. Using the formula
DH
Dt

∂ H
∂t
÷v · ∇H = 0.
4.4 Surface Force in Incompressible Flow 97
and the no-slip condition on S, we find

∂t
(Hω) = −

∂t
(∇H ∧ U) −curl((∇H · U)U) −∇H ∧ ∇B
−curl(Hω ∧ v) −ν curl(H curl ω).
Then, because ω = 0 within S,
d
dt
_
x ∧ ω(x. t ) d
3
x =
d
dt
_
x ∧ (Hω) d
3
x =
_
x ∧

∂t
(Hω) d
3
x
= −
_
x ∧

∂t
(∇H ∧ U) d
3
x −
_
x ∧ curl ((∇H · U)U) d
3
x

_
x ∧ (∇H ∧ ∇B) d
3
x −
_
x ∧ curl (Hω ∧ v) d
3
x
−ν
_
x ∧ curl (H curl ω) d
3
x
= 2L
dU
dt
÷0 ÷2
_
S
B dS −2
_
V
ω ∧ v d
3
x −2ν
_
S
ω ∧ dS.
where the last line follows by use of the identities (4.4.3). Thus, adopting suffix
notation,
dI
i
dt

1
2
d
dt
_
(x ∧ ω)
i
d
3
x = L
dU
i
dt
÷
_
S
Bn
i
dS −
_
V
∇x
i
· (ω ∧ v) d
3
x
−ν
_
S
∇x
i
· ω∧dS. (4.4.5)
The surface integral
_
S
Bn
i
dS can be eliminated by recalling that

2
ϕ

i
= 0.
∂ϕ

i
∂x
n
≡ n
j
∂ϕ

i
∂x
j
= n
i
on S.
Then, because ∇ϕ

i
∼ O(1,[x[
3
) as [x[ → ∞, the divergence theorem shows
that
_
S
Bn
i
dS = −
_
V
div(∇ϕ

i
B) d
3
x ≡ −
_
V
∇ϕ

i
· ∇B d
3
x. Hence, using
Crocco’s equation (4.2.5)
_
S
Bn
i
dS =
_
V
div
_
ϕ

i
∂v
∂t
_
d
3
x ÷
_
V
∇ϕ

i
· ω ∧ v d
3
x
−ν
_
V
div(∇ϕ

i
∧ ω) d
3
x.
The first and last integrals on the right are transformed further by the divergence
98 4 Vorticity
theorem, for the first
_
V
div
_
ϕ

i
∂v
∂t
_
d
3
x =
M
i j
ρ
0
dU
j
dt
.
where M
i j
= M
j i
= −ρ
0
_
S
n
j
ϕ

i
dS is the added mass coefficient of (3.8.6).
For the last
−ν
_
V
div(∇ϕ

i
∧ ω) d
3
x = ν
_
S
∇ϕ

i
· ω ∧ dS.
Thus, substituting for
_
S
Bn
i
dS in (4.4.5), we find
dI
i
dt
= L
dU
i
dt
÷
M
i j
ρ
0
dU
j
dt

_
V
∇X
i
· ω∧v d
3
x−ν
_
S
∇X
i
· ω∧dS. (4.4.6)
But the identity
∇X
i
· ω ∧ U = div(U(v · ∇X
i
) −v(U· ∇X
i
) −(v · U)∇X
i
)
implies that
_
V
∇X
i
· ω ∧ Ud
3
x = 0, so that (4.4.6) can also be written
dI
i
dt
= L
dU
i
dt
÷
M
i j
ρ
0
dU
j
dt

_
V
∇X
i
· ω∧v
rel
d
3
x−ν
_
S
∇X
i
· ω∧dS (4.4.7)
where v
rel
= v −U.
Equation (4.4.4) is now obtained by substituting from (4.4.7) into (4.4.1)
(recalling that m
0
= ρ
0
L).
4.4.3 Stokes Drag on a Sphere
The first termon the right-hand side of (4.4.4) is the force necessary to accelerate
the added mass of the body. The i th component of the viscous skin friction is
−η
_
S
(ω ∧ dS)
i
≡ −η
_
S
∇x
i
· ω ∧ dS. Thus, (because X
i
= x
i
−ϕ

i
) the net
contribution of the normal pressure forces on S is represented in (4.4.4) by the
terms
−ρ
0
_
V
∇X
i
· ω ∧ v
rel
d
3
x ÷η
_
S
∇ϕ

i
· ω ∧ dS.
The second, viscous component is comparable in magnitude to the skin friction,
and is produced by the pressure field established by the surface shear stress.
The necessity for such a term is vividly illustrated by the Stokes drag on a
sphere. Let the sphere have radius a and translate at constant velocity U=(U. 0.
0). U >0, along the x
1
axis. At very small Reynolds numbers Re = aU,ν _1
4.4 Surface Force in Incompressible Flow 99
the inertial terms ω ∧ v and ∇(
1
2
:
2
) can be discarded from Crocco’s equation
(4.2.5), which (for incompressible flow) reduces to the creeping flow equation
∇p = −η curl ω (4.4.8)
in a reference frame moving with the sphere. Both the pressure and the vorticity
therefore satisfy Laplace’s equation ∇
2
p = 0. ∇
2
ω = 0. By symmetry p must
vary linearly with η and U· x, and the condition that p should vanish at large
distances from the sphere supplies the dipole solution
p = Cη
U· x
[x[
3
≡ −Cη div
_
U
[x[
_
. [x[ >a.
where C is a constant.
Similarly, ω must be a linear function of U∧x: the identity curl curl(U,
[x[) = grad div(U,[x[) and Equation (4.4.8) imply that ω = C curl (U,[x[) ≡
C(U ∧ x),[x[
3
([x[ >a). The value of C is most easily found by substituting
this expression for ω into the Biot–Savart formula (4.3.1) and evaluating the
right-hand side at the centre x = 0 of the sphere, where v ≡ U. This yields
C = 3a,2, and therefore
ω = curl
_
3aU
2[x[
_
. [x[ >a. (4.4.9)
The net force F
1
on the fluid is in the x
1
direction, and is given by the final
integral on the right of (4.4.4). It is equal in magnitude to D
s
÷ D
p
, where
D
s
and D
p
are the respective components of the Stokes drag on the sphere
produced by the skin friction and the viscous surface pressure. For the sphere
ϕ

1
= −a
3
x
1
,2[x[
3
, and we readily calculate F
1
= 6πηUa, and
D
s

_
S
(ω ∧ dS)
1
=−4πηUa. D
p
=−η
_
S
∇ϕ

1
· ω∧dS=−2πηUa.
The pressure drag is therefore equal to half the skin-friction drag.
This interpretation of D
p
as the component of drag attributable to the normal
pressure forces on the sphere can be confirmed directly using the creeping flow
approximation (4.4.8). Because n
1
= n· ∇ϕ

1
on S we find, using the divergence
theorem,
D
p
= −
_
S
pn
1
dS ≡ −
_
S
p∇ϕ

1
· dS =
_
V
∇p · ∇ϕ

1
d
3
x
= −η
_
V
curl ω· ∇ϕ

1
d
3
x = −η
_
S
∇ϕ

1
· ω ∧ dS.
100 4 Vorticity
where (4.4.8) and the identity div(A ∧ B) = curl A· B − A· curl B have been
used on the second line.
4.5 The Complex Potential
The remainder of this chapter is devoted to a brief outline of the complex
potential representation of two-dimensional, incompressible flows and its ap-
plication to determine the equation of motion of a line vortex in such flows. The
results will be applied in later chapters to investigate simple models of sound
production by vortices interacting with surfaces.
4.5.1 Laplace’s Equation in Two Dimensions
Suppose that
n(z) = ϕ(x. y) ÷i ψ(x. y). z = x ÷i y
is regular (analytic) in a region D of the z-plane. The real and imaginary parts
ϕ(x. y) and ψ(x. y) are solutions of Laplace’s equation.

2
ϕ
∂x
2
÷

2
ϕ
∂y
2
= 0.

2
ψ
∂x
2
÷

2
ψ
∂y
2
= 0 in D.
Let f (z) be regular in D, and define a (conformal) transformation Z = f (z)
of D into a region D
/
in the plane of Z = X ÷i Y. Let W(Z) be regular in D
/
with real and imaginary parts +(X. Y). +(X. Y). Then,

2
+
∂ X
2
÷

2
+
∂Y
2
= 0.

2
+
∂ X
2
÷

2
+
∂Y
2
= 0 in D
/
.
The transformation Z = f (z) permits us to define a corresponding function
n(z) ≡ ϕ(x. y) ÷i ψ(x. y) = W( f (z)), which is regular in D, with derivative
n
/
(z) = f
/
(z)W
/
( f (z)). For corresponding points in D and D
/
we have
ϕ(x. y) = +(X(x. y). Y(x. y)). ψ(x. y) = +(X(x. y). Y(x. y)).
In other words, the solutions + and + of Laplace’s equation in D
/
are also
solutions of Laplace’s equation in D.
These results have the following significance. The solution of Laplace’s equa-
tion within a given two-dimensional bounded region D is equivalent to the so-
lution of Laplace’s equation within the transformed region D
/
. If it is possible to
solve the latter problem, the solution to the original problem in D can be found
4.5 The Complex Potential 101
by transforming back to the z plane. Difficulties may arise at isolated points
where f
/
(z) =0 and at points where f (z) ceases to be regular, but these can usu-
ally be dealt with by careful examination of the behavior of the transformation
near such points.
4.5.2 Hydrodynamics in Two Dimensions
Irrotational motion of an ideal, incompressible fluid in planes parallel to the xy
plane can be investigated by introducing the complex potential n(z) =ϕ(x. y) ÷
i ψ(x. y). The velocity
v = ∇ϕ = (∂ϕ,∂x. ∂ϕ,∂y).
The function ψ is called the stream function. For steady motion the velocity at
(x. y) does not change with time, and the fluid particles travel along a fixed sys-
temof streamlines each of which is a member of the family of curves ψ(x. y) =
constant.
Both ϕ(x. y) and ψ(x. y) are solutions of Laplace’s equation and satisfy the
Cauchy–Riemann equations:
∂ϕ
∂x
=
∂ψ
∂y
.
∂ϕ
∂y
= −
∂ψ
∂x
.
which imply that ∇ϕ · ∇ψ = 0, i.e., that the streamlines intersect the equipo-
tentials ϕ = constant at right angles. If v = (u. :), then the complex velocity
n
/
(z) =
∂ϕ
∂x
−i
∂ϕ
∂y
≡ u −i :
is also regular.
The fact that n(z) is a regular function of z can greatly simplify the solution
of many problems. This will be illustrated by consideration of two methods
based on the theory of complex variables.
Method 1 The real and imaginary parts of every regular function n(z) deter-
mine the velocity potential and stream function of a possible flow. A catalog
of flows can therefore be constructed by studying the properties of arbitrarily
selected n(z).
Example 1 n = Uz. U = real constant:
ϕ = Ux. ψ = Uy. Thus, v = (U. 0).
102 4 Vorticity
The motion is uniform at speed U along streamlines parallel to the x direction.
Example 2
n = U
_
z ÷
a
2
z
_
. U = real constant, a >0. [z[ >a. (4.5.1)
At large distances from the origin n →Uz, and the motion becomes uniform
at speed U parallel to the x axis. In terms of the polar form z = re
i θ
,
n = U
_
re
i θ
÷
a
2
r
e
−i θ
_
. Thus, ϕ = U cos θ
_
r ÷
a
2
r
_
.
The radial component of velocity
∂ϕ
∂r
= U cos θ
_
1 −
a
2
r
2
_
vanishes at r = a. The motion therefore represents steady flow in the x direc-
tion past a rigid cylinder of radius a with centre at the origin (Fig. 4.5.1; c.f.,
Section 3.6).
Example 3
n = −iU
_
z −
a
2
z
_
. U = real constant. [z[ >a >0.
_
ϕ = U sin θ
_
r ÷
a
2
r
__
. (4.5.2)
describes potential flow in the y direction past a rigid cylinder of radius a with
center at the origin.
Fig. 4.5.1.
4.5 The Complex Potential 103
Example 4 The function
n =
1

ln z.
_
ϕ =
1

lnr. ψ =
θ

. z = re
i θ
_
.
is regular except at z = 0. The flow is radially outward from the origin along
streamlines θ =constant, at speed ∂ϕ,∂r = 1,2πr. The origin is a singularity
of the flow where fluid is created at a rate equal to
_
C
∇ϕ · nds, where C is any
simple closed curve enclosing the origin with outward normal n, and ds is the
element of arc length on C. In particular, taking C to be a circle of radius r,
_
C
∇ϕ · nds =
_

0
∂ϕ
∂r
r dθ = 1.
The origin is therefore a simple source of unit strength. When the source is
situated at z
0
= x
0
÷i y
0
n =
1

ln(z−z
0
).
_
ϕ =
1

ln [z − z
0
[ =
1

ln
_
(x −x
0
)
2
÷(y −y
0
)
2
_
.
Example 5 The function
n =
−i I

ln z.
_
ϕ =


. ψ = −
I

lnr. z = re
i θ
_
.
is regular except at z =0, and describes the irrotational flow outside a line
vortex of strength I concentrated at z =0. The streamlines are circles centered
at z =0, and the flow speed is ∂ϕ,r∂θ =I,2πr in the anticlockwise direction
(for I >0). The circulation
_
C
v · dx =I, where C is any contour encircling
the vortex once, and the contour is traversed in the positive direction (with the
interior on the left). When the vortex is at z
0
= x
0
÷i y
0
n =
−i I

ln(z − z
0
).
Example 6 The function
n =
1

(ln(z − z
0
) ÷ln(z − z

0
)).
_
ϕ =
1

(lnr
1
÷lnr
2
)
_
.
represents the flow produced by two unit point sources located at z
0
= x
0
÷i y
0
and z

0
= x
0
−i y
0
(Fig. 4.5.2). The motion is symmetric with respect to the x
axis, and ∂ϕ,∂y = 0 on y = 0. Therefore, in the region y >0 the potential also
describes the flow produced by a point source at z
0
adjacent to a rigid wall at
y = 0 (the presence of the wall is said to be accounted for by an image source).
104 4 Vorticity
Fig. 4.5.2.
Example 7 The function
n =
−i I

ln(z − z
0
) ÷
i I

ln(z − z

0
).
represents the flowproducedbytwoline vortices of circulations ±Irespectively
at z
0
= x
0
÷i y
0
. z

0
= x
0
−i y
0
(Fig. 4.5.3). The streamfunction ψ = Imn = 0
onthe x axis, whichis therefore a streamline of the flow, onwhich∂ϕ,∂y = 0. In
the region y >0 the potential describes the flowproduced by a vortex of strength
I at z
0
adjacent to a rigid wall at y = 0 (which is accounted for by an equal and
opposite image vortex). Each vortex translates parallel to the wall at speed u =
I,4πy
0
determined by the velocity potential of its image. The mean value of the
local rotational flow produced by the self-potential of each vortex (Example 5)
vanishes on the vortex axis, and cannot therefore cause it to translate.
Method 2 The flow past a system of rigid boundaries in the z plane is repre-
sented by means of a conformal transformation Z = f (z) by an equivalent flow
in the Z plane. The transformation is usually chosen to simplify the boundary
Fig. 4.5.3.
4.5 The Complex Potential 105
conditions, thereby permitting the solution in the Z plane to be found in a rela-
tively straightforward manner. Point source and vortex singularities of the flow
are preserved under the transformation. Indeed, if Z = Z
0
is the image of a
vortex of strength I at z = z
0
, the complex potential in the neighborhood of
Z
0
(where Z − Z
0
≈ f
/
(z
0
)(z − z
0
)) is determined by
W(Z) = n(z) =
−i I

ln(z − z
0
) ÷terms finite at z
0
=
−i I

ln
_
Z − Z
0
f
/
(z
0
)
_
÷terms finite at Z
0
=
−i I

ln(Z − Z
0
) ÷terms finite at Z
0
.
The vortex in the z plane therefore maps into an equal vortex at the image point
in the Z plane.
Example 8 Derive the following formula for the velocity potential of irrota-
tional flow around the edge of the rigid half-plane x -0. y = 0 in terms of
polar coordinates (r. θ):
ϕ = α

r sin
θ
2
. α =a real constant.
and plot the streamlines.
The transformation Z =i

z maps the z plane cut along the negative real
axis (so that −π -arg z -π) onto the upper half of the Z plane. The complex
potential of flowin the positive X direction parallel to the boundary Y =0 in the
Z plane corresponds to flow around the edge of the half-plane in the clockwise
sense, and has the general representation W = UZ, where U is real. In the z
plane this becomes
n = iU

z ≡ −U

r sin
_
θ
2
_
÷iU

r cos
_
θ
2
_
. −π -θ -π.
The polar representation of the velocity is therefore
v = (:
r
. :
θ
) =
_
∂ϕ
∂r
.
1
r
∂ϕ
∂θ
_
=
−U
2

r
_
sin
θ
2
. cos
θ
2
_
.
This satisfies the rigid wall condition on the half-plane because the component
of velocity normal to the wall is :
θ
, which vanishes at θ = ±π. The streamlines
of the flow are the parabolas

r cos
_
θ
2
_
= constant. i.e., y = ±2β
_
1 −
x
β
.
106 4 Vorticity
Fig. 4.5.4.
where x -β. β being a positive constant, as shown in Fig. 4.5.4. When U >0
fluid particles travel along the parabolic streamlines around the edge in the
clockwise direction. The streamline for β =0 corresponds to the upper and
lower surfaces of the half-plane, which maps into the streamline Y =0 on the
surface of the wall in the Z plane. The flowvelocity becomes infinite like 1,

r
as r →0 at the sharp edge.
4.6 Motion of a Line Vortex
In two-dimensional incompressible, inviscid flow in planes parallel to x
3
= 0
the vortex lines are all parallel to the x
3
direction, and the vorticity equation
(4.2.7) reduces to

3
Dt
= 0.
A line vortex is therefore convected without change at the local velocity at its
4.6 Motion of a Line Vortex 107
core. For a vortex of strength I at z = z
0
(t ) in the plane of z = x
1
÷ i x
2
,
the velocity becomes infinite as the core is approached because of the singular
velocity induced by its self-potential

i I

ln(z − z
0
).
But the rotational flow around the core induced by the vortex cannot induce
motion in itself, and this potential must be removed from the complex potential
n(z) before calculating the convection velocity of the vortex.
In applications the complex potential n(z) usually arises in the form
n(z) = −
i I

ln(ζ (z) −ζ (z
0
)) ÷ F(z). (4.6.1)
where ζ (z). F(z) are regular functions of z in the neighborhood of the vortex
core at z = z
0
. In particular, when [z − z
0
[ is small we have
ζ (z) = ζ (z
0
) ÷(z − z
0

/
(z
0
) ÷
(z − z
0
)
2
2
ζ
//
(z
0
) ÷· · · .
where the primes denote differentiation with respect to z. Thus, subtracting the
self-potential from n(z) we find, near the vortex,
W(z) = n(z) ÷
i I

ln(z − z
0
)
= −
i I

ln(ζ (z) −ζ (z
0
)) ÷
i I

ln(z − z
0
) ÷ F(z)
≈ −
i I

ln
_
ζ
/
(z
0
) ÷
1
2
ζ
//
(z
0
)(z − z
0
)
_
÷ F(z). (4.6.2)
The complex velocity of the vortex is W
/
(z
0
) ≡ {W
/
(z)]
z=z
0
, i.e.,
dz

0
dt

dx
01
dt
−i
dx
02
dt
= W
/
(z
0
).
Using (4.6.2) this becomes
dx
01
dt
−i
dx
02
dt
= −
i Iζ
//
(z
0
)
4πζ
/
(z
0
)
÷ F
/
(z
0
). (4.6.3)
The real and imaginary parts of this equation supply two nonlinear first-order
ordinary differential equations for the position (x
01
(t ). x
02
(t )) of the vortex at
time t .
108 4 Vorticity
4.6.1 Numerical Integration of the Vortex Path Equation
In most cases it is necessary to integrate equation (4.6.3) numerically. The
time and space variables should first be nondimensionalized with respect to
convenient time and length scales defined by the problem(several examples are
discussed in Chapter 8). The integration is started from a prescribed point on
the trajectory through which the vortex is required to pass.
Let us consider integration by means of a fourth-order Runge–Kutta algo-
rithm. Write the equation of motion (4.6.3) in the form
dz
0
dt
= f

(z
0
). where f (z
0
) = −
i Iζ
//
(z
0
)
4πζ
/
(z
0
)
÷ F
/
(z
0
).
and let h be a suitably small integration time step (which need not be constant).
Assume that at time t
n
the vortex is at z
0
(t
n
) = z
n
0
. To determine the complex
position z
n÷1
0
at time t
n÷1
= t
n
÷h, we evaluate
k
1
= h f

_
z
n
0
_
. k
2
= h f

_
z
n
0
÷
1
2
k
1
_
. k
3
= h f

_
z
n
0
÷
1
2
k
2
_
.
k
4
= h f

_
z
n
0
÷k
3
_
.
and then find
z
n÷1
0
= z
n
0
÷
1
6
(k
1
÷2k
2
÷2k
3
÷k
4
).
Example 1 Calculate the trajectory of a line vortex of strength I >0 adjacent to
a rigid half-plane lying along the negative real axis (x
1
-0. x
2
= 0; Fig. 4.6.1a).
The transformation
ζ = i

z. z = x
1
÷i x
2
. −π -arg z -π. (4.6.4)
maps the fluid region −π -arg z -π into the upper half Imζ >0 of the ζ plane
(Fig. 4.6.1b). Let the vortex at z
0
(t ) map into a vortex at ζ = ζ
0
(t ). The velocity
potential n(ζ ) of the motion in the ζ plane is found by introducing an image
vortex of strength −I at ζ = ζ

0
(t ), as described in Example 7 of Section 4.5,
in which case
n =
−i I

ln(ζ −ζ
0
) ÷
i I

ln(ζ −ζ

0
).
In the z plane this becomes
n(z) = −
i I

ln(ζ (z) −ζ (z
0
)) ÷
i I

ln(ζ (z) −ζ

(z
0
)).
4.6 Motion of a Line Vortex 109
Fig. 4.6.1.
which is of the form (4.6.1). Hence, the equation of motion (4.6.3) becomes
dx
01
dt
−i
dx
02
dt
=
i I
8πz
0
÷
i I


z
0
[

z
0
÷(

z
0
)

]
.
This can be integrated in closed form. Let z
0
=re
i θ
. Then the real and imag-
inary parts of the equation are
dx
01
dt
≡ cos θ
dr
dt
−r sin θ

dt
=
I
8πr
_
sin θ ÷tan
θ
2
_
.
dx
02
dt
≡ sin θ
dr
dt
÷r cos θ

dt
= −
I
8πr
(cos θ ÷1).
Therefore,
dr
dt
= −
I
8πr
tan
θ
2
.

dt
= −
I
4πr
2
(4.6.5)
that is,
r

dr
= 2 cot
1
2
θ
110 4 Vorticity
Fig. 4.6.2.
Thus,
r = ¹ sec
1
2
θ. ¹ = constant. (4.6.6)
This is the polar equation of the trajectory plotted in Fig. 4.6.2. The constant
length ¹ is equal to the distance of closest approach of the vortex to the edge
of the half-plane, which occurs at θ =0. Substituting for r in the second of
equations (4.6.5), we find
sec
2
_
1
2
θ
_

dt
= −
I
4π¹
2
. Thus, θ = 2 tan
−1
_

It
8π¹
2
_
.
where time is measured from the instant at which θ = 0. The dependence of r
on t is now obtained by substituting into (4.6.6).
Collecting together these results we have
r = ¹
_
1 ÷
_
Ut
¹
_
2
. θ =2 tan
−1
_

Ut
¹
_
;
x
01
¹
=
1 −(Ut ,¹)
2
_
1 ÷(Ut ,¹)
2
.
x
02
¹
=
−2Ut ,¹
_
1 ÷(Ut ,¹)
2
. (4.6.7)
where U =
I
8π¹
. Thus, (for I >0) the vortex starts above the half-plane at
t =−∞ at x
01
=−∞, x
02
=2¹ and translates towards the edge, initially at
speed U parallel to the plane. It crosses the x
1
axis at t =0 at x
01
=¹, and
proceeds along a symmetrical path below the half-plane.
4.6 Motion of a Line Vortex 111
Fig. 4.6.3.
Example 2: Vortexmotionoutside acylinder AvortexIis locatedat z
0
=re
i θ
outside a rigid cylinder of radius a(-r) with center at the origin (Fig. 4.6.3).
There is no net circulation around the cylinder. The complex potential is ob-
tained by placing an image vortex −I at the inverse point z = a
2
,z

0
together
with a vortex ÷I at the center of the cylinder. The two interior vortices ensure
that the total circulation around the cylinder vanishes. Then
n(z) = −
i I

ln(z − z
0
) ÷
i I

ln
_
z −
a
2
z

0
_

i I

ln z.
The first term on the right is the self-potential of the vortex (in the notation of
(4.6.1) ζ ≡ z), so that the equation of motion of the vortex is
dz

0
dt
=
i Iz

0
2π(r
2
−a
2
)

i I
2πz
0

i Ia
2
2πz
0
(r
2
−a
2
)
.
By multiplying by z
0
and adding the complex conjugate equation we see that
r = constant, and
r
d
dt
e
−i θ
≡ −ire
−i θ

dt
=
i Ia
2
e
−i θ
2πr(r
2
−a
2
)
.
Therefore,

dt
=
−Ia
2
2πr
2
(r
2
−a
2
)
.
and (for I >0) the vortex trajectory is a circle traversed in the clockwise direc-
tion at speed
:
0
=
Ia
2
2πr(r
2
−a
2
)
. (4.6.8)
112 4 Vorticity
Problems 4
1. Show that in inviscid, homentropic flow (where div v ,= 0) the vorticity
equation (4.2.7) takes the form
D
Dt
_
ω
ρ
_
=
_
ω
ρ
· ∇
_
v.
2. Use the relation
_
(y
i
ω
j
(y. t ) ÷ y
j
ω
i
(y. t )) d
3
y = 0 to show that
1
4π[x[
3
_
(x · y)ω(y. t ) d
3
y = ∇
_
1
4π[x[
_

_
1
2
_
y ∧ ω(y. t ) d
3
y
_
.
Deduce the formulae (4.3.3).
3. Calculate the added mass coefficients M
i j
for an infinite, rigid strip of width
2a.
4. Calculate the added mass coefficients M
i j
for an infinite, rigid cylinder of
radius a.
5. Calculate the unsteady lift and drag exerted on a rigid circular cylinder of
radius a produced by a parallel line vortex of circulation I in the presence
of a uniform mean flow normal to the cylinder. Assume the motion is ideal
and that the net circulation around the cylinder vanishes.
6. Repeat Question 5 under the assumption that the vortex is convected solely
by the mean flow (i.e., when the induced component of the motion of I
produced by image vortices in the cylinder is neglected).
7. A rigid sphere of radius a translates at constant velocity U=(U. 0. 0).
U >0, along the x
1
axis. Use the creeping flow approximation ω=curl
(3aU,2[x[), where the coordinate origin is taken at the center of the sphere,
to deduce the Stokes drag formula D = 6πηUa.
8. A gas bubble in water is set into translational motion at velocity U(t ) by
sound whose wavelength greatly exceeds the bubble radius. If the acoustic
particle velocity near the bubble would equal V(t ) in the absence of the
bubble, show that U=3V when the mass of the air within the bubble is
neglected.
9. Calculate the path of a line vortex of strength I that is parallel to a rigid strip
occupying −a -x
1
-a. x
2
= 0. −∞-x
3
-∞. Assume the fluid is at rest
at infinity and that there is no net circulation around the strip. Determine
the unsteady force on the strip.
10. Calculate the path of a line vortex of strength I that is parallel to a rigid
elliptic cylinder of semi-major and minor axes respectively equal to a and
b. Assume the fluid is at rest at infinity and that there is no net circulation
around the cylinder.
Problems 4 113
11. A line vortex of strength I is adjacent to a rigid right-angle corner whose
sides lie along the positive x
1
and x
2
axes, the vortex being parallel to
the edge of the corner. Show that the vortex traverses a path with polar
representation r sin 2θ = constant.
12. Calculate the trajectories of a vortex pair consisting of two parallel line
vortices of strengths ±I moving under their mutual induction towards a
rigid plane parallel to the line of centers of the vortices.
13. Calculate the trajectory of a line vortex of strength I adjacent to the rigid
half-plane x
1
-0. x
2
= 0 in the presence of a uniform mean flow at speed
U in the positive x
1
direction.
14. Showthat the transformationζ =
_
z
2
,a
2
÷1. a >0maps the upper z plane
cut bya thinrigidbarrier alongthe imaginaryaxis between z = 0and z = i a
onto the upper ζ plane. Deduce that a line vortex I at z = z
0
(t ) traverses a
path determined by the equation
dz

0
dt
= −
i I

_
a
2
z
0
_
z
2
0
÷a
2
_ −
2z
0
_
z
2
0
÷a
2

¸
¸
z
2
0
÷a
2
¸
¸
_
_
.
provided the fluid is at rest at infinity.
5
Vortex Sound
5.1 The Role of Vorticity in Lighthill’s Theory
At low Mach numbers in unbounded, homentropic flow the value of Lighthill’s
quadrupole source (2.2.2) can be approximated by means of the Biot–Savart
induction formula (4.3.1):
T
i j
≈ ρ
0
u
i
u
j
. u(x. t ) = curl
_
ω(y. t ) d
3
y
4π[x −y[
. (5.1.1)
To examine this in more detail, consider the acoustically compact eddy of
Fig. 2.2.1 consisting of vorticity of characteristic length ¹, and take the coordi-
nate origin within the eddy. Put
v = u ÷∇ϕ;
u involves the whole incompressible component of velocity, and u ∼ O(1,[x[
3
)
as [x[ →∞(see Section 4.3). Because div u=0, the scalar potential ϕ describes
compressible motions, and the continuity equation becomes

2
ϕ ÷
1
ρ

Dt
= 0.
But p−p
0
∼ ρ
0
u
2
in the eddy, where the characteristic frequency ∼u,¹. Thus,
Dp
Dt

ρ
0
u
3
¹
. Hence,
1
ρ

Dt
=
1
ρc
2
Dp
Dt

u
¹
M
2
. M =
u
c
0
.
Hence, in order of magnitude
∇ϕ = O(uM
2
) within the eddy, where [x[ ∼ ¹. (5.1.2)
114
5.1 The Role of Vorticity in Lighthill’s Theory 115
Now write

2
(u
i
u
j
)
∂x
i
∂x
j
= div(ω ∧ u) ÷∇
2
_
1
2
u
2
_
(5.1.3)
and express the solution p(x. t ) = c
2
0
(ρ −ρ
0
) of Lighthill’s equation given by
(2.2.1) in the form
p(x. t ) = p
1
(x. t ) ÷ p
2
(x. t ).
where, using (1.9.6) and (1.9.8) as [x[ →∞,
p
1
(x. t ) =
−ρ
0
x
i
4πc
0
[x[
2

∂t
_
(ω ∧ u)
i
_
y. t −
[x[
c
0
÷
x · y
c
0
[x[
_
d
3
y. (5.1.4)
p
2
(x. t ) =
ρ
0
4πc
2
0
[x[

2
∂t
2
_
1
2
u
2
_
y. t −
[x[
c
0
÷
x · y
c
0
[x[
_
d
3
y. (5.1.5)
When retarded time variations x · y,c
0
[x[ within the eddy are neglected the
identity(5.1.3) andthe divergence theoremimplythat
_
ω∧ud
3
y ≡ 0, because
u ∼ O(1,[y[
3
) as [y[ →∞. To estimate the value of the integral in (5.1.4) it is
therefore necessary to expand the integrand to the next higher approximation
in the retarded time:
(ω ∧ u)
_
y. t −
[x[
c
0
÷
x · y
c
0
[x[
_
= (ω ∧ u)
_
y. t −
[x[
c
0
_
÷
x · y
c
0
[x[

∂t
_
(ω ∧ u)
_
y. t −
[x[
c
0
__
÷· · · .
We now find
p
1
(x. t ) ≈
−ρ
0
x
i
x
j
4πc
2
0
[x[
3

2
∂t
2
_
y
i
(ω ∧ u)
j
_
y. t −
[x[
c
0
_
d
3
y ∼
¹
[x[
ρ
0
u
2
M
2
.
[x[ →∞. (5.1.6)
The order of magnitude of p
2
(x. t ) is estimated by using the momentum
equation (4.2.3). Because div v ∼ O(M
2
) within the source region, we can write
∂u
∂t
÷∇
__
dp
ρ
÷
1
2
:
2
÷
∂ϕ
∂t
_
= −ω ∧ u −ω ∧ ∇ϕ −ν curl ω.
Take the scalar product with u

∂t
_
1
2
u
2
_
÷div
_
u
__
dp
ρ
÷
1
2
:
2
÷
∂ϕ
∂t
__
=−u· ω ∧ ∇ϕ −νu· curl ω
=−u· ω ∧ ∇ϕ ÷ν(div (u ∧ ω) −ω
2
)
116 5 Vortex Sound
and integrate over the whole of space. The contributions from the divergence
terms vanish because u(
_
dp,ρ ÷
1
2
:
2
÷ ∂ϕ,∂t ) tends to zero at least as fast
as 1,[y[
3
as [y[ →∞, where also ω = 0. Hence, using the estimate (5.1.2)

∂t
_
1
2
u
2
(y. t ) d
3
y = −
_
(u· ω ∧ ∇ϕ ÷νω
2
)(y. t ) d
3
y ∼ ¹
2
u
3
M
2
÷
¹
2
u
3
Re
.
(5.1.7)
where Re =u¹,ν typically exceeds 10
4
in turbulent flow. The two terms on
the right-hand side nominally represent the dissipation of the turbulent motions
respectively by acoustic radiation and by viscous damping. (We have already
seen, however, in Chapter 2, Equation (2.2.5) that a more accurate estimate of
the radiation damping is ¹
2
u
3
M
5
.)
Thus, when retarded time variations are neglected in (5.1.5), we find
p
2
(x. t ) ∼
¹
[x[
ρ
0
u
2
M
4
÷
¹
[x[
ρ
0
u
2
M
2
Re
.
and therefore that p
2
_ p
1
in turbulent flow where M _1 and Re ¸1.
We conclude that the component
div(ρ
0
ω ∧ v) of the Lighthill quadrupole

2

0
:
i
:
j
)
∂x
i
∂x
j
is principal source of sound at low Mach numbers.
5.2 The Equation of Vortex Sound
Lighthill’s equation (2.1.12) can be recast in a form that emphasizes the promi-
nent rˆ ole of vorticity in the production of sound by taking the total enthalpy
B =
_
dp
ρ
÷
1
2
:
2
as the independent acoustic variable, in place of Lighthill’s c
2
0
(ρ−ρ
0
). The total
enthalpy occurs naturally in Crocco’s form (4.2.3) of the momentum equation.
Inthe followingwe shall actuallyuse the Approximation(4.2.5) of this equation,
in which the viscous term
4
3
ν∇(div v) is neglected. Indeed, the principal effect of
this term is to attenuate the sound once it has been generated and is propagating
to a distant observer in the source-free region of the flow. This attenuation can be
significant in applications, but is of no particular interest when studying sound
generation mechanisms. All viscous stresses can be ignored in a high Reynolds
number source flow except possibly within surface boundary layers on bodies
5.2 The Equation of Vortex Sound 117
immersed in the flow. But surface friction is dominated by the vorticity term
−ν curl ω, which is retained in (4.2.5).
In irrotational flow Crocco’s equation (4.2.5) reduces to
∂v
∂t
= −∇B.
In other words,
B = −
∂ϕ
∂t
in regions where ω = 0. (5.2.1)
where ϕ(x. t ) is the velocity potential that determines the whole motion in the ir-
rotational regions of the fluid. B is therefore constant in steady irrotational flow,
and at large distances from the acoustic sources perturbations in B represent
acoustic waves.
If the mean flow is at rest in the far field, the acoustic pressure is given by
p = ρ
0
B ≡ −ρ
0
∂ϕ
∂t
. (5.2.2)
To calculate the pressure in terms of B elsewhere in the flow, we use the
definition
_
dp
ρ
= B −
1
2
:
2
.
Differentiatingwithrespect totime andusingCrocco’s equation(4.2.5), we have
1
ρ
∂p
∂t
=
∂ B
∂t
−v ·
∂v
∂t
=
∂ B
∂t
−v · (−∇B −ω ∧ v −ν curl ω)
=
DB
Dt
÷νv · curl ω.
The small viscous correction can be ignored in high Reynolds number source
flows, where p and B can be taken to be related by
1
ρ
∂p
∂t
=
DB
Dt
. (5.2.3)
5.2.1 Reformulation of Lighthill’s Equation
Multiply Crocco’s equation (4.2.5) by the density ρ and take the divergence
div
_
ρ
∂v
∂t
_
÷∇ · (ρ∇B) = −div(ρω ∧ v). (5.2.4)
118 5 Vortex Sound
The first term on the left is expressed in terms of B by using the continuity
equation in the form
div v = −
1
ρ

Dt
.
and writing
div
_
ρ
∂v
∂t
_
= ∇ρ ·
∂v
∂t
÷ρ

∂t
div v
= ∇ρ ·
∂v
∂t
−ρ

∂t
_
1
ρ

Dt
_
= ∇ρ ·
∂v
∂t
−ρ

∂t
_
1
ρ
∂ρ
∂t
_

∂v
∂t
· ∇ρ −ρv · ∇
_
1
ρ
∂ρ
∂t
_
= −ρ
D
Dt
_
1
ρ
∂ρ
∂t
_
= −ρ
D
Dt
_
1
ρc
2
∂p
∂t
_
= −ρ
D
Dt
_
1
c
2
DB
Dt
_
.
where Equation (5.2.3) has been used on the last line. Substituting into (5.2.4)
and dividing by ρ, we obtain the desired vortex sound equation for homen-
tropic flow
_
D
Dt
_
1
c
2
D
Dt
_

1
ρ
∇ · (ρ∇)
_
B =
1
ρ
div(ρω ∧ v). (5.2.5)
The vortex source on the right-hand side vanishes in irrotational regions; if
ω = 0 everywhere, and if there are no moving boundaries, the total enthalpy B
is constant, and there are no sound waves propagating in the fluid. If acoustic
waves cannot enter from infinity, it follows that the (homentropic) flow can
generate sound only if moving vorticity is present, and the right-hand side
of (5.2.5) may be identified as the analytical representation of the acoustic
sources. The differential operator on the left describes propagation of the sound
through the nonuniform flow; as in the case of Lighthill’s equation, when the
source region is very extensive it will not normally be permissible to neglect
the interaction of the sound with the vorticity through which it propagates.
5.2.2 Sound Waves in Irrotational Mean Flow
Let an irrotational mean flow be defined by the velocity potential ϕ
0
(x), with
mean velocity U = ∇ϕ
0
. In an unbounded fluid U =constant; the mean velocity
5.2 The Equation of Vortex Sound 119
can vary with position only if the fluid is bounded, either internally by an airfoil,
say, or externally by the walls of a duct of variable cross section (ϕ
0
(x) can be
multiple-valued if the boundaries are multiply connected, but the mean velocity
is always single-valued).
Consider an irrotational disturbance ϕ
/
(x. t ), and set
ϕ(x. t ) = ϕ
0
(x) ÷ϕ
/
(x. t ).
It can be shown that the general, nonlinear equation satisfied by ϕ is
1
c
2

2
ϕ
∂t
2
÷
1
c
2
D
Dt
_
1
2
(∇ϕ)
2
_
÷
1
c
2

∂t
_
1
2
(∇ϕ)
2
_
−∇
2
ϕ = 0.
The linearized version of this equation describes the propagation of small ampli-
tude sound waves determined by ϕ
/
(x. t ). However, when ω = 0 the linearized
equation for B = −∂ϕ
/
,∂t ≡ −˙ ϕ is more easily derived from (5.2.5), which
becomes
_
D
Dt
_
1
c
2
D
Dt
_

1
ρ
∇ · (ρ∇)
_
˙ ϕ = 0. (5.2.6)
The coefficients of the differential operators in this equation are functions of
both mean and perturbation quantities, but the linearized equation is obtained
merely by replacing these coefficients by their values in the absence of the
sound. In homentropic flowthe mean density and sound speed can be expressed
in terms of the variable mean velocity U(x), and
D
Dt


∂t
÷U· ∇ .
Furthermore, because the mean flow does not depend on time, we can take the
perturbation potential ϕ
/
, rather than ˙ ϕ, as the acoustic variable. The linearized
equation then becomes
__

∂t
÷U· ∇
__
1
c
2
_

∂t
÷U· ∇
__

1
ρ
∇ · (ρ∇)
_
ϕ
/
= 0.
where c ≡c(x) and ρ ≡ρ(x) are the local sound speed and density in the steady
flow.
5.2.3 Vortex Sound at Low Mach Numbers
When the characteristic Mach number M is small the local mean values of the
density and sound speed are related to their uniform respective values ρ
0
and
120 5 Vortex Sound
c
0
at infinity by relations of the form
c
c
0
∼ 1 ÷O(M
2
).
ρ
ρ
0
∼ 1 ÷O(M
2
).
The vortex sound equation (5.2.5) can therefore be simplified by (a) taking
c =c
0
, and ρ =ρ
0
, and (b) by neglecting nonlinear effects of propagation and
the scatteringof soundbythe vorticity. The productionof soundis thengoverned
by the simpler equation
_
1
c
2
0

2
∂t
2
−∇
2
_
B = div(ω ∧ v). (5.2.7)
and in the far field the acoustic pressure is given by the linearized approximation
p(x. t ) ≈ ρ
0
B(x. t ). (5.2.8)
5.2.4 Example 1 (Powell 1963): Sound Generation
by a Spinning Vortex Pair
Two parallel vortex filaments each of circulation I and distance 2¹ apart rotate
about the x
3
axis midway between them (Fig. 5.2.1) at angular velocity O =
I,4π¹
2
, provided the Mach number is small enough for the motion to be
regarded as incompressible. Their positions at time t are
¯ x = (x
1
. x
2
) = ±s ≡ ±(s
1
(t ). s
2
(t )) = ±¹(cos Ot. sin Ot ).
Fig. 5.2.1.
5.2 The Equation of Vortex Sound 121
The vorticity distribution is
ω = Ik(δ(¯ x −s) ÷δ(¯ x ÷s)).
where k is a unit vector in the x
3
direction, parallel to the vortices. The vortex
convection velocities are
v = ±Ok ∧ s(t ) at ¯ x = ±s(t ). where U = O¹ _c
0
.
Hence, because k ∧ (k ∧ s) = −s,
ω ∧ v = −IOs(t )[δ(¯ x −s) −δ(¯ x ÷s)].
If this is expanded in powers of the radius ¹ of the circular orbit (and it can be
verified that this is equivalent to expanding the acoustic pressure in powers of
M =U,c
0
_1) the i th component of the first nonzero term is
(ω ∧ v)
i


∂ ¯ x
j
(2IOs
i
(t )s
j
(t )δ(¯ x)).
so that the vortex sound source is equivalent to the quadrupole
div(ω ∧ v) ≈

2
∂ ¯ x
i
∂ ¯ x
j
(2IOs
i
(t )s
j
(t )δ(¯ x)).
The solution of the vortex sound equation (5.2.7) for this quadrupole source
is (c.f., (2.2.1))
B =
1


2
∂ ¯ x
i
∂ ¯ x
j
_
2IO(s
i
s
j
)
_
t −
[x −y[
c
0
_
δ(¯ y) d
3
y
[x −y[
. ¯ y = (y
1
. y
2
).
In the acoustic far field, we use (1.9.7):

∂ ¯ x
j

−¯ x
j
c
0
(r
2
÷(x
3
− y
3
)
2
)
1
2

∂t
.
where r =(x
2
1
÷ x
2
2
)
1
2
is the perpendicular distance from the centroid of the
vortices (the x
3
axis). Thus, by setting ξ = y
3
−x
3
, we can write in the acoustic
far field, where B ≈ p,ρ
0
,
p ≈
ρ
0
IO¯ x
i
¯ x
j
2πc
2
0

2
∂t
2
_

−∞
(s
i
s
j
)
_
t −
(r
2
÷ξ
2
)
1
2
c
0
_

(r
2
÷ξ
2
)
3
2
. r →∞.
(5.2.9)
122 5 Vortex Sound
In this formula
(s
i
s
j
)(t ) =
¹
2
2
_
1 ÷cos 2Ot sin 2Ot
sin 2Ot 1 −cos 2Ot
_
.
but the constant terms in the matrix can be omitted because of the time deriva-
tives in (5.2.9). The integration in (5.2.9) can now be performed by the approx-
imate method described below in Example 2 in the limit that Or,c
0
→ ∞,
i.e., in the limit in which the radial distance r greatly exceeds the acoustic
wavelength
_

−∞
(s
i
s
j
)
_
t −
(r
2
÷ξ
2
)
1
2
c
0
_

(r
2
÷ξ
2
)
3
2

¹
2
2r
2
_
πc
0
Or
_
1
2
_
cos
_
2O[t ] −
π
4
_
sin
_
2O[t ] −
π
4
_
sin
_
2O[t ] −
π
4
_
−cos
_
2O[t ] −
π
4
_
_
.
where [t ] = t −r,c
0
. Hence, introducing polar coordinates ¯ x = r(cos θ. sin θ)
we find
¯ x
i
¯ x
j
¹
2
2r
2
_
πc
0
Or
_
1
2
_
cos
_
2O[t ] −
π
4
_
sin
_
2O[t ] −
π
4
_
sin
_
2O[t ] −
π
4
_
−cos
_
2O[t ] −
π
4
_
_
i j
=
¹
2
2
_
πc
0
Or
_
1
2
(cos θ. sin θ)
_
cos
_
2O[t ] −
π
4
_
sin
_
2O[t ] −
π
4
_
sin
_
2O[t ] −
π
4
_
−cos
_
2O[t ] −
π
4
_
_
_
cos θ
sin θ
_
=
¹
2
2
_
πc
0
Or
_
1
2
cos
_
2θ −2O[t ] ÷
π
4
_
.
and, therefore, (5.2.9) becomes
p ≈
−ρ
0
IO
3
¹
2
πc
2
0
_
πc
0
Or
_
1
2
cos
_
2θ −2O
_
t −
r
c
0
_
÷
π
4
_
= −4
_
π¹
r
ρ
0
U
2
M
3,2
cos
_
2θ −2O
_
t −
r
c
0
_
÷
π
4
_
.
Or
c
0
→∞.
(5.2.10)
The amplitude of the sound decreases like 1,

r (instead of 1,r) because the
waves are spreading cylindrically in two dimensions. The sound power must
now be calculated by considering the integral
_
Y
p
2
ρ
0
c
0
dS
over the surface of a large circular cylinder r =constant. Taking the time
5.2 The Equation of Vortex Sound 123
average, we can show that the acoustic power per unit length of the vortices
∼¹ρ
0
U
3
M
4
. This differs by a factor of the Mach number M from the power
radiated by a compact body of three-dimensional turbulence, and is character-
istic of the acoustic power produced by two-dimensional regions of turbulence
in an unbounded fluid.
5.2.5 Example 2
Show that
_

−∞
f
_
ξ
r
_
e
i κ
0

r
2
÷ξ
2
dξ ≈r f (0)
_

κ
0
r
_1
2
e
i
(
κ
0

π
4
)
. κ
0
r →∞. (5.2.11)
Put ξ =jr, then
I ≡
_

−∞
f
_
ξ
r
_
e
i κ
0

r
2
÷ξ
2
dξ = r
_

−∞
f (j)e
i κ
0
r

1÷j
2
dj.
As κ
0
r →∞the exponential factor oscillates increasingly rapidly, and the main
contribution to the integral is from the neighborhood of that value of j where
the oscillations are stationary. This occurs at j = 0. The integrand is therefore
expanded about this point. In the first approximation, f (j) can be replaced by
f (0), and
e
i κ
0
r

1÷j
2
≈ e
i κ
0
r÷i κ
0
rj
2
,2
.
Thus,
I = r
_

−∞
f (j)e
i κ
0
r

1÷j
2
dj ≈ r f (0)e
i κ
0
r
_

−∞
e
i κ
0
rj
2
,2
dj
= r f (0)e
i κ
0
r
_

κ
0
r
_1
2
e
i π
4
.
which yields (5.2.11).
In particular,
_

−∞
_
cos 2O
_
t −
(r
2
÷ξ
2
)
1
2
c
0
_
−i sin 2O
_
t −
(r
2
÷ξ
2
)
1
2
c
0
__

(r
2
÷ξ
2
)
3
2
= e
−2i Ot
_

−∞
e
i
2O
c
0

r
2
÷ξ
2 dξ
(r
2
÷ξ
2
)
3
2

1
r
2
_
πc
0
Or
_
1
2
e
−i [2O(t −
r
c
0
) −
π
4
]
.
Or
c
0
→∞.
124 5 Vortex Sound
Hence,
_

−∞
cos 2O
_
t −
(r
2
÷ξ
2
)
1
2
c
0
_

(r
2
÷ξ
2
)
3
2

1
r
2
_
πc
0
Or
_
1
2
cos
_
2O
_
t −
r
c
0
_

π
4
_
_

−∞
sin 2O
_
t −
(r
2
÷ξ
2
)
1
2
c
0
_

(r
2
÷ξ
2
)
3
2

1
r
2
_
πc
0
Or
_
1
2
sin
_
2O
_
t −
r
c
0
_

π
4
_
.
5.3 Vortex–Surface Interaction Noise
The small Mach number vortex sound equation (5.2.7) is now applied to deter-
mine the sound generated by vorticity in the neighborhood of a fixed body whose
surface S may be vibrating at small amplitude (Fig. 5.3.1). The development
here is analogous to the derivation in Section 2.3 of Curle’s equation.
Introduce a stationary, closed control surface S
÷
on which f (x) = 0, such
that f (x)
>
-
0 according as x lies without or within S
÷
. The body is assumed
to be within S
÷
, and S
÷
will subsequently be allowed to shrink down to co-
incide with the body surface S. Multiply equation (5.2.7) by H ≡ H( f ) and
Fig. 5.3.1.
5.3 Vortex–Surface Interaction Noise 125
form the inhomogeneous wave equation for the new variable HB. We use the
transformations
H∇
2
B ≡ H div (∇B) = div(H∇B) −∇H · ∇B
= ∇
2
(HB) −div(B∇H) −∇H · ∇B. (5.3.1)
and H div(ω ∧ v) = div(Hω ∧ v) −∇H · ω ∧ v. (5.3.2)
Then, (5.2.7) becomes
_
1
c
2
0

2
∂t
2
−∇
2
_
(HB) = −div(B ∇ H) −∇H · (∇B ÷ω∧v) ÷div(Hω∧v).
This equation is formally valid everywhere, including the region within S
÷
where HB ≡0. The source terms involving ∇H are concentrated on the control
surface. When x lies in the exterior region these surface terms take account of
the presence of the solid body inside S
÷
; if the body is absent (so that S
÷
is
filled with fluid), the surface sources constitute a representation ‘to the outside
world’ in f >0 of the various hydrodynamic or acoustic processes that may be
occurring within S
÷
.
Using Crocco’s equation (4.2.5), we can make the substitution
∇H · (∇B ÷ω ∧ v) =−∇H ·
_
∂v
∂t
÷ν curl ω
_
≡−∇H ·
∂v
∂t
÷ν div(∇H ∧ω).
Hence the vortex sound equation becomes
_
1
c
2
0

2
∂t
2
−∇
2
_
(HB) =−div(B∇H) ÷∇H ·
∂v
∂t
÷div(Hω ∧ v) −ν div(∇H ∧ ω). (5.3.3)
The sources on the right of this equation are either concentrated on the control
surface S
÷
or lie in the fluid outside S
÷
; they completely determine B outside
this control surface. The solution in this region can therefore be found by using
any Green’s function G(x. y. t −τ) that satisfies
_
1
c
2
0

2
∂t
2
−∇
2
_
G = δ(x −y)δ(t −τ). where G = 0 for t -τ
for x and y anywhere within the fluid. In Fig. 5.3.1 the fluid occupies the region
V outside the surface S of the solid body; the control surface S
÷
( f (x) = 0)
therefore lies within V.
126 5 Vortex Sound
Thus, for points x within the fluid the solution of (5.3.3) is
HB(x. t ) =
_

−∞
_
V
G(x. y. t −τ)
_
−div(B∇H) ÷∇H ·
∂v
∂τ
÷div(Hω∧v)
−ν div(∇H ∧ ω)
_
d
3
y dτ.
where all of the source terms within the brace brackets are functions of y and τ.
Those involving ∇H vanish except on the control surface S
÷
. The divergence
terms are removed by application of the divergence theorem, and then using the
formula
_
V
(·)∇H d
3
y =
_
S
÷
(·) dS
(see Section 2.3). Let us illustrate the procedure for the first term in the brace
brackets of the integrand
_
V
G{−div(B∇H)] d
3
y = −
_
V
{div(GB∇H) − B∇G · ∇H] d
3
y
=
_
S÷Y
GB∇H · dS ÷
_
V
B∇G · ∇H d
3
y
= 0 ÷
_
S
÷
B∇G · dS

_
S
÷
B(y. τ)
∂G
∂y
n
(x. y. t −τ) dS(y).
where all vector operators are with respect to the y dependence, and Y is a
large, closed ‘surface at infinity’ where ω = 0. There are no contributions from
S and Y because ∇H = 0 everywhere except on S
÷
.
The general solution in the region f >0 outside S
÷
accordingly becomes
B(x. t ) =
_
S
÷
_
B(y. τ)
∂G
∂y
n
(x. y. t −τ) ÷ G(x. y. t −τ)
∂:
n
∂τ
(y. τ)
_
dS(y) dτ

_
V
H( f (y))(ω ∧ v)(y. τ) ·
∂G
∂y
(x. y. t −τ) d
3
y dτ
÷ν
_
S
÷
ω(y. τ) ∧
∂G
∂y
(x. y. t −τ) · dS(y) dτ. (5.3.4)
where for brevity we have omitted the integration sign for τ, which is understood
to vary over the range −∞-τ -∞.
5.3 Vortex–Surface Interaction Noise 127
We now choose G to have vanishing normal derivative on the surface S of
the body. When this is done the control surface S
÷
is allowed to shrink down
onto S (whereupon the first term in the first integral of (5.3.4) vanishes), and
the general solution in the fluid becomes
B(x. t ) = −
_
V
(ω ∧ v)(y. τ) ·
∂G
∂y
(x. y. t −τ) d
3
y dτ ÷ν
_
S
ω(y. τ)

∂G
∂y
(x. y. t −τ) · dS(y) dτ ÷
_
S
G(x. y. t −τ)
∂:
n
∂τ
(y. τ) dS(y) dτ.
where
∂G
∂y
n
(x. y. t −τ) = 0 on S. (5.3.5)
In the acoustic far field ([x[ →∞) we can replace B(x. t ) by p(x. t ),ρ
0
.
The first integral represents the production of sound by vortex sources dis-
tributed within the fluid. Green’s function takes full account of the influence
of the body on the efficiency with which these sources generate sound. The
second, surface integral involving the surface vorticity is the contribution from
frictional forces on S. To interpret the final term, recall that the control surface
S
÷
was taken to be fixed in space. This means that fluid can flow through the
surface. When S
÷
shrinks down to S the implication is that S is also fixed in
space. However, the normal velocity :
n
can still be nonzero if the surface of the
body is vibrating at small amplitude, and this term in the solution is actually
identical with that given previously in (3.8.2) for a vibrating body in the absence
of vortex sources.
In connection with this, it should also be noted that the reciprocal theorem
implies that the normal derivative conditions
∂G
∂y
n
(x. y. t −τ) = 0.
∂G
∂x
n
(x. y. t −τ) = 0 respectively for y. x on S.
are always satisfied simultaneously.
The contribution to the sound from surface friction (the first surface integral
on the right of (5.3.5)) is nominally of order
1
Re
_1. Re =

ν
.
relative to the contribution from the volume vorticity (the first integral), where
¹ is the characteristic length scale of the turbulence or body and : is a typical
velocity. At high Reynolds numbers the surface termcan therefore be discarded,
and in the important case in which the body does not vibrate the acoustic far
128 5 Vortex Sound
field is then given by
p
ρ
0
(x. t ) = −
_
V
(ω ∧ v)(y. τ) ·
∂G
∂y
(x. y. t −τ) d
3
y dτ. (5.3.6)
5.4 Radiation from an Acoustically Compact Body
Whenthe surface S is acousticallycompact the compact Green’s function(3.9.1)
can be used to evaluate the general solution (5.3.5) in the far field. When
[x[ →∞and the origin is within or close to S, we proceed as already described
in Section 3.8 by expanding Green’s function to first order in the retarded time
across S:
G(x. y. t −τ) =
1
4π[X −Y[
δ
_
t −τ −
[X −Y[
c
0
_

1
4π[x[
δ
_
t −τ −
[x[
c
0
_
÷
x
j
Y
j
4πc
0
[x[
2
δ
/
_
t −τ −
[x[
c
0
_
.
[x[ →∞.
where the prime denotes differentiation with respect to t . The first term in this
approximation, which is independent of y, clearly makes no contribution to the
first two integrals in (5.3.5). It makes a contribution to the final surface integral
only if the volume of the body is pulsating. When this happens the resulting
monopole radiation fromthe body is usually large compared to all other sources.
We shall, therefore, ignore this possibility, and consider only surface vibrations
for which the volume of S is constant; in particular we shall assume that S
vibrates as a rigid body. In this case, therefore, the first approximation in the
Green’s function expansion can again be discarded.
Substituting into (5.3.5) and performing the integrations with respect to τ,
we find in the acoustic far field (where B = p,ρ
0
)
p(x. t ) ≈
−ρ
0
x
j
4πc
0
[x[
2

∂t
__
(ω ∧ v) · ∇Y
j
d
3
y −ν
_
S
ω ∧ ∇Y
j
· dS(y)

_
S
∂U
n
∂t
Y
j
dS(y)
_
. (5.4.1)
where the large square brackets ([ ]) denote that the enclosed quantity is to be
evaluated at the retarded time t − [x[,c
0
, and U
n
is the normal component of
velocity of vibration of S.
5.4 Radiation from an Acoustically Compact Body 129
When the body executes translational oscillations at velocity U(t ) we have
U
n
= U
i
n
i
.
where n
i
is the i th component of the surface normal directed into the fluid.
Then
ρ
0
_
S
∂U
n
∂t
Y
j
dS = ρ
0
dU
i
dt
_
S
(n
i
y
j
−n
i
ϕ

j
) dS
= (m
0
δ
i j
÷ M
i j
)
dU
i
dt
.
where if the body has volume L, then m
0
= ρ
0
L is the mass of fluid displaced
by the body, and M
i j
is the added mass tensor of the body (see (3.8.6)).
The solution (5.4.1) can therefore be written
p(x. t ) ≈
−x
j
4πc
0
[x[
2

∂t
_
ρ
0
_
(ω ∧ v) · ∇Y
j
d
3
y −η
_
S
ω ∧ ∇Y
j
· dS(y)
−(m
0
δ
i j
÷ M
i j
)
dU
i
dt
_
. (5.4.2)
Reference to Equation (4.4.4) shows that this can also be written
p(x. t ) ≈
x
j
4πc
0
[x[
2
∂ F
j
∂t
_
t −
[x[
c
0
_
÷
m
0
x
j
4πc
0
[x[
2

2
U
j
∂t
2
_
t −
[x[
c
0
_
. [x[ →∞.
(5.4.3)
where F(t ) is the unsteady force exerted on the fluid by the body. This is just
our earlier conclusion (2.4.2) derived from Curle’s equation, with the addition
of the fluid-displacement effect of the vibrating body, and is equivalent to the
solution (3.8.10) obtained in the absence of vorticity.
The relative contributions from the volume and surface distributions of vor-
ticity in (5.4.2) (respectively the first and second integrals) for turbulence of
length scale ¹ and velocity : are estimated respectively by
ρ
0
:
2
M
¹
[x[
and ρ
0
:
2
M
¹
[x[
1
Re
. Re =

ν
.
Thus, in high Reynolds number turbulent flows the surface frictional contribu-
tion to the dipole force F can usually be neglected. For a nonvibrating compact
body the principal component of the acoustic pressure in the far field is therefore
130 5 Vortex Sound
given by
p(x. t ) ≈
−ρ
0
x
j
4πc
0
[x[
2

∂t
_
(ω ∧ v)
_
y. t −
[x[
c
0
_
· ∇Y
j
(y) d
3
y. [x[ →∞.
(5.4.4)
5.5 Radiation from Cylindrical Bodies of Compact Cross Section
An important special case occurs when vorticity interacts with a cylindrical (or
approximately cylindrical) surface S of compact cross section (such as the strip
airfoil of Fig. 3.6.3). If the vorticity extends over an extensive spanwise section
of the body it may be important to account for differences in the retarded times
of the sound produced at different spanwise positions.
To do this we first write the Kirchhoff vector in the form
Y = Y

÷ky
3
. Y

= (Y
1
(y). Y
2
(y). 0). (5.5.1)
where k is a unit vector in the x
3
direction. Then, because variations in the
spanwise source position are not necessarily small compared to the acoustic
wavelength, the compact Green’s function in (5.3.6) is expanded as follows:
G(x. y. t −τ) =
1
4π[X −Y[
δ
_
t −τ −
[X −Y[
c
0
_

1
4π[x −ky
3
[
δ
_
t −τ −
[x −ky
3
[
c
0
_
÷
x
j
Y
⊥j
4πc
0
[x −ky
3
[
2
δ
/
_
t −τ −
[x −ky
3
[
c
0
_

1
4π[x[
δ
_
t −τ −
[x −ky
3
[
c
0
_
÷
x
j
Y
⊥j
4πc
0
[x[
2
δ
/
_
t −τ −
[x −ky
3
[
c
0
_
. [x[ →∞. (5.5.2)
For example, when a stationary cylindrical body interacts with high Reynolds
number flowat lowMach number, the monopole termin (5.5.2) can be discarded
as before, and the acoustic pressure given by (5.3.6) becomes
p(x. t ) ≈
−ρ
0
x
j
4πc
0
[x[
2

∂t
_
(ω∧v)
_
y. t −
[x −ky
3
[
c
0
_
· ∇Y
⊥j
(y) d
3
y. [x[ →∞.
(5.5.3)
The sound is produced by dipole sources orientated in the lift and drag directions
5.6 Impulse Theory of Vortex Sound 131
only ( j = 1. 2). This approximation is applicable also to a thin airfoil of large
but finite span, and in cases where the chord of the airfoil is a slowly varying
function of y
3
(such as the elliptic airfoil of Fig. 3.9.1).
5.6 Impulse Theory of Vortex Sound
An interesting formula for the sound generated by vorticity near a compact body
can be derived directly from the representation (4.3.3) of the velocity v(x. t ) in
the hydrodynamic far field in terms of the impulse I(t ). Indeed,
v(x. t ) ≈ ∇ϕ when [x[ ¸¹.
where ¹ is the length scale of the interaction region (the body), and
ϕ(x. t ) = div
_
I(t )
4π[x[
_
where I(t ) =
1
2
_
y ∧ ω(y. t ) d
3
y. (5.6.1)
This expression for ϕ(x. t ) defines the incompressible motion in the irrota-
tional region far from the body. It is the velocity potential of a hydrodynamic
dipole that will be recognized as the acoustic near field of an outgoing acoustic
dipole representing sound production by the flow (see Equations (1.7.4) and
(1.7.9)). The acoustic dipole is found simply by replacing I(t ) in (5.6.1) by
I(t −[x[,c
0
). At large distances from the body (where the undisturbed fluid is
stationary) the pressure p(x. t ) =−ρ
0
∂ϕ,∂t , and this procedure therefore leads
to the following formula for the sound in terms of the vorticity:
p(x. t ) ≈ −ρ
0

∂x
j
_
1
4π[x[
∂ I
j
∂t
(t −[x[,c
0
)
_

ρ
0
x
j
4πc
0
[x[
2

2
I
j
∂t
2
_
t −
[x[
c
0
_
. [x[ →∞
=
ρ
0
x
j
8πc
0
[x[
2

2
∂t
2
_
(y ∧ ω)
j
_
y. t −
[x[
c
0
_
d
3
y. (5.6.2)
Equation (4.4.1) shows that this is equivalent to the compact approximation
(5.4.3). Note, however, that ω in (5.6.2) is the generalized vorticity, including
the bound vorticity on S. This should be contrasted with the representation
(5.4.2) involving the Kirchhoff vector, where bound vorticity occurs only in the
surface integral of the frictional contribution to the sound. But, (5.4.2) is valid
only for a body in translational motion whereas (5.6.2) is applicable for a body
executing any combination of translations and rotations (Fig. 4.1.1).
132 5 Vortex Sound
The impulse I is constant for vorticity in an unbounded fluid (when com-
pressibility is ignored). We knowthat the sound is nowgenerated by quadrupole
sources and that it can be represented in terms of the vorticity as in (5.1.6).
M¨ ohring (1978) has shown that it is also possible to express the quadrupole
sound as a third-order time derivative of a second-order moment of the vor-
ticity, analogous to the first order moment in (5.6.2) (see Problems 5),
namely
p(x. t ) ≈
ρ
0
x
i
x
j
12πc
2
0
[x[
3

3
∂t
3
_
y
i
(y ∧ω)
j
(y. t −[x[,c
0
) d
3
y. [x[ →∞. (5.6.3)
Problems 5
1. Kirchhoff’s spinning vortex: A columnar vortex parallel to the x
3
axis
has elliptic cross section defined by the polar equation r = a{1÷c cos(2θ −
Ot ,2)], where c _1 and O is the uniform vorticity in the core. The ellipse
rotates at angular velocity
1
4
O, and the velocity distribution within the core
is given by
v = (:
1
. :
2
) = −
1
2
Or(sin θ ÷c sin(θ −Ot ,2). −cos θ ÷c cos(θ −Ot ,2)).
Show that to first order in c the vortex is equivalent to the two-dimensional
quadrupole
div(ω ∧ v) ≈

2
∂x
i
∂x
j
(T
i j
δ(x
1
)δ(x
2
)). i. j = 1. 2
Problems 5 133
where
T
i j
=
cπO
2
a
4
8
_
cos(Ot ,2) sin(Ot ,2)
sin(Ot ,2) −cos(Ot ,2)
_
and that the acoustic pressure is
p ≈ −
c
8
_
2πa
r
ρ
0
U
2
M
3,2
cos
_
2θ −
O
2
_
t −
r
c
0
_
÷
π
4
_
.
Or
c
0
→∞.
where U =
1
2
aO and M =U,c
0
.
2. Coaxial vortex rings: Use Equation (5.2.7) to calculate the sound produced
by the unsteady motions of an acoustically compact system of N vortex
rings coaxial with the x
1
axis. Take the vorticity of the nth vortex to be
ω
n
= I
n
δ(x
1
− X
n
(t ))δ(r − R
n
(t ))i
θ
, where (r. θ. x
1
) are cylindrical polar
coordinates, R
n
(t ) being the vortex ring radius, X
n
(t ) its location in the x
1
direction, and i
θ
is a unit vector in the azimuthal direction. Show that
p ≈
ρ
0
8c
2
0
[x[
(3 cos
2
O−1)

2
∂t
2
_

n
I
n
X
n
d R
2
n
dt
_
. [x[ →∞.
where Ois the angle between the observer direction and the positive x
1
axis
and the term in square braces is evaluated at τ = t −[x[,c
0
.
In an ideal, incompressible fluid conservation of energy and momentum
implies that

n
I
n
R
n
_
R
n
d X
n
dt
− X
n
d R
n
dt
_
= constant.

n
I
n
R
2
n
= constant.
Use these equations to show that
p ≈
ρ
0
12c
2
0
[x[
(3 cos
2
O−1)
_
d
3
S
dt
3
_
. [x[ →∞.
where S(t ) =

n
I
n
R
2
n
X
n
.
134 5 Vortex Sound
3. Calculate the sound produced by a vortex ring of total circulation I, coaxial
with the x
1
axis, whose core has elliptic cross section of major and minor
axes 2a. 2b _ R, where R is the mean radius of the ring. Assume that the
x
1
coordinate X(t ) of the vorticity centroid satisfies
d X
dt
=
I
4π R
_
ln
_
16R
a ÷b
_

1
4
÷
3(a −b)
2(a ÷b)
cos 2Ot
_
. O =
I
π(a ÷b)
2
.
In the notation of Question 2, show that
p ≈
ρ
0
IR
2
(3 cos
2
O−1)
12c
2
0
[x[
_
d
3
X
dt
3
_
t −
[x[
c
0
. [x[ →∞
=
ρ
0
U
2
M
2

3
R(3 cos
2
O−1)
[x[
_
a −b
a ÷b
_
cos
_
2I
π(a ÷b)
2
_
t −
[x[
c
0
__
.
where U =
I
a ÷b
. M =
U
c
0
.
4. Derive M¨ ohring’s formula (5.6.3) for the acoustic pressure generated by a
compact region of vorticity in an unbounded fluid. Take the cross product of y
with the high Reynolds number vorticity equation ∂ω,∂t ÷curl (ω∧v) = 0
(expressed in terms of y and t as independent variables), multiply by y
i
, and
use the identity
y ∧ curl A = 2A ÷∇(y · A) −

∂y
j
(y
j
A)
to deduce that the integral in (5.1.6) can be written
_
y
i
(ω ∧ v)
j
d
3
y = −
1
3

∂t
_
y
i
(y ∧ ω)
j
d
3
y ÷
1
3
δ
i j
_
1
2
:
2
d
3
y.
The result nowfollows by noting that the estimate (5.1.7) permits the second
integral on the right to be discarded.
5. The free space Green’s function in two dimensions – the solution of
_
1
c
2
0

2
∂t
2
−∇
2
_
G =δ(x
1
−y
1
)δ(x
2
−y
2
)δ(t −τ). where G =0 for t -τ.
– can be derived by integrating the three-dimensional Green’s function
1
4π[x −y[
δ
_
t −τ −
[x −y[
c
0
_
over −∞- y
3
-∞.
Problems 5 135
Deduce that
G(x. y. t −τ) =
H(t −τ −[x −y[,c
0
)

_
(t −τ)
2
−(x −y)
2
_
c
2
0
. x = (x
1
. x
2
). y =(y
1
. y
2
).
and that near the wavefront, where [x −y[ ≈ c
0
(t −τ)
G(x. y. t −τ) ≈
H(t −τ −[x −y[,c
0
)


2[x −y[,c
0

(t −τ) −[x −y[,c
0
.
6. Consider sound production by a compact distribution of vorticity in an un-
bounded two-dimensional flow (independent of x
3
), where the vorticity ω
is parallel to the k direction (the x
3
axis). Show that
_
y
i
(ω ∧ v)
j
dy
1
dy
2
≈−
1
2

∂t
_
y
i
(y ∧ ω)
j
dy
1
dy
2
. where i. j = 1. 2.
Deduce M¨ ohring’s (1980) two-dimensional representation
p(x. t ) ≈
ρ
0
x
i
x
j
4πc
2
0
[x[
2

3
∂t
3
_
dy
1
dy
2
_
t −[x[,c
0
−∞
y
i
(y ∧ ω)
j
(y. τ) dτ
_
(t −τ)
2
−[x[
2
_
c
2
0

ρ
0
x
i
x
j
4πc
2
0
[x[
2
_
c
0
2[x[

3
∂t
3
_
dy
1
dy
2
_
t −[x[,c
0
−∞
y
i
(y ∧ ω)
j
(y. τ) dτ

t −τ −[x[,c
0
.
[x[ →∞.
7. Use the result of Problem 6 to derive the Solution (5.2.10) for the sound
produced by a spinning vortex pair.
8. Use the result of Problem 6 to solve Problem 1.
6
Vortex–Surface Interaction Noise
in Two Dimensions
6.1 Compact Green’s Function in Two Dimensions
In this chapter, we apply the general high Reynolds number solution (5.3.6)
to determine sound produced by two-dimensional interactions of rectilinear
vortices with a stationary solid boundary. Conditions are assumed to be uniform
in the x
3
direction, parallel to the vorticity. We shall derive the two-dimensional
analogue of the general solution
p
ρ
0
(x. t ) = −
_
V
(ω ∧ v)(y. τ) ·
∂G
∂y
(x. y. t −τ) d
3
y dτ (6.1.1)
by first determining a suitable representation of G in two dimensions. Both the
vorticity convection velocity v and the Lamb vector ω∧v are parallel to the x
1
x
2
plane, so that only the y
1
and y
2
components of the gradient ∂G,∂y contribute
to the integral. Also, because (ω ∧ v)(y. τ) depends only on y
1
. y
2
and τ, the
integration with respect to the spanwise coordinate y
3
involves only the Green’s
function, and may be performed prior to any further calculations of the sound.
Let
G
2
=
_

−∞
G(x. y. t −τ) dy
3
. (6.1.2)
For two-dimensional problems G is a function of y
3
−x
3
, and the function G
2
will therefore satisfy the Green’s function equation
_
1
c
2
0

2
∂t
2
−∇
2
_
G
2
=δ(x
1
− y
1
)δ(x
2
− y
2
)δ(t −τ).
where G
2
=0 for t -τ. (6.1.3)
obtained by integrating the three-dimensional Equation (3.1.4) over −∞- y
3
-
∞. Intwodimensions, G
2
represents the fieldgeneratedbya uniformline source
parallel to the x
3
axis extending along the whole of the line x
1
= y
1
. x
2
= y
2
.
136
6.1 Compact Green’s Function in Two Dimensions 137
Similarly, the compact Green’s function for a cylindrical body (with gener-
ators parallel to x
3
)
G(x. y. t −τ) =
1
4π[X −Y[
δ
_
t −τ −
[X −Y[
c
0
_
.
X
1.2
= x
1.2
−ϕ

1.2
(x). Y
1.2
= y
1.2
−ϕ

1.2
(y). X
3
= x
3
. Y
3
= y
3
.
is a functionof y
3
– x
3
, andthe correspondingtwo-dimensional compact Green’s
function can be found by integrating over −∞- y
3
-∞.
Set ξ =y
3
−x
3
. ¯ x =(x
1
. x
2
) and let [¯ x[ =(x
2
1
÷x
2
2
)
1
2
→∞. Taking the origin
of coordinates within the cylindrical body, we have
G
2

1

_

−∞
δ
_
t −τ −
_
[¯ x[
2
÷ξ
2
c
0
÷
¯ x · Y
c
0
_
[¯ x[
2
÷ξ
2
_

_
[¯ x[
2
÷ξ
2
as [¯ x[ →∞.
where ¯ x · Y = x
1
Y
1
÷ x
2
Y
2
is independent of ξ. To use this to evaluate (6.1.1)
the δ function must be expanded to first order in Y
G
2

1

_

−∞
δ
_
t −τ −
_
[¯ x[
2
÷ξ
2
c
0
_

_
[¯ x[
2
÷ξ
2
÷
¯ x · Y
4πc
0
_

−∞
δ
/
_
t −τ −
_
[¯ x[
2
÷ξ
2
c
0
_

([¯ x[
2
÷ξ
2
)
.
Only the second term on the right depends on y and therefore contributes to the
radiation integral (6.1.1). We can therefore take
G
2

¯ x · Y
4πc
0
_

−∞
δ
/
_
t −τ −
_
[¯ x[
2
÷ξ
2
c
0
_

([¯ x[
2
÷ξ
2
)
=
¯ x · Y
2πc
0

∂t
_

0
δ
_
t −τ −
_
[¯ x[
2
÷ξ
2
c
0
_

([¯ x[
2
÷ξ
2
)
=
¯ x · Y
2πc
0

∂t
_
¸
_
¸
_
H(t −τ −[¯ x[,c
0
)
([¯ x[
2
÷ξ
2
)
¸
¸

∂ξ

[¯ x[
2
÷ξ
2
c
0
¸
¸
_
¸
_
¸
_
ξ=

c
2
0
(t −τ)
2
−[¯ x[
2
=
¯ x · Y
2πc
0

∂t
_
_
_
H(t −τ −[¯ x[,c
0
)
(t −τ)
_
c
2
0
(t −τ)
2
−[¯ x[
2
_
_
_
.
138 6 Vortex–Surface Interaction Noise in Two Dimensions
We shall henceforth in this chapter regard all space vectors as two-dimen-
sional, such as x = (x
1
. x
2
). y = (y
1
. y
2
), and drop the overbar on ¯ x and the
subscript 2 on G
2
and soforth. The dipole component of the two-dimensional
compact Green’s function then becomes
G(x. y. t −τ) ≈
x · Y
2πc
0

∂t
_
_
_
H(t −τ −[x[,c
0
)
(t −τ)
_
c
2
0
(t −τ)
2
−[x[
2
_
_
_
. [x[ →∞.
(6.1.4)
In contrast to the three-dimensional Green’s function, which is nonzero only
on a spherically expanding wavefront, G has an infinite peak at the wavefront
where t − τ − [x[,c
0
=0 followed by a slowly decaying tail. At any point x
in the far field the first sound arrives from the nearest point on the line source
of (6.1.3), after propagating along a ray perpendicular to the source over a
distance equal to [x[, and therefore after a time delay [x[,c
0
; but the observer at x
receives sound continuously after the passage of this wavefront, generated at
more distant sections of the infinitely long line source; the wavefront arrives at
time τ ÷[x[,c
0
, and at a later time t sound is received from those source points
whose distance from x is equal to c
0
(t −τ).
The far-field representation (6.1.4) can be approximated further by expanding
about the wavefront (where t −τ = [x[,c
0
), which contains most of the acoustic
energy. Just to the rear of the wavefront
(t −τ)
_
c
2
0
(t −τ)
2
−[x[
2
≡ (t −τ)
_
c
0
(t −τ) ÷[x[
_
c
0
(t −τ) −[x[

[x[
c
0
_
2[x[
_
c
0
(t −τ) −[x[. for t −τ ∼
[x[
c
0
.
Therefore, (6.1.4) becomes
G(x. y. t −τ) ≈
x · Y


2c
0
[x[
3
2

∂t
_
H(t −τ −[x[,c
0
)

t −τ −[x[,c
0
_
. [x[ →∞. (6.1.5)
(see Question 1 of Problems 6).
The special case of a cylindrical body adjacent to a plane, rigid wall at
x
2
= 0, or of a cylindrical wall cavity or projection from a wall (see Fig. 3.9.2)
is handled by the two-dimensional version of the compact Green’s function
(3.9.3). The procedure described above yields the following expression for the
dipole component of the two-dimensional compact Green’s function
G(x. y. t −τ) ≈
x
1
Y
1
π

2c
0
[x[
3
2

∂t
_
H(t −τ −[x[,c
0
)

t −τ −[x[,c
0
_
. [x[ →∞. (6.1.6)
6.2 Sound Generated by a Line Vortex 139
where Y
1
≡ Y
1
(y
1
. y
2
) is the velocity potential of incompressible flow past the
cylinder in a direction parallel to the wall (with unit speed at large distances
from the body). G represents the field of a dipole orientated parallel to the
wall and perpendicular to the cylinder axis, and the effect of the wall is to
generate an equal image dipole that just doubles the magnitude of the sound
relative to the corresponding dipole (6.1.5) of the cylinder in the absence of the
wall.
6.2 Sound Generated by a Line Vortex Interacting
with a Cylindrical Body
The sound produced by two-dimensional vortex motion at low Mach number
M ∼ :,c
0
near a stationary, rigid cylindrical body of diameter ¹ has charac-
teristic wavelength ∼¹,M ¸ ¹. The acoustic pressure is determined by the
two-dimensional version of (6.1.1) using the compact Green’s function (6.1.5),
viz,
p(x. t ) ≈
−ρ
0
x
j


2c
0
[x[
3
2

∂t
_
t −[x[,c
0
−∞


t −τ −[x[,c
0

_
(ω ∧ v · ∇Y
j
)(y. τ) dy
1
dy
2
. [x[ →∞. (6.2.1)
According to the inviscid form of the Formula (4.4.4) applied to a stationary
body, this can also be written
p(x. t ) ≈
x
j


2c
0
[x[
3
2

∂t
_
t −[x[,c
0
−∞
F
j
(τ) dτ

t −τ −[x[,c
0
. [x[ →∞. (6.2.2)
where F
j
is the force per unit length of the cylinder exerted on the fluid in the
j direction.
In these two-dimensional problems the vorticity ω is directed along the x
3
axis, out of the plane of the paper in Fig. 6.2.1 and parallel to the generators of
the cylinder. Let k be a unit vector in this direction and consider a line vortex
of strength I whose position and translational velocity are
x = x
0
(t ). v =
dx
0
dt
(t ).
If the motion elsewhere is irrotational, we have
ω = Ikδ(x −x
0
(t ))
140 6 Vortex–Surface Interaction Noise in Two Dimensions
Fig. 6.2.1.
so that
ω ∧ v = Ik ∧ vδ(x −x
0
(t )) ≡ Ik ∧
dx
0
dt
(t )δ(x −x
0
(t )). (6.2.3)
and (6.2.1) yields the following general formula for the acoustic pressure as
[x[ →∞:
p(x. t )

−ρ
0
Ix
j


2c
0
[x[
3
2

∂t
_
t −[x[,c
0
−∞
_
k ∧
dx
0

(τ) · ∇Y
j
(x
0
(τ))
_


t −τ −[x[,c
0
=
−ρ
0
Ix
j


2c
0
[x[
3
2

∂t
_
t −[x[,c
0
−∞
_
dx
01

∂Y
j
∂y
2

dx
02

∂Y
j
∂y
1
_
x
0
(τ)


t −τ −[x[,c
0
.
(6.2.4)
6.2.1 Example 1: Sound Produced by Vortex Motion near
a Circular Cylinder
Assume there is no mean flow, and let the vortex strength I be sufficiently
small for the local motion to be considered incompressible. Then, the vortex
will traverse the circular orbit discussed in Section 4.6 (Example 2).
Let the cylinder have radius a, the vortex path have radius r
0
, and take the
coordinate origin at the centre of the cylinder. If I >0 the vortex moves in the
6.2 Sound Generated by a Line Vortex 141
Fig. 6.2.2.
clockwise direction in Fig. 6.2.2 at the speed given by (4.6.8) when r is replaced
by r
0
. Then,
v =
dx
0
dt
(t ) = Ok ∧ x
0
(t ).
O =
−Ia
2
2πr
2
0
_
r
2
0
−a
2
_.
x
0
= r
0
(cos Ot. sin Ot ).
and
k ∧
dx
0
dt
= Ok ∧ (k ∧ x
0
) = −Ox
0
.
Therefore, (6.2.4) becomes
p(x. t ) ≈
ρ
0
IOx
j
r
0


2c
0
[x[
3
2

∂t
_
t −[x[,c
0
−∞
∂Y
j
∂r
(x
0
(τ))


t −τ −[x[,c
0
. (6.2.5)
where r =

y
2
1
÷ y
2
2
is the radial distance from the cylinder axis.
Table 3.9.1 supplies the components of the two-dimensional Kirchhoff vector
for the cylinder:
Y
1
= cos ϑ
_
r ÷
a
2
r
_
. Y
2
= sin ϑ
_
r ÷
a
2
r
_
.
142 6 Vortex–Surface Interaction Noise in Two Dimensions
where (y
1
. y
2
) = r(cos ϑ. sin ϑ). Thus, by introducing polar coordinates for x
x = [x[(cos θ. sin θ)
we find x
j
∂Y
j
∂r
= [x[
_
1 −
a
2
r
2
_
cos(θ −ϑ)
so that
x
j
∂Y
j
∂r
(x
0
(τ)) = [x[
_
1 −
a
2
r
2
0
_
cos(θ −Oτ).
and (6.2.5) becomes
p(x. t ) ≈
ρ
0
IOr
0
2π(2c
0
[x[)
1
2
_
1 −
a
2
r
2
0
_

∂t
_
t −[x[,c
0
−∞
cos(θ −Oτ) dτ

t −τ −[x[,c
0
.
Hence, using the formula
_
t −[x[,c
0
−∞
cos(θ −Oτ) dτ

t −τ −[x[,c
0
=
_
π
[O[
_1
2
cos
_
θ −O
_
t −
[x[
c
0
_

π
4
_
the pressure becomes
p(x. t ) ≈
ρ
0
I[O[
3
2
r
0
2(2πc
0
[x[)
1
2
_
1 −
a
2
r
2
0
_
sin
_
θ −O
_
t −
[x[
c
0
_

π
4
_
= ρ
0
U
2

M
_
πr
0
2[x[
_
r
0
a
_
2
_
1 −
a
2
r
2
0
_
2
sin
_
θ −O
_
t −
[x[
c
0
_

π
4
_
.
[x[ →∞. (6.2.6)
where U =[O[r
0
is the vortex speed.
The acoustic waves decay like 1,

[x[ with distance, which is appropriate
for energy spreading two dimensionally in cylindrically diverging waves, and
have the characteristic dipole amplitude proportional to ρ
0
U
2

M. In three
dimensions the pressure would be proportional to ρ
0
U
2
M, which is smaller by
a factor

M when M _1. The increased amplitude in two dimensions is a
consequence of the infinite extent of the vortex source parallel to the cylinder.
At any particular retarded time t −[x[,c
0
, the acoustic amplitude has the double-
lobed directivity pattern illustrated in Fig. 1.7.1b for a dipole. Because O-0,
the peaks of these lobes at a fixed distance [x[ from the cylinder rotate in the
clockwise direction at angular velocity [O[ following the orbiting vortex, but
with a phase lag of π,4 radians. The reader can confirm that the instantaneous
force exerted on the fluid by the cylinder lies in the direction of the vector x
0
(t )
6.2 Sound Generated by a Line Vortex 143
joining the center of the cylinder to the vortex. The radiation peak therefore
also lags by π,4 the peak in the retarded surface force.
6.2.2 Example 2: Sound Produced by Vortex Motion near a Half-Plane
(Crighton 1972)
The trajectory of a line vortex of strength I interacting with a rigid half-plane is
shown in Fig. 4.6.2 for ideal motion at low Mach number. The sound generated
by the vortex is calculated using the two-dimensional compact Green’s function
(3.9.9), which can be written
G
1
(x. y. t −τ) ≈
sin(θ,2)ϕ

(y)
π

[x[
δ
_
t −τ −
[x[
c
0
_
. [x[ →∞.
ϕ

(y) =

r
0
sin(θ
0
,2). (6.2.7)
where x =[x[(cos θ. sin θ), the coordinates being defined as in Fig. 4.6.2. This
is applicable when the distance r
0
from the edge of the source at (y
1
. y
2
) =
r
0
(cos θ
0
. sin θ
0
) is much smaller than the acoustic wavelength. For a line vortex
at (r
0
. θ
0
) the characteristic frequency ∼:,r
0
, where : is the vortex translational
velocity. The wavelength is therefore of order
r
0
:
c
0
=
r
0
M
¸r
0
for M =
:
c
0
_1.
so that low Mach number motion is sufficient to ensure that the wavelength of
the sound is much larger than the vortex distance from the edge.
Thus, adopting the notation of (6.2.3) and applying (6.1.1) in two dimensions
(Green’s function being given by (6.2.7)), we find
p(x. t ) ≈
−ρ
0
I sin(θ,2)
π

[x[
_
k ∧
dx
0

(τ) · ∇ϕ

(y)δ(y −x
0
(τ))
δ
_
t −τ −
[x[
c
0
_
dy
1
dy
2

=
−ρ
0
I sin(θ,2)
π

[x[
_
k ∧
dx
0
dt
· ∇ϕ

_
. [x[ →∞. (6.2.8)
where on the second line the term in the square brackets is evaluated at the
retarded position x
0
(t −[x[,c
0
) of the vortex.
Now ϕ

is the velocity potential of an ideal flow around the edge of the
half-plane in the anticlockwise sense (with streamlines as in Fig. 6.2.3). It is
144 6 Vortex–Surface Interaction Noise in Two Dimensions
Fig. 6.2.3.
the real part of the complex potential
n = ϕ

÷i ψ

= −i

z. z = y
1
÷i y
2
.
where ϕ

and the stream function ψ

satisfy the Cauchy–Riemann equations
(see Section 4.5)
∂ϕ

∂y
1
=
∂ψ

∂y
2
.
∂ϕ

∂y
2
= −
∂ψ

∂y
1
.
A simple calculation shows that
k ∧ ∇ϕ

= ∇ψ

.
and therefore that
k ∧
dx
0
dt
· ∇ϕ

= −
dx
0
dt
∧ k· ∇ϕ

= −
dx
0
dt
· k ∧ ∇ϕ

= −
dx
0
dt
· ∇ψ

.
The acoustic pressure can therefore be put in the form
p(x. t ) ≈
ρ
0
I sin(θ,2)
π

[x[
_
dx
0
dt
· ∇ψ

_

ρ
0
I sin(θ,2)
π

[x[
_


Dt
_
. [x[ →∞.
(6.2.9)
where [Dψ

,Dt ] is evaluated at the retarded position of the vortex.
6.3 Influence of Vortex Shedding 145
Fig. 6.2.4.
The stream function ψ

is constant on each of the parabolic streamlines of
the ideal flow around the edge defined by ϕ

(Fig. 6.2.3). A vortex that trans-
lated along one of these streamlines would be silent; the actual edge-generated
sound depends on the rate at which the trajectory of the vortex cuts across the
streamlines of this ideal edge flow. This is found as follows
ψ

= −

r
0
cos
_
θ
0
2
_
.
Therefore,


Dt
= −
1
2

r
0
dr
0
dt
cos
_
θ
0
2
_
÷

r
0
2
sin
_
θ
0
2
_

0
dt
.
where r
0
. θ
0
are given by (4.6.7) (in which r is replaced by r
0
and θ by θ
0
).
Performing the calculations we find (see Fig. 6.2.4)
p(x. t ) ≈
ρ
0
I
2
(4π¹)
2
_
¹
[x[
_1
2
sin
_
θ
2
__
It ,8π¹
2
[1 ÷(It ,8π¹
2
)
2
]
5,4
_
t −[x[,c
0
. [x[ →∞.
where ¹ is the distance of closest approach of the vortex to the edge (where it
crosses the x
1
axis at time t = 0 in Fig. 4.6.2).
6.3 Influence of Vortex Shedding
We can use Equation (6.2.9) to form a qualitative picture of the influence of
vortex shedding on sound generation. Let the circulation of the vortex I in
146 6 Vortex–Surface Interaction Noise in Two Dimensions
Fig. 6.2.3 be in the indicated anticlockwise sense, so that fluid near the edge
is induced to flow in a clockwise direction around the edge, as implied by
the dashed curve in the figure. When the Reynolds number is large, inertial
forces actually cause the flow to separate from the edge, resulting in the release
of vorticity of opposite sign from the edge into the wake. Let us assume for
simplicity that this shed vorticity rolls up into a concentrated core of strength
I
s
. Equation (6.2.9) then supplies the following prediction for the net acoustic
pressure
p(x. t ) ≈
ρ
0
sin(θ,2)
π

[x[
_
I
_


Dt
_
I
÷I
s
_


Dt
_
I
s
_
. [x[ →∞.
where the derivatives are evaluated at the retarded positions of I and I
s
respec-
tively. Both vortices translate across the curves ψ

= constant in the direction
of decreasing ψ

, and the derivatives therefore have the same sign. Hence, be-
cause I and I
s
have opposite signs, sound produced by the shed vortex will
tend to cancel the edge-generated sound attributable to the incident vortex I
alone.
This conclusionis applicable toa wide range of fluid–structure interactions. A
typical interaction involves a bounded region of vorticity, called a ‘gust,’ swept
along in a nominally steady mean flow. The localized velocity field of the gust
is determined by the Biot–Savart formula (4.3.1). At high mean flow speeds
it is sometimes permissible to neglect changes in the relative configuration
of the vorticity distribution during its convection past an observation point,
the vorticity is then said to be frozen (at least temporarily) and the induced
velocity is steady in a frame translating with the gust. If the mean flow carries
the gust past the surface S of a stationary body, the free field induced velocity
determined by the Biot–Savart integral is said to produce an upwash velocity on
S; the actual velocity consists of the upwash velocity augmented by the velocity
field required to satisfy the no-slip condition on S. (In an ideal fluid only the
normal component of the upwash velocity is cancelled on S.)
When a gust convects past a stationary airfoil the high Reynolds number
surface force (responsible for the sound) is given by (see (4.4.4))
F
i
= −ρ
0
_
V
∇Y
i
(y) · (ω ∧ v)(y. t ) d
3
y. Y
i
= y
i
−ϕ

i
(y). (6.3.1)
The vector ∇Y
i
is the velocity of an ideal flow past the airfoil that has unit
speed in the i direction at large distances from the airfoil. It is singular (or very
large) at the edges of the airfoil. These singularities have the following signifi-
cance, when the vorticity length scale is small compared to the airfoil chord the
6.3 Influence of Vortex Shedding 147
principal contribution to the integral is from vorticity in the neighborhoods of
the singularities. For example, for the strip airfoil of Fig. 3.6.3
Y
2
= Re(−i
_
z
2
−a
2
). z = y
1
÷i y
2
.
and ∇Y
2
becomes infinite at the leading and trailing edges z = ∓a. An incident,
small-scale gust convecting in the y
1
direction in a mean flow at speed U would
in practice induce shedding fromthe trailing edge at z = a. When this shedding
is ignored the force calculated from (6.3.1) has two principal components,
respectively fromgust elements near the leading and trailing edges. To calculate
the overall force, however, it is necessary to include the contribution from the
shed vorticity, which affects the motion only near the trailing edge when the
length scale of the wake vorticity is small. In the linearized treatment of this
case (discussed in more detail below), when both the gust and wake vorticity
are taken to convect at the same mean velocity U, it is known from unsteady
aerodynamics that the force component produced by the wake is equal and
opposite to that generated by the gust at the trailing edge (Sears 1941).
The effect of this cancellation can be approximated without calculating
any details of the shed vorticity. This is accomplished by formally deleting
the trailing edge singularity from∇Y
2
, and then ignoring the contribution to the
integral (6.3.1) fromthe shed vorticity. To understand this observe that, because
the value of the integral is dominated by vorticity near the edges, it is only the
behaviors of Y
2
near these edges that must be retained in the integrand, and Y
2
can therefore be replaced by the leading order terms in its expansions about the
edges. For the strip airfoil of Fig. 3.6.3, we would write
Y
2
= Re(−i

z −a

z ÷a) ∼ Re(

2a

z ÷a) ÷Re(−i

2a

z −a).
(6.3.2)
The last term is singular at the trailing edge; it is deleted and the following
approximation is used in (6.3.1) with the wake vorticity ignored:
Y
2
∼ Re(

2a

z ÷a). (6.3.3)
where the branch cut for

z ÷a is taken along the real axis from z = −a to
z = ÷∞.
6.3.1 Example: Surface Force Produced by a Periodic Gust
To illustrate the procedure consider incompressible flow parallel to the airfoil
of Fig. 6.3.1 at speed U in the x
1
direction, in which a time harmonic vortex
148 6 Vortex–Surface Interaction Noise in Two Dimensions
Fig. 6.3.1.
sheet of vorticity
ω
I
= γ kδ(x
2
−h)e
−i ω(t −x
1
,U)
. h >0. ω>0.
is convected past the airfoil at perpendicular distance h, where γ is the cir-
culation per unit length of the sheet. The vortex sheet can be regarded as an
elementary model of a periodic wake behind a small diameter circular cylin-
der upstream of the airfoil. The gust upwash velocity induces the shedding of
vorticity ω
S
from the trailing edge of the airfoil. When the reduced frequency
ωa,U is large the hydrodynamic wavelength 2πU,ω of the gust and wake is
much smaller than the airfoil chord, and the surface force is produced primarily
by the gust interaction with the leading edge at x
1
= −a.
The net force F
2
(per unit span) on the fluid in the x
2
direction can therefore
be calculated from (6.3.1) by setting ω = ω
I
, where
ω
I
∧ v = γUjδ(x
2
−h)e
−i ω(t −x
1
,U)
.
(j being a unit vector in the x
2
direction) and by replacing Y
2
by the right-hand
side of (6.3.3):
F
2
= −ρ
0
γU
_

−∞
∂Y
2
∂y
2
(y)δ(y
2
−h)e
−i ω(t −y
1
,U)
dy
1
dy
2
≈ −ρ
0
γU

2a
_

−∞
Re
_
i
2

y
1
÷i h ÷a
_
e
−i ω(t −y
1
,U)
dy
1
= −ρ
0
γUa
_
πU
2i ωa
_1
2
e
−ωh,U−i ω(t ÷a,U)
. (6.3.4)
The force can also be calculated exactly from linearized thin airfoil theory
with proper account taken of vortex shedding. This is the gust loading problem
6.3 Influence of Vortex Shedding 149
of classical aerodynamics (Sears 1941). The linear theory wake is treated as
a vortex sheet downstream of the edge, whose elements convect at the mean
stream velocity U. The strength of the vortex sheet is determined by imposing
the Kutta condition that the pressure (and velocity) should be finite at the edge
(Crighton 1985). For arbitrary values of the reduced frequency ωa,U it is found
that
F
2
= πiρ
0
γUaS
_
ωa
U
_
e
−ωh,U−i ωt
. (6.3.5)
where S(x) is the Sears function, which is defined in terms of the Hankel
functions H
(1)
0
and H
(1)
1
by
S(x) =
2
πx
_
H
(1)
0
(x) ÷i H
(1)
1
(x)
_
. (6.3.6)
In the limit of high reduced frequency
S
_
ωa
U
_

_
iU
2πωa
_1
2
e
−i ωa,U
.
and the substitution of this into (6.3.5) yields the prediction (6.3.4) determined
by the leading edge singularity of Y
2
. The plots in Fig. 6.3.2 of the real and
imaginary parts of S(ωa,U) and its asymptotic limit show that the approx-
imation (6.3.4) and the exact value (6.3.5) of the surface force agree when
ωa,U >1.
Fig. 6.3.2.
150 6 Vortex–Surface Interaction Noise in Two Dimensions
Linear theory does not permit the corresponding force component at the
leading edge to be removed by vorticity production at the edge, because it re-
quires vorticity shed there to be swept over the rigid surface of the airfoil on
which it cannot influence the force because ω ∧ v · ∇Y
2
≡ 0.
6.4 Blade–Vortex Interaction Noise in Two Dimensions
A rigid, two-dimensional airfoil of chord 2a occupies −a -x
1
-a. x
2
= 0 in
the presence of a uniform mean stream at speed U in the positive x
1
direction.
A line vortex of strength I parallel to the airfoil span convects at the mean
flow velocity at a constant distance h above the airfoil (Fig. 6.4.1). This is the
approximation of linearized thin airfoil theory, which is applicable when
I
h
_U.
that is, when the influence on the vortex trajectory of the induced velocity
(∼I,h) of image vortices in the body of the airfoil is negligible. As the vortex
passes the airfoil new vorticity is shed from the trailing edge into the airfoil
wake, which is assumed to consist of a vortex sheet stretching along the x
1
axis
from x
1
= a to x
1
= ÷∞.
Let us first consider the potential flow interaction of the vortex and airfoil,
when no account is taken of vortex shedding. Suppose the vortex passes above
the midchord of the airfoil at time t = 0, then
ω = Ikδ(x
1
−Ut )δ(x
2
−h). v = Ui.
Hence,
ω ∧ v = IUjδ(x
1
−Ut )δ(x
2
−h). (6.4.1)
where i and j are unit vectors in the x
1
and x
2
directions. The acoustic pressure
Fig. 6.4.1.
6.4 Blade–Vortex Interaction Noise in Two Dimensions 151
generated when the wake is ignored is given by (6.2.1) with
Y
1
= y
1
. Y
2
= Re (−i
_
z
2
−a
2
). z = y
1
÷i y
2
.
Thus, ∇Y
1
= i and ω ∧ v · ∇Y
1
≡ 0, and (6.2.1) reduces to
p(x. t ) ≈
−ρ
0
IUx
2


2c
0
[x[
3
2

∂t
_
t −[x[,c
0
−∞
∂Y
2
∂y
2
(Uτ. h)


t −τ −[x[,c
0
.
=
−ρ
0
IU cos O


2c
0
[x[
1
2

∂t
_
t −[x[,c
0
−∞
∂Y
2
∂y
2
(Uτ. h)


t −τ −[x[,c
0
.
[x[ →∞. (6.4.2)
where O = cos
−1
(x
2
,[x[) is the angle between the radiation direction x and
the normal to the airfoil (the x
2
axis). The sound can be attributed to a dipole
source orientated in the x
2
direction.
The radiation produced when a vortex passes very close to the airfoil (so that
h _a) is likely to be particularly intense. The dominant interactions occur as
the vortex passes the edges, where the time scales of the motions ∼h,U. Thus,
the characteristic frequency
ω ∼
U
h
and the reduced frequency
ωa
U

a
h
¸1.
We may therefore regard the leading and trailing edges as independent sources
of sound, and calculate their individual contributions by using the local approx-
imation (6.3.2). For the acoustic pressure p
LE
, say, produced at the leading edge
(x
1
= −a) we take
Y
2
∼ Re (

2a

z ÷a).
so that (6.4.2) becomes
p
LE

−ρ
0
IU cos O


2c
0
[x[
1
2

∂t
_
t −[x[,c
0
−∞
Re
_
i

2a
2(Uτ ÷i h ÷a)
1
2
_



t −τ −[x[,c
0
. [x[ →∞.
To evaluate the integral, make the substitution j=

t −τ −[x[,c
0
and
152 6 Vortex–Surface Interaction Noise in Two Dimensions
perform the differentiation with respect to time. Then,
p
LE

−ρ
0
IU cos O


c
0
_
a
[x[
_1
2

∂t
_

0
Re
_
i
(U[t ] ÷i h ÷a −Uj
2
)
1
2
_
dj
=
ρ
0
IU
2
cos O


c
0
_
a
[x[
_1
2
_

0
Re
_
i
(U[t ] ÷i h ÷a −Uj
2
)
3
2
_
dj.
where [t ] = t −
[x[
c
0
.
The additional substitution j=1,ξ transforms the integrand into an exact dif-
ferential, leading finally to
p
LE

ρ
0
IU
2
cos O


c
0
_
a
[x[
_1
2
_

0
Re
_
i ξ
[(U[t ] ÷i h ÷a)ξ
2
−U]
3
2
_

=
ρ
0
IU

M cos O
4πa
_
a
[x[
_1
2
_
U[t ]
a
÷1
_
_
U[t ]
a
÷1
_
2
÷
_
h
a
_
2
. [x[ →∞. (6.4.3)
where M = U,c
0
.
The corresponding nondimensional pressure signature
p
LE
_
ρ
0
IU

M cos O
4πa
_
a
[x[
_1
2
is plotted in Fig. 6.4.2 as the solid curve when h,a =0.2. The pressure field
Fig. 6.4.2.
6.4 Blade–Vortex Interaction Noise in Two Dimensions 153
is generated predominantly as the vortex passes the leading edge of the air-
foil at the retarded time [t ] =−a,U, with characteristic frequency ω∼U,h.
According to Section 6.3, at high reduced frequencies the sound pressure p
TE
,
say, generated by the potential flow interaction of the vortex with the trailing
edge is cancelled by that produced by the wake vorticity; the solid curve in
Fig. 6.4.2 is therefore representative of the whole of the radiation produced by
the blade–vortex interaction.
To determine p
TE
the calculation described above for p
LE
is repeated after
setting
Y
2
= Re(−i

2a

z −a)
in (6.4.2), leading to
p
TE

−ρ
0
IU cos O


c
0
_
a
[x[
_1
2

∂t
_
t −[x[,c
0
−∞
Re
_
1
(Uτ ÷i h −a)
1
2
_



t −τ −[x[,c
0
=
−ρ
0
IU

M cos O
4πa
_
a
[x[
_1
2
_
h
a
_
_
U[t ]
a
−1
_
2
÷
_
h
a
_
2
. [x[ →∞. (6.4.4)
This is large at the retarded times during which the vortex is close to the trailing
edge. Thus, when the contribution from the wake is ignored (which is equal
and opposite to p
TE
) the overall acoustic pressure signature is given nondimen-
sionally by
( p
LE
÷ p
TE
)
_
ρ
0
IU

M cos O
4πa
_
a
[x[
_1
2
.
which is plotted as the broken line curve in Fig. 6.4.2.
The leading and trailing edge generated components p
LE
and p
TE
have dif-
ferent waveforms, even though they are produced by the vortex interacting with
geometrically identical airfoil edges. This is because the integral in (6.4.2) de-
termines the acoustic pressure at the retarded time [t ] in terms of interactions
between the vortex and the airfoil at all earlier retarded times; it is a further
consequence of the two-dimensional character of the acoustic sources, accord-
ing to which, after the first arrival of sound fromthe nearest point on the source,
additional contributions to the sound continue to be received indefinitely in time
from more distant parts of the source.
154 6 Vortex–Surface Interaction Noise in Two Dimensions
Problems 6
1. Starting from the formula
G ≈
¯ x · Y
2πc
0

∂t
_

0
δ
_
t −τ −
_
[¯ x[
2
÷ξ
2
c
0
_

([¯ x[
2
÷ξ
2
)
.
derive the far-field approximation (6.1.5) for the dipole component of the
two-dimensional compact Green’s function by writing
δ
_
t −τ −
_
[¯ x[
2
÷ξ
2
c
0
_
=
1

_

−∞
e
−i ω(t −τ−

[¯ x[
2
÷ξ
2
c
0
)
dω.
and applying Formula (5.2.11).
2. Investigate the production of sound by the low Mach number motion of a
line vortex of strength I that is parallel to a rigid circular cylinder of radius a
whose axis coincides with the x
3
coordinate axis (c.f., Section 4.6, Example
2). Assume that there is no net circulation around the cylinder, and that there
is a mean flow past the cylinder which has speed U in the x
1
direction when
[x
1
[ ¸ a. If the vortex is initially far upstream of the cylinder at a distance
h from the x
1
axis, examine the production of sound for different values of
the nondimensional parameter I,Uh.
3. Aline vortexof strengthIis parallel toa rigidairfoil occupying−a -x
1
-a.
x
2
= 0. −∞-x
3
-∞, in the presence of a mean flow at speed U in the
x
1
direction. The vortex is initially far upstream of the airfoil at a vertical
stand-off distance h above the plane of the airfoil. There is no net circulation
around the airfoil. If the motion occurs at very small Mach number, calculate
the sound produced when the vortex passes the airfoil for different values
of the nondimensional velocity ratio I,Uh. When U ¸I,h, estimate the
influence on the sound of vortex shedding fromthe trailing edge of the airfoil.
4. A line vortex of strength I is parallel to a rigid airfoil occupying
−a -x
1
-a. x
2
= 0. −∞-x
3
-∞
in fluid at rest at infinity. The vortex is in periodic motion around the airfoil
under the influence of image vortices in the absence of a mean circulation
around the airfoil. Calculate the sound produced when the motion occurs at
a very small Mach number, and show that it can be attributed to two dipole
sources orientated in the x
1
and x
2
directions. Explain the significance of
these sources in terms of the corresponding components of the unsteady
force between the fluid and airfoil.
Problems 6 155
5. A line vortex of strength I traverses a path of the kind illustrated in the
figure past a two-dimensional, thin rigid barrier of length d at right angles
to a plane wall at x
2
= 0. There is a low Mach number mean potential flow
over the barrier that has speed U parallel to the wall at large distances from
the barrier. If the distance of the vortex from the wall is h when the vortex
is far upstream of the barrier, calculate the sound produced as the vortex
passes the barrier for different values of I,Uh. Explain what happens when
I,h _ U. Discuss the forces exerted on the barrier by the flow, and how
they contribute to the radiation.
7
Problems in Three Dimensions
7.1 Linear Theory of Vortex–Airfoil Interaction Noise
Consider aninhomogeneous fieldof vorticity, a gust, convectedinhighReynolds
number, homentropic flow past a stationary rigid airfoil (Fig. 7.1.1). The undis-
turbed flow has speed U in the x
1
direction, where the origin is at a convenient
point within the airfoil, with x
3
along the span and x
2
vertically upward. The
Mach number M = U,c
0
is sufficiently small that convection of sound by the
flow can be ignored, and the airfoil chord can be assumed to be acoustically
compact.
The vortex sound source div(ω∧v) includes vorticity in the gust together with
any vorticity shed from the airfoil, either in response to excitation by the gust,
or as tip vortices responsible for the mean lift. The problemcan be linearized by
assuming that u _U, where curl u = ω, that is, by requiring the gust-induced
velocity, and the perturbation velocities caused by airfoil thickness, twist, cam-
ber, and the angle of attack, to be small. When div(ω ∧ v) is expanded about
the undisturbed mean flow, only the gust vorticity and additional vorticity shed
when the gust encounters the airfoil contribute to the acoustic radiation to first
order. In other words, thickness, twist, camber, and angle of attack may ignored,
and the airfoil regarded as a rigid lamina in the plane x
2
= 0. In this approx-
imation, quadrupoles are neglected and vorticity convects as a frozen pattern
of vortex filaments at the undisturbed mean stream velocity U=(U. 0. 0). In
particular, the wake vorticity is confined to a vortex sheet downstream of the
trailing edge.
When convection of sound by the flow is neglected, the linearized form of
the vortex sound equation (5.2.5) becomes
_
1
c
2
0

2
∂t
2
−∇
2
_
B = div(ω ∧ U). (7.1.1)
156
7.1 Linear Theory of Vortex–Airfoil Interaction Noise 157
Fig. 7.1.1.
with solution
B(x. t ) =
p(x. t )
ρ
0
≈ −
_
(ω ∧ U)(y. τ) ·
∂G
∂y
(x. y. t −τ) d
3
y dτ. [x[ →∞.
(7.1.2)
where ∂G,∂y
2
=0 on both sides (y
2
=±0) of the projection of the airfoil plan-
form onto the y
1
. y
3
plane. At sufficiently small Mach numbers G may be
approximated by Green’s function for an airfoil of compact chord.
The sound produced when a localized, high Reynolds number frozen gust
ω(x−Ut ) ≡ω(x
1
−Ut. x
2
. x
3
) is swept past the airfoil of Fig. 7.1.1 is therefore
given by (5.4.4) with the convection velocity v replaced by U, and the Kirchhoff
vector Y by
Y
1
= y
1
. Y
2
= y
2
−ϕ

2
(y). Y
3
= y
3
.
Thus, because
_
ωd
3
y ≡ 0, Equation (5.4.4) reduces to
p(x. t ) ≈
−ρ
0
U cos O
4πc
0
[x[

∂t
_ _
ω
3
∂Y
2
∂y
2
−ω
2
∂Y
2
∂y
3
_
t −[x[,c
0
d
3
y. [x[ →∞.
(7.1.3)
where O = cos
−1
(x
2
,[x[) is the angle between the radiation direction and the
normal to the airfoil, and the origin is taken in the airfoil within the interaction
region.
Let the interaction occur at an inboard location where the chord may be
regarded as constant, with both the leading and trailing edges at right angles to
the mean flow (so that ∂Y
2
,∂y
3
_ ∂Y
2
,∂y
2
). The planform in the interaction
158 7 Problems in Three Dimensions
Fig. 7.2.1.
regionis thenlocallythe same as that of the two-dimensional airfoil of Fig. 7.2.1,
and Y
2
can be approximated as in (3.9.2) for constant a ≡a(y
3
), such that 2a
is equal to the local chord of the airfoil. Then, (7.1.3) becomes
p(x. t ) ≈
−ρ
0
U cos O
4πc
0
[x[

∂t
_ _
ω
3
∂Y
2
∂y
2
_
t −[x[,c
0
d
3
y. [x[ →∞. (7.1.4)
which reveals that only the spanwise component of vorticity contributes to the
production of sound.
According to Equation (5.4.3) (in which dU
j
,dt = 0 for a stationary airfoil),
this result can also be expressed in the form
p(x. t ) ≈
cos O
4πc
0
[x[
∂ F
2
∂t
_
t −
[x[
c
0
_
. [x[ →∞.
F
2
(t ) = −ρ
0
U
_
ω
3
(y. t )
∂Y
2
∂y
2
(y) d
3
y. (7.2.5)
where −F
2
is the unsteady airfoil lift during the interaction when the motion
is regarded as incompressible, and the vorticity ω
3
includes contributions from
the impinging gust together with any shed into the vortex sheet wake.
7.2 Blade–Vortex Interactions in Three Dimensions
The calculations canbe performedexplicitlyfor a gust inthe formof a rectilinear
line vortex. Let the vortex have circulation I and be orientated with its axis in
the direction of the unit vector n, as indicated in Fig. 7.2.1. The mean flowspeed
is sufficiently large that the vortex can be assumed to maintain its rectilinear
form after being cut by the leading edge of the airfoil. Choose the origin on the
airfoil midchord such that the axis of the vortex passes through the origin at
time t = 0. Any point x on the vortex can then be represented in the parametric
7.2 Blade–Vortex Interactions in Three Dimensions 159
form
x = (Ut. 0. 0) ÷sn. −∞-s -∞. (7.2.1)
where s is distance measured along the vortex from its point of intersection
with the plane of the airfoil. Then, if s

denotes vector distance measured in
the normal direction from the vortex axis,
ω = Inδ(s

).
where the polar angles θ. φ in Figure 7.2.1 define the orientation of the unit
vector
n = (sin θ cos φ. sin θ sin φ. cos θ). 0 -θ -π. 0 -φ -2π.
Because of vortex shedding from the trailing edge, most of the sound is
generated when the vortex is cut by the leading edge. The influence of the shed
vorticity can be formally included by the procedure described in Sections 6.3
and 6.4 by expanding Y
2
about its singularity at the leading edge, that is, by
setting
Y
2
∼ Re(

2a

z ÷a). z = y
1
÷i y
2
.
with the branch cut for the square root taken along the z axis from z = −a to
z = ÷∞. Thus, by recalling the Relation (7.2.1), Equation (7.1.4) becomes
p(x. t ) ≈
−n
3
ρ
0
IU cos O
4πc
0
[x[

∂t
Re
_
_
δ(s

)
_
i

2a
2

y
1
÷i y
2
÷a
__
t −[x[,c
0
d
2
s

ds
=
−n
3
ρ
0
IU cos O
4

2πc
0
[x[

∂t
Re
_

−∞
_
i

a

U[t ] ÷s(n
1
÷i n
2
) ÷a
_
ds
=
n
3
ρ
0
IU
2
cos O
8

2πc
0
[x[
Re
_

−∞
_
i

a
(U[t ] ÷s(n
1
÷i n
2
) ÷a)
3
2
_
ds
=
−n
3
ρ
0
IU
2
cos O
4

2πc
0
[x[
Re
_
i

a
(U[t ] ÷s(n
1
÷i n
2
) ÷a)
1
2
(n
1
÷i n
2
)
_

−∞
.
(7.2.2)
where [t ] = t −[x[,c
0
is the retarded time.
By referring to Fig. 7.2.2 it will be seen that the last line of (7.2.2) is zero
when
U[t ] ÷a -0.
160 7 Problems in Three Dimensions
Fig. 7.2.2.
before the vortex is cut by the leading edge of the airfoil. At later times the
integration along the vortex axis over the infinite range −∞-s -∞must be
split, as indicated in the figure, into the two parts −∞-s -−0. ÷0 -s -∞,
because the square root in the last line of (7.2.2) is discontinuous across the
airfoil; for example, when n
2
>0 the square root is real and positive on the
upper surface (s = ÷0) and real and negative at s = −0. Hence, the acoustic
pressure becomes
p(x. t ) ≈
ρ
0
IUM cos O
2
3
2
π[x[
[sinφ[
tan θ
H
_
U[t ]
a
÷1
_
_
U[t ]
a
÷1
. (7.2.3)
The pressure pulse accordingly begins with a singular peak at the instant at
which the vortex is severed by the leading edge of the airfoil at the retarded time
U[t ],a = −1. The waveform is illustrated by the dotted curve in Fig. 7.2.3,
which is a plot of
p(x. t )

0
IUM cos O,[x[)
=
[sinφ[
2
3
2
π tan θ
H
_
U[t ]
a
÷1
_
_
U[t ]
a
÷1
for θ = 85

. φ = 90

.
The infinite singularity in the pressure is absent for a vortex of nonzero
core radius R, say. If, for example, the vorticity is assumed to be distributed
according to the Gaussian formula
ω(x) =
Ine
−(s

,R)
2
π R
2
.
as a function of distance s

from the vortex axis, the acoustic pressure is found
7.2 Blade–Vortex Interactions in Three Dimensions 161
Fig. 7.2.3.
to be given by (Howe 1998a)
p(x. t )

0
IUM cos O,[x[)

[ sin φ[
3
2
8 tan θ
_
a
π R
_
1
2
`(α). [x[ →∞. for R _a.
(7.2.4)
where
`(α) = [α[
1
2
_
I

1
4
_
α
2
8
_
÷sgn(α)I 1
4
_
α
2
8
__
e
−α
2
,8
. α =
2a[ sin φ[
R
_
U[t ]
a
÷1
_.
and I
±
1
4
are modified Bessel functions of the first kind. The pressure signature
predicted by (7.2.4) for
R = 0.1a. θ = 85

. φ = 90

is plotted as the solid curve in Fig. 7.2.3, and differs negligibly from the line
vortex prediction when U[t ],a >−1.
The broken-line curve inFig. 7.2.3represents the pressure signature produced
by the potential flow interaction between the finite core vortex and airfoil (i.e.,
when vortex shedding is ignored). It is an odd function of the retarded time
[t ]. The large negative peak produced as the vortex crosses the trailing edge (at
U[t ],a =1) is cancelled by an equal and opposite contribution generated by the
wake. The reader can easily show that, when the finite size of the vortex core is
162 7 Problems in Three Dimensions
ignored, the potential flow, trailing edge generated pressure pulse is given by
p(x. t ) ≈ −
ρ
0
IUM cos O
2
3
2
π[x[
[sinφ[
tan θ
H
_
1 −
U[t ]
a
_
_
1 −
U[t ]
a
.
7.3 Sound Produced by Vortex Motion near a Sphere
The sound generated when a nominally rectilinear vortex is swept past a com-
pact rigid body can also be treated in a linearized fashion, by assuming that
each element of the vortex core is convected along a streamline of the steady
undisturbed mean flow at the local mean velocity. It is not generally possible,
however, to include the influence of vortex shedding in a satisfactory manner,
except perhaps for streamlined body shapes that are amenable to treatment by
the strip theory of unsteady aerodynamics.
To illustrate the procedure, consider a rigid sphere of radius a with center at
the coordinate origin in the presence of a low Mach number irrotational mean
flow which is in the x
1
direction at speed U for [x[ ¸a. The mean velocity at
x can therefore be written
U = U∇X
1
(x). (7.3.1)
where X
1
(x) is the x
1
component of the Kirchhoff vector for the sphere, which
has the general form (Table 3.9.1)
X
i
= x
i
_
1 ÷
a
3
2[x[
3
_
. (7.3.2)
Suppose a line vortex of strength I is initially far upstream of the sphere
and parallel to the x
3
axis at a distance h above the plane x
2
=0. The vortex is
convected toward the sphere by the mean flow. The part of the vortex that passes
close to the sphere must evidently be deformed to pass around the sphere; more
distant parts of the vortex (at [x
3
[ ¸a) are unaffected and remain parallel to the
x
3
direction during the whole of the interaction. The shape of the distorted vortex
will be symmetric with respect to the mid-plane x
3
=0; the vortex element
initially on x
3
=0 remains on this plane of symmetry as it convects past the
sphere along a mean streamline, as illustrated in Fig. 7.3.1, which shows the
motion in the plane x
3
= 0.
The shape of the vortex at time t is determined by the solution of the equations
dx
1
dt
= U
∂ X
1
∂x
1
(x).
dx
2
dt
= U
∂ X
1
∂x
2
(x).
dx
3
dt
= U
∂ X
1
∂x
3
(x).
7.3 Sound Produced by Vortex Motion near a Sphere 163
Fig. 7.3.1.
for each element of the vortex. If the undistorted parts of the vortex (at [x
3
[ ¸a)
are assumed to convect across the plane x
1
= 0 at time t = 0, these equations
are to be integrated subject to the initial conditions
x
1
= Ut . x
2
= h. x
3
= x
0
3
t →−∞.
where x
0
3
is the initial spanwise location of the vortex element.
In terms of the nondimensional variables
T =
Ut
a
. ¯ x =
x
a
.
the equations of motion of a point on the vortex are found to be
d ¯ x
1
dT
= 1 ÷
¯ x
2
2
÷ ¯ x
2
3
−2¯ x
2
1
2
_
¯ x
2
1
÷ ¯ x
2
2
÷ ¯ x
2
3
_5
2
.
d ¯ x
2
dT
=
−3¯ x
1
¯ x
2
2
_
¯ x
2
1
÷ ¯ x
2
2
÷ ¯ x
2
3
_5
2
.
d ¯ x
3
dT
=
−3¯ x
1
¯ x
3
2
_
¯ x
2
1
÷ ¯ x
2
2
÷ ¯ x
2
3
_5
2
.
These are solved (for example, by the Runge–Kutta method described in
Section 4.6) by starting the integration at T =−10, say. It can be safely assumed
that the sphere has no perceptible influence on vortex elements initially located
at [ ¯ x
3
[ >10. Because the motion is symmetric about ¯ x
3
=0 the solutions are
required only for the N ÷1 vortex elements with respective the initial positions
¯ x
1
= T. ¯ x
2
=
h
a
. ¯ x
3
= ¯ x
n
3
at T = −10.
where ¯ x
n
3
= 10n,N. 0 ≤n ≤ N, and N is a suitably large integer.
164 7 Problems in Three Dimensions
Fig. 7.3.2.
Figure 7.3.2 illustrates successive calculated positions of the vortex with in-
creasing values of the time T = Ut ,a for the case h,a = 0.2. The distortion of
the vortex first becomes evident at about T = −2. The hairpin loop is formed
because the translation velocities of vortex elements close to the sphere are small
inthe neighborhoodof the stagnationpoints just infront andjust tothe rear of the
sphere; the accelerated motion over the upper surface of the sphere is insufficient
to counteract the formation of the loop. In reality, of course, the motion would
be strongly influenced by large self-induced velocities, by image vorticity in
the sphere, and by viscous diffusion of vorticity from the vortex and from the
surface of the sphere, none of which is accounted for in the present calculation.
The sound generated during this potential flow interaction can be calculated
using the Formula (5.4.4) when the sphere is compact:
p(x. t ) ≈
−ρ
0
x
j
4πc
0
[x[
2

∂t
_
(ω ∧ v)
_
y. t −
[x[
c
0
_
· ∇Y
j
(y) d
3
y. [x[ →∞.
(7.3.3)
where
v = U∇Y
1
(y).
7.3 Sound Produced by Vortex Motion near a Sphere 165
There is no unsteady drag contribution to (7.3.3) from j = 1 because ω∧∇Y
1
·
∇Y
1
≡ 0. Similarly, there can be no net side-force on the sphere because of
the symmetric form of the vortex, and therefore there will be no contribution
from j =3. The sound is accordingly produced by a dipole source orientated
in the x
2
direction; that is, the interaction produces an unsteady lift force in this
direction which is responsible for the sound, which has the representation
p(x. t ) ≈
−ρ
0
U cos O
4πc
0
[x[

∂t
_
(ω · ∇Y
1
∧ ∇Y
2
)
_
y. t −
[x[
c
0
_
d
3
y. [x[ →∞.
(7.3.4)
where O = cos
−1
(x
2
,[x[) is the angle between the observer direction x and the
x
2
axis.
To evaluate the integral, write
ω = Iδ(s

)ˆ s. d
3
y = d
2
s

ds.
where ˆ s is a unit vector locally parallel to ω, s

is the vector distance measured
in the normal direction from the local axis of the vortex, and s is distance
measured along the vortex in the direction of ω. The integral (7.3.4) can then
be cast in the following nondimensional form, suitable for numerical evaluation,
p(x. t )
ρ
0
IUM cos O,4π[x[
= −

∂T
_

−∞
[ˆ s · ∇Y
1
∧∇Y
2
] d ¯ s. ¯ s =
s
a
. M =
U
c
0
.
(7.3.5)
where the integrand is evaluated at the retarded position of the distorted vortex.
Now the integral in (7.3.5) is divergent, because ˆ s · ∇Y
1
∧ ∇Y
2
→ 1 as
¯ s →±∞. The divergence is not real, however, but a consequence of the formal
operations used in the application of the compact Green’s function. The infinite
contributions to the integral from large values of ¯ s are equal at successive
retarded locations of the vortex, and disappear on differentiation with respect
to T. The integral can therefore be evaluated numerically by restricting the range
of integration to a finite interval, say, −10 - ¯ s -10, because the contributions
at larger values of ¯ s are the same for all retarded times, and give no contribution
to the sound when differentiated.
Typical plots of the calculated nondimensional pressure (7.3.5) are shown in
Fig. 7.3.3 for two values of h,a; they illustrate how the sound level decreases
as the initial standoff distance h of the vortex increases relative to the radius a
of the sphere.
166 7 Problems in Three Dimensions
Fig. 7.3.3.
7.4 Compression Wave Generated When a Train Enters a Tunnel
A train entering a tunnel pushes aside the stationary air, most of which flows
over the train and out of the tunnel portal, but the build-up of pressure just ahead
of the train propagates into the tunnel as a compression wave at the speed of
sound. In a long tunnel the compression wavefront can experience nonlinear
steepening that is ultimately manifested as a loud, impulsive bang or ‘crack’
(calleda micro-pressure wave) radiatingout of the distant tunnel exit. Inaddition
inaudible low-frequency pressure fluctuations called infrasound (at frequencies
∼10–20 Hz) are radiated from the tunnel portal into the open air when the train
enters and leaves the tunnel. All of these waves are indicated schematically in
Fig. 7.4.1. Their effects become pronounced when the train speed U exceeds
Fig. 7.4.1.
7.4 Compression Wave Generated When a Train Enters a Tunnel 167
Fig. 7.4.2.
about 200 km/h (125 mi/h), when in particular the micro-pressure wave and the
infrasound can cause vibrations and annoying structural rattles in neighboring
buildings.
The formation of the compression wave can be studied in terms of the simpler
problem involving an axisymmetric train entering axisymmetrically a semi-
infinite, circular cylindrical duct of radius R and cross-sectional area A = π R
2
(Fig. 7.4.2). Let the train be travelling at constant speed U in the negative x
1
direction, where the origin O is at the center of the tunnel entrance plane, so that
the x
1
axis coincides with the axis of the tunnel. Denote the pressure, density,
and speed of sound in the air respectively by ¯ p. ρ and c. They vary with position
and time within the tunnel, and their corresponding undisturbed values are
p
0
. ρ
0
. c
0
.
The cross section of the train is assumed to become uniform with constant
area A
0
=πh
2
at a distance L fromthe nose of the train, where h is the uniform
maximumtrain radius. The aspect ratio h,L of the nose is takentobe sufficiently
small, andthe trainprofile sufficientlystreamlined, toensure that flowseparation
does not occur. In practice the Mach number M =U,c
0
does not exceed 0.4,
and the blockage A
0
,A≤0.2. If heat transfer and frictional losses are neglected
during the initial stages of wave formation, the air flow may be regarded as
homentropic, and the compression wave can be calculated using the vortex
sound equation (5.2.5)
_
D
Dt
_
1
c
2
D
Dt
_

1
ρ
∇· (ρ∇)
_
B =
1
ρ
div(ρω ∧ v). (7.4.1)
The air in the compression wave region ahead of the train may be regarded as
linearly perturbed from its mean state, with B ≈ p,ρ
0
≡ ( ¯ p − p
0
),ρ
0
. In this
168 7 Problems in Three Dimensions
simple model the vorticity ω vanishes everywhere except within the outer shear
layer of the exit flow of the air displaced when the train enters the tunnel (see
Fig. 7.4.2).
Let f ≡ f (x
1
÷Ut. x
2
. x
3
) =0 be a control surface S contained within the
fluid that just encloses the moving train, with f -0 inside S (in the region oc-
cupied by the train) and f >0 outside. The surface is fixed relative to the train,
and the influence of the train on its surroundings can be represented in terms
of monopole and dipole sources on S. In the usual way, multiply (7.4.1) by
H ≡ H( f ) and rearrange (noting that DH,Dt =0) to obtain
_
D
Dt
_
1
c
2
D
Dt
_

1
ρ
∇ · (ρ∇)
_
(HB)
=
1
ρ
div(Hρω ∧ v) −(∇B ÷ω ∧ v) · ∇H −
1
ρ
div(ρB∇H). (7.4.2)
This is a generalization of Equation (5.3.3). The two terms on the right-hand side
involving ∇H respectively represent monopole and dipole sources distributed
over the moving surface f (x
1
÷Ut. x
2
. x
3
) = 0.
When frictional losses are neglected Crocco’s equation (4.2.5) reduces to
∂v,∂t = −∇B −ω ∧ v, so that the source terms can be written

∂t
(U · ∇H) −v · ∇
∂ H
∂t

1
ρ
div (ρB∇H) ÷
1
ρ
div(Hρω ∧ v).
where U = (−U. 0. 0). The compressibility of the air adjacent to S and within
the very lowMach number exterior flowfromthe tunnel portal can be neglected
when M(A
0
,A)
2
_1 (Howe et al. 2000), and the source approximated further
by

∂t
(U · ∇H) ÷div (v U · ∇H) −div
__
p
ρ
0
÷
1
2
:
2
_
∇H
_
÷div(Hω ∧ v).
where the relation ∂ H( f ),∂t = −U · ∇H( f ) has been used.
Thus, if the nonlinear terms onthe left of (7.4.2) (whichaffect the propagation
of the compression wave) are also ignored, the equation finally reduces to
_
1
c
2
0

2
∂t
2
−∇
2
_
(HB) =

∂t
(U · ∇H) ÷div (v U · ∇H)
−div
__
p
ρ
0
÷
1
2
:
2
_
∇H
_
÷div(Hω ∧ v). (7.4.3)
7.4 Compression Wave Generated When a Train Enters a Tunnel 169
Fig. 7.4.3.
7.4.1 Linear Theory
When the blockage A
0
,Ais small it is sufficient to retain only the first monopole
source on the right-hand side of Equation (7.4.3). This source can be simplified
when the aspect ratio h,L _1 by introducing a slender body approximation.
To do this, consider a system of cylindrical coordinates in which r =

x
2
2
÷ x
2
3
is the perpendicular distance from the axis of the train. The control surface
equation
f (x
1
÷Ut. x
2
. x
3
) = 0 can be written r =
¯
f (x
1
÷Ut ).
where A
T
(s) = π
¯
f
2
(s) is the cross-sectional area of the train at distance s from
the nose, and the nose is assumed to cross the tunnel entrance plane (x
1
=0)
at t =0. As the train moves (to the left in Fig. 7.4.3) the rate at which air is
displaced by a section of the train of length dx
1
is
U2π
¯
f (x
1
÷Ut ) d
¯
f (x
1
÷Ut ) = U2π
¯
f (x
1
÷Ut )

¯
f
∂x
1
(x
1
÷Ut ) dx
1
≡ U
∂A
T
∂x
1
(x
1
÷Ut ) dx
1
.
Thus,
U
∂A
T
∂x
1
(x
1
÷Ut ) = monopole source strength per unit length of the train.
When h,L _1, we can collapse the monopole source distribution over the
surface of the train into a line source concentrated on its axis, and approximate
the monopole on the right-hand side of Equation (7.4.3) by

∂t
(U · ∇H) (x. t ) ≈

∂t
_
U
∂A
T
∂x
1
(x
1
÷Ut )δ(x
2
)δ(x
3
)
_
.
170 7 Problems in Three Dimensions
The source strength is proportional to the rate at which the train cross section
changes with distance along the train, and is nonzero only in the vicinity of the
train nose (and also the tail).
The corresponding approximation of Equation (7.4.3) is therefore
_
1
c
2
0

2
∂t
2
−∇
2
_
(HB) =

∂t
_
U
∂A
T
∂x
1
(x
1
÷Ut )δ(x
2
)δ(x
3
)
_
. (7.4.4)
where B → p,ρ
0
in the linear acoustic region ahead of the train.
The monopole in this equation does not depend on time when viewed in a
reference frame moving at the uniformsubsonic speedU of the train. The source
therefore creates only a nonacoustic near field when travelling within the tunnel
or in free space far fromthe tunnel entrance (c.f., Question 4 of Problems 1 when
q
0
(t ) =constant). The compression wave is produced when the near field of the
source interacts with the tunnel portal, as the train nose enters the tunnel. This
occurs over a time ∼R,U, so that the characteristic thickness of the wavefront
∼R,M ¸R. Equation (7.4.4) can therefore be solved by using the compact
Green’s function (3.9.13) for a duct entrance
G(x. y; t −τ) ≈
c
0
2A
_
H
_
t −τ −


(x) −ϕ

(y)[
c
0
_
− H
_
t −τ ÷
ϕ

(x) ÷ϕ

(y)
c
0
__
.
where ϕ

(x) is the velocity potential of a uniform incompressible flow out of
the tunnel portal that has unit speed far inside the tunnel (see (3.9.14)).
Thus, at x within the tunnel, ahead of the train where B = p,ρ
0
, we have
p ≡ p
_
t ÷
x
1
c
0
_
≈ρ
0

∂t
__

−∞
U
∂A
T
∂y
1
(y
1
÷Uτ)G(x. y
1
. 0. 0; t −τ) dy
1

=
ρ
0
Uc
0
2A
_

−∞
{A
/
T
(y
1
− Mϕ

(y
1
. 0. 0) ÷U[t ])
−A
/
T
(y
1
÷ Mϕ

(y
1
. 0. 0) ÷U[t ])] dy
1
. (7.4.5)
where the prime on A
T
denotes differentiation with respect to the argument,
and [t ] =t ÷ (x
1
− ¹
/
),c
0
is the effective retarded time. Because nonlinear
propagation terms have been ignored, this approximation determines the initial
form of the compression wave profile, before the onset of nonlinear steepening.
It is therefore applicable within the region several tunnel diameters ahead of
the train, during and just after tunnel entry.
7.4 Compression Wave Generated When a Train Enters a Tunnel 171
The main contributions to the Integral (7.4.5) are from the vicinities of the
nose and tail of the train, where the cross-sectional area A
T
is changing. The
compression wave is generated as the nose enters the tunnel, and may be cal-
culated by temporarily considering a train of semi-infinite length. During the
formation of the wave, and in the particular case in which the Mach number is
small enough that terms ∼O(M
2
) are negligible, the term Mϕ

in the arguments
of A
/
T
in (7.4.5) is small, and we then find, by expanding to first order in Mϕ

and integrating by parts, that
p ≈
ρ
0
U
2
A
_

−∞
∂A
T
∂y
1
(y
1
÷U[t ])
∂ϕ

∂y
1
(y
1
. 0. 0) dy
1
. M
2
_1. (7.4.6)
After the nose has passed into the tunnel, ∂ϕ

,∂y
1
=1 in the region occupied
by the nose, and (7.4.6) predicts the overall (linear theory) pressure rise to be
Lp ≈ ρ
0
U
2
A
0
,A. But the linear theory, asymptotic pressure rise can also be
calculated exactly, with no restriction on Mach number, to be
Lp =
ρ
0
U
2
A
0
A(1 − M
2
)
.
because this is attained when ϕ

(y
1
. 0. 0) ≈ y
1
− ¹
/
in (7.4.5) (see Equation
(3.9.14)). This implies that the Approximation (7.4.6) can be extrapolated to
finite Mach numbers by writing
p ≈
ρ
0
U
2
A(1 − M
2
)
_

−∞
∂A
T
∂y
1
(y
1
÷U[t ])
∂ϕ

∂y
1
(y
1
. 0. 0) dy
1
. (7.4.7)
This extrapolation of the linear theory to finite values of M turns out to be
applicable for M -0.4 (Howe et al. 2000).
Figure 7.4.4 illustrates schematically an experimental arrangement used by
Maeda et al. (1993) to investigate the compression wave. Wire-guided, axisym-
metric model trains are projected into and along the axis of a tunnel consisting of
a 7-m long circular cylinder of internal diameter 0.147 m. The nose aspect ratio
h,L = 0.2, the blockage A
0
,A = 0.116, and the projection speed U ≈ 230
km/h (M ≈ 0.188). The train nose profiles include the cone, and the paraboloid
and ellipsoid of revolution, with respective cross-sectional areas given by
A
T
(s)
A
0
=
_
s
2
L
2
.
s
L
.
s
L
_
2 −
s
L
_
. 0 -s -L.
1. s ≥ L.
The data points in the figure are measurements (made at the point labelled T)
of the pressure gradient dp,dt 1 m from the entrance for these three different
172 7 Problems in Three Dimensions
Fig. 7.4.4.
nose profiles. The solid curves are predictions of Equation (7.4.7), evaluated
using the following formulae for ∂ϕ

,∂y
1
(Howe 1998b):
∂ϕ

∂y
1
(y) =
1
2

1

_

0
I
0
_
ξr
R
__
2K
1
(ξ)
I
1
(ξ)
_1
2
sin
_
ξ
_
y
1
R
÷Z(ξ)
__
dξ.
Z(ξ) =
1
π
_

0
ln
_
K
1
(j)I
1
(j)
K
1
(ξ)I
1
(ξ)
_
dj
j
2
−ξ
2
.
where r =
_
y
2
2
÷ y
2
3
- R and I
0
, I
1
, and K
1
are modified Bessel functions.
The linear theory underpredicts the maximum observed pressure gradients
by about 8%. The agreement with experiment can be greatly improved by inc-
luding contributions from the surface dipoles in Equation (7.4.3) (which in a
first approximation are determined by the drag force exerted on the nose of the
train by the linear theory pressure rise) and, to a lesser extent, by including the
vortex sound generated by the tunnel exit-flow vorticity (the final source term
on the right of (7.4.3)).
Problems 7
1. The termω
2
∂Y
2
,∂y
3
in the Representation (7.1.3) of the sound produced by
a gust interacting with a thin airfoil accounts for the influence of changes in
Problems 7 173
the airfoil chord 2a(y
3
) over the interaction region. Show that when
da
dy
3
(y
3
) _1
the Formula (7.2.3) for the sound produced by a line vortex is given in a first
approximation by
p(x. t ) ≈
ρ
0
IUM cos O
2
3
2
π[x[
[sinφ[
sin θ

_
cos θ −sin θ cos φ
_
da
dy
3
_
0
_
H
_
U[t ]
a
÷1
_
_
U[t ]
a
÷1
.
where da,dy
3
is evaluated at y
3
= 0, where the vortex is cut by the airfoil.
Show that this result is identical with that given by (7.1.4) provided that
in (7.1.4) ω
3
is interpreted as the component of the vorticity parallel to the
local leading edge of the airfoil and the convection velocity U is replaced by
its component normal to the local leading edge.
2. A vortex ring orientated with its axis parallel to the ÷x
1
axis is convected in
a low Mach number mean flow at speed U in the x
1
direction past the edge
of the rigid half-plane x
1
-0. x
2
= 0. −∞-x
3
-∞. Use the compact
Green’s function
G(x. y. t −τ) =
1

2

2πi c
0
ϕ

(x)ϕ

(y)
[x − y
3
i
3
[
3,2
_

−∞

ωe
−i ω(t −[x−y
3
i
3
[,c
0
)
dω.
where ϕ

is defined as in (3.9.6), to calculate the sound produced as the
vortex passes the edge when the influence of the half-plane on the motion
of the ring is ignored.
3. Calculate the sound produced within and outside a semi-finite circular cylin-
drical rigid pipe when a vortex ring exhausts axisymmetrically fromthe open
end. Neglect the influence of the pipe walls on the motion of the vortex and
ignore any change in the vortex radius at the exit.
4. Determine the (quadrupole) sound produced by the head-on collision of
two equal ring vortices. Estimate the sound generated when a ring vortex is
incident normally on a plane wall.
174 7 Problems in Three Dimensions
5. Use the Green’s function (3.9.15) and Equation (7.4.4) to determine the
infrasound generated by a train entering a tunnel modeled by the unflanged,
circular cylindrical duct in Fig. 3.9.6b. Assume that the train travels along
the axis of the duct and show that the acoustic pressure at the far field point
x outside the tunnel is given approximately by
p(x. t ) ≈
ρ
0
U
2
M
4π[x[
_
1 −
x
1
[x[
_

_

−∞
∂A
T
∂y
1
(y
1
÷U[t ])

2
ϕ

∂y
2
1
(y
1
. 0. 0) dy
1
. [x[ →∞.
where [t ] = t −[x[,c
0
.
8
Further Worked Examples
8.1 Blade–Vortex Interactions in Two Dimensions
The linear theory of the lowMach number, two-dimensional interaction of a line
vortex with an airfoil was discussed in Section 6.4. The interaction will now be
examined in more detail, including also the influence of image vortices on the
motion. The general problem to be considered is depicted in Fig. 8.1.1, which
shows a vortex of strength I moving in the neighbourhood of a rigid airfoil of
chord 2a occupying −a - x
1
-a. x
2
=0. There is no mean circulation about
the airfoil. We shall consider cases with and without a mean flow in the x
1
direction and examine the influence of vortex shedding from the trailing edge.
8.1.1 Equation of Motion of the Vortex
At time t let the vortex be at
x ≡ (x
1
. x
2
) = x
0
(t ). and translate at velocity v
0
=
dx
0
dt
(t ).
If we set z = x
1
÷i x
2
. z
0
= x
01
÷i x
02
, the transformation
ζ =
z
a
÷
_
z
2
a
2
−1 (8.1.1)
maps the fluid region in the z plane of the airfoil into the region [ζ [ >1 in
the ζ plane. The upper and lower faces of the airfoil (x
2
=±0) respectively
transform into the upper and lower halves of the unit circular cylinder [ζ [ = 1,
and the vortex maps into an equal vortex at ζ = ζ
0
(Fig. 8.1.2). In the absence
of mean flow (U =0), and when there is no mean circulation about the cylin-
der (and therefore about the airfoil), the complex potential of the motion is ob-
tainedbyplacinganimage vortex−Iat the inverse point ζ =1,ζ

0
together with
175
176 8 Further Worked Examples
Fig. 8.1.1.
a vortex ÷I at the center of the cylinder. The two interior vortices ensure that
the total circulation around the cylinder vanishes. Then,
n(ζ ) = −
i I

ln(ζ −ζ
0
) ÷
i I

ln
_
ζ −
1
ζ

0
_

i I

ln ζ.
The velocitypotential of the motioninthe z plane is givenbysettingζ = ζ (z).
Because a mean flow in the x
1
direction is unaffected by the airfoil, we can
include its contribution by adding the complex potential Uz. Then,
n(z) = −
i I

ln(ζ (z) −ζ (z
0
)) ÷ F(z).
where F(z) =
i I

ln
_
ζ (z) −
1
ζ (z
0
)

_

i I

ln ζ (z) ÷Uz.
This is of the formgiven in (4.6.1), so that the corresponding equation of motion
Fig. 8.1.2.
8.1 Blade–Vortex Interactions in Two Dimensions 177
of the vortex at z
0
is found from (4.6.3) to be
dz

0
dt

dx
01
dt
−i
dx
02
dt
= −
i Iζ
//
(z
0
)
4πζ
/
(z
0
)
÷ F
/
(z
0
).
that is
dz

0
dt
=
i I
4πa

Z
2
−1
_
Z

Z
2
−1
−1 ÷
2

0
[
2
−1
_
÷U. (8.1.2)
where Z =
z
0
a
. ζ
0
= Z ÷
_
Z
2
−1.
Equation (8.1.2) takes no account of the influence of vortex shedding. In a
linearized calculation (in which image effects in the airfoil are neglected) this
could be done by assuming shed vorticity to lie in a thin vortex sheet downstream
of the trailing edge at x
1
= a, as in Section 6.3. This would lead to a solution in
terms of the Sears function (6.3.6), but we shall not do this, because it limits the
discussion to linearized motions. Instead, we shall apply the method discussed
in Section 6.4, where the effects of vortex shedding are modelled by deleting
singularities from the compact Green’s function.
8.1.2 Formula for the Acoustic Pressure
The sound produced by the lowMach number motion of the vortex is calculated
from (6.2.4):
p(x. t ) ≈
−ρ
0
Ix
j


2c
0
[x[
3
2

∂t
_
t −[x[,c
0
−∞
_
dx
01

∂Y
j
∂y
2

dx
02

∂Y
j
∂y
1
_
x
0
(τ)



t −τ −[x[,c
0
. (8.1.3)
where the Kirchhoff vector for the strip airfoil has the components (Table 3.9.1)
Y
1
= y
1
. Y
2
= Re(−i
_
z
2
−a
2
). z = y
1
÷i y
2
. (8.1.4)
By defining the radiation angle O for an observer at x in the far field as in
Fig. 8.1.1, we can write
p(x. t ) ≈
ρ
0
I sin O


2c
0
[x[

∂t
_
t −[x[,c
0
−∞
dx
02

(τ)


t −τ −[x[,c
0

ρ
0
I cos O


2c
0
[x[


∂t
_
t −[x[,c
0
−∞
_
dx
01

∂Y
2
∂y
2

dx
02

∂Y
2
∂y
1
_
x
0
(τ)


t −τ −[x[,c
0
.
The two integrals in this formula represent the acoustic fields of dipole sources.
According to Curle’s theory (Section 2.3) and the Formula (6.2.2), the strengths
178 8 Further Worked Examples
of these dipoles are determined by the unsteady force (F
1
. F
2
) exerted on the
fluid (per unit span) by the airfoil. The first is aligned with the airfoil chord
(the mean flow direction) and represents the influence of suction forces at the
leading and trailing edges (Batchelor 1967); the second component F
2
is equal
and opposite tothe unsteadylift experiencedbythe airfoil duringthe interaction.
In general the integrals must be evaluated numerically using the solution of
the equation of motion (8.1.2). Introduce the shorthand notation
W =
d
dz
(−i
_
z
2
−a
2
) =
−i Z

Z
2
−1
(8.1.5)
evaluated at the vortex. Then,
_
dx
01

∂Y
2
∂y
2

dx
02

∂Y
2
∂y
1
_
x
0
(τ)
≡ −a Im
_
W(Z)
dZ

_
.
and the acoustic pressure becomes
p(x. t ) ≈
ρ
0
Ia


2c
0
[x[

∂t
_
sin O
_
[t ]
−∞
Im
_
dZ

_


[t ] −τ
÷cos O
_
[t ]
−∞
Im
_
W(Z)
dZ

_


[t ] −τ
_
. (8.1.6)
where [t ] = t −[x[,c
0
is the retarded time, and it is understood that Z = Z(τ).
Equations (8.1.2) and (8.1.6) for the vortex motion and the acoustic pressure
will now be applied to several different special cases.
8.1.3 Linear Theory
In the linearized approximation the vortex is swept past the airfoil along a
trajectory parallel to the x
1
direction at precisely the uniform mean flow speed
U. This is the case illustrated in Fig. 6.4.1. When the standoff distance h _a it
was argued in Section 6.4 that the influence of vortex shedding fromthe trailing
edge could be estimated by deleting the singularity that occurs at the edge from
the Green’s function and ignoring the shed vorticity. Only the second integral
in (8.1.6) contributes to the sound (because dZ,dτ = U,a is real and F
1
≡ 0),
and the trailing edge singularity corresponds to the singularity of W(Z) at
Z =1. W(Z) is singular at both the leading and trailing edges (Z =±1), which,
other things being equal, are therefore the most significant sources of sound
at high frequencies, because the second integral in (8.1.6) is dominated by
contributions from the neighbourhoods of the singularities. By deleting the
8.1 Blade–Vortex Interactions in Two Dimensions 179
contribution from the trailing edge we are asserting that all of the sound is
produced by the interaction of the vortex with the leading edge. Near this edge
W(Z) ≈
1

2

Z ÷1
. (8.1.7)
where the branch cut for

Z ÷1 runs along the real axis from Z = −1 to Z =
÷∞. Makingthis substitutionin(8.1.6), measuringtime fromthe instant that the
vortex crosses the midchord x
1
=0 of the airfoil, so that Z =Uτ,a ÷i h,a, and
changing the integration variable to ξ =1,

t −τ −[x[,c
0
, we then recover
the result (6.4.3), which can be written,
p(x. t )
ρ
0
IU

M cos O(a,[x[)
1
2
_
4πa

_
U[t ]
a
÷1
_
_
U[t ]
a
÷1
_
2
÷
_
h
a
_
2
. [x[ →∞. (8.1.8)
The nondimensional acoustic pressure signature (the right-hand side of
(8.1.8)) is plotted as the solid curves in Fig. 8.1.3 for h,a = 0.2. 0.5. 1.0.
Fig. 8.1.3.
180 8 Further Worked Examples
It was pointedout inSection6.3that the linearizedproblemof determiningthe
unsteady force F
2
exerted on the fluid when an incompressible, sinusoidal gust
convects past the airfoil can be solved exactly with full account taken of vortex
shedding, in terms of the Sears function (6.3.6). This force also determines
the low Mach number acoustic radiation by Equation (6.2.2) (because F
1
≡0),
which in the present case can be shown to predict that
p(x. t )
ρ
0
IU

M cos O(a,[x[)
1
2
_
4πa


2πRe
_

0
(i λ)
1
2
S(λ)e
−λ{h,a÷iU[t ],a]
dλ.
[x[ →∞. (8.1.9)
The corresponding pressure signatures are plotted as the dotted curves in
Fig. 8.1.3. The agreement with the approximate theory of Equation (8.1.8) is
remarkably good even when h,a is as large as unity, when the characteristic
reduced frequency λ =ωa,U of the motion is relatively small, and might be
expected to lie outside the range for which (8.1.8) is valid.
8.1.4 Nonlinear Theory
When account is taken of image vortices in the airfoil the trajectory of the
vortex in the neighbourhood of the airfoil is no longer parallel to the mean flow
direction, and must be determined by numerical integration of Equation (8.1.2).
To do this it is convenient to introduce a dimensionless velocity ratio c and time
T defined by
c =
I
4πaU
. T =
Ut
a
.
in terms of which (8.1.2) becomes
dZ

dT
=
i c

Z
2
−1
_
Z

Z
2
−1
−1 ÷
2

0
[
2
−1
_
÷1. (8.1.10)
which can be solved for Z by Runge–Kutta integration (Section 4.6).
If the initial standoff distance is h at x
1
= −∞, the integration is started at a
large distance L upstream of the airfoil midchord, say L =10a, by prescribing
the initial position of the vortex to be Z =−L,a ÷ i h,a. The upper part of
Fig. 8.1.4 shows a calculated trajectory for
c = 0.2.
h
a
= 0.2.
8.1 Blade–Vortex Interactions in Two Dimensions 181
Fig. 8.1.4.
where time is measured from the instant that the vortex passes the midchord
of the airfoil. The nonlinear influence of the image vorticity is to shift the
initially rectilinear trajectory of the vortex away fromthe airfoil in the direction
of the vortex force ω ∧ U (U=Ui). The vortex is closest to the airfoil at
Ut ,a = 0, where x
02
∼ 0.28a, and where convection by the images increases
the translation speed of the vortex from U to approximately
U ÷
I
4πx
02
= U ÷
cU
x
02
,a
∼ U
_
1 ÷
0.2
0.28
_
= 1.71U.
The sound generated as the vortex passes the airfoil is given by (8.1.6). The
influence of vortex shedding into the wake is included by using the approxi-
mation (8.1.7) for W(Z). The integrals must be evaluated numerically, and this
is done by defining a dimensionless vortex convection velocity (u(
ˆ
T). :(
ˆ
T))
by
dZ
d
ˆ
T
= u(
ˆ
T) ÷i :(
ˆ
T). where
ˆ
T =

a
.
182 8 Further Worked Examples
Then,
p(x. t )
ρ
0
IU

M(a,[x[)
1
2
_
4πa
≈ 2
1
2
d
dT
_
sin O
_
[T]
−∞
:(
ˆ
T) d
ˆ
T
_
[T] −
ˆ
T
÷cos O
_
[T]
−∞
Im(W(Z)(u ÷i :))(
ˆ
T) d
ˆ
T
_
[T] −
ˆ
T
_
= 2
3
2
sin O
d
dT
_

0
:([T] −λ
2
) dλ
÷2
3
2
cos O
d
dT
_

0
Im(W(Z)(u ÷i :))([T] −λ
2
) dλ

p
1
(x. t )
ρ
0
IU

M(a,[x[)
1
2
_
4πa
÷
p
2
(x. t )
ρ
0
IU

M(a,[x[)
1
2
_
4πa
. (8.1.11)
where T =Ut ,a, [T] =U[t ],a, and the integration variable
ˆ
T has been re-
placed by λ =
_
[T] −
ˆ
T. The final integrals are easily evaluated numerically
when the path of the vortex has been determined. The upper limit of integra-
tion is actually finite, because the source terms must be set to equal zero as
soon as [T] −λ
2
reduces to the nondimensional time at which the computation
of the vortex path begins (where the vortex is sufficiently far upstream that it
effectively produces no sound by interaction with the airfoil).
The components p
1
(x. t ). p
2
(x. t ) of (8.1.11) correspond respectively to the
dipole sound produced by the unsteady suction and lift forces; their nondimen-
sional forms
p
1
(x. t )
ρ
0
IU

M sin O(a,[x[)
1
2
_
4πa
and
p
2
(x. t )
ρ
0
IU

M cos O(a,[x[)
1
2
_
4πa
are plotted in Fig. 8.1.4. Vortex shedding should smooth out the pressure signa-
tures at the retarded times when the vortex is close to the trailing edge. But the
calculated pressures exhibit blips shown as dotted curves in the figure. These
arise because, although our calculation has accounted for vortex shedding in
evaluating the dipole source strengths (by means of the approximation (8.1.7)),
the effect of shedding was not included in the calculation of the vortex tra-
jectory. However, the smoothing influence of shedding at a sharp edge acts
to remove the blips, and the pressure signatures have profiles similar to those
depicted by the solid curves in the figure, obtained by interpolating smoothly
between the calculated pressures on either side of the blips.
An interesting nonlinear interaction occurs when the initial standoff distance
of the vortex h =0 (Fig. 8.1.5). In the linearized approximation, the vortex
would strike the leading edge of the airfoil at U[t ],a = −1, at which time the
8.1 Blade–Vortex Interactions in Two Dimensions 183
Fig. 8.1.5.
linear theory acoustic pressure (8.1.8) is infinite. This singular event does not
occur because the vortex trajectory is deflected around the airfoil by the image
vorticity (for a rounded nose the possibility of additional vortex shedding from
the leading edge may be ignored). The upper part of Fig. 8.1.5 illustrates this
for the same value of the velocity ratio c = I,4πaU =0.2 considered above.
The maximum convection velocity of the vortex (at Ut ,a = 0) is now more
than twice the mean stream velocity:
U ÷
I
4π(0.15a)
= U
_
1 ÷
0.2
0.15
_
= 2.3U.
The corresponding suction- and lift-dipole acoustic pressures p
1
and p
2
shown
in the figure are also greatly increased.
8.1.5 Periodic Vortex Motion
When there is no mean flow (U =0) the characteristic velocity and dimension-
less time become
V =
I
4πa
. T =
Vt
a
.
184 8 Further Worked Examples
Fig. 8.1.6.
and the vortex equation of motion (8.1.2) reduces to
dZ

dT
=
i

Z
2
−1
_
Z

Z
2
−1
−1 ÷
2

0
[
2
−1
_
.
The solutions are closed trajectories orbiting the airfoil periodically. A typical
orbit is plotted in the upper half of Fig. 8.1.6 for I > 0, for the case where the
trajectory passes through the point labelled 0, where x
01
= −2a. x
02
= 0. The
calculated period is T
0
≡ Vt
0
,a ≈ 35.84.
An orbiting vortex motion of this kind cannot be realized in practice (because
of diffusion from the vortex core and the continual shedding of additional
vorticityfromthe airfoil), but it is still instructive tocalculate the soundproduced
by the motion. By writing
ˆ
T =

a
and
dZ
d
ˆ
T
= u(
ˆ
T) ÷i :(
ˆ
T)
in the general formula (8.1.6) for the acoustic pressure, the nondimensional
8.1 Blade–Vortex Interactions in Two Dimensions 185
suction and lift acoustic pressures are found to be given by the following mod-
ified form of (8.1.11)
p
1
(x. t )
ρ
0
V
2

M(a,[x[)
1
2
÷
p
2
(x. t )
ρ
0
V
2

M(a,[x[)
1
2
≈ 2
1
2
d
dT
_
sin O
_
[T]
−∞
:(
ˆ
T) d
ˆ
T
_
[T] −
ˆ
T
÷cos O
_
[T]
−∞
Im(W(Z)(u ÷i :))(
ˆ
T) d
ˆ
T
_
[T] −
ˆ
T
_
.
(8.1.12)
where M = V,c
0
.
The function W(Z) in the integrand is given by (8.1.5) in the absence of
vortex shedding. It follows by inspection and from the numerical solution, that
when T is measured from Z = −2, as indicated in Fig. 8.1.6, the suction and
dipole source strengths have period T
0
, and possess Fourier series expansions
of the form
:(T) =

n=1
a
n
cos
_
2πnT
T
0
_
. Im(W(Z)(u÷i :))(T) =

n=1
b
n
sin
_
2πnT
T
0
_
.
where the coefficients a
n
. b
n
can be calculated by using the numerical solution
for the orbit to evaluate
a
n
=
2
T
0
_
T
0
0
:(T) cos
_
2πnT
T
0
_
dT.
b
n
=
2
T
0
_
T
0
0
Im(W(Z)(u ÷i :))(T) sin
_
2πnT
T
0
_
dT.
By making the change of integration variable λ =
_
[T] −
ˆ
T,

T
0
, the right-
hand side of (8.1.12) now becomes
4



T
0

n=1
_
−a
n
n sin O
_

0
sin
_
2πn
_
[T]
T
0
−λ
2
__

÷b
n
n cos O
_

0
cos
_
2πn
_
[T]
T
0
−λ
2
__

_
.
The integrals are evaluated from the real and imaginary parts of
_

0
e
2πi n{[T],T
0
−λ
2
]
dλ =
1
2

2n
e
{2n[T],T
0

1
4
]πi
.
186 8 Further Worked Examples
Hence, the suction and lift force dipole fields are given respectively by
p
1
(x. t )
ρ
0
V
2

M sin O(a,[x[)
1
2
≈ −


T
0

n=1
a
n

n sin
_
2nπt
t
0

π
4
_
p
2
(x. t )
ρ
0
V
2

M cos O(a,[x[)
1
2



T
0

n=1
b
n

n cos
_
2nπt
t
0

π
4
_
. [x[ →∞.
where [ ] denotes evaluation at the retarded time t −[x[,c
0
. The corresponding
nondimensional pressures are plotted in Fig. 8.1.6 (taking the first 26 terms
in the series); both have similar orders of magnitude, and exhibit rapid varia-
tions at the retarded times at which the vortex is directly above and below the
airfoil.
8.2 Parallel Blade–Vortex Interactions in Three Dimensions
We now examine to what extent the simple two-dimensional methods of the
previous section can be adapted to wings of finite span and variable chord for
problems of the kind shown in Fig. 8.2.1. The general representation of the
sound produced by vortex–airfoil interactions is discussed in Section 7.1, when
Fig. 8.2.1.
8.2 Parallel Blade–Vortex Interactions in Three Dimensions 187
the airfoil chord can be regarded as compact. The general solution is applicable
to airfoils of arbitrary span, but we shall consider only the case where the span
is compact; predictions for a noncompact span will be intermediate between
those discussed here and those in Section 8.1.
Consider a planar airfoil of either rectangular or elliptic planform, orientated
as illustrated in Fig. 8.2.1 at zero angle of attack to a mean flow at speed U in
the x
1
direction. A spanwise line vortex of strength I is swept past the airfoil
at an initial standoff distance h above the airfoil, as indicated in the side view
of Fig. 8.2.1b. When h =0 it will be necessary to take account of nonlinear
interactions with the airfoil.
For an airfoil of compact chord and span the acoustic pressure produced by
the interaction is given by Equation (5.4.4):
p(x. t ) ≈
−ρ
0
x
j
4πc
0
[x[
2

∂t
_
(ω ∧ v)
_
y. t −
[x[
c
0
_
· ∇Y
j
(y) d
3
y. [x[ →∞.
(8.2.1)
It is assumed that the section of the line vortex that interacts with the airfoil
remains rectilinear, with the representation
ω = Ikδ(x
1
− x
01
(t ))δ(x
2
− x
02
(t )). where x
0
= (x
01
. x
02
. 0).
For an elliptic airfoil of span L (between −
1
2
L -x
3
-
1
2
L), the Kirchhoff vector
Y has the components
Y
1
= y
1
.
Y
2
=
_
Re(−i
_
z
2
− ˆ a(y
3
)
2
). [y
3
[ -
1
2
L
y
2
. [y
3
[ >
1
2
L
. Y
3
= y
3
. z = y
1
÷i y
2
.
where 2ˆ a(y
3
) is the airfoil chord at the spanwise location y
3
. For the rectangular
airfoil ˆ a(y
3
) ≡ a = constant; for the elliptic airfoil ˆ a(y
3
) assumes a maximum
value of a at y
3
= 0, and we shall write
ˆ a(y
3
)
a
=
_
1 −
4y
2
3
L
2
. [y
3
[ -
1
2
L. (8.2.2)
Vorticity is shed into the wake of the airfoil in accordance with the Kutta
condition of unsteady aerodynamics. This smooths out conditions at the trail-
ing edge, so that sound is generated primarily as the vortex passes over the
leading edge of the airfoil. As before, this can be dealt with in a first approxima-
tion by ignoring the shed vorticity and deleting the trailing edge singularity of
188 8 Further Worked Examples
Green’s function, by using the following modification of the x
2
component
of Y:
Y
2
= Re(
_
2ˆ a(y
3
)
_
z ÷ ˆ a(y
3
)). [y
3
[ -
1
2
L.
Then, (8.2.1) becomes
p(x. t ) ≡ p
1
(x. t ) ÷ p
2
(x. t )

ρ
0
I cos +
4πc
0
[x[

∂t
_ L
2

L
2
_
dx
02
dt
_
dy
3
÷
ρ
0
I cos O
4

2πc
0
[x[


∂t
_ L
2

L
2
_
Im
_
dz
0
dt

ˆ a(y
3
)

z
0
(t ) ÷ ˆ a(y
3
)
__
dy
3
[x[ →∞. (8.2.3)
where +. Oare respectively the angles shown in Fig. 8.2.1a between the x
1
and
x
2
directions and the radiation direction, z
0
(t ) = x
01
(t ) ÷i x
02
(t ), and quantities
in square braces are evaluated at the retarded time [t ] = t −[x[,c
0
.
The first term on the right is the suction force dipole, aligned with the airfoil
chord, whose strength is determined by the x
2
component of the vortex convec-
tion velocity. It is assumed to be nonzero only over the section −
1
2
L - y
3
-
1
2
L
of the vortex, where dx
02
,dt ,= 0 because of nonlinear interactions with the air-
foil. The second termis the conventional lift dipole radiation. Note that ‘infinite’
contributions to the integrals from [y
3
[ > L,2 are constant because ω ∧ v is
constant for [y
3
[ > L,2, and have been discarded (c.f., Section 7.3).
8.2.1 Linear Theory
When there is no back-reaction of the airfoil on the vortex the convection
velocity of the vortex is equal to the mean stream velocity
dx
01
dt
= U.
dx
02
dt
= 0.
The radiation is produced entirely by the lift dipole, and if the vortex crosses
the midchord of the airfoil at time t = 0 (8.2.3) reduces to
p
2
(x. t )
ρ
0
IUM cos O(L,[x[),4πa
≈ −
1
2
3
2
_ 1
2

1
2
Im
_
_
_
ˆ a
a
_
U[t ]
a
÷
ˆ a
a
÷i
h
a
_
3
2
_
_
d ˆ y
3
.
(8.2.4)
8.2 Parallel Blade–Vortex Interactions in Three Dimensions 189
Fig. 8.2.2.
where ˆ y
3
= y
3
,L; ˆ a,a = 1 for the rectangular airfoil, and is given by (8.2.2)
for the elliptic airfoil. For a rectangular airfoil the integral evaluates to
Im
_
_
U[t ]
a
÷1 ÷i
h
a
_

3
2
_
.
The acoustic pressure signatures (the left-hand side of (8.2.4)) for the rectan-
gular and elliptic airfoils are plotted in Fig. 8.2.2 for a vortex standoff distance
h =0.2a. The profiles are qualitatively similar to the corresponding plot in
Fig. 8.1.3 for an airfoil of infinite span, although in three dimensions the am-
plitude decreases much more rapidly with increasing retarded distance of the
vortex from the leading edge. The peak amplitude is larger and the acoustic
pulse is of smaller duration ∼h,U for the rectangular airfoil because different
sections of the vortex interact with the leading edge of the elliptic airfoil at
different times during a total interaction time ∼a,U > h,U.
8.2.2 Nonlinear Theory
When the standoff distance h =0. image vorticity in the airfoil prevents the
vortex from impinging on the leading edge, and causes the trajectory to be
locally deflected above the airfoil (for I > 0). If the leading edge of the airfoil
is suitably rounded (so that no additional vortex shedding occurs) this case
can be treated for a rectangular airfoil by assuming that only the section of the
vortex within the span −
1
2
L - x
3
-
1
2
L of the airfoil is affected in this way, and
that the distorted path can be approximated by that for locally two-dimensional
flow.
190 8 Further Worked Examples
Let
c =
I
4πaU
. T =
Ut
a
. Z =
z
0
a
.
dZ
dT
= u(T) ÷i :(T).
W(Z) =
1

2

Z ÷1
.
Then, the motion of the section of the vortex within the airfoil span (−
1
2
L -
x
3
-
1
2
L) is governed by Equation (8.1.10) (where ζ
0
is defined in terms of z
0
as in (8.1.1)), and the suction and lift dipole radiation pressures are given by
p
1
(x. t )
ρ
0
IUM cos +(L,[x[),4πa

_
d:
dT
_
p
2
(x. t )
ρ
0
IUM cos O(L,[x[),4πa


∂T
[Im(W(Z)(u ÷i :))]
_
¸
¸
¸
_
¸
¸
¸
_
[x[ →∞.
where [ ] denotes evaluation at the retarded time t −[x[,c
0
.
These nondimensional pressures are plotted in Fig. 8.2.3 for a velocity ratio
c =0.2 when the vortex is released upstream with h =0. The upper part of the
Fig. 8.2.3.
8.3 Vortex Passing over a Spoiler 191
figure shows the path followed by those sections of the vortex inboard of the
airfoil tips; it is the same as that depicted in Fig. 8.1.5 for the infinite span
airfoil. As in that case, small acoustic blips spuriously predicted during the
passage of the vortex past the trailing edge have been removed (c.f., Fig. 8.1.4).
The three-dimensional acoustic pulses are narrower than those predicted in two
dimensions.
8.3 Vortex Passing over a Spoiler
The sound produced when vorticity interacts at low Mach number with surface
irregularities on a nominally plane, rigid wall is produced by dipoles orientated
in the plane of the wall, that is, by the unsteady wall drag. A simple canonical
interaction (Kasoev, 1976) involving a line vortex near a thin vertical spoiler is
illustrated in Fig. 8.3.1. The wall coincides with the plane x
2
= 0, and the spoiler
extends along the x
2
axis from x
2
= 0 to x
2
= a > 0 for −∞- x
3
- ∞. The
vortex
ω = Ikδ(x −x
0
(t )). where x
0
= (x
01
. x
02
. 0).
is parallel to the spoiler, and is assumed to convect over it in a lowMach number,
irrotational mean stream having uniform speed U in the x
1
direction.
Define z = x
1
÷i x
2
. z
0
= x
01
÷i x
02
. The transformation
ζ =
_
z
2
a
2
÷1 (8.3.1)
maps the fluid region onto the upper half Imζ > 0 of the ζ -plane. The left and
right faces of the spoiler (x
1
=∓0) transform respectively into the intervals
−1 -ζ -0 and 0 -ζ -1 of the real ζ axis, and the vortex maps into an equal
vortex at ζ = ζ
0
. The mean flow is parallel to the real axis in the ζ plane,
Fig. 8.3.1.
192 8 Further Worked Examples
with complex potential Uaζ . The complex potential of the whole flow in the
ζ plane is obtained by introducing an image vortex of strength −I at the
complex conjugate point ζ = ζ

0
, and is given by
n(ζ ) = −
i I

ln(ζ −ζ
0
) ÷
i I

ln(ζ −ζ

0
) ÷Uaζ.
Hence, setting ζ = ζ (z) the motion in the z plane is defined by
n(z) = −
i I

ln(ζ (z) −ζ (z
0
)) ÷ F(z).
where F(z) =
i I

ln(ζ (z) −ζ (z
0
)

) ÷Uaζ (z).
which is in the form (4.6.1). The equation of motion of the vortex at z
0
is
therefore (see (4.6.3))
dz

0
dt

dx
01
dt
−i
dx
02
dt
= −
i Iζ
//
(z
0
)
4πζ
/
(z
0
)
÷ F
/
(z
0
).
that is,
dZ

dT
=−i
_
1
Z(Z
2
÷1)

2Z
Z
2
÷1 −[Z
2
÷1[
_
÷
cZ

Z
2
÷1
. (8.3.2)
where Z =
z
0
a
. T =
Vt
a
. V =
I
4πa
. c =
U
V
.
The compact Green’s function for this problem(applicable when the acoustic
wavelength ¸ ∂) is given by (6.1.6), so that the analogue of Equation (6.2.4)
for the far-field acoustic pressure becomes
p(x. t )

−ρ
0
Ix
1
π

2c
0
[x[
3
2

∂t
_
t −[x[,c
0
−∞
_
k ∧
dx
0

(τ) · ∇Y
1
(x
0
(τ))
_


t −τ −[x[,c
0
=
−ρ
0
Ix
1
π

2c
0
[x[
3
2

∂t
_
t −[x[,c
0
−∞
_
dx
01

∂Y
1
∂y
2

dx
02

∂Y
1
∂y
1
_
x
0
(τ)


t −τ −[x[,c
0
.
(8.3.3)
where the Kirchhoff vector
Y
1
= Re(aζ ) = aRe(
_
Z
2
÷1) at z = z
0
. (8.3.4)
8.3 Vortex Passing over a Spoiler 193
The radiation is produced by the unsteady drag force F
1
exerted on the fluid
by the spoiler, given (per unit span) by
F
1
= −ρ
0
_
ω ∧ v · ∇Y
1
dy
1
dy
2
= −ρ
0
Ik ∧
dx
0
dt
· ∇Y
1
(x
0
).
This force vanishes, and therefore no sound is generated, in the linearized
approximation in which the vortex is assumed to translate at the local mean
stream velocity, because in that case
dx
0
dt
= U∇Y
1
(x
0
) and k ∧ ∇Y
1
· ∇Y
1
≡ 0.
Following the procedure of Section 8.1, introduce the notations
dZ
dT
= u(T) ÷i :(T). W =
d
dz
(
_
z
2
÷a
2
) =
Z

Z
2
÷1
(8.3.5)
evaluated at the vortex, and make the substitution
ˆ
T = Vτ,a in (8.3.3) to obtain
the acoustic pressure in the form
p(x. t ) ≈
ρ
0
IV

M sin O


2
_
a
[x[
_1
2

∂T
_
[T]
−∞
Im
_
W(Z)
dZ
d
ˆ
T
_
d
ˆ
T
_
[T] −
ˆ
T
.
that is,
p(x. t )
ρ
0
V
2

M sin O(a,[x[)
1
2
≈ 2
5
2

∂T
_

0
Im(W(Z)(u ÷i :))([T] −λ
2
) dλ.
(8.3.6)
where [T] =V[t ],a is the nondimensional retarded time and M =V,c
0
.
The vortex path equation (8.3.2) and the acoustic pressure integral (8.3.6)
are evaluated numerically, taking the initial position of the vortex to be several
spoiler heights a upstream, where its motion is unaffected by the spoiler. The
upper part of Fig. 8.3.2 shows the vortex trajectories when the initial distance of
the vortexfromthe wall is h =0.75a for the twocases (i) of nomeanflow, U =0,
and (ii) U =V ≡I,4πa; the corresponding nondimensional acoustic pressures
(8.3.6) are plotted in the lower part of the figure, where time is measured from
the instant that the vortex passes the spoiler. The effect of mean flow is to draw
the trajectory marginally closer to the spoiler as it passes the tip of the spoiler
where the interaction is strongest. The convection velocity at this point is also
increased from about 1.98V when U =0 to 3.95V when U =V, and this is
responsible for more than doubling the amplitude and the effective frequency
of the sound.
194 8 Further Worked Examples
Fig. 8.3.2.
8.4 Bluff Body Interactions: The Circular Cylinder
LowMach number, two-dimensional interactions of a line vortex with a circular
cylinder provide an interesting contrast to the sharp-edge problems discussed
above. Let the cylinder have radius a and be coaxial with the x
3
axis, and let
there be an irrotational mean flowat speedU past the cylinder in the x
1
direction,
with no mean circulation about the cylinder.
Set z = x
1
÷i x
2
and let the vortex of strength I have the complex position
z
0
= x
01
÷ i x
02
at time t . The complex potential n(z) is found by placing an
image vortex −I at the inverse point z = a,z

0
within the cylinder, a vortex
÷I at the centre to make the circulation vanish, and by adding the potential for
the uniform mean flow past the cylinder (c.f., Section 8.1):
n(z) = −
i I

ln(z−z
0

i I

ln
_
z −
a
2
z

0
_

i I

ln z ÷U
_
z ÷
a
2
z
_
. (8.4.1)
The velocity potential governing the motion of the vortex at z
0
is obtained
by deleting the self-potential

i I

ln(z − z
0
).
8.4 Bluff Body Interactions: The Circular Cylinder 195
Hence we arrive at the equation of motion
dZ

dT
=
i
Z([Z[
2
−1)
÷c
_
1 −
1
Z
2
_
. (8.4.2)
where Z =
z
0
a
. V =
I
2πa
. T =
Vt
a
. c =
U
V
.
and
dz
0
dt
= V
dZ
dT
≡ V(u ÷i :).
8.4.1 The Acoustic Pressure
The far-field sound produced by the vortex is calculated from (6.2.4):
p(x. t ) ≈
−ρ
0
Ix
j


2c
0
[x[
3
2

∂t
_
t −[x[,c
0
−∞
_
dx
01

∂Y
j
∂y
2

dx
02

∂Y
j
∂y
1
_
x
0
(τ)



t −τ −[x[,c
0
. (8.4.3)
where the components of the Kirchhoff vector can be written (see Section 4.5)
Y
1
= Re
_
z ÷
a
2
z
_
. Y
2
= Re
_
−i
_
z −
a
2
z
__
. z = y
1
÷i y
2
. (8.4.4)
By defining
W
1
=
d
dz
_
z ÷
a
2
z
_
≡1 −
1
Z
2
. W
2
=
d
dz
_
−i
_
z −
a
2
z
__
≡ −i
_
1 ÷
1
Z
2
_
evaluated at z
0
, and making the change of integration variable
ˆ
T =Vτ,a,
Equation (8.4.3) can be written
p(x. t ) ≈
ρ
0
IV

Mx
j


2a[x[
3
2

∂T
_
[T]
−∞
Im(W
j
(u ÷i :))(
ˆ
T)
d
ˆ
T
_
[T] −
ˆ
T
.
where M =
V
c
0
. [T] =
V
a
_
t −
[x[
c
0
_
.
The subscripts j = 1. 2 in this formula respectively correspond to the acous-
tic pressures p
1
. p
2
, say, produced by drag and lift dipoles, whose strengths
are determined by the force (F
1
. F
2
) exerted on the fluid (per unit span) by
the cylinder. The integrals must be evaluated numerically using the numerical
196 8 Further Worked Examples
Fig. 8.4.1.
solution of Equation (8.4.2) for the vortex path. This is done by making the
further change of integration variable λ =
_
[T] −
ˆ
T, in which case
p
1
(x. t )
ρ
0
V
2

M sin O(a,[x[)
1
2
≈ 2
1
2

∂T
_

0
Im(W
1
(u ÷i :))([T] −λ
2
) dλ.
p
2
(x. t )
ρ
0
V
2

M cos O(a,[x[)
1
2
≈ 2
1
2

∂T
_

0
Im(W
2
(u ÷i :))([T] −λ
2
) dλ.
The calculation begins at time T
/
, say, by taking the initial position of the vortex
to be far upstream of the cylinder at z
0
= −L ÷i h, where L ¸a is sufficiently
large that the source strengths are negligible for T -T
/
(Fig. 8.4.1). The upper
limits of integration are then finite because the source terms vanish as soon as
[T] −λ
2
- T
/
.
Figure 8.4.1illustrates the typical nondimensional waveforms producedwhen
V ≡ I,2πa = 2U and for h,a = ±0.7, time being measured from the instant
that the vortex crosses x
1
=0. The amplitude of the sound decreases rapidly
with increasing distance of closest approach of the vortex to the cylinder; near
the cylinder the translational velocity of the vortex is increased because the
8.4 Bluff Body Interactions: The Circular Cylinder 197
mean flow velocity is larger, and also because of the increased influence of the
image vorticity. In cases where U ¸V, the lift dipole will tend to predomi-
nate because convection by the image vortices can then be neglected in a first
approximation, and the drag ∼(ω ∧U∇Y
1
) · ∇Y
1
≡ 0.
8.4.2 Wall-Mounted Cylinder
The case of ideal motion of a vortex translating past a cylindrical, semicircular
projection on a rigid wall (Fig. 8.4.2) can be treated by the method used for
the spoiler in Section 8.3. The problem is equivalent to that in which a vortex
pair, consisting of a vortex I at z
0
accompanied by an image of strength −I at
z

0
, is incident symmetrically on a circular cylinder. In this case, the lift dipole
vanishes identically.
The velocity potential of the unsteady motion is given by augmenting the
complex potential (8.4.1) by the terms
i I

ln(z − z

0
) −
i I

ln
_
z −
a
2
z
0
_
÷
i I

ln z.
Fig. 8.4.2.
198 8 Further Worked Examples
which correspond to the net potential produced by the image. Then, the equation
of motion becomes
dZ

dT
= i
_
1
Z − Z

÷
Z − Z

([Z[
2
−1)(Z
2
−1)
_
÷c
_
1 −
1
Z
2
_
. (8.4.5)
where Z =
z
0
a
. V =
I
2πa
. T =
Vt
a
. c =
U
V
.
The compact Green’s function is given by (6.1.6), and the far-field acoustic
pressure by
p(x. t )

−ρ
0
Ix
1
π

2c
0
[x[
3
2

∂t
_
t −[x[,c
0
−∞
_
k ∧
dx
0

(τ) · ∇Y
1
(x
0
(τ))
_


t −τ −[x[,c
0
=
−ρ
0
Ix
1
π

2c
0
[x[
3
2

∂t
_
t −[x[,c
0
−∞
_
dx
01

∂Y
1
∂y
2

dx
02

∂Y
1
∂y
1
_
x
0
(τ)


t −τ −[x[,c
0
.
(8.4.6)
where the Kirchhoff vector
Y
1
= Re
_
z ÷
a
2
z
_
. (8.4.7)
The radiation is produced by the unsteady drag force exerted on the fluid by
the cylinder, which vanishes in the linearized approximation, when the vortex
is assumed to convect passively at the local velocity of the undisturbed mean
stream. As before, set
dZ
dT
= u(T) ÷i :(T). W
1
=
d
dz
_
z ÷
a
2
z
_
= 1 −
1
Z
2
(8.4.8)
evaluated at the vortex. Then,
p(x. t )
ρ
0
V
2

M sin O(a,[x[)
1
2
≈ 2
3
2

∂T
_

0
Im(W
1
(u÷i :))([T]−λ
2
) dλ. (8.4.9)
where the angle Ois definedas inFig. 8.4.1, [T] =V[t ],a is the nondimensional
retarded time (T =0 when the vortex is at x
1
=0), and M =V,c
0
.
The vortex path equation (8.4.5) and the acoustic pressure integral (8.4.9)
must be evaluated numerically, taking the initial position of the vortex to
be several cylinder radii a upstream where its motion is unaffected by the
cylinder. The upper part of Fig. 8.4.2 shows the vortex trajectories when the
8.5 Vortex Ring and Sphere 199
initial standoff distance of the vortex from the wall h =0.5a for the two cases
(i) of no mean flow, U =0, and (ii) U =V. The vortex convection velocity
at y
1
=0 is increased from about 1.23V when U = 0 to 3.07V when U =V;
this is responsible for the increased acoustic amplitude and for more than dou-
bling the effective frequency. The waveforms and these general conclusions
are qualitatively similar to those discussed in Section 8.3 for the sharp-edged
spoiler.
8.5 Vortex Ring and Sphere
Perhaps the simplest low Mach number, inviscid, three-dimensional vortex–
surface interaction amenable to analysis is the axisymmetric motion of a ring
vortex over a sphere. Let a sphere of radius a be placed with its centre at the
origin in the presence of a uniform mean flow at speed U in the x
1
direction.
A vortex ring of radius r
0
(t ) and circulation I is coaxial with the x
1
axis and
translates in the positive x
1
direction under the influence of the mean flow,
self-induction and image vorticity in the sphere (Fig. 8.5.1). We shall assume
the vortex core is circular (and remains circular throughout the interaction)
with radius σ(t ) _r
0
. The self-induced velocity of the ring (in inviscid flow)
is parallel to the x
1
-axis at speed u
I
given approximately by Kelvin’s formula
(Batchelor, 1967)
u
I
(r
0
. σ) =
I
4πr
0
_
ln
_
8r
0
σ
_

1
4
_
. (8.5.1)
Fig. 8.5.1.
200 8 Further Worked Examples
The image vorticity consists of a coaxial ring vortex whose circulation I
/
,
radius r
/
0
. and axial location x
/
01
are given by
I
/
= −
I
_
r
2
0
÷ x
2
01
_1
2
a
. r
/
0
=
a
2
r
0
r
2
0
÷ x
2
01
. x
/
01
=
a
2
x
01
r
2
0
÷ x
2
01
. (8.5.2)
where the planes of symmetry of the ring vortex and its image cut the x
1
axis respectively at x
01
(t ). x
/
01
(t ). The motion of the vortex produced by the
combined induction by the image and the mean flow can be expressed in terms
of the Stokes stream function ψ(
·
r. x
1
) (Batchelor, 1967; Ting and Klein, 1991)
ψ(r. x
1
) =
Ur
2
2
_
_
1 −
a
3
_
r
2
÷ x
2
1
_3
2
_
_
÷
I
/

(+
÷
÷+

){K(A) − E(A)].
(8.5.3)
where +
±
=
_
(r ∓r
/
0
)
2
÷(x
1
− x
/
01
)
2
. A =
+

−+
÷
+

÷+
÷
.
K(A) =
_ π
2
0
dj
_
1 −A
2
sin
2
j
. E(A) =
_ π
2
0
_
1 −A
2
sin
2
jdj.
where r denotes perpendicular distance from the x
1
axis, and K(A). E(A) are
respectively complete elliptic integrals of the first and second kinds.
The radius r
0
(t ) andaxial position x
01
(t ) of the ringvortexare thendetermined
by the equations of motion
dr
0
dt
= −
1
r
0
∂ψ
∂x
1
(r
0
. x
01
).
dx
01
dt
= u
I
(r
0
. σ) ÷
1
r
0
∂ψ
∂r
(r
0
. x
01
). (8.5.4)
The core radius σ decreases when r
0
increases, because the vortex lines move
with the fluid particles. If r
0
=h and σ = σ
0
are the initial values when the
vortex ring is far from the sphere, then at any time t
(2πr
0
)πσ
2
= (2πh)πσ
2
0
. i.e.. σ(t ) = σ
0
_
h
r
0
(t )
so that the self-induced velocity (8.5.1) becomes
u
I
=
I
4πr
0
_
ln
_
8h
σ
0
_
r
0
(t )
h
_3
2
_

1
4
_
. (8.5.5)
8.5 Vortex Ring and Sphere 201
The equations of motion of the vortex are cast in nondimensional terms by
defining
X =
x
01
a
. R =
r
0
a
. V =
I
2πa
. T =
Vt
a
. c =
U
V
.
Then,
d R
dT
= −
1
R
∂+
∂ X
(R. X).
d X
dT
=
1
R
∂+
∂ R
(R. X) ÷
1
2R
_
ln
_
8h
σ
0
_
aR
h
_3
2
_

1
4
_
.
(8.5.6)
where + =
c R
2
2
_
1 −
1
(R
2
÷ X
2
)
3
2
_
−(R
2
÷ X
2
)
1
2
(
ˆ
+
÷
÷
ˆ
+

){K(A) − E(A)].
ˆ
+
±
=
_
(R ∓ R
/
)
2
÷(X − X
/
)
2
. A =
ˆ
+


ˆ
+
÷
ˆ
+

÷
ˆ
+
÷
.
R
/
=
R
R
2
÷ X
2
. X
/
=
X
R
2
÷ X
2
.
Figure 8.5.2 illustrates the sections in the vertical plane of symmetry of
the sphere of two typical vortex trajectories predicted by Equations (8.5.6). In
both cases the integration is started five sphere diameters upstream with the
following initial values for the vortex ring radius and core radius,
h = 0.8a. σ
0
= 0.05h. (8.5.7)
The solid and broken-line curves in the figure correspond respectively to c = 0
Fig. 8.5.2.
202 8 Further Worked Examples
(no mean flow) and c = 3. The latter value is chosen to make the mean stream
velocity U approximately the same as the self-induced velocity u
I
at large
distances from the sphere. This has a relatively small effect on the trajectory,
although the convection speed of the ring past the sphere is greatly increased.
8.5.1 Acoustic Pressure
When the sphere is acoustically compact, equation (5.4.4) gives
p(x. t ) ≈
−ρ
0
x
j
4πc
0
[x[
2

∂t
_
(ω ∧ v)
_
y. t −
[x[
c
0
_
· ∇Y
j
(y) d
3
y. [x[ →∞.
(8.5.8)
For the purpose of evaluating the integral we may neglect the finite core size of
the vortex, and set
ω = I
ˆ
θδ(r −r
0
(t ))δ(x
1
− x
01
(t )). (8.5.9)
where
ˆ
θ is a unit azimuthal vector, locally tangential to the vorticity ω and ori-
entated in the clockwise direction when the vortex ring is viewed fromupstream,
as indicated in Fig. 8.5.1.
The force on the sphere is in the mean flow direction – the effective acoustic
source is the unsteady drag – and only the component
Y
1
= y
1
_
1 ÷
a
3
2[y[
3
_
≡ y
1
_
_
1 ÷
a
3
2
_
r
2
÷ y
2
1
_3
2
_
_
(from Table 3.9.1)
of the Kirchhoff vector makes a nontrivial contribution to (8.5.8). The produc-
tion of sound is therefore a nonlinear event – the source explicitly involves
only the self-induced velocity and the velocity induced by the image vortex;
the mean flow velocity U = U∇Y
1
is absent because
(ω ∧U∇Y
1
)
_
y. t −
[x[
c
0
_
· ∇Y
1
(y) ≡ 0.
However, the amplitude and characteristic frequency of the sound both increase
with U.
Substituting (8.5.9) into (8.5.8) and evaluating the integral, we find
p(x. t ) ≈
−ρ
0
I cos O
2c
0
[x[

∂t
_
r
0
_
dx
01
dt
∂Y
1
∂r

dr
0
dt
∂Y
1
∂y
1
_
(r
0
.x
01
)
_
. [x[ →∞.
8.5 Vortex Ring and Sphere 203
Fig. 8.5.3.
where the quantity in the square braces is evaluated at the retarded position
of the vortex ring, and O is the angle between the radiation direction and the
x
1
axis illustrated in the upper part of Fig. 8.5.3. Expressing this result in
nondimensional form, we have
p(x. t )
ρ
0
V
2
M cos O(a,[x[)
≈ π

∂T
_
3R
2
X
2(R
2
÷ X
2
)
5
2
d X
dT
÷
_
1 ÷
R
2
−2X
2
2(R
2
÷ X
2
)
5
2
_
R
d R
dT
_
.
where M =V,c
0
, and R and X are the solutions of the vortex equations of
motion (8.5.6).
The nondimensional acoustic pressure signatures plotted in Fig. 8.5.3 are
for the same the initial conditions (8.5.7) considered above for the vortex ring
trajectories in Fig. 8.5.2. The thick solid curve is the pressure profile in the
204 8 Further Worked Examples
absence of mean flow (U =0). The positions of the vortex ring in this case at
several different retarded times V[t ],a are marked on the thick curve in the
upper part of Fig. 8.5.3 (time being measured from the instant that the ring
crosses the centre of the sphere). Similarly, the thin-line curves in the figure
give the pressure signature and retarded positions for U =3V, when the self-
induction velocity u
I
≈ U at large distances from sphere. Both the amplitude
and frequency of the sound are increased because of the increased convection
velocity of the vortex past the sphere.
8.6 Vortex Pair Incident on a Wall Aperture
Hydrodynamic motion in the vicinity of an aperture in a large thin wall generally
produces an unsteady volume flux through the aperture, which is acoustically
equivalent to a monopole source when the aperture is compact. The upper part
of Fig. 8.6.1 depicts a simple model of such a source. The rigid wall coincides
with the plane x
1
=0, and is pierced by a two-dimensional slit aperture of
width 2a whose centerline extends along the x
3
axis. A vortex pair aligned with
the x
3
axis, consisting of vortices of strengths ±I at the respective complex
positions
z
0
= x
01
÷i x
02
and z

0
= x
01
−i x
02
is incident on the aperture from the left (x
1
= −∞).
The motion is evidently symmetric with respect to the x
1
axis, and the trans-
formation
ζ =
z

z
2
÷a
2
(z = x
1
÷i x
2
)
maps the region Imz > 0 cut along the upper section x
2
> a of the wall onto
the upper half of the ζ plane. By the usual method, we accordingly obtain the
equation of motion of the vortex pair in the form (Karweit, 1975)
dZ

dT
=
3i Z
Z
2
÷1
÷
2i
(Z
2
÷1)
3
2
{Z,

Z
2
÷1 −(Z,

Z
2
÷1)

]
. (8.6.1)
where Z =
z
0
a
. T =
Vt
a
. V =
I
4πa
.
and
dz
0
dt
= V
dZ
dT
≡ V(u ÷i :).
Let the initial separation of the vortices at x
1
= − ∞ be 2h. To integrate the
equation, we can set z
0
= − L ÷i h at a convenient initial (but arbitrary) time
8.6 Vortex Pair Incident on a Wall Aperture 205
Fig. 8.6.1.
T = T
/
, where L ¸a. When h,a is smaller than 2,3
3
2
≈ 0.385 the vortex pair
passes through the aperture in the manner indicated in Fig. 8.6.1 for h,a = 0.35.
For larger values of h,a the trajectories of the two vortices separate; the vortices
travel along symmetric paths parallel to the wall on either side of the aperture,
as illustrated for h,a = 0.6.
The acoustic pressure in the far field is given by
p(x. t ) ≈ −ρ
0
_
ω ∧ v ·
∂G
∂y
d
2
y dτ. (8.6.2)
where G is the compact Green’s function (3.9.10) for the wall aperture
G(x. y. t −τ)≈−

c
0
sgn(x
1
)
π

2π[x[
χ(t −τ −[x[,c
0
)

t −τ −[x[,c
0
Re
_
ln
_
˜ z
a
÷
_
˜ z
2
a
2
−1
__
.
˜ z = y
2
÷i y
1
. (8.6.3)
206 8 Further Worked Examples
and
χ(t ) = H(t )
_

0
ln(maξ
2
,4c
0
t )e
−ξ
2

[ln(maξ
2
,4c
0
t )]
2
÷π
2
. m = 1.781072.
The dependence on source position y in (8.6.3) is contained entirely in the
logarithmic term, which represents the velocity potential of the ideal flow that
wouldbe producedthroughthe aperture (fromleft toright) bya uniformpressure
drop across the wall.
When vortex shedding from the aperture edges is ignored,
ω = Ikδ(y
1
− x
01
)δ(y
2
− x
02
) −Ikδ(y
1
− x
01
)δ(y
2
÷ x
02
).
where k is a unit vector in the x
3
direction (out of the plane of the paper in
Fig. 8.6.1).
If we define
˜
W(Z) =
_
1
_
˜
Z
2
−1
_
˜
Z=i Z

. ˆ χ(T) = χ(t ). M =
V
c
0
.
and put
ˆ
T =

a
in the integral (8.6.2).
we find
p(x. t ) ≈
2
5
2
ρ
0
V
2
sgn(x
1
)

πM
_
a
[x[
_1
2
_
[T]
−∞
Re(
˜
W

(Z)(u ÷i :))(
ˆ
T)

ˆ χ([T] −
ˆ
T) d
ˆ
T
_
[T] −
ˆ
T
. [T] =
V[t ]
a
.
Therefore, by setting λ =
_
[T] −
ˆ
T we can write
p(x. t )
ρ
0
V
2
sgn(x
1
)(a,[x[)
1
2

2
7
2

πM
_

0
Re(
˜
W

(Z)(u ÷i :))([T] −λ
2
) ˆ χ(λ
2
) dλ.
[x[ →∞. (8.6.4)
where
ˆ χ(λ
2
) =
_

0
ln(mMξ
2
,4λ
2
)e
−ξ
2

[ln(mMξ
2
,4λ
2
)]
2
÷π
2
.
8.6 Vortex Pair Incident on a Wall Aperture 207
As before, the upper limit of integration in (8.6.4) is actually λ =

[T] − T
/
,
where T
/
is the nondimensional initial time fromwhich the motion of the vortex
pair is calculated.
The value of the integral depends weakly on the characteristic Mach number
M =
V
c
0

I
4πac
0
.
This is just the self-induced convection Mach number of the vortex pair when
separated by a distance 2a. We have taken M = 0.03 for the far-field acoustic
pressure signatures plottedinFig. 8.6.1; inair this wouldimplythat V∼10 m/sec.
The flow induced by the vortex pair approaching the wall forms a localized
two-dimensional jet between the vortices, directed toward the wall. The resis-
tance of the wall to this flow causes the pressure just to the left of the wall
aperture to rise, forcing fluid through the aperture into the region x
1
> 0. The
radiation therefore has the characteristics of an acoustic monopole source for
x
1
> 0 and a sink for x
1
-0. Numerical results are illustrated in the figure for
h,a = 0.35. 0.6. In each case, the time origin has been adjusted to correspond
approximately with the peak in the radiated acoustic pressure, which occurs
when the vortices pass close to the edges of the aperture. When h,a =0.6 the
vortices do not penetrate the aperture but are deflected by the wall; this pro-
duces a relatively larger pressure rise than for h,a =0.35, where the vortices
pass through the aperture. The maximum acoustic pressure amplitude is found
to occur when h,a just exceeds the critical value (∼0.385), when the vortex
trajectories pass very close to the aperture edges. Further increases of h,a be-
yond 0.6 result in a gradual reduction in the amplitude of the sound, and a
corresponding increase in the width of the acoustic pulse (i.e., a decrease in the
characteristic frequency of the sound).
Bibliography
Batchelor, G.K. 1967. An Introduction to Fluid Dynamics. Cambridge: University
Press.
Cannell, P. and Ffowcs Williams, J.E. 1973. Radiation from line vortex filaments
exhausting from a two-dimensional semi-infinite duct. Journal of Fluid
Mechanics 58: 65–80.
Crighton, D.G. 1972. Radiation from vortex filament motion near a half plane. Journal
of Fluid Mechanics 51: 357–362.
Crighton, D.G. 1975. Basic principles of aerodynamic noise generation. Progress in
Aerospace Sciences 16: 31–96.
Crighton, D.G. 1985. The Kutta condition in unsteady flow. Annual Reviews of Fluid
Mechanics 17: 411–445.
Crighton, D.G., Dowling, A.P., Ffowcs Williams, J.E., Heckl, M., and Leppington,
F.G. 1992. Modern Methods in Analytical Acoustics (Lecture Notes). London:
Springer-Verlag.
Curle, N. 1955. The influence of solid boundaries upon aerodynamic sound.
Proceedings of the Royal Society of London A231: 505–514.
Dhanak, M.R. 1981. Interaction between a vortex filament and an approaching rigid
sphere. Journal of Fluid Mechanics 110: 129–147.
Dowling, A.P. and Ffowcs Williams, J.E. 1983. Sound and Sources of Sound.
Chichester: Ellis Horwood.
Ffowcs Williams, J.E. 1963. The noise from turbulence convected at high speed.
Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society of London A255: 469–503.
Ffowcs Williams, J.E. and Hawkings, D.L. 1969. Sound generation by turbulence and
surfaces in arbitrary motion. Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society of
London A264: 321–342.
Ffowcs Williams, J.E. and Hall, L.H. 1970. Aerodynamic sound generation by
turbulent flow in the vicinity of a scattering half-plane. Journal of Fluid
Mechanics 40: 657–670.
Ffowcs Williams, J.E. 1974. Sound production at the edge of a steady flow. Journal of
Fluid Mechanics 66: 791–816.
Goldstein, M.E. 1976. Aeroacoustics. New York: McGraw-Hill.
Goldstein, S. 1960. Lectures on Fluid Mechanics. New York: Interscience.
Howe, M.S. 1975a. Contributions to the theory of aerodynamic sound with
209
210 Bibliography
application to excess jet noise and the theory of the flute. Journal of Fluid
Mechanics 71: 625–673.
Howe, M.S. 1975b. The generation of sound by aerodynamic sources in an
inhomogeneous steady flow. Journal of Fluid Mechanics 67: 579–610.
Howe, M.S. 1989. On unsteady surface forces, and sound produced by the normal
chopping of a rectilinear vortex. Journal of Fluid Mechanics 206: 131–153.
Howe, M.S. 1998a. Acoustics of Fluid–Structure Interactions. Cambridge: Cambridge
University Press.
Howe, M.S. 1998b. The compression wave produced by a high-speed train entering a
tunnel. Proceedings of the Royal Society A454: 1523–1534.
Howe, M.S. 2001. Vorticity and the theory of aerodynamic sound. Journal of
Engineering Mathematics 41: 367–400.
Howe, M.S., Iida, M., Fukuda, T., and Maeda, T. 2000. Theoretical and experimental
investigation of the compression wave generated by a train entering a tunnel with
a flared portal. Journal of Fluid Mechanics 425: 111–132.
Karweit, M. 1975. Motion of a vortex pair approaching an opening in a boundary.
Physics of Fluids 18: 1604–1606.
Kasoev, S.G. 1976. Sound radiation from a linear vortex over a plane with a projecting
edge. Soviet Physics Acoustics 22: 71–72.
Kelvin, Lord. 1867. On vortex motion. Transactions of the Royal Society of Edinburgh
25: 217–260.
Knio, O.M., Ting, L., and Klein, R. 1998. Interaction of a slender vortex with a rigid
sphere: Dynamics and far field sound. Journal of the Acoustical Society of
America 103: 83–98.
Lamb, Horace. 1932. Hydrodynamics. 6th ed. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Landau, L.D. and Lifshitz, E.M. 1987. Fluid Mechanics. 2nd ed. Oxford: Pergamon.
Lighthill, M.J. 1952. On sound generated aerodynamically. Part I: General theory.
Proceedings of the Royal Society of London A211: 564–587.
Lighthill, M.J. 1956. The image system of a vortex element in a rigid sphere.
Proceedings of the Cambridge Philosophical Society 52: 317–321.
Lighthill, M.J. 1958. An Introduction to Fourier Analysis and Generalised Functions.
Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Lighthill, M.J. 1963. Laminar Boundary Layers. Edited by L. Rosenhead. Chs. 1, 2.
Oxford: University Press.
Lighthill, James. 1978. Waves in Fluids. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Lighthill, J. 1986. An Informal Introduction to Theoretical Fluid Mechanics. Oxford:
Clarendon Press.
Maeda, T., Matsumura, T., Iida, M., Nakatani, K., and Uchida, K. 1993. Effect of
shape of train nose on compression wave generated by train entering tunnel.
Proceedings of the International Conference on Speedup Technology for Railway
and Maglev Vehicles. Japan Society of Mechanical Engineers (Yokohama, Japan
22–26 November) pp. 315–319.
Milne-Thomson, L.M. 1968. Theoretical Hydrodynamics. 5th ed. London: Macmillan.
Moore, D.W. 1980. The velocity of a vortex ring with a thin core of elliptical
cross-section. Proceedings of the Royal Society of London A370: 407–415.
M¨ ohring, W. 1978. On vortex sound at low Mach number. Journal of Fluid Mechanics
85: 685–691.
M¨ ohring, W. 1980. Modelling low Mach number noise. Mechanics of Sound
Generation in Flows. Edited by E.-A. M¨ uller, pp. 85–96. Berlin: Springer-Verlag.
Powell, A. 1960. Aerodynamic noise and the plane boundary. Journal of the Acoustical
Society of America 32: 962–990.
Bibliography 211
Powell, A. 1963. Mechanisms of Aerodynamic Sound Production. AGARD Report No.
466.
Powell, A. 1964. Theory of vortex sound. Journal of the Acoustical Society of America
36: 177–195.
Rayleigh, Lord. 1945. Theory of Sound. 2 vols. New York: Dover.
Saffman, P.G. 1993. Vortex Dynamics. Cambridge: University Press.
Sears, W.R. 1941. Some aspects of non-stationary airfoil theory and its practical
applications. Journal of the Aeronautical Sciences 8: 104–108.
Ting, L. and Klein, R. 1991. Viscous vortical flows. Lecture Notes in Physics, Vol. 374.
New York: Springer-Verlag.
Index
acoustic wave number, 43
added mass tensor, 68
contribution to surface force, 69, 94
relation to bound vorticity, 94
sphere, 70
aerodynamic sound, definition, 1
acoustic analogy, 25
airfoil theory, linearized, 148
airfoil, elliptic, 187
rectangular, 187, 190
analogy, acoustic, 25
Biot-Savart, application to creeping flow, 99
formula, 88
used to calculate sound source, 114
with bound vorticity, 91
blade-vortex interactions, two-dimensions
150, 175
linear theory, 178, 188
nonlinear, 180, 189
three-dimensions, 158, 186
blockage, 167
bluff body, 194
bound vorticity, 91
boundary, solid, 41
bubble, in sound field, 112
candle, blowing out, 91
causality, 11
circulation, definition, 87
Kelvin’s theorem, 87
per unit length of wake, 148
compact, acoustically, 18
body, 36, 128
turbulence eddies, 30, 38
compact Green’s function, preliminary
definition, 49, 52
airfoil of variable chord, 71
circular cylinder, 58
cylindrical bodies, 58
definition for Helmholtz equation, 64
definition for wave equation, 65
duct (tunnel) entrance, 77, 170
duct with neck, 77, 80
for incompressible flow, 81
general form, 70
half-plane, 74
rigid strip, 60
sphere, 53
symmetric, 63
two-dimensional, 136, 154
uniform duct, 76
wall aperture, 75
wall cavity, 72
wall projection, 72
complex potential, 100
circular cylinder, 102
half-plane, 105
source, 103
vortex, 103
complex velocity, 101
compression wave, generated by train, 166
compressive stress, 35
conformal transformation, 100
half-plane, 105
strip 61,
continuity equation, 2
linearized, 5
with source, 5
control surface, definition, 32
creeping flow, 99
Crighton, 143, 149
Crocco’s equation, 85
Curle, theory, 32
differential equation, 35
integral equation, 36
213
214 Index
decibel, 4
delta function
Fourier integral for, 43
in three dimensions, 9
density, 2
values for air and water, 3
diffusion, of vorticity, 87
dipole, definition, 14
directivity, 16
drag, 195
far field form, 21
fluid volume, 15
in Curle’s equation, 35
in Helmholtz equation, 45
lift, 188, 190, 195
near compact sphere, 54
near edge, 62
drag, 191, 195
efficiency, acoustic, 32
of quadrupole radiation, 32
of surface dipoles, 37
end correction, 78
energy, equation, 4
flux, 18
kinetic, 82, 90
enthalpy, see total enthalpy
entropy, 4
far field, definition, 17
acoustic, 19
calculation of, 20
hydrodynamic, 89
in terms of impulse, 89
Ffowcs Williams, 29
Force, impulse formula, 93
added mass contribution, 94
formula for translating body, 96
lift, 182, 185
produced by gust, 147
role of bound vorticity, 94
Sears’ formula, 149
Fraunhofer approximation, 21
Green’s function, see also compact
Green’s function
definition, 12
for Helmholtz equation, 45
free-space, 12, 46
gust, time harmonic, 148
vortex, 146, 156
Heaviside unit function, definition, 32
Helmholtz, equation, 44
Green’s function, 45
inhomogeneous equation, 44, 57
homentropic, 4
hydrodynamic, pressure, 38
far field, 89
wavelength, 148
ideal acoustic medium, 25, 27
impedance, 48
impulse, definition, 90
theory of vortex sound, 131
incompressible fluid, 7, 90, 93, 96
infrasound, 166, 174
integrals, transformation using Heaviside
function, 32
intensity, acoustic, 19
irrotational flow, sound waves in, 118
Karweit, 204
Kasoev, 191
Kelvin, circulation theorem, 87
definition of vorticity, 82
formula for vortex ring speed, 92, 199
theorem on kinetic energy, 84
kinetic energy, 82
in terms of vorticity, 90
Kelvin’s theorem on, 84
Kirchhoff spinning vortex, 132
Kirchhoff vector, definition, 52
circular cylinder, 60
rigid strip, 61
singularities of, 146, 159, 179
special cases, 71
sphere, 54
Kraichnan-Phillips theorem, 39
Kutta condition, 149
see also singularities
Lamb vector, 85, 96, 136
Laplace equation
axisymmetric, 53
polar from, 60
two dimensions, 100
leading edge, Kutta condition, 150
suction, 178, 182, 185
lift, 158
lift dipole, 188, 190, 195
Lighthill, 1
acoustic analogy, 25
eighth power law, 29
equation, 28
equation reformulated in terms of vorticity,
117
stress tensor, 28
linear, acoustics, 4
Lighthill’s equation, 27
momentum equation, 5
Mach number, 29
Maeda, 171
Index 215
micro-pressure wave, 166
M¨ ohring, vortex sound formula, 132, 135
momentum equation, 3
Crocco’s form, 85
linearized, 5
Reynolds’ form, 27
momentum flux tensor, 27
monopole, 9, 13
in Curle’s equation, 35
Navier-Stokes equation, 3
near field, hydrodynamic, 17
no slip condition, 85
nonlinear steepening in tunnel, 166
plane wave, 19, 23
point source, definition, 9
impulsive, 10, 12
in Helmholtz equation, 44
monopole, 9
potential, velocity, 6
vector, 88
potential flow interaction, 150, 161, 164
Powell, 38
power, acoustic, 19
quadrupole, definition, 15
far field form, 22
image in plane wall, 39
in Helmholtz equation, 45
Lighthill’s, 28
radiation condition, 11, 13
rate of strain tensor, 26, 84
Rayleigh, 47
end correction, 78
reciprocal, theorem, 46, 127
problem for compact Green’s function, 50
reduced frequency, definition, 148
retarded potential, definition, 13
retarded time, definition, 14
Reynolds number, definition, 36
Reynolds stress, definition, 28
in Lighthill tensor, 29
linear, 29
Runge-Kutta integration, 108, 163
Sears, 147
Sears function, 149
self potential, vortex, 107
singularities, deleting from Green’s function,
146, 159, 179, 187
specific heats, ratio, 4
speed of sound, definition, 6
values for air and water, 7
sphere, added mass, 68
interacting with a vortex, 162, 199
modelled by point source, 9
pulsating, 7, 67
vibrating, 16, 57, 67
slender body approximation, 169
spinning vortex pair, 120
stationary phase, 75
Stokes, drag, 98
stream function, 200
Stokesian fluid, 3
stress tensor
Lighthill’s, 28
viscous, 26
suction force, 178, 182, 185
dipole, 188, 190
surface, compact, 36
impedance, 48
noncompact, 37
test function, 9
thermodynamics, Second Law, 11
total enthalpy, definition for homentropic flow,
85
acoustic variable, 116
in terms of velocity potential, 117
relation to pressure, 117
tunnel, 166, 174
turbulent nozzle flow, 25
velocity, acoustic particle, 5, 18
in terms of impulse, 89
potential, 6
vibrating body, 56
low frequency radiation from, 65, 129
vibrating sphere, 16, 57, 67
viscosity, 3
kinematic, 3
values for air and water, 3
volume source, 5
dipole, 15
vortex-airfoil interaction, linear theory, 156,
178, 188
nonlinear, 180, 189
periodic, 183
three-dimensional, 158, 186
two-dimensional, 150
vortex, coaxial rings, 133
complex potential, 103
equation of motion, 106, 175, 180, 192, 195,
198, 204
finite core, 160
line, 84, 158
motion near half-plane, 108
outside cylinder, 111
ring, 92, 173, 199
self potential, 107
shedding, 145, 159
tube, 84
216 Index
vortex pair, 204
spinning, 120
vortex sheet, 87, 88, 91
wake, 150
vortex sound, at low Mach numbers,
119
for cylindrical bodies, 130, 194
for nonvibrating body, 130
from spinning vortices, 120
from spoiler, 191
from vortex interacting with cylinder,
139
from vortex near half-plane, 143, 173
from vortex near sphere, 162, 199
from wall aperture, 204
in terms of surface force, 129
vortex sound equation, 116, 118
linearized, 156
low Mach number approximation, 120
vortex-surface interaction noise, 124
general formula, 127
high Reynolds number form, 128
influence of vortex shedding, 143
vortex near sphere, 162
vortex near spoiler, 191
wall mounted cylinder, 197
vorticity, bound, 91
equation, 84
equation for Stokesian fluid, 86
in force formulae, 93, 96
Kelvin’s definition, 82
molecular diffusion, 87
source of sound, 114
wake, cylinder, 148
vortex sheet, 150
wall drag, 191
wave equation
classical acoustics, 6
for pressure, 6
in irrotational mean flow, 118
inhomogeneous, 13
radially symmetric, 10
wavelength
acoustic, 7, 17, 43
at 1 kHz, 7
hydrodynamic, 148
wave number, 43

This page intentionally left blank

Theory of Vortex Sound
Theory of Vortex Sound is an introduction to the theory of sound generated by hydrodynamic flows. Starting with a review of elementary theoretical acoustics, the book proceeds to a unified treatment of low Mach number vortex-surface interaction noise in terms of the compact Green’s function. Problems are provided at the end of each chapter, many of which can be used for extended student projects, and a whole chapter is devoted to worked examples. It is designed for a one-semester introductory course at the advanced undergraduate or graduate levels. Great care is taken to explain underlying fluid mechanical and acoustic concepts, and to describe as fully as possible the steps in a complicated derivation. M.S. Howe has been Professor in the Department of Aerospace and Mechanical Engineering at Boston University since 1992. He is a Fellow of the Institute of Acoustics (U.K.) and of the Acoustical Society of America.

Maugin Boundary Integral and Singularity Methods for Linearized Viscous Flow C. Naugolnykh and L. Ockendon Scaling. J. J. G. Self-Similarity. R. Barenblatt A First Course in the Numerical Analysis of Differential Equations Arieh Iserles Complex Variables: Introduction and Applications Mark J. Hinch The Thermomechanics of Plasticity and Fracture Gerard A. G. Pozrikidis Nonlinear Wave Processes in Acoustics K. Chapman Wave Motion J. J. Gibbon Viscous Flow H. D. S. C. King . Ciarlet Integral Equations David Porter and David S. Ottino Introduction to Numerical Linear Algebra and Optimisation Philippe G. S. Fowler Thinking About Ordinary Differential Equations Robert E. Fokas Mathematical Models in the Applied Sciences A. Drazin Stability.Cambridge Texts in Applied Mathematics Maximum and Minimum Principles M. Johnson The Kinematics of Mixing J. Doering and J. C. Stirling Perturbation Methods E. G. and Chaos Paul Glendinning Applied Analysis of the Navier–Stokes Equations C. Instability. Drazin and R. Johnson Rarefied Gas Dynamics Carlo Cercignani Symmetry Methods for Differential Equations Peter E. M. O’Malley A Modern Introduction to the Mathematical Theory of Water Waves R. Ablowitz and Athanassios S. R. and Intermediate Asymptotics G. Hydon High Speed Flow C. Sewell Solitons P. Ockendon and J. Ostrovsky Nonlinear Systems P. I. Billingham and A.

Harris Vorticity and Incompressible Flow Andrew J. A. Drazin Theory of Vortex Sound M. K. Robinson An Introducion to Symmetry Analysis Brian J. Majda and Andrea L. Howe . LeVeque Introduction to Hydrodynamic Stability P. Davidson Linear Elastic Waves John G. Bertozzi Infinite Dimensional Dynamical Systems James C.An Introduction to Magnetohydrodynamics P. G. Rogers and W. Cantwell Backlund and Darboux Transformations C. Schief Finite-Volume Methods for Hyperbolic Problems Randall J. S.

Theory of Vortex Sound M. HOWE Boston University . S.

Madrid. Singapore.cambridge.   Cambridge. Subject to statutory exception and to the provision of relevant collective licensing agreements. or will remain.cambridge. New York www. accurate or appropriate. Cape Town. .org/9780521812818 © Cambridge University Press 2003 This book is in copyright. and does not guarantee that any content on such websites is. United Kingdom Published in the United States of America by Cambridge University Press. Cambridge  . São Paulo Cambridge University Press The Edinburgh Building. First published in print format 2002 - - - - - - ---- eBook (NetLibrary) --- eBook (NetLibrary) ---- hardback --- hardback ---- paperback --- paperback Cambridge University Press has no responsibility for the persistence or accuracy of s for external or third-party internet websites referred to in this book. New York. no reproduction of any part may take place without the written permission of Cambridge University Press. Melbourne.org Information on this title: www.

To Shˆ n Ffowcs Williams o .

Contents

Preface 1 Introduction 1.1 What is Vortex Sound? 1.2 Equations of Motion of a Fluid 1.3 Equation of Linear Acoustics 1.4 The Special Case of an Incompressible Fluid 1.5 Sound Produced by an Impulsive Point Source 1.6 Free-Space Green’s Function 1.7 Monopoles, Dipoles, and Quadrupoles 1.8 Acoustic Energy Flux 1.9 Calculation of the Acoustic Far Field Problems 1 2 Lighthill’s Theory 2.1 The Acoustic Analogy 2.2 Lighthill’s v 8 Law 2.3 Curle’s Theory 2.4 Sound Produced by Turbulence Near a Compact Rigid Body 2.5 Radiation from a Noncompact Surface Problems 2 3 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 The Compact Green’s Function The Influence of Solid Boundaries The Helmholtz Equation The Reciprocal Theorem Time-Harmonic Compact Green’s Function ix

page xiii 1 1 2 4 7 10 12 13 18 20 23 25 25 29 32 36 37 39 41 41 44 46 49

x

Contents 53 58 63 65 70 79 82 82 84 88 93 100 106 112 114 114 116 124 128 130 131 132 136 136 139 145 150 154 156 156 158 162 166 172

3.5 Compact Green’s Function for a Rigid Sphere 3.6 Compact Green’s Function for Cylindrical Bodies 3.7 Symmetric Compact Green’s Function 3.8 Low-Frequency Radiation from a Vibrating Body 3.9 Compact Green’s Function Summary and Special Cases Problems 3 4 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 Vorticity Vorticity and the Kinetic Energy of Incompressible Flow The Vorticity Equation The Biot–Savart Law Surface Force in Incompressible Flow Expressed in Terms of Vorticity 4.5 The Complex Potential 4.6 Motion of a Line Vortex Problems 4

5 Vortex Sound 5.1 The Role of Vorticity in Lighthill’s Theory 5.2 The Equation of Vortex Sound 5.3 Vortex–Surface Interaction Noise 5.4 Radiation from an Acoustically Compact Body 5.5 Radiation from Cylindrical Bodies of Compact Cross Section 5.6 Impulse Theory of Vortex Sound Problems 5 6 Vortex–Surface Interaction Noise in Two Dimensions 6.1 Compact Green’s Function in Two Dimensions 6.2 Sound Generated by a Line Vortex Interacting with a Cylindrical Body 6.3 Influence of Vortex Shedding 6.4 Blade–Vortex Interaction Noise in Two Dimensions Problems 6 7 Problems in Three Dimensions 7.1 Linear Theory of Vortex–Airfoil Interaction Noise 7.2 Blade–Vortex Interactions in Three Dimensions 7.3 Sound Produced by Vortex Motion near a Sphere 7.4 Compression Wave Generated When a Train Enters a Tunnel Problems 7

Contents 8 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 Further Worked Examples Blade–Vortex Interactions in Two Dimensions Parallel Blade–Vortex Interactions in Three Dimensions Vortex Passing over a Spoiler Bluff Body Interactions: The Circular Cylinder Vortex Ring and Sphere Vortex Pair Incident on a Wall Aperture

xi 175 175 186 191 194 199 204 209 213

Bibliography Index

.

Many examples of this type are discussed.Preface Vortex sound is the branch of fluid mechanics concerned with the conversion of hydrodynamic (rotational) kinetic energy into the longitudinal disturbances we call sound. the effective acoustic sources turn out to be localized to one or more regions that are small compared to the acoustic wavelength. The subject is itself a subsection of the theory of aerodynamic sound. culminating in a routine procedure for estimating the sound.4). It seems reasonable. It is then possible to investigate a number of idealized hydrodynamic flows involving elementary distributions of vorticity adjacent to solid boundaries. which encompasses a much wider range of problems also involving. and a corresponding broad range of noise problems encountered in industrial applications. therefore. A considerable number of practical problems occur at low Mach numbers (say. for example. and many are ill-equipped to deal with the novel analytical techniques that have been developed to investigate the coupling. and providing. This permits the development of a unified theory of sound production by vortex– surface interactions in terms of the compact Green’s function. an easy identification of those parts of a structure that are likely to be important sources of sound. combustion and ‘entropy’ sources of sound. Most students at this level possess an insufficient grasp of basic principles to appreciate the subtle coupling of the hydrodynamic and acoustic fields. and to analyze in detail the sound produced by these vortex–surface interactions. Great care has therefore been taken to discuss underlying fluid mechanical and acoustic concepts. and to explain as fully as possible the steps in a complicated derivation. For a broad range of such problems. less than about 0. and they are simple enough for the student to acquire an intuitive understanding of the method of xiii . at the same time. The book is based on an introductory one-semester graduate level course given on several occasions at Boston University. to confine an introductory discussion specifically to low Mach number flows.

→ +0. Experience has shown that the successful completion of this kind of project. An elementary understanding of the properties of the Dirac δ function is desirable (Lighthill. M. The mathematical ability assumed of the reader is roughly equivalent to that taught in an advanced undergraduate course on Engineering Mathematics. DeBenedictis. Howe where the summation is over real simple roots of f (x) = 0. 1958). A. By these means the reader is encouraged to investigate both the hydrodynamics and the sound generated by a simple flow. M. The final chapter contains a set of worked examples that have been investigated by students at Boston University. In particular. Harrison. including its interpretation as the formal limit of an -sequence.xiv Preface solution and the underlying physics. Kim. and F. | f (xn )| M. Much use is made of the formula δ( f (x)) = n δ(x − xn ) . A. . Zagadou for their considerable help in preparing that chapter. such as δ(x) = π(x 2 + 2) . Abou-Hussein. S. the reader should be familiar with basic vector differential and integral calculus and with the repeated suffix summation convention of Cartesian tensors (but a detailed knowledge of tensor calculus is not required). I wish to thank my former students H. One or more of the problems appended to some of the later chapters can form the basis of a project. involving the implementation of a widely applicable yet standard procedure for the prediction of sound generation at low Mach numbers. N. Rodrigues. motivates a student to understand the ostensibly difficult parts of the theory.

must possess vorticity. The modern theory of aerodynamic sound was pioneered by James Lighthill in the early 1950s. apart from the high speed turbulent jet – which may be regarded as a distribution of intense turbulence velocity fluctuations that generate sound by converting a tiny fraction of the jet rotational kinetic energy into the longitudinal waves that constitute sound – colliding solid bodies. explosions. It is part of the more general subject of aerodynamic sound. that is. combustion and combustion instabilities in rockets. In this book we shall consider principally the production of sound by unsteady motions of a fluid.1 Introduction 1. 1. conventional loudspeakers. Thus. it is now widely recognized that any mechanism that produces sound can actually be formulated as a problem of aerodynamic sound.1). Any fluid that possesses intrinsic kinetic energy. 1 . crackling paper. and so forth all fall within the theory of aerodynamic sound in its broadest sense. energy not directly attributable to a moving boundary (which is largely withdrawn from the fluid when the boundary motion ceases). and of how the sound can be estimated quantitatively. vibrating surfaces. Our objective. therefore. is to simplify the general aerodynamic sound problem to obtain a thorough understanding of how this happens. complex fluid–structure interactions in the larynx (responsible for speech). Lighthill (1952) wanted to understand the mechanisms of noise generation by the jet engines of new passenger jet aircraft that were then about to enter service. musical instruments. aeroengine rotor blades. However.1 What is Vortex Sound? Vortex sound is the sound produced as a by-product of unsteady fluid motions (Fig. We shall see that in a certain sense and for a vast number of flows vorticity may be regarded as the ultimate source of the sound generated by the flow.1.

2 1 Introduction Fig. x2 . 1.1. x3 ). The velocity v and the fluid density ρ must therefore satisfy .1 Equation of Continuity Conservation of mass requires the rate of increase of the fluid mass within a fixed region of space V to be equal to the net influx due to convection across the boundaries of V.1. Typical vortex sound problems. 1.2. and energy. the state of a fluid is defined when the velocity v and any two thermodynamic variables are specified. momentum. These equations are statements of the conservation of mass.2 Equations of Motion of a Fluid At time t and position x = (x1 . Five scalar equations are therefore required to determine the motion. 1.

284 × 10−3 ν.1) (1.23 1000 η. Dt 3 (1. i. Then the momentum equation is ρ Dv 1 = −∇ p + η ∇ 2 v + ∇(div v) + F.2 Momentum Equation The momentum equation is also called the Navier–Stokes equation. . 1. and body forces F per unit volume.433 × 10−5 1.. div v = 0. it expresses the rate of change of momentum of a fluid particle in terms of the pressure p. but also a good approximation in air for calculating the frictional drag at a solid boundary) for which the principal frictional forces are expressed in terms of the shear coefficient of viscosity η. kg/ms 1.2) is the material derivative.e. The last of Equations (1. which we shall invariably assume to be constant.2. Density and viscosity ρ. which has the following equivalent forms  ∂ρ   + div(ρv) = 0.1. the viscous or frictional force.764 × 10−5 1.284 × 10−6 .1.1) states that div v is equal to the rate of change of fluid volume per unit volume following the motion of the fluid. ρ Dt     D 1     div v = ρ Dt ρ where ∂ ∂ ∂ D = + v·∇ ≡ + vj Dt ∂t ∂t ∂x j 3 (1.2.3) Values of ρ.2 Equations of Motion of a Fluid the equation of continuity.1: Table 1.   ∂t     1 Dρ + div v = 0. kg/m3 Air Water 1. 3. For an incompressible fluid this is zero.2. the repeated suffix j implies summation over j = 1.2.2. η and ν = η/ρ (the ‘kinematic’ viscosity) for air and water at 10 ◦ C and one atmosphere pressure are given in the Table 1.2. 2. m2 /s 1. We consider only Stokesian fluids (most liquids and monatomic gases.2.

This corresponds to a pressure of about 0. of course. (1.2. when shock waves are formed by highly nonlinear events.2.3 Energy Equation This equation must be used in its full generality in problems where energy is transferred by heat conduction. namely. for a ‘deafening’ sound of 160 dB. s = constant. where frictional dissipation of sound is occurring.5) This equation will be satisfied by both the mean (undisturbed) and unsteady components of the flow.02. For our purposes it will usually be sufficient to suppose the flow to be homentropic. the specific entropy s of the fluid is uniform and constant throughout the fluid. Thus.4) We may then assume that the pressure and density are related by an equation of the form p = p(ρ. (1.3 lbs/in2 and is loud enough for nonlinear effects to begin to be important. p/ p0 ∼ 0. The passage of a sound wave in the form of a pressure fluctuation is.3 Equation of Linear Acoustics The intensity of a sound pressure p in air is usually measured on a decibel scale by the quantity 20 × log10 | p| .2. for an ideal gas p = constant × ρ γ .2. pref where the reference pressure pref = 2 × 10−5 N/m2 . γ = ratio of specific heats. Similarly. so that the energy equation becomes s = constant. accompanied by a back-and-forth motion of the fluid at the acoustic .4 1 Introduction 1. or when sound is being generated by combustion and other heat sources. (1.6) 1. Thus. p = p0 ≡ 1 atmosphere ( = 105 N/m2 ) is equivalent to 194 dB. A very loud sound ∼120 dB corresponds to 2 × 10−5 p 120 ≈ × 10( 20 ) = 2 × 10−4 5 p0 10 1. s).

s). say.2.2. In most applications the acoustic amplitude is very small relative to the mean pressure p0 .3.1) and (1.3. and sound propagation may be studied by linearizing the equations. we introduce an artificial generalization by inserting a volume source distribution q(x.5) . ρ /ρ0 1. t) on the righthand side 1 Dρ + div v = q. 0 s = constant.3 Equation of Linear Acoustics particle velocity v.1. and might represent. − ∇ 2 p = ρ0 ∂t 2 ∂t (1. ∂t (1. at 120 dB v ∼ 5 cm/sec. for example. the effect of volume pulsations of a small body in the fluid. Thus. (1.3) An equation determining the pressure p alone in terms of q and F is obtained by invoking the homentropic relation (1.2) where q is the rate of increase of fluid volume per unit volume of the fluid. ρ Dt (1.3): ∂ 2ρ ∂q − div F. where p / p0 1. ρ . let the departures of the pressure and density from these mean values be denoted by p . s) ≈ p(ρ0 .3.4) (1.3. mean density × speed of sound 5 In air the speed of sound is about 340 m/sec.1). ρ0 ∂t Now eliminate v between (1. We shall see later that acoustic particle velocity ≈ acoustic pressure .1) Before linearizing the continuity equation (1. p0 + p = p(ρ0 + ρ . In the undisturbed and disturbed states we have p0 = p(ρ0 .3. To do this we shall first consider sound propagating in a stationary inviscid fluid of mean pressure p0 and density ρ0 .3.5).3. at 160 dB v ∼ 5 m/sec. The linearized equation is then 1 ∂ρ + div v = q. s) + ∂p (ρ. s) ∂ρ ρ.3) becomes ρ0 ∂v + ∇ p = F.2. The linearized momentum equation (1.

. This equation governs the production of sound waves by the volume source q and the force F. − ∇ 2 p = ρ0 2 ∂t c0 ∂t 2 (1.e.5): ρ = p /c0 . s (1.3. and its square root defines the speed of sound c0 = ∂p ∂ρ . In general this can be a dangerous procedure because. The volume source q and the body force F would never appear in a complete description of sound generation within a fluid.3. When these terms are absent the equation describes sound propagation from sources on the boundaries of the fluid. small errors in specifying the sources of sound in a fluid can lead to very large errors in the predicted sound. such as the vibrating cone of a loudspeaker. ∂t (1.3. The implication is that losses due to heat transfer between neighboring fluid particles by viscous and thermal diffusion are neglected during the passage of a sound wave (i.7) (with F = 0) that the velocity potential is the solution of 1 ∂2 − ∇ 2 ϕ = −q(x.3.3. It has the dimensions of velocity2 . substituting for ρ in (1. They are introduced only when we think we understand how to model the real sources of sound in terms of volume sources and forces. (1. t). 2 From (1. Hence. Equation (1.6 1 Introduction The derivative is evaluated at the undisturbed values of the pressure and density ( p0 . 2 c0 ∂t 2 This is the wave equation of classical acoustics. that the motion of a fluid particle is adiabatic).3. This is because only a tiny fraction of the available energy of a vibrating fluid or structure actually radiates away as sound.4).7) where the prime ( ) on the acoustic pressure has been discarded. we obtain ∂q 1 ∂2 − div F.1) implies the existence of a velocity potential ϕ such that v = ∇ϕ.3.6) where the derivative is taken with the entropy s held fixed at its value in the undisturbed fluid. as we shall see.3.9) . When F = 0.8) It follows from this and (1. in terms of which the perturbation pressure is given by p = −ρ0 ∂ϕ . ρ0 ).

Let the center of the sphere be at the origin. so that ∇ 2ϕ = Hence.4 The Special Case of an Incompressible Fluid Table 1. r = a where r = |x|. and let its normal velocity be vn (t).9) reduces to ∇ 2 ϕ = q(x.1.4. Therefore.1) 1. t). There are no sources within the fluid. The motion is obviously radially symmetric.3.5 ft 1 5 7 For future reference. and the corresponding acoustic wavelength λ at a frequency of 1 kHz (sound of frequency f has wavelength λ = c0 / f ). r > a. r > a. Speed of sound and acoustic wavelength c0 m/s Air Water 340 1500 ft/s 1100 5000 km/h 1225 5400 mi/h 750 3400 λ at 1 kHz m 0.3 1.4.3. (1.1 Pulsating Sphere Consider the motion produced by small amplitude radial pulsations of a sphere of mean radius a.). δρ In an incompressible fluid the pressure can change by the action of external forces (moving boundaries. Table 1. etc. . ∇ 2 ϕ = 0. so that q ≡ 0. but the density must remain fixed.1.4 The Special Case of an Incompressible Fluid Small (adiabatic) pressure and density perturbations δp and δρ satisfy δp 2 ≈ c0 . ∂ϕ/∂r = vn (t). ϕ= A + B. c0 = ∞. r 1 ∂ r 2 ∂r r2 ∂ ∂r ϕ = 0. and Equation (1.3. Thus.1 lists the approximate speeds of sound in air and in water. 1.

. 4πr (1. and exhibits the unphysical characteristic of changing instantaneously everywhere when dvn /dt changes its value. we then find ϕ=− Thus. r > a. and we may also write ϕ= −q(t) .8 1 Introduction where A ≡ A(t) and B ≡ B(t) are functions of t.4. 1. For any time t.3) Fig.2) decays as 1/r with distance from the sphere.1. 1.1.4. as shown in Fig. Evaluating it for any sphere S of radius r > a.4. r (1.4. B(t) can be discarded because the pressure fluctuations (∼ −ρ0 ∂ϕ/∂t) must vanish as r → ∞. Applying the condition ∂ϕ/∂r = vn at r = a. the pressure p = −ρ0 ∂ϕ a 2 dvn = ρ0 (t) ∂t r dt a 2 vn (t) . the volume flux q(t) of fluid is the same across any closed surface enclosing the sphere. we find q(t) = S ∇ϕ · dS = 4πa 2 vn (t). r > a.

4.4 The Special Case of an Incompressible Fluid 1.4. where δ(x) = δ(x1 )δ(x2 )δ(x3 ). it is not necessarily a good model (especially when we come to examine the production of sound by a pulsating body) in the presence of a mean fluid flow past the sphere. where it attains a large maximum ∼3/4π 3 . Then ∇ϕ · dS ≡ S −A R2 × (4π R 2 ) = q(t). in which case ∇ 2 ϕ = lim 3 2 q(t) 4π(r 2 + 2) 2 5 →0 .2 Point Source 9 The incompressible motion generated by a volume point source of strength q(t) at the origin is the solution of ∇ 2 ϕ = q(t)δ(x). which agrees with the solution (1. not just a sphere. Hence.5) for the point source is strictly valid only for r > 0.4. where S is the surface of the sphere. Therefore. where its value is actually undefined? To answer this question.4. A = −q(t)/4π and ϕ = −q(t)/4πr . and use the divergence theorem r <R ∇ 2 ϕ d 3 x = S ∇ϕ · dS.4) To find A.5) (1. where it satisfies ∇ 2 ϕ = 0.4. The solution must be radially symmetric and given by ϕ= A r for r > 0. for any smoothly varying test function f (x) and any volume V 5 .3) for the sphere with the same volume outflow in the region r > a = radius of the sphere. The Solution (1. > 0. This conclusion is valid for any pulsating body. it is permissible to replace the sphere by a point source (a monopole) of the same strength q(t) = rate of change of the volume of the sphere. Indeed when is small 3 2 /4π (r 2 + 2 ) 2 is also small except close to r = 0. What happens as r → 0. we integrate (1. The last limit is just equal to q(t)δ(x).1. (1.4) over the interior of a sphere of radius r = R > 0. This indicates that when we are interested in modelling the effect of a pulsating sphere at large distances r a. we write the solution in the form −q(t) 4π(r 2 + 2) 1 2 ϕ = lim →0 .4. However.

6) for a unit point source (q = 1) is −1 −1 = lim →0 4π (r 2 + 4πr where ∇2 −1 4πr = lim ∇ 2 →0 2) 2 1 .10 enclosing the origin lim 3 V 2 1 Introduction f (x) d 3 x 2) 5 2 →0 4π (r 2 + = f (0) lim = f (0) 0 ∞ 3 2 d 3x 2) 2 5 →0 −∞ ∞ 4π (r 2 + 2) 2 5 3 2r 2 dr (r 2 + = f (0).8) 1. r > 0. t) = 0 everywhere. where the value of the last integral is independent of .2) .7) −1 4π (r 2 + 2) 1 2 = lim 3 2 2) 2 5 →0 4π (r 2 + = δ(x).5. r ≥ 0. impulsive point source δ(x)δ(t) is the solution of 1 ∂2 − ∇ 2 ϕ = δ(x)δ(t).4.4. 2 c0 ∂t 2 (1.5. the correct interpretation of the solution ϕ= −1 4πr of ∇ 2 ϕ = δ(x) (1.1) The source exists only for an infinitesimal instant of time at t = 0.5. and that for r = |x| > 0 we have to solve 1 ∂ 1 ∂ 2ϕ − 2 2 ∂t 2 r ∂r c0 The identity 1 ∂ r 2 ∂r r2 ∂ ∂r ϕ≡ 1 ∂2 (r ϕ) r ∂r 2 (1. (1. It is evident that the solution is radially symmetric.4. (1. Thus.5 Sound Produced by an Impulsive Point Source The sound generated by the unit. (1. therefore at earlier times ϕ(x.3) r2 ∂ ∂r ϕ = 0. This is the defining property of the three-dimensional δ function.

where are arbitrary functions.5.1) and examine what happens as → 0. it would be the acoustic analogue of the far-scattered pieces of a broken cup spontaneously reassembling.4) and + t+ r r c0 . By direct calculation we find ∇ 2ϕ = (t − r/c0 ) 3 2 (t − r/c0 ) 2 2 (t − r/c0 ) 1 ∂2 (r ϕ) = − − + 5 3 1 2 2 2 2 + 2) 2 2 + 2) 2 r ∂r (r c0r (r c0 (r + 2 ) 2 1 ∂ 2ϕ (t − r/c0 ) = 1 2 ∂t 2 2 2 c0 c0 (r + 2 ) 2 .4.5.5) The first term on the right represents a spherically symmetric disturbance that propagates in the direction of increasing values of r at the speed of sound c0 as t increases.2) is ϕ= t− r r c0 (1. We do this by extending the solution down to the source at r = 0 by writing (c. r ≥ 0. An event in which sound waves converge on a point from all directions at infinity is so unlikely as to be impossible in practice. This is a causality or radiation condition. (1.5.. It is also consistent with the Second Law of Thermodynamics. whereas the second represents an incoming wave converging toward x = 0. r > 0. 2 ∂r c0 ∂t 2 This has the general solution r ϕ = (t − r/c0 ) + (t + r/c0 ).2) in the form of the one-dimensional wave equation for r ϕ: ∂2 1 ∂2 (r ϕ) − 2 (r ϕ) = 0. since it represents sound waves generated at r = ∞ that approach the source rather than sound waves generated by the source and radiating away from the source. which requires natural systems to change in the more probable direction.5.f.6) Let us substitute this into Equation (1. (1. that (in the absence of boundaries) sound produced by a source must radiate away from the source. We must therefore set = 0.1.7)) ϕ= t− r r c0 = lim t− (r 2 + r c0 2) 2 1 →0 .5.5. Hence. To complete the solution it remains to determine the function . r > 0.5 Sound Produced by an Impulsive Point Source 11 permits us to write Equation (1. (1. the general solution of (1.

8) 1 δ(t). whose radius increases at the speed of sound c0 .5. (1.5.5. δ t −τ − 4π|x − y| c0 (1. 1.4.5. t − τ ) = |x − y| 1 . if 1 ∂2 − ∇ 2 G = δ(x − y)δ(t − τ ).1). t −τ ) is the causal solution of the wave equation generated by the impulsive point source δ(x − y)δ(t − τ ).5.12 Therefore. t) = r 1 δ t− 4πr c0 ≡ |x| 1 δ t− .7) where the δ function in the last line follows from (1. 4π|x| c0 (1. y. 1 Introduction 1 ∂ 2ϕ 3 2 (t − r/c0 ) 2 2 (t − r/c0 ) − ∇ 2ϕ = + 5 3 2 c0 ∂t 2 (r 2 + 2 ) 2 c0r (r 2 + 2 ) 2 → 4π (t)δ(x) + 0 as → 0.8).6) becomes ϕ(x. before the impulsive source is triggered.2) where G = 0 for t < τ. comparing (1. located at the point x = y at time t = τ . The formula for G is obtained from the solution (1.6. 4π This represents a spherical pulse that is nonzero only on the surface of the sphere r = c0 t > 0. and the ‘+ 0’ is obtained by noting that for any smoothly varying test function f (x) and any volume V enclosing the origin 2 V 2 f (x) d 3 x 2) 2 3 r (r 2 + ≈ f (0) = f (0) ∞ −∞ ∞ 0 2 2 d 3x 2) 2 3 r (r 2 + (r 2 + 8π 2r dr 2) 2 3 = 8π f (0) → 0 as → 0. it vanishes everywhere for t < 0. (1.6.1) . 2 c0 ∂t 2 then G(x. In other words.6 Free-Space Green’s Function The free-space Green’s function G(x. we find (t) = and the Solution (1.5. y. Hence.8) for a source at x = 0 at t = 0 simply by replacing x by x − y and t by t − τ .7) with the inhomogeneous wave equation (1.

|x−y|/c0 being the time of travel of sound waves from y to x. t) = ∞ −∞ F(y.6. τ )G(x. spherically symmetric wave expanding from the source at y at the speed of sound. y. in accordance with the radiation condition. it represents the pressure at position x and time t as a linear superposition of contributions from sources at positions y. t − τ ) d 3 y dτ. t).1. t) = = ∞ −∞ F(y. The outgoing wave solution for each constituent source of strength F(y. and Quadrupoles A volume point source q(t)δ(x) of the type considered in Section 1. τ ) d 3 y dτ (1.4) 1 4π |x − y| F(y.5) δ t −τ − |x − y| c0 |x−y| c0 1 i.7) of linear acoustics. t − −∞ |x − y| d 3 y.6) The integral formula (1.7 Monopoles. (1. The wave amplitude decreases inversely with distance |x − y| from the source point y. which radiated at the earlier times t −|x−y|/c0 .6. (1.6.4 as a model for a pulsating sphere is also called a monopole point source. t) is assumed to be generating waves that propagate away from the source region. For a compressible . Let us write this equation in the form 1 ∂2 − ∇2 2 c0 ∂t 2 p = F(x.. Green’s function is the fundamental building block for forming solutions of the inhomogeneous wave equation (1. p(x. Dipoles.6) is called a retarded potential. so that by adding up these individual contributions we obtain p(x. y. Dipoles. τ )G(x.1). τ )δ(x − y)δ(t − τ ) d 3 y dτ is F(y.7 Monopoles. τ ) δ(x − y) δ(t − τ ) d 3 y dτ. 1. and Quadrupoles 13 This represents an impulsive.6.6. t) = 4π F y.e. t − τ ) d 3 y dτ ∞ −∞ ∞ (1.3) where the generalized source F(x. This source distribution can be regarded as a distribution of impulsive point sources of the type on the right of Equation (1.6. because F(x.3.

5): p(x.7.6. Then.3) for a pulsating sphere or volume point source in an incompressible fluid by the dependence on the retarded time t − cr0 .14 1 Introduction medium the corresponding velocity potential it produces is the solution of the equation 1 ∂2 − ∇ 2 ϕ = −q(t)δ(x).7) shows that the point dipole is equivalent to a force distribution F(t) = −f(t)δ(x) per unit volume applied to the fluid at the origin. but it is easier to use (1. implies a summation over j = 1.3.6) and set F(y.6. 2 c0 ∂t 2 (1.6). ϕ(x. t) = 1 4π ∞ −∞ δ t − τ − |x−y| 3 ∂ c0 d y dτ.6. Then a source on the right of the acoustic pressure equation (1.6) of Equation (1.1) The solution can be written down by analogy with the Solution (1. ( f j (τ )δ(y)) ∂yj |x − y| Integrate by parts with respect to each y j (recalling that δ(y) = 0 at y j = ±∞). Replace p by ϕ in (1.3) of the form F(x. t) = −q t − |x| c0 4π |x| ≡ −q t − 4πr r c0 .2) This differs from the corresponding solution (1.1 The Point Dipole Let f = f(t) be a time-dependent vector. a repeated italic subscript.3) for the acoustic pressure.6. 3. and note that |x−y| |x−y| ∂ δ t − τ − c0 ∂ δ t − τ − c0 =− . This is physically more realistic.7.e. such as j in this equation. (1.7.7. τ ) = −q(τ )δ(y). ∂yj |x − y| ∂x j |x − y| . in the value of the volume outflow rate q(t)) are now communicated to a fluid element at distance r after an appropriate time delay r/c0 required for sound to travel outward from the source.3) is called a point dipole (located at the origin). The sound produced by the dipole can be calculated from (1. any effects associated with changes in the motion of the sphere (i. Equation (1.4.6. As explained in the Preface.. t) = div(f(t)δ(x)) ≡ ∂ ( f j (t)δ(x)) ∂x j (1.6. 2. 1.

3.7.6. t) = 4π = Thus. t) = div f(x.3) is −ρ0 ∂ ˙ ( q(t)δ(x)).7. the acoustic pressure becomes p(x. (1.7) or (1. t) = ∂ ∂x j fj t − |x| c0 ∞ −∞ 15 ∂ f j (τ )δ(y) ∂x j ∞ −∞ δ t −τ − |x−y| c0 |x − y| δ t −τ − |x−y| c0 d 3 y dτ 1 ∂ 4π ∂ x j f j (τ )δ(y) |x − y| d 3 y dτ. 1.3).7. 4π |x| . ∂x This is a fluid volume dipole. For example.6. Dipoles. t − |x−y| c0 |x − y| d 3 y. the two monopoles would be q(t)δ x − 2 δ(y)δ(z) − q(t)δ x + 2 δ(y)δ(z) ≈ − q(t)δ (x)δ(y)δ(z) ≡ − ∂ ( q(t)δ(x)). and Quadrupoles Then.4) The same procedure shows that for a distributed dipole source of the type F(x.2 Quadrupoles A source distribution involving two space derivatives is equivalent to a combination of four monopole sources (whose net volume source strength is zero). 1 p(x. if n is parallel to the x axis.7 Monopoles. . t) on the right of Equation (1. t) = 1 ∂ 4π ∂ x j ∞ −∞ f j y. p(x. The relation p = −ρ0 ∂ϕ/∂t implies that the equivalent dipole source in the pressure equation (1.5) A point dipole at the origin orientated in the direction of a unit vector n is entirely equivalent to two point monopoles of equal but opposite strengths placed a short distance apart (much smaller than the acoustic wavelength) on opposite sides of the origin on a line through the origin parallel to n. and the sources are distance apart.1. ∂x where the dot denotes differentiation with respect to time. (1.

7.1.7.6) in Equation (1.3).7) 1.7. we shall prove that the motion induced in an ideal fluid when the sphere is small is equivalent to that produced by a point volume dipole of strength 2πa 3 U (t) at its center directed along the x1 axis. t) = ∂ 2 Ti j (x. The argument above leading to Expression (1. determined Fig. In Section 3.7. A general quadrupole is a source of the form F(x.6.5. 1. 1. |x − y| (1.16 1 Introduction and is called a quadrupole. t) = ∂2 1 4π ∂ xi ∂ x j ∞ −∞ Ti j (y. Take the coordinate origin at the mean position of the center.5) can be applied twice to show that the corresponding acoustic pressure is given by p(x.7. t − |x − y|/c0 ) 3 d y.7.3 Vibrating Sphere Let a rigid sphere of radius a execute small amplitude oscillations at speed U (t) in the x1 direction (Fig.1a). t) ∂ xi ∂ x j (1. .

9) (1.7.7. it decreases in amplitude like 1/r 2 as r → ∞. Hence. in which the sphere is replaced by a point dipole at its center. But. (1. The motion becomes incompressible when c0 → ∞.7.10) Applying this formula for j = 1. and Quadrupoles by the solution of 1 ∂2 ∂ − ∇2 ϕ = (2πa 3 U (t)δ(x)).7. The near-field term is dominant at sufficiently small distances r from the origin such that 1 r 1 1 ∂U f ∼ .8) . |x| = ∂x j |x| 3 ∂ 2πa U t − ∂ x1 4π |x| |x| c0 17 (1. The analytical model (1. t) = Now.4).3) and (1.7. The far field is the acoustic region that only exists when the fluid is compressible. the near-field term is dominant when r λ. we have ϕ(x. xj ∂ . we find (putting r = |x| and x1 = r cos θ) ϕ=− a 3 cos θ r U t− 2r 2 c0 near field − a 3 cos θ ∂U r t− 2c0r ∂t c0 far field . involves the implicit assumption that the motion .7. sound of frequency f travels a distance c0 / f = λ ≡ one acoustic wavelength in one period of oscillation 1/ f . It consists of propagating sound waves.1. 2 ∂ x1 c0 ∂t 2 By analogy with (1. There is an intermediate zone where r ∼ λ in which the solution is in a state of transition from the near to the far field. c0 U ∂t c0 where f is the characteristic frequency of the oscillations of the sphere. carrying energy away from the sphere. Dipoles.8). In this limit the solution reduces entirely to the near-field term.7 Monopoles. which is also called the hydrodynamic near field. and takes over from the near field when r λ.

vφ . decrease faster than 1/r as r → ∞.1b. . t − r c0 ≡ p . say.3) that the acoustic particle velocity is normal to the acoustic wavefronts (the spherical surfaces r = c0 t).18 1 Introduction close to the sphere is essentially the same as if the fluid is incompressible. φ.3) By considering the θ and φ components of the momentum equation we can show that the corresponding velocity components vθ . c0 (1. It follows from what we have just said that a λ. and θ and φ are polar angles determining the directivity of the sound. φ. For the dipole it has the figure of eight pattern illustrated in Fig. ρ0 c0 (1.7. with peaks in directions parallel to the dipole axis (θ = 0. We therefore conclude from this and (1. t − r r c0 .8 Acoustic Energy Flux At large distances r from a source region we generally have p(x. t − r . φ. From the radial component of the linearized momentum equation 1 ∂p ∂vr =− ∂t ρ0 ∂r ≡ 1 r2 θ. In general.8. the diameter of the sphere is much smaller than the acoustic wavelength. 1.8. and therefore vr ∼ 1 c0 r θ.8. r → ∞. t − r c0 + 1 ∂ c0r ∂t θ. π). In other words.8.2) The first term in the second line can be neglected when r → ∞. 1. sound consists of longitudinal waves in which the fluid particles oscillate backwards and forwards along the local direction of propagation of the sound. a body is said to be acoustically compact when its characteristic dimension is small compared to the wavelengths of the sound waves it is producing or with which it interacts. t) ∼ ρ0 θ. The dependence on θ determines the directivity of the sound.1) where the function depends on the nature of the source distribution. The intensity of the sound generated by the sphere in the far field is proportional to ϕ 2 : ϕ2 → ∂U a6 2 2 ∂t 4c0 r t− r c0 2 cos2 θ. φ. there are radiation nulls at θ = π (the 2 curve should be imagined to be rotated about the x1 axis). that is. (1.

1.8 Acoustic Energy Flux The acoustic power from the formula

19

radiated by a source distribution can be computed p2 d S, ρ0 c0

=
S

pvr d S =
S

(1.8.4)

where the integration is over the surface S of a large sphere of radius r centered on the source region. Because the surface area = 4πr 2 , we only need to know the pressure and velocity correct to order 1/r on S in order to evaluate the integral. Smaller contributions (such as that determined by the first term in the second line of (1.8.2)) decrease too fast as r increases to supply a finite contribution to the integral as r → ∞. In acoustic problems we are therefore usually satisfied if we can calculate the pressure and velocity in the acoustic far field correct to order 1/r ; this will always enable us to determine the radiated sound power. The formula vr = p/ρ0 c0 is applicable at large distances from the sources, where the wavefronts can be regarded as locally plane, but it is true identically for plane sound waves. In the latter case, and for spherical waves on the surface of the large sphere of Fig. 1.8.1, the quantity I = pvr = p2 ρ0 c0 (1.8.5)

is called the acoustic intensity. It is the rate of transmission of acoustic energy per unit area of wavefront.

Fig. 1.8.1.

20

1 Introduction

Fig. 1.9.1.

1.9 Calculation of the Acoustic Far Field We now discuss the approximations necessary to evaluate the sound in the far field from the retarded potential representation: p(x, t) = 1 4π
∞ −∞

F y, t −

|x−y| c0

|x − y|

d 3 y.

(1.9.1)

We assume that F(x, t) = 0 only within a finite source region (Fig. 1.9.1), and take the coordinate origin O within the region. When |x| → ∞ and y lies within the source region (so that |x| |y|) 2x · y |y|2 + 2 |x − y| ≡ (|x| − 2x · y + |y| ) = |x| 1 − |x|2 |x|
2 2
1 2 1 2

≈ |x| 1 − Then,

x·y +O |x|2

|y|2 |x|2

|x − y| ≈ |x| − Also,

x·y |x|

when

|y| |x|

1.

(1.9.2)

1 1 ≈ |x − y| |x| − Therefore,

x·y |x|

1 x·y 1+ 2 |x| |x| |y| |x| 1. (1.9.3)

1 x·y 1 ≈ + 3 |x − y| |x| |x|

when

The Approximation (1.9.3) shows that, in order to obtain the far-field approximation of the Solution (1.9.1) that behaves like 1/r = 1/|x| as |x| → ∞, it is sufficient to replace |x − y| in the denominator of the integrand by |x|. However, in the argument of the source strength F it is important to retain possible phase

1.9 Calculation of the Acoustic Far Field

21

differences between the sound waves generated by components of the source distribution at different locations y; we therefore replace |x − y| in the retarded time by the right-hand side of (1.9.2). Hence, p(x, t) ≈ 1 4π|x|
∞ −∞

F y, t −

|x| x·y + d 3 y, c0 c0 |x|

|x| → ∞.

(1.9.4)

This is called the Fraunhofer approximation. The source region may extend over many characteristic acoustic wavelengths of the sound. By retaining the contribution x · y/c0 |x| to the retarded time we ensure that any interference between waves generated at different positions within the source region is correctly described by the far-field approximation. In Fig. 1.9.1 the acoustic travel time from a source point y to the far field point x is equal to that from the point labelled A to x when |x| → ∞. The travel time over the distance O A is just x · y/c0 |x|, so that |x|/c0 − x · y/c0 |x| gives the correct value of the retarded time when |x| → ∞.

1.9.1 Dipole Source Distributions By applying the far-field formula (1.9.4) to a dipole source F(x, t) = div f(x, t) we obtain (from (1.7.5)) p(x, t) ≈ ≈ 1 ∂ 1 4π ∂ x j |x| ∂ 1 4π|x| ∂ x j
∞ −∞ ∞ −∞

f j y, t −

|x| x·y d 3y + c0 c0 |x| (1.9.5)

f j y, t −

x·y |x| + d 3 y, |x| → ∞, c0 c0 |x|

because the differential operator ∂/∂ x j need not be applied to 1/|x| as this would give a contribution decreasing like 1/r 2 at large distances from the dipole. However, it is useful to make a further transformation that replaces ∂/∂ x j by the time derivative ∂/∂t, which is usually more easily estimated in applications. To do this, we observe that ∂fj ∂x j = = y, t − x·y |x| + c0 c0 |x| ∂ x·y |x| + t− ∂x j c0 c0 |x| − yj (x · y)x j xj + − c0 |x| c0 |x| c0 |x|3 as |x| → ∞.

∂fj x·y |x| + y, t − ∂t c0 c0 |x| ∂fj x·y |x| + y, t − ∂t c0 c0 |x|

≈−

xj ∂fj x·y |x| + y, t − c0 |x| ∂t c0 c0 |x|

22

1 Introduction Hence, the far field of a distribution of dipoles F(x, t) = div f(x, t) is given by p(x, t) = −x j ∂ 4π c0 |x|2 ∂t
∞ −∞

f j y, t −

|x| x·y d 3 y. + c0 c0 |x|

(1.9.6)

Note that xj xj 1 , = |x|2 |x| |x| where x j /|x| is the jth component of the unit vector x/|x|. Thus, the additional factor of x j /|x| in (1.9.6) does not change the rate of decay of the sound with distance from the source (which is still like 1/r ), but it does have an influence on the acoustic directivity. A comparison of (1.9.5) and (1.9.6) leads to the following rule for interchanging space and time derivatives in the acoustic far field: 1 xj ∂ ∂ . ←→ − ∂x j c0 |x| ∂t 1.9.2 Quadrupole Source Distributions For the Quadrupole (1.7.6) F(x, t) = and p(x, t) = ∂2 1 4π ∂ xi ∂ x j
∞ −∞

(1.9.7)

∂ 2 Ti j (x, t), ∂ xi ∂ x j Ti j (y, t − |x − y|/c0 ) 3 d y. |x − y|

By applying (1.9.4) and the rule (1.9.7), we find that the acoustic far field is given by p(x, t) ≈ xi x j ∂ 2 2 4π c0 |x|3 ∂t 2
∞ −∞

Ti j y, t −

x·y |x| + d 3 y, |x| → ∞. c0 c0 |x| (1.9.8)

1.9.3 Example For the (1, 2) point quadrupole F(x, t) = ∂2 (T (t)δ(x)) ∂ x1 ∂ x2

x3 = r sin θ sin φ. t) ≈ sin 2θ cos φ ∂ 2 T 2 8π c0 |x| ∂t 2 t− |x| . Its shape is plotted in Fig. A plane sound wave propagating parallel to the x axis satisfies the equation 1 ∂2 ∂2 − 2 ϕ = 0.9. t) ≈ x1 x2 ∂ 2 T 2 4π c0 |x|3 ∂t 2 t− |x| . Problems 1 1.9. 2 ∂t 2 ∂x c0 . Equation (1. c0 If we use spherical polar coordinates. we can write the pressure in the form p(x. The four-lobe cloverleaf pattern is characteristic of a quadrupole Ti j for which i = j. |x| → ∞. |x| → ∞. 1. x2 plane (φ = 0. 1.2 for radiation in the x1 . such that x1 = r cos θ .2. c0 The directivity of the sound (∝ p 2 ) is therefore represented by sin2 2θ cos2 φ.8) shows that in the acoustic far field p(x.Problems 1 23 Fig.9. π). x2 = r sin θ cos φ.

Show that for a wave propagating in the positive x direction in an ideal gas v= p . t) = −q0 (t − R/c0 ) . 4. where U0 = constant. ρ. A volume point source of strength q0 (t) translates at constant. t) of the radiated sound is determined by the solution of 1 ∂2 − ∇ 2 ϕ = −q0 (t)δ(x − Ut). when the sphere executes small amplitude radial oscillations at normal velocity vn = U0 cos(ωt).8. As for Problem 2. Calculate the acoustic power (1. 4π R(1 − M cos ) M= U . and temperature variations. c0 where and are arbitrary functions respectively representing waves propagating in the positive and negative x directions. c0 where R is the distance of the reception point x from the source position at the time of emission of the sound received at x at time t. and T are respectively the acoustic pressure. p. 3. and is the angle between U and the direction of propagation of this sound. density. The velocity potential ϕ(x. 2 c0 ∂t 2 Show that ϕ(x. ρ0 c0 ρ= p . 2. and cp is the specific heat at constant pressure. . 2 c0 T = p .24 with general solution ϕ= 1 Introduction t− x c0 + t+ x . subsonic velocity U.4) radiated by an acoustically compact sphere of radius R executing small amplitude translational oscillations of frequency ω and velocity U (t) = U0 cos(ωt). ρ0 cp where v is the acoustic particle velocity. U0 = constant.

and the acoustic radiation is a very small byproduct of the motion. 25 . of the sound produced by a turbulent nozzle flow. Lighthill was initially interested in solving the problem.1b. This avoids complications caused by the presence of the nozzle. Most unsteady flows of technological interest are of high Reynolds number and turbulent. its back-reaction on the main flow can usually be ignored. The fluid is assumed to be at rest at infinity. The properties of the unsteady flow in the source region may then be determined by neglecting the production and propagation of the sound.1. where the mean pressure. his original theory actually applies to the simpler situation shown in Fig. c0 .1 The Acoustic Analogy The sound generated by turbulence in an unbounded fluid is usually called aerodynamic sound.2 Lighthill’s Theory 2. in which the sound is imagined to be generated by a finite region of rotational flow in an unbounded fluid. Lighthill (1952) transformed the Navier–Stokes and continuity equations to form an exact. once generated. 2. and there are many important flows where the hypothesis is obviously correct. ρ0 . and sound speed are respectively equal to p0 . a reasonable approximation if the Mach number M is small. illustrated in Fig. inhomogeneous wave equation whose source terms are important only within the turbulent region. 2. The turbulence is usually produced by fluid motion over a solid boundary or by flow instability.1a. However. Lighthill compared the equations for the production of acoustic density fluctuations in the real flow with those in an ideal linear acoustic medium that coincides with the real fluid at large distances from the sources. density. and where the theory leads to unambiguous predictions of the sound.1. He argued that sound is a very small component of the whole motion and that.

26 2 Lighthill’s Theory Fig.1.1.1.2) . ∂t ∂x j ∂ xi ∂x j ∂x j (2. and σi j is the viscous stress tensor defined (for a Stokesian fluid) by σi j = 2η ei j − 1 ekk δi j .1.3) is cast in the form ρ ∂σi j ∂vi ∂vi ∂p ∂ + ρv j =− + ≡− ( pδi j − σi j ).1. To do this. and 0 for i = j).1) δi j is the Kronecker delta (= 1 for i = j.3) (2. and the ith component of the momentum equation (1.2. body forces are neglected. 2. 3 where ei j = ∂v j 1 ∂vi + 2 ∂x j ∂ xi (2.

and the constant pressure p0 is inserted for convenience. stationary acoustic .1. ∂t ∂ xi 0 (2.2.1.1.1.1.8) to obtain the equation of linear acoustics satisfied by the perturbation density ρ − ρ0 1 ∂2 − ∇2 2 c0 ∂t 2 2 c0 (ρ − ρ0 ) = 0. the momentum flux tensor contains only the pressure 2 πi j → πi0j = ( p − p0 )δi j ≡ c0 (ρ − ρ0 )δi j .9) Because the turbulence is neglected in this approximation.1) is written in the slightly modified form ∂ ∂(ρvi ) (ρ − ρ0 ) + = 0. (2. linear acoustic medium.2.1.5) (2.8) we can eliminate the momentum density ρvi between (2.1 The Acoustic Analogy 27 is the rate of strain tensor. (2.1.4) is called the momentum flux tensor. (2. Next multiply the continuity equation (1. It can now be asserted that the sound generated by the turbulence in the real fluid is exactly equivalent to that produced in the ideal. ∂t ∂ xi (2. and there are no externally applied forces or moving boundaries. ∂t ∂x j By adding this to Equation (2.1.1). we obtain the Reynolds form of the momentum equation ∂πi j ∂(ρvi ) =− .7) If the continuity equation (1. In an ideal.7) and (2. the unique solution of this equation that satisfies the radiation condition of outgoing wave behavior is simply ρ − ρ0 = 0. ∂t ∂x j where πi j = ρvi v j + ( p − p0 )δi j − σi j .1) by vi : vi ∂(ρv j ) ∂ρ + vi = 0.1.2.6) and the momentum equation then reduces to ∂(ρvi ) ∂ 2 + c (ρ − ρ0 ) = 0.

8) (the same procedure used above for the linear problem).10) where Ti j is called the Lighthill stress tensor.10) of Ti j .1.4) as the momentum equation for an ideal. This is Lighthill’s acoustic analogy. it implies (see Section 2.11) By eliminating the momentum density ρvi between this and the continuity equation (2. stationary acoustic medium of mean density ρ0 and sound speed c0 subject to the externally applied stress Ti j 0 ∂(ρvi ) ∂πi j ∂ + πi j − πi0j .1. (2. nonlinear counterpart of (2. we obtain Lighthill’s equation 1 ∂2 − ∇2 2 c0 ∂t 2 2 c0 (ρ − ρ0 ) = ∂ 2 Ti j .1. Indeed.28 2 Lighthill’s Theory medium (which is governed by (2.1. For the simplified problem of Fig. ideal fluid produced by a distribution of quadrupole sources whose strength per unit volume is the Lighthill stress tensor Ti j .9).2) that free-field turbulence is an extremely weak sound source. This is produced by wave amplitude nonlinearity. =− ∂t ∂x j ∂x j or ∂ Ti j ∂ 2 ∂(ρvi ) + c (ρ − ρ0 ) = − . we can rewrite (2.1.1. In the definition (2.1.12) This is the exact.1b it is a nonlinear quantity that can be neglected except where the motion is turbulent. The problem of calculating the turbulence generated sound is therefore equivalent to solving this equation for the radiation into a stationary.1. ∂t ∂ xi 0 ∂x j (2. and that in a typical low Mach number flow only a tiny fraction of the available flow energy is converted into sound. The quadrupole character of the turbulence sources is one of the most important conclusions of Lighthill’s theory. The viscous . the term ρvi v j is called the Reynolds stress. and by mean density variations in the source flow.1. ∂ xi ∂ x j (2. The second term represents the excess of momentum transfer by the pressure over that in the ideal (linear) fluid of density ρ0 and sound speed c0 . 2.9) in turbulence-free regions) forced by the stress distribution Ti j = πi j − πi0j 2 = ρvi v j + ( p − p0 ) − c0 (ρ − ρ0 ) δi j − σi j .

and the viscous attenuation of the radiating sound is usually ignored.12). Consider the particular but important case in which the mean density and sound speed are uniform throughout the fluid. The influence of acoustic nonlinearity and of thermoviscous dissipation is usually sufficiently weak to be neglected within the source region.2. although they may affect propagation to a distant observer. in most applications the Reynolds number in the source region is very large. 1). to predict the radiated sound from Lighthill’s equation (2. Convection and refraction of sound within and near the source flow can be important. and properly accounts for the attenuation of the sound.1.12) with outgoing wave be2 havior is given by (1. and attenuation due to thermal and viscous actions. Thus. This is because the terms in the definition (2.2 Lighthill’s v 8 Law The formal solution of Lighthill’s equation (2. such effects are described by the presence of unsteady linear terms in Ti j (Ffowcs Williams.1) it is usually necessary to suppose that all of these acoustic effects in the source flow (which really depend on fluid compressibility) are in some sense negligible.7) with p(x.1) This is strictly an alternative. 2. integral equation representation of Equation (2.2. t − |x − y|/c0 ) 3 d y.2. or when there are large variations in the mean thermodynamic properties of the medium within the source region. 1974). |x − y| (2. t) = ∂2 1 4π ∂ xi ∂ x j ∞ −∞ Ti j (y.1. it provides a useful prediction of the sound only when Ti j is known or has been determined by some other means. but also govern acoustic self-modulation caused by acoustic nonlinearity. refraction caused by sound speed variations. The variations in the density ρ within a low Mach number. for example in the presence of a mean shear layer (when the Reynolds stress will include terms like ρUi u j .2 Lighthill’s v 8 Law 29 stress tensor σi j is linear in the perturbation quantities.1.7. t) replaced by c0 (ρ − ρ0 ) 2 c0 (ρ − ρ0 )(x. high Reynolds number source flow are then of . the convection of sound waves by the turbulent velocity. This means that in practice it must be possible to derive a good approximation for Ti j by taking the source flow to be effectively incompressible. where U and u respectively denote the mean and fluctuating components of v). and when the wavelength of the sound is much larger than the when M 2 size of the source region. This is often possible when the characteristic Mach number M ∼ v/c0 is small (specifically. and σi j can be neglected.10) of Ti j not only account for the generation of sound.

ρvi v j = ρ0 (1 + O(M 2 ))vi v j ≈ ρ0 vi v j .8) for the far field of a quadrupole distribution. provided that M 2 1. so that 2 2 p − p0 − c0 (ρ − ρ0 ) ≈ ( p − p0 ) 1 − c0 c2 ∼ O(ρ0 v 2 M 2 ). + c0 c0 |x| |x| → ∞.2. we introduce a characteristic velocity v and length scale (of the energy-containing eddies) of the turbulence sources. Fluctuations in vi v j occurring in different regions of the turbulent flow separated by distances >O( ) will tend to be statistically independent. if viscous dissipation is neglected we make the approximation Ti j ≈ ρ0 vi v j .2. Thus. 1967).9. if c(x.30 2 Lighthill’s Theory order ρ0 M 2 (Batchelor. Hence.2. Quantitative predictions can be made from this formula provided the behavior of the Reynolds stress ρ0 vi v j is known. t − |x| x·y d 3 y. The value of the integral over the eddy then may be estimated to be of order ρ0 v 2 3 . we can set x · y/c0 |x| = 0 in the integration over that eddy. such as the width of a jet mixing layer. the retarded time variations x · y/c0 |x| across that eddy can be neglected. that is. This means that when the integral in (2. t) is the local speed of sound in the source region. so that the wavelength (c0 / f ) of the sound ∼ /M 1). To determine the order of magnitude of p. . The value of depends on the mechanism responsible for turbulence production. t − |x − y|/c0 ) 3 d y 4π |x − y| ρ0 vi v j y. Hence. if the coordinate origin is temporarily placed at O within the eddy.2. we arrive at the important conclusion that (because M = v/c0 the turbulence eddies are each acoustically compact.2. t) ≈ ≈ ∂2 ∂ xi ∂ x j ρ0 vi v j (y. (2. and the sound may be considered to be generated by a collection of V0 / 3 independent eddies.1) of Lighthill’s equation therefore becomes p(x. The characteristic frequency of the turbulent fluctuations f ∼ v/ . the Solution (2.3) xi x j ∂ 2 2 4πc0 |x|3 ∂t 2 where in the second line we have used the formula (1. Similarly. If the irrelevant constant pressure p0 is suppressed. where V0 is the volume occupied by the turbulence (Fig.3) is confined to a single eddy.1).2) 2 In the acoustic region outside the source flow c0 (ρ − ρ0 ) = p − p0 . it may also 2 be shown that c0 /c2 = 1 + O(M 2 ). 2. (2.

2.2.2.4) The acoustic power radiated by the eddy is determined by the surface integral (1. The total power radiated from the whole of the turbulent region of volume V0 . Thus.2 Lighthill’s v 8 Law 31 Fig.5) This is Lighthill’s ‘eighth power’ law.3) that. = 2 |x| c0 |x| (2. .4) taken over a large sphere centered on the eddy. in order of magnitude. 2. for one eddy. acoustic power radiated by one eddy ∼4π |x|2 p2 ∼ ρ0 c0 2 (2.1. The order of magnitude of the time derivative for changes in the source region is ∂ v ∼ . ∂t Therefore. it follows from (2.8. containing V0 / 3 independent eddies.2.2. is q ρ0 v 8 = 5 c0 2 ρ0 v 3 M 5 . the far-field acoustic pressure satisfies p∼ ρ0 v 4 ρ0 v 2 M 2 . ≈ V0 3 × ( 2 ρ0 v 3 M 5 ) = v ρ0 v 2 M 5 V0 .

2. (2. turbulence is frequently generated in the boundary layers and wakes of flow past such bodies (airfoils. although for the moment we shall discuss only cases involving stationary bodies. say. for x within S.4.1) and consider the Heaviside unit function H( f ) = 1 0 for x in V.). Before doing this we establish an integral transformation formula that is used repeatedly in problems of this kind.3. 2.3 Curle’s Theory In most applications of Lighthill’s theory it is necessary to generalize the solution (2. for x within S. flow control surfaces.1) defined by the equation f (x) = 0.2. Indeed. .3. (2. Therefore. The procedure in such cases is to introduce a system of mathematical control surfaces that can be deformed to coincide with the surfaces of the different moving or stationary bodies. and the unsteady surface forces (dipoles) that arise are likely to make a significant contribution to the production of sound. confirming Lighthill’s hypothesis that the flow generated sound is an infinitesimal byproduct of the turbulent motion.1 Volume and Surface Integrals Let V be the fluid outside a closed control surface S (Fig. where f (x) > 0 f (x) < 0 for x in V.6) This is smaller than about 0.1) to account for the presence of solid bodies in the flow. at which energy must be supplied by the action of external forces to maintain the kinetic energy of a statistically steady turbulent field occupying a volume V0 is given in order of magnitude by 0 ∼ v ρ0 v 2 V0 .3.32 2 Lighthill’s Theory Dimensional arguments and experiment indicate that the rate 0 . etc.2. 2. the mechanical efficiency with which turbulence kinetic energy is converted into sound is q 0 ∼ M 5.01 for Mach numbers M < 0.

2. S (2. where ∇ f is in the direction of n.3 Curle’s Theory 33 Fig.3.2.3. and in which the volume element is d 3 x = ds⊥ d S. where s⊥ = 0 on S and s⊥ is measured parallel to n.3) or −∞ (x) n j d S ≡ S where H ≡ H ( f ) and n is the unit normal on S directed into V. (x) d S j . The volume integral is therefore confined to the region between the inner and outer faces of a shell of infinitesimal thickness (between the broken line surfaces in Fig. f = ∂f ∂s⊥ s⊥ .3.1.3. 2.2) (2. . for small values of s⊥ . (x) n d S ≡ S S (x)∇ H d 3 x = (x) ∂H 3 d x= ∂x j (x) dS. Proof ∇ H ( f ) ≡ δ( f ) ∇ f (2.4) is nonzero only on S.3. Because f = 0 on S we can write. Then. S where (∂ f /∂s⊥ ) S ≡ |∇ f | > 0 is evaluated on S.1) that just encloses S. for an arbitrary function ∞ −∞ ∞ (x) defined in V and on S.

2 Curle’s Equation Curle (1955) has derived a formal solution (called Curle’s equation) of Lighthill’s equation (2. because n = S ∇f .34 Therefore. |∇ f | 2.2).3. |∇ f | (x)∇ H d 3 x ≡ = ∞ −∞ (x)∇ f δ( f ) d 3 x = ∞ (x) −∞ ∇f δ(s⊥ ) ds⊥ d S |∇ f | (x)n dS. ∂t ∂ xi ∂x j ∂x j (2.1.1.11) by H ≡ H ( f ). 2 Lighthill’s Theory δ( f ) = δ(|∇ f |s⊥ ) ≡ Hence. To derive Curle’s equation.1. fixed surface S. multiply the momentum equation (2. or merely constitute a control surface used to isolate a fixed region of space containing both solid bodies and fluid or just fluid. ∞ −∞ δ(s⊥ ) .3.10) of Ti j to obtain ∂ ∂ ∂H ∂ 2 (ρvi H ) + H c0 (ρ − ρ0 ) = − (H Ti j ) + (ρvi v j + pi j ) .5) Fig. defined as above by an equation f (x) = 0 (Fig.2.3. . 2.12) for the sound produced by turbulence in the vicinity of an arbitrary.3. This surface may either enclose a solid body. 2. and use the definition (2.

whereas the monopole is responsible for the sound produced by volume pulsations (if any) of the body. in other words the aggregate effect of the dipole and monopole sources accounts for the presence of solid bodies and turbulence within S (when Ti j = 0 in S) and also for the interaction of sound generated outside S with the fluid and solid bodies in S.3.5) and (2. Repeat this operation for the continuity equation (2.6.6) is the compressive stress tensor. The second and third terms on the right-hand side respectively represent dipole and monopole sources distributed over S. and may or may not contain turbulence.8): ∂ ∂H ∂ (H (ρ − ρ0 )) + (Hρvi ) = (ρvi ) .2.8) The equation is valid throughout all space.7). the surface dipole and monopole sources then represent the influence of this region on the sound radiated in V . This is the differential form of Curle’s equation 1 ∂2 − ∇2 2 c0 ∂t 2 = 2 H c0 (ρ − ρ0 ) ∂ 2 (H Ti j ) ∂ ∂H − (ρvi v j + pi j ) ∂ xi ∂ x j ∂ xi ∂x j + ∂ ∂t ρv j ∂H . the outgoing wave solution is found from the general solution (1. ∇ H = ∇ f δ( f ). They have the following interpretations: 1. Because Curle’s form of Lighthill’s equation is valid throughout all space.7) formally determine the momentum density ρvi and the density fluctuation (ρ − ρ0 ) in the exterior region V (where H ( f ) ≡ 1) in terms of the Lighthill stresses Ti j in V and sources distributed over the control surface.12) can now be obtained by eliminating Hρvi between (2. If S is the boundary of a solid body.4).6) of the wave .3. 2.3 Curle’s Theory where pi j = ( p − p0 )δi j − σi j 35 (2. including the region enclosed by S where H ( f ) vanishes.3. If S is merely an artificial control surface it will enclose fluid. ∂x j (2.3.5) and (2.3.7) The Formula (2.3. shows that Equations (2. ∂t ∂ xi ∂ xi (2.3. possibly also solid bodies.1. the surface dipole represents the production of sound by the unsteady surface force that the body exerts on the exterior fluid. An analog of Lighthill’s equation (2.3.1.

2. [ρv j ] 4π |x − y| S where the square bracket notation such as [Ti j ] ≡ Ti j (y. note first that for turbulence of velocity v and correlation scale .9) d S j (y) .3.7.1) We now use this solution to determine the order of magnitude of the sound generated by an acoustically compact body within a turbulent flow. and we shall assume this to be the case in the following. the orders of magnitude of the pressure and viscous components of the compressive stress tensor pi j = ( p − p0 )δi j − σi j are ( p − p0 ) ∼ ρ0 v 2 .3.3. because H ( f ) ≡ 0 inside S.5) for dipole sources.36 2 Lighthill’s Theory equation (1. When account is taken of the transformation formula (2.2) is rigid. ( p − p0 ) ρ0 v v ∼ = . the sum of the three integrals on the right-hand side must also vanish when the field point x is within S. σ η ν where ν = η/ρ0 is the kinematic viscosity.3. 2. 4π |x − y| (2. 2.4.9) reduces to 2 H c0 (ρ − ρ0 ) = ∂2 ∂ xi ∂ x j [Ti j ] V ∂ d 3y − 4π |x − y| ∂ xi S [ pi j ] d S j (y) .4 Sound Produced by Turbulence Near a Compact Rigid Body When the surface S (in Fig. as before.1) is estimated as in Section 2. that is. using the special form (1. The contribution from the quadrupole integral in (2. The dimensionless ratio Re = v /ν is the Reynolds number and is always very large (∼104 or more) in turbulent flow. t − |x − y|/c0 ) implies evaluation at the retarded time. This means that viscous contributions to the surface force can be neglected.3). Compactness usually requires the Mach number M ∼ v/c0 1.4. Curle’s equation (2. .6. v σ ∼η . Note that. To deal with the surface dipole.3) this yields Curle’s equation 2 H c0 (ρ − ρ0 ) = ∂2 ∂ xi ∂ x j ∂ + ∂t [Ti j ] V ∂ d 3y − 4π|x − y| ∂ xi S [ρvi v j + pi j ] d S j (y) 4π |x − y| (2.

6). and neglecting retarded time variations x · y/c0 |x| because S is compact. c0 |x| |x| which exceeds by an order of magnitude (1/M 1) the sound pressure (2. corners. Thus. the same as in the absence of the body (see Section 2. there are A/ 2 independently radiating surface elements. say.4. This increase in acoustic efficiency brought about by surface dipoles on an acoustically compact body occurs also for arbitrary.1) of Curle’s equation to calculate the radiation.5. which determine the appropriate values of A and V0 / . (2. 2. the dipole sound pressure pd . The contribution to pd from a surface element of diameter within which the turbulence surface pressure fluctuations are correlated is evidently of order 1 v × (ρ0 v 2 2 ) = ρ0 v 2 M. t) = c0 (ρ − ρ0 )(x.9. and H ( f ) = 1. such as edges.3) The direct power radiated by quadrupoles occupying a volume V0 is q ∼ (V0 / )ρ0 v 3 M 5 .4) produced by a quadrupole in V of length scale . t− c0 4π c0 |x|2 dt c0 |x| → ∞. If A is the total surface area wetted by the turbulent flow. applying the far-field dipole approximation (1. and the total power radiated by the dipoles is d ∼ 4π |x|2 × 2 pd ∼ Aρ0 v 3 M 3 . t − S |x| d Fi |x| xi d Si = . Let us apply the rigid surface form (2. can be written pd ≈ ∂ xi 4πc0 |x|2 ∂t ( p − p0 ) y. ρ0 c0 (2.5 Radiation from a Noncompact Surface 37 2 In the far field the pressure p(x.2.2) where F(t) is the unsteady force exerted on the fluid by the body. plane rigid wall at x2 = 0 (Fig.5 Radiation from a Noncompact Surface Consider a compact turbulent eddy in x2 > 0 adjacent to an infinite.4. noncompact bodies when turbulence interacts with compact structural elements.4. 2. The sound produced by the turbulence near S is therefore dominated by the dipole when M is small.1). At high Reynolds numbers and at x in the . and protuberances.2. and as M → 0 the acoustic power exceeds the quadrupole 1. Precisely how small M should be for this to power by a factor ∼1/M 2 be true depends on the details of the flow.2). t).

t) ≡ c0 (ρ − ρ0 ) and H ( f ) ≡ H (x2 ) = 1) we find p(x. and therefore involves an unknown and possibly important contribution from the acoustic pressure that we are trying to calculate! The difficulty was resolved by Powell (1960) by the ingenious device of applying Curle’s solution . t − Retarded time variations have been neglected in the integral over the volume of the compact turbulent eddy. 2. t − |x| d 3y c0 |x| x1 y1 + x3 y3 + c0 c0 |x| |x| → ∞. dy1 dy3 .1.38 2 Lighthill’s Theory Fig. extends out to infinity on the wall.5. because this tends to extend over a larger region than the Reynolds stress fluctuations responsible for it (indeed. We have not done this in the surface pressure integral.4 for a compact body.5. the acoustic component of the pressure. The value of the surface integral cannot be estimated by a naive order-ofmagnitude calculation of the kind performed in Section 2.1) y2 =0 ( p − p0 ) y. as opposed to the near field hydrodynamic pressure. (2. because for an infinite plane wall the domain of integration includes the acoustic region. t) ≈ xi x j ∂ 2 2 4πc0 |x|3 ∂t 2 + x2 ∂ 4πc0 |x|2 ∂t Ti j y. decaying only very slowly like 1/|x|). 2 acoustic far field (where p(x.

This is a consequence of the Kraichnan–Phillips theorem (see Howe.1) at the image x = (x1 . (2.5. .5. extreme care must be exercised when using Curle’s equation to estimate the sound produced by turbulence interacting with large surfaces. At the image point H ( f ) = H (x2 ) ≡ 0. t − |x| → ∞.5. (2. according to which the net unsteady component of the normal force between an infinite plane wall and an incompressible fluid must vanish identically ( p − p0 )(y.2) y2 =0 ( p − p0 ) y.5.4.1) and (2. t) ≈ ≈ ¯ ¯ (xi x j + x i x j ) ∂ 2 2 4πc0 |x|3 ∂t 2 ¯ ¯ (xi x j + x i x j ) ∂ 2 2 4πc0 |x|3 ∂t 2 Ti j y. t − |x| d 3y c0 |x| d 3 y. −x2 . Show that the acoustic efficiency of a compact sphere of radius R executing small amplitude translational oscillations at velocity U = U0 sin(ωt) is a 0 ∼ ωR c0 3 .4) y2 =0 Thus. As a general rule. (2. t) dy1 dy3 ≡ 0.2). 1998a).3) c0 ρ0 vi v j y.5. the surface contribution will be comparable to that from the turbulence quadrupoles whenever the characteristic wavelength of the sound is smaller than the radius of curvature of the surface. The surface integral term in this formula is equal but opposite in sign to that in the original solution (2. |x| → ∞.1). x3 ) in the wall of the far field observation point x. we find p(x. which is now seen to exactly represent the quadrupole sound generated by a system of image quadrupoles in the wall! Adding (2.Problems 2 39 ¯ (2.5. the apparently strong contribution from the surface pressure dipoles actually integrates to a term of quadrupole strength. t − |x| d 3y c0 |x| x1 y1 + x3 y3 + c0 c0 |x| dy1 dy3 . Problems 2 1. and therefore 0≈ ¯ ¯ xi x j ∂2 2 4πc0 |x|3 ∂t 2 − ∂ x2 4πc0 |x|2 ∂t Ti j y. t − Therefore.

5. G(x. −x2 . x3 ). y. t − τ ) is the solution of what problem of linear acoustics? . 0 = 2ω R 3 2 ρ0 U0 3 are respectively the average acoustic and hydrodynamic powers fed into the fluid during the quarter cycle 0 < ωt < π/2. and A is the projected cross-sectional area of the body in the flow direction. time-harmonic component such that U = U0 + u cos(ωt). low Mach number flow at speed U produces a drag force equal to CD A 1 ρ0 U 2 . What is the efficiency in Problem 1 when the sphere pulsates with small amplitude normal velocity vn = U0 sin(ωt)? 3. 4. y. where CD 2 is the drag coefficient (which may be regarded as constant).8) determined by the modified Green’s function G(x. Derive an approximate formula for the far-field acoustic pressure radiated by the body when U contains a small amplitude. 2.3. Show that Powell’s solution (2. δ t −τ − 4π |¯ − y| x c0 ¯ where x = (x1 .3) for the sound generated by turbulence adjacent to a rigid plane wall is identical with the solution of Curle’s differential equation (2.40 where a 2 Lighthill’s Theory = π ω R3 2 ρ0 U0 6 ωR c0 3 . Explain the significance of averaging only over 0 < ωt < π/2. where U0 and u are constant and u U0 . The wake behind a bluff body fixed in a nominally steady. t − τ ) = 1 |x − y| δ t −τ − 4π |x − y| c0 + 1 |¯ − y| x .

t − τ ) = |x − y| 1 δ t −τ − . it was found that the presence of a solid boundary S in the vicinity of the turbulence quadrupole sources Ti j resulted in the appearance of additional dipole and monopole sources distributed over S. we shall frame the present discussion in terms of Equation (1. (3.6 enable us to represent ϕ in the form ϕ(x. To fix ideas.1. t). t − τ ) d 3 y dτ.3.9) of this 41 .1 The Influence of Solid Boundaries Let us return to the general problem of linear acoustics.3 The Compact Green’s Function 3. Curle’s solution (2.4) In our discussion of Curle’s extension of Lighthill’s theory in Chapter 2. represented by the second and third terms on the right-hand side of Equation (2. y.1. but our conclusions will be applicable quite generally. where G = 0 2 c0 ∂t 2 for t < τ.1. 4π |x − y| c0 (3. t − τ ) is the outgoing wave solution of 1 ∂2 − ∇ 2 G = δ(x−y)δ(t −τ ).3. G(x. t − τ ) is the free space Green’s function G(x. t) 2 c0 ∂t 2 (3. τ )G(x.3) that is. y. In the absence of solid boundaries (in free space) the results of Section 1.9) 1 ∂2 − ∇ 2 ϕ = −q(x. t) = ∞ −∞ −q(y. This equation determines ϕ in terms of a specified source distribution q(x.1. (3.3.2) where G(x. y.8).1) for the velocity potential. y.

It would be very convenient if we could modify the functional form of G(x. we must find a solution of Green’s function equation (3.3) in the situation illustrated in Fig.1) using Green’s function (3. it turns out that a relatively simple and general approximate formula can be found for the modified Green’s function for those problems where it is known that the typical wavelength of the sound produced by the source distribution q(x. and half-planes).6. t − τ ) so that it automatically takes account of the contributions from the dipole and monopole sources on S. A similar representation involving surface distributions of dipoles and monopoles is obtained for ϕ when we attempt to solve Equation (3.1. equation was derived by using the retarded potential formula (1. However. To do this.1. 3.6).1. The main practical difficulty is the calculation of the modified Green’s function. circular cylinders. Although it is always possible in principle. t) is adjacent to a rigid boundary S on which the normal derivative ∂ϕ/∂ xn = 0. t) is large compared to one or more principal dimensions of the solid body S. .1. y.2) in terms of the modified Green’s function.4) that satisfies appropriate boundary conditions on S. inasmuch that no surface integrals occur in the final solution.1.1. there being no additional surface integrals to evaluate.42 3 The Compact Green’s Function Fig. exact analytical representations are known only for solid bodies of very simple shapes (such as spheres.1. where the source distribution q(x. The solution ϕ of (3. obtained by use of the free space Green’s function (3.3). This is called the compact Green’s function.1) is then once again given by Formula (3.1.1. 3.1.

y.1. The formula is proved by observing that no real system can oscillate at infinitely large frequencies. ω) = δ(x − y). 1958).1. (3. a solid body of characteristic dimension frequency ω provided that λ = κ0 2π 1. 1 2π ∞ −∞ e−iω(t−τ ) dω ≡ lim →+0 1 2π π[ 2 ∞ −∞ e−iω(t−τ )− . (3.1. y.1. ω)e−iω(t−τ ) dω.6) then the substitution of this and (3.1 The Influence of Solid Boundaries 43 To simplify the calculation of the compact Green’s function.4 to calculate the compact Green’s function. κ0 is compact for waves of Thus.5) into the Green’s function equation (3.8) This condition will be used below in Section 3. (3.7) where κ0 = ω/c0 is called the acoustic wave number. Then. we use the Fourier integral formula δ(t − τ ) = 1 2π ∞ −∞ e−iω(t−τ ) dω. G(x. Sound of frequency ω has wavelength λ= 2π .5) which expresses the δ function as a linear combination of time-harmonic oscillations of frequency ω. |ω| dω = lim →+0 + (t − τ )2 ] The final term on the right is the usual definition of δ(t − τ ) as the limit of an ‘ -sequence’ (Lighthill. .3. If we now put G(x. y. for each frequency ω.1.4) ˆ shows that. y. t − τ ) = −1 2π ∞ −∞ ˆ G(x.1. ω) is the solution of 2 ˆ ∇ 2 + κ0 G(x. (3. and therefore in all practical problems e−iω(t−τ ) can be replaced by e−iω(t−τ )− |ω| for arbitrarily small > 0.

t) = ∞ −∞ ϕ(x. so that q(x.2.2. r r where A. The free space Green’s function can be found by the method used in Section 1. ˆ (3.5 for the wave equation.2.1.2.2. we have ∂2 ˆ 2 ˆ (r G) + κ0 (r G) = 0 ∂r 2 and therefore Aeiκ0 r Be−iκ0 r ˆ G= + .5).1. . ω) ˆ (3. (3. ω) for the inhomogeneous Helmholtz equation.44 3 The Compact Green’s Function 3.1) are known respectively as the Helmholtz equation and the inhomogeneous ˆ Helmholtz equation. ω)e−iωt dω. because (differentiating under the integral sign) 1 ∂2 2 c0 ∂t 2 ∞ −∞ ϕ(x. The source term q(x. (3. ˆ the solution ϕ(x.2.1 The Point Source ˆ Equation (3. we have to find the radially symmetric solution of 2 ˆ ∇ 2 + κ0 G = δ(x). (3.1) by ϕ(x. ω)e−iωt dω.5) for r = |x| > 0. y. B remain to be determined. t) = ∞ −∞ ˆ q(x.1. ω)e−iωt dω ˆ ≡− 2 κ0 ϕ(x.2) Therefore.2 The Helmholtz Equation The equations 2 ∇ 2 + κ0 ϕ = 0.3) 3.4) In the usual way (see Section 1. ω)e−iωt dω = ˆ 1 2 c0 ∞ −∞ ∞ −∞ −ω2 ϕ(x.1). If we temporarily set y = 0. t) of Equation (3. ω) represents one frequency component of the source q(x. ω) of the inhomogeneous equation is related to the solution of ˆ (3. ˆ 2 ˆ ∇ 2 + κ0 ϕ = q(x. ω)e−iωt dω.7) determines Green’s function G(x.

2. ω) ∂ xi ∂ x j (3. ω)δ(x − y) d 3 y.4) and using the Formula (1.4. ω) = .6) ˆ Because the source q(x. y. ω) = ∞ −∞ ˆ q(y.2. the solution of the inhomogeneous Helmholtz equation in an unbounded medium can be written ϕ(x. ω) ∂x j ˆ and q(x.3. By substituting the solution into (3.8) we find A = −1/4π.7)) is now obtained by replacing r = |x| by |x − y| −eiκ0 |x−y| ˆ G(x. Hence. ω) = ∂fj (x. r the second of which represents waves converging on the source from infinity. ω) = −1 ˆ ˆ G(x. The free space Green’s function for the inhomogeneous Helmholtz equation (the solution of (3. The value of the remaining constant A is found by extending the solution to include the region occupied by the source at r = 0 by writing ˆ G = lim Aeiκ0 r (r 2 + 2) 2 1 →0 . 4π |x − y| (3.1. ω)eiκ0 |x−y| 3 d y. the two terms on the right-hand side of (3.8) . ω)q(y.1) can be expressed as a superposition of point sources by means of ˆ q(x.2.2 Dipole and Quadrupole Sources The method of integration by parts described in Section 1.2.2.5) correspond to propagating sound waves of the form Ae −iω t− cr 0 r + Be −iω(t+ cr 0 ) . Since the time factor is e−iωt . B = 0. ω) d 3 y ≡ 4π −∞ ∞ ∞ −∞ ˆ q(y.2.7 can be used to show that the corresponding solutions for the dipole and quadrupole sources ˆ q(x.2. y. ω) in the second of Equations (3.7) 3. |x − y| (3. ω) = ∂ 2 Ti j (x.2 The Helmholtz Equation 45 To do this recall that our solution represents one component of a timedependent acoustic problem of frequency ω. and must therefore be rejected because of the radiation condition.

G(x. ˆ t−τ ) and G(x. respectively. ω) = ˆ and ϕ(x.6) for the free ˆ space Green’s function G. |x − y| (3.3 Green’s Function for the Wave Equation Let us verify the general relation (3. for the wave equation and the inhomogeneous Helmholtz equation in the special case in which there are no solid boundaries.3 The Reciprocal Theorem The calculation of the compact Green’s function is greatly simplified by application of the reciprocal theorem. |x − y| −1 ∂ 2 4π ∂ xi ∂ x j ∞ −∞ Ti j (y.9) Example For a point dipole at the origin orientated in the x1 direction ˆ q(x. 4π |x − y| c0 which is precisely Equation (3. ω). We need to consider only a special case of . y. ω)eiκ0 |x−y| 3 d y.1.3). using the expression (3.2. ∂ x1 f 1 δ(y)eiκ0 |x−y| 3 −iκ0 x1 f 1 eiκ0 |x| d y≈ . t − τ ) = = = −1 2π ∞ −∞ ˆ G(x.2. ω) = ˆ −1 ∂ 4π ∂ x j ∞ −∞ f j (y. 3. y.6) between the Green’s functions G(x. ω)e−iω(t−τ ) dω ∞ 1 2 |x − y| 8π e −∞ −iω(t−τ − |x−y| ) c 0 dω 1 |x − y| δ t −τ − . ϕ(x. ω) = Therefore.46 are respectively 3 The Compact Green’s Function ϕ(x. |x − y| 4π |x|2 (3. According to this formula we find. ω)eiκ0 |x−y| 3 d y.1. y. y. |x| → ∞.2. ω) = ˆ −1 ∂ 4π ∂ x1 ∞ −∞ ∂ ( f 1 δ(x)).2.10) 3.

ω) and G(x. (x. 3. x A . x A . x B . ω) . We take these to have the same general linear form ˆ ˆ G(x. ω) = δ(x − x A ). Consider the two acoustic problems indicated in Fig.3.2) ˆ ˆ In addition G(x.1) (3. this very general theorem of mechanics. ω) for x on S. x B . x B .3 The Reciprocal Theorem 47 Fig. (x. ω) = ∂ xn Z(x. 2 ˆ ∇ 2 + κ0 G(x. ω) = δ(x − x B ). 3. x A . which was first used with great effect in acoustics by Lord Rayleigh (1945).3. x B .1. ω) must satisfy appropriate mechanical boundary conditions on S.3) . ω). We denote the functional forms of the respective ˆ ˆ velocity potentials generated by these sources by G(x.3. ω) ˆ ˆ ∂G G(x. in which sound of frequency ω is generated by two unit point sources at x = x A and x = x B in the presence of a solid body S.3. ω) = ∂ xn Z(x. x A . x A . x B . (3.3. where 2 ˆ ∇ 2 + κ0 G(x.3. ω) and G(x.1. ω) ∂G . (3.

φ defining the orientation of the far field point x. x B . x A . ω) − G(x. x B . . x A . x B . x A . The reciprocal theorem states that ˆ ˆ G(x A . Green’s identity ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ G(x. ω) ∼ . ω) ∼ . ω)∇ 2 G(x. x B . ω)). ω) is the surface impedance.4) where it may be supposed that the coordinate origin is in the neighborhood of S. At large distances from S. ω) = G(x B . Z(x. x A . x B . φ).3. ω) ∂ xn ∂ xn S+ ˆ ˆ = G(x B . φ)eiκ0 r ˆ G(x. Multiply Equation (3. the potential at x A produced by the point source at x B is equal to the potential at x B produced by an equal point source at x A . and generally depend strongly on the details of the interaction of the volume flows from each source with S. (3. φ) and f B (θ.3. r f B (θ. φ)eiκ0 r ˆ G(x. x B .5) That is.1) by G(x. x B . ω). ω) ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ = div(G(x. x B . subtract the resulting equations and integrate over the volume bounded by the surface S and by a large surface in the acoustic far field. x B . ω)∇ G(x. ω) dS G(x.48 3 The Compact Green’s Function where xn is measured in the normal direction from S into the fluid and Z(x. For a rigid surface. The angular dependencies of the far-field radiations from the two sources are determined by the factors f A (θ. ω). and the divergence theorem permit the volume integral of the term obtained from the left-hand sides to be expressed as surface integrals over S and . ω)∇ 2 G(x. r r ≡ |x| → ∞. ω) and Equation (3. which are functions of the polar angles θ. ω) (x. x A . both solutions are assumed to exhibit the characteristics of outgoing sound waves. ω) − G(x.3. ω). x A . ˆ Proof. This procedure gives ˆ ˆ ∂G ∂G ˆ ˆ (x. ω) − G(x A . in the acoustic far field. ω) = ∞. ω) − G(x. such that (with implicit time dependence e−iωt ) f A (θ. x A .2) by ˆ G(x.3. x A . x A . whereas the integrals involving the δ functions can be evaluated explicitly. x A . x B . ω)∇ G(x. (3.

ω) = δ(x − y).4) and because ∂θ/∂ xn and ∂φ/∂ xn are each of order 1/r as r → ∞. The surface integral over vanishes because of conditions (3.3).4. ω) ∼ f A (θ.1. and therefore ˆ ∂G iκ0 eiκ0 r (x. ω) for the problem depicted in Fig. 3. ∂ xn ∂r . ω).3. .6) 3.1) where the rigid body S is assumed to be acoustically compact. ˆ ∂G =0 ∂ xn on S. y. ω) = G(y.4 Time-Harmonic Compact Green’s Function ˆ We are now ready to derive the compact Green’s function G(x. 3. ∂ xn This proves the theorem. y.4. The result is usually expressed as the simple reciprocal relation ˆ ˆ G(x. x B . (3. as r → ∞.4.3.3. ω) ∼ f B (θ. φ) ∂ xn r ∂r . y.3.4 Time-Harmonic Compact Green’s Function 49 The surface integral over S vanishes because of the impedance conditions (3. x A . The influence of Fig. φ) ∂ xn r ˆ ∂G iκ0 eiκ0 r (x. (3. We have to solve 2 ˆ ∇ 2 + κ0 G(x. x.1.

x. ω) ≡ −eiκ0 |x−y| ˆ + G (y. The compactness condition (3.2) ˆ where the source is at the far-field point x. x. ω) (the potential G(x.8) therefore implies that κ0 1 and κ0 |y| 1. x. The compact Green’s function includes a first approximation for the net effect of these monopole and dipole distributions. and take the coordinate origin at O within S. ω) = G 0 (y.4. When |x| → ∞. The solution of (3. x.50 3 The Compact Green’s Function a solid body on the production of sound by neighboring sources is equivalent to an additional distribution of monopoles and dipoles on S. y. Let denote the characteristic diameter of the body. ω) at the far-field point x produced by the point source at y is exactly equal to the potential ˆ G(y. 2 ∂ y1 ∂ y2 ∂ y3 ˆ ∂G =0 ∂ yn on S. ω) 4π |x − y| ˆ where G 0 (y. obviating the need to evaluate surface integrals. ω) is determined as a function of y close to S. x. x. the approximations |x − y| ≈ |x| − x j yj x·y ≡ |x| − |x| |x| and 1 1 x·y 1 ≈ ≈ + |x − y| |x| |x|3 |x| . y. x. ω) + G (y. we put ˆ ˆ ˆ G(y. ω) = G(y. ω) is the velocity potential of the motion produced in the fluid when this wave impinges on S. y.2). ω) is the spherically spreading wave generated by the point ˆ source at x when the presence of the solid is ignored. To solve (3. x. ˆ In these circumstances the compact approximation for G(x. ω) can be found very easily from the solution of the reciprocal problem: ∂2 ∂2 ∂2 2 ˆ + 2 + 2 + κ0 G(y. we are interested primarily in calculating the sound in the far field of the body. and G(y.1) is then given by the reciprocal ˆ ˆ ˆ theorem (Section 3.3) G(x. ω) = δ(y − x). x.4.4.1. The source point y is assumed to be close to S (so that |y| ∼ ) and the observer at x is taken to be in the acoustic far field. x. ω) produced at the near-field point y by an equal point source at the far-field point x). (3. In practice. The term G (y.

3) The linear dependence on y j in the second line of this formula represents the first approximation (of order κ0 ) in a power series expansion of rapidly decreasing terms that describes the variation of the incident spherical wave close to the body. ω) = 4π|x| 4π |x| |x| where U j = eiκ0 |x| iκ0 x j . j But U j (y j − ϕ ∗ (y)) = O(κ0 ).4.3. ˆ Near the body G(y. x. x. x. Then. j i. regarded as a function of y. x. ω) = j 4π|x| (3. the terms shown explicitly in eiκ0 |x| iκ0 x j y j −eiκ0 |x| ˆ + + · · · ≡ constant + U j y j + · · · . ω) = G 0 (y. and therefore. Hence. x. U j ∇ 2 (y j − ϕ ∗ (y)) + O(κ0 )2 = 0.e. x. Thus. ∇ 2 ϕ ∗ (y) = 0. 4π|x| |x| (3. x.4. j . the distortion of this flow produced by the body must be small. ω) ≡ ≈ × e− |x| 4π |x − y| 4π |x| ≈ −eiκ0 |x| 4π |x| 1− iκ0 x j y j + O(κ0 )2 |x| (3.5) where the terms shown explicitly represent a potential flow past the body. correct to the neglect of small j terms of order O(κ0 )2 . j where ϕ ∗ (y) → 0 j when |y| .4. ∇ 2 (y j − ϕ ∗ (y)) = 0. ω) satisfies (3. −eiκ0 |x| ˆ ˆ ˆ + U j (y j − ϕ ∗ (y)) + · · · . ω) = −U j ϕ ∗ (y) + O(κ0 )2 .4.4 Time-Harmonic Compact Green’s Function and the condition κ0 y j ∼ κ0 1 imply that 51 iκ0 x j y j −eiκ0 |x−y| −eiκ0 |x| ˆ G 0 (y.2) with the right-hand side replaced by zero (because the source is in the far field). G(y. At distances |y| from S. ω) + G (y. The function ϕ ∗ has the dimensions of length and ∼ in order of magnitude j (Batchelor 1967).4) can be regarded as the velocity potential of a uniform flow at velocity U j impinging on the solid. Let it be represented by the velocity potential ˆ G (y. G 0 (y.

and can be interpreted as the velocity potential of an incompressible flow past S that has unit speed in the j direction at large distances from S.4. y.52 3 The Compact Green’s Function where the rigid surface condition requires ∂ (y j − ϕ ∗ (y)) = 0 on S.7) The first term in the large brackets represents the contribution from the spherical ˆ wave G 0 (x.8) because ∂ y j /∂ yn ≡ n i ∂ y j /∂ yi = n i δi j = n j . y ∼ O( ).10) is called the compact Green’s function for source points y near the body and observer positions x in the acoustic far field.4. the jth component Y j (y) ≡ y j − ϕ ∗ (y) j satisfies Laplace’s equation ∇ 2 Y j = 0 with ∂Y j /∂ yn = 0 on S.4)–(3. j |x| (3. ω) = 4π|x| 1− iκ0 x j (y j − ϕ ∗ (y)) . y. and y is close to the body −eiκ0 |x| ˆ G(x.4. (3. .4. y.6) Summarizing our conclusions from Equations (3.4. ω) evaluated at y = 0. Hence.9) (3. ϕ ∗ (y) is just the instantaj neous velocity potential of the motion that would be produced by translational motion of S as a rigid body at unit speed in the j direction. The function ϕ ∗ (y) decays j with distance from S. j ∂ yn (3. ω) = 4π |x| 1− iκ0 x j (y j − ϕ ∗ (y)) + O(κ0 )2 . |x| → ∞. The next term is O(κ0 ) and includes a component −iκ0 x j y j /|x| from the incident wave plus a correction iκ0 x j ϕ ∗ (y)/|x| j produced by S. Definition −eiκ0 |x| ˆ G(x.4. (3.4.6): When x is in the acoustic far field. j |x| y ∼ O( ). The vector field Y(y) ≡ y − ϕ∗ (y) is called the Kirchhoff vector for the body. and satisfies ∂ϕ ∗ j ∂ yn (y) = n j on S. |x| → ∞.

φ) with ϑ measured from the positive y1 axis. Consider the case j = 1 shown in the figure. . (3. 3. The flow is evidently symmetric about the y1 axis.5.1. as illustrated in Fig.4.9) to be satisfied on the sphere is ∗ ∂ϕ1 = cos ϑ ∂r at r = a. which satisfies the axisymmetric form of Laplace equation 1 ∂ r 2 ∂r r2 ∂ ∂r + r2 ∂ 1 sin ϑ ∂ϑ sin ϑ ∂ ∂ϑ (r ) cos ϑ = 0. Fig. 3. We have to determine the Kirchhoff vector whose jth component Y j (y) = y j − ϕ ∗ (y) j for j = 1.1.5. ϑ. Take spherical polar coordinates (r. 3.3.5 Compact Green’s Function for a Rigid Sphere Let the sphere have radius a and take the coordinate origin O at its center.5.7.1) The axisymmetry of the problem suggests that we look for a solution of Laplace’s equation in the form ∗ ϕ1 = (r ) cos ϑ. y1 = r cos ϑ and the condition (3. 2. 3 is equal to the velocity potential of incompressible flow past the sphere having unit speed in the j direction at large distances from the sphere.5 Compact Green’s Function for a Rigid Sphere 53 In Section 3. Then. we shall introduce a very much more elegant representation of the compact Green’s function that greatly expands its utility.

10) for the sphere is iκ0 x j y j −eiκ0 |x| ˆ G(x. i. the compact Green’s function (3.5. |x| → ∞. The condition that ϕ1 → 0 as r → ∞ implies 3 that A = 0. ∗ where A and B are constants. Y1 = r cos ϑ + a3 a3 cos ϑ ≡ y1 1 + 3 2r 2 2r . y. after all.1) supplies B = −a /2. Because of the symmetry of the sphere it is clear that we also have Y2 = y2 1 + a3 2r 3 . Hence. Thus.2) to determine the far-field sound generated by a dipole source close to a sphere of radius a λ = acoustic . 3. Because κ0 |y| is small the second term in the brace brackets is always small compared to 1. (3.1 Radiation from a Dipole Adjacent to a Compact Sphere Let us apply the compact Green’s function (3. n = −2. and condition (3. Therefore.e. but most sources of interest in applications are dipoles or quadrupoles. and in these circumstances we shall see that it is the small. Y3 = y3 1 + a3 2r 3 . ω) = 1− 4π |x| |x| 1+ a3 2|y|3 .5.5.54 provided that 3 The Compact Green’s Function r2 d2 d −2 + 2r dr 2 dr = 0. The solutions of this equation are proportional to r n where n is a root of the quadratic equation n 2 + n − 2 = 0. This appears to suggest that.4. r = |y|. the sphere has a relatively small effect on the production of sound! This is certainly true for monopole sources. second term that determines the leading order approximation for the far-field sound..5.2) This represents the far-field acoustic potential produced by a point source at y close to the sphere. y ∼ O(a). 1. ∗ Y1 ≡ y1 − ϕ1 = r cos ϑ − Ar + B r2 cos ϑ.

ω) = ˆ f1 ∂ ˆ {δ(y1 − L)δ(y2 )δ(y3 )} G(x. To determine the solution in the far field given that the sphere is acoustically compact we use the compact approximaˆ tion (3. where =0 ∂ x1 ∂ xn on |x| = a. ω)δ(y1 − L)δ(y2 )δ(y3 )} d 3 y ∂ y1 ˆ ∂G δ(y1 − L)δ(y2 )δ(y3 ) (x. The solution is given by ϕ(x. y. 0).0.2. and ∂ G/∂ xn = 0 on the sphere. y. y.2. 3. The source term is zero everywhere except at (L .5.5. ω). ω) = −f 1 ˆ ˆ ∂G (x. ω) d 3 y.2) for G(x. wavelength. ∂ y1 ˆ where the integration is over the fluid. y. 0). we consider the outgoing wave solution of 2 ∇ 2 + κ0 ϕ = f 1 ˆ ∂ϕ ˆ ∂ {δ(x1 − L)δ(x2 )δ(x3 )}. ω) ∂ y1 . 0.5 Compact Green’s Function for a Rigid Sphere 55 Fig. y=(L . y.5. 3. as in Fig.3) Thus far the calculation is exact. ∂ y1 The first integral is zero because δ(y1 − L) = 0 on the boundaries of the region of integration. so that ϕ(x. 0. ω) = f 1 ˆ − f1 ∂ ˆ {G(x. We see immediately that the differentiation with respect to y1 will be applied only to the small second term in the braces .3. The dipole is orientated in the x1 direction and lies on the x1 axis at (L . ω) d 3 y. With the origin at the center of the sphere.5.0) (3. To evaluate the integral we write ϕ(x.

By setting a = 0 in this formula. we recover the far field (3. and to calculate the sound in this case it would be necessary to use a more accurate approximation to ˆ G(x.56 of (3. . where θ is the angle between the x1 axis and the x direction (so that x1 = |x| cos θ). ω) per unit area of S when S is Fig.2). The presence of the sphere accordingly reduces the amplitude of the sound relative to that produced by a free-field dipole.5. because in this limit the surface of the sphere is effectively plane in the vicinity of the dipole and an equal and opposite image dipole is formed in the sphere. The fluid motion is the same as that generated by a distribution of monopoles of strength vn (x.3.3).0. 3.5. y.0) −iκ0 f 1 cos θ eiκ0 |x| 4π |x| 1− . ω) = ˆ = = 3 The Compact Green’s Function −iκ0 f 1 x j eiκ0 |x| 4π|x|2 −iκ0 f 1 x1 eiκ0 |x| 4π |x|2 ∂ a3 yj 1 + ∂ y1 2|y|3 1− a3 L3 a3 L3 y=(L . 3. The amplitude is zero when L → a.2 Sound Produced by a Vibrating Sphere Let the surface S of a fixed body execute small amplitude vibrations with normal velocity vn (x. κ0 a 1.2. ω).5. ω) (Fig. The net radiation is therefore equivalent to that produced by a quadrupole source. but it is also true for any compact rigid surface when a dipole orientated in the direction of the local surface normal approaches the surface. |x| → ∞. 3. This conclusion applies only to dipoles orientated radially with respect to the sphere (see Problem 1).10) of a dipole source in the absence of the sphere. giving ϕ(x.5.

ω)δ(s⊥ − )G(x. ω) ≈ ˆ ˆ ˆ iκ0 U (ω)a 3 x1 eiκ0 |x| iωU (ω)a 3 cos θeiκ0 |x| . ϕ(x. y. The solution for a sphere oscillating at an arbitrary time dependent velocity U (t) can be derived from this result provided the sphere remains compact.5. ω)δ(s⊥ − ).5. ω) is therefore ˆ ϕ(x. y. The velocity potential ϕ(x.3. Then. where s⊥ is distance measured in the normal direction from S into the fluid. The corresponding source strength q(x. ˆ vn (y.5 Compact Green’s Function for a Rigid Sphere 57 ˆ assumed to be stationary (rigid). 3. ω) d S(y) S ( → +0) = where ˆ ∂G (x. ω) d S(y) . ω): ϕ(x. The second integral is nonzero only for j = 1. Hence. ω) = ˆ fluid ˆ vn (y.2) for G(x.1) is ˆ q(x. |x| → ∞.7. ω) ˆ ≈ −eiκ0 |x| 4π|x| vn (y. ω) = 0 on S. 1. and we can take d S = 2πa 2 π ˆ sin ϑ dϑ (so that the surface integral becomes 3πa 3 U (ω) 0 cos2 ϑ sin ϑ dϑ = 3 ˆ 2πa U (ω)). ω) in the inhomogeneous Helmholtz equation (3. This .5. ω) = vn (x. y. ≡ 2|x|2 2c0 |x| where θ is the angle between the x1 axis and the radiation direction x (see Fig. ω) d S(y) − S iκ0 x j |x| yj 1 + S a3 2|y|3 vn (y. If the vibrations are at sufficiently low frequency.5.4) Consider the sound produced when the sphere of Fig. the sphere will be compact. y. ω) d 3 y ˆ vn (y. ω)G(x.4) can ˆ be evaluated using the compact approximation (3.1).1 vibrates with small amplitude about its undisturbed position centred at the origin with velocity ˆ U (ω)e−iωt along the x1 axis. ( → +0). ∂ xn (3.2. and when the observer at x is in the acoustic far field the integral in (3. ω) = U (ω) cos ϑ. The first integral represents the net volume flux through S and vanishes identically for rigid body translational motion. and > 0 places the sources just within the fluid adjacent to S. when y1 = a cos ϑ and |y| = a on S.

2) and (3. we can take −eiκ0 |x| ˆ G(x.6. Figure 3.58 3 The Compact Green’s Function ∞ −∞ means that if we write U (t) = ˆ U (ω)e−iωt dω.4.7) remains valid ∗ with ϕ3 (y) ≡ 0.7. In this region the Expansion (3. ˆ 1.4 for the compact body in Fig.2) 3.6. and whose diameter 2a ∼ is acoustically compact.4.7) is assumed to be within an axial distance |y3 | λ from the coordinate origin O.3) to obtain the time-dependent velocity potential in the form ϕ(x.6 Compact Green’s Function for Cylindrical Bodies The reciprocal calculation of the Green’s function described in Section 3.1 can be immediately extended to the case of a cylindrical body of compact cross section. 3.2. and confirms the model used there in which the vibrating sphere was replaced by a point dipole of strength 2πa 3 U (t) at its center. ∗ ϕ1 (y). 2c0 |x| ∂t This agrees with the far-field result obtained in Section 1.1 Circular Cylinder for the circular cylinder of radius a can be found The potentials by the method of Section 3.1 illustrates the situation for an infinite circular cylinder of radius a whose axis lies along the y3 axis. (3.5. ∗ Y2 = y2 − ϕ2 (y). y. The source point y is adjacent to the cylinder and for the moment (see Section 3. ∗ ϕ2 (y) .2.6. because the impinging flow described by the velocity potential (3.1) where the Kirchhoff vector Y has the components ∗ Y1 = y1 − ϕ1 (y). −a 3 cos θ ∂ = 2c0 |x| ∂t = −a 3 cos θ ∂U (t − |x|/c0 ). If this condition is satisfied we can use the then U (ω) = 0 only for κ0 a Formulae (3.6. ω) = 4π |x| 1− iκ0 x j Y j |x| . Y3 = y3 . 3. y ∼ O( ). t) ≈ a 3 cos θ 2c0 |x| ∞ −∞ ∞ −∞ ˆ iωU (ω)e−iω(t−|x|/c0 ) dω ˆ U (ω)e−iω(t−|x|/c0 ) dω |x| → ∞. |x| → ∞. (3.4) for j = 3 is unaffected by the cylinder. Hence.4.

3. .2). For j = 1 the flow is symmetric about the y1 axis and is independent of the spanwise coordinate y3 (Fig.4.9) to be satisfied on the cylinder is ∗ ∂ϕ1 = cos ϑ ∂r at r = a.6. Using polar coordinates (y1 . 3. the condition (3. 3. y2 ) = r (cos ϑ.6. (3.2.6 Compact Green’s Function for Cylindrical Bodies 59 Fig.6.1.3) Fig. 3.6. sin ϑ).

∗ Y1 ≡ y1 − ϕ1 = r cos ϑ − B cos ϑ. Therefore.60 3 The Compact Green’s Function As in the case of the sphere. (3. y. y ∼ O( ). we try a solution of the form ∗ ϕ1 = (r ) cos ϑ.6. with source near the origin. which satisfies the polar form of Laplace’s equation 1 ∂ r ∂r provided that r2 d2 d − +r dr 2 dr = 0. . r and condition (3.3 the airfoil occupies −a < y1 < a.2 Rigid Strip The rigid strip of chord 2a and infinite span provides a simple model of a sharp-edged airfoil. (3. Y1 = r cos ϑ + Similarly. 3. Y3 = y3 . Hence. is −eiκ0 |x| ˆ G(x. The airfoil has no influence on a uniform mean flow in the y1 ∗ direction. 2. The component Ar must be rejected because it does not decay as r → ∞. nor on one in the y3 -direction. so that potential functions ϕ1 (y) ≡ 0 ∗ and ϕ3 (y) ≡ 0. |x| → ∞. the compact Green’s function for a circular cylinder.6. Therefore. j = 1. ω) = 4π |x| where Yj = yj 1 + a2 2 2 y1 + y2 . Y2 = y2 1 + a2 r2 . r ∂ ∂r + 1 ∂2 r 2 ∂ϑ 2 (r ) cos ϑ = 0.6.4) 3.6.3) yields B = −a 2 . In Fig. −∞ < y3 < ∞. a2 a2 cos ϑ ≡ y1 1 + 2 r r .5) 1− iκ0 x j Y j |x| .6. The general solution is = Ar + B/r . y2 = 0.

) If z = y1 + i y2 . y.5. Y2 = Re(−i z 2 − a 2 ). |x| → ∞. z = y1 + i y2 . (Readers unfamiliar with this procedure should consult Section 4.6) where the components of the Kirchhoff vector are Y1 = y1 .3. and determines ∗ Y2 = y2 − ϕ2 (y1 . ∗ ∗ The potential ϕ2 (y) ≡ ϕ2 (y1 .6. y2 ) can be determined by the method of conformal transformation. 3. with source near the origin. This flow can be found by the method discussed above for the circular cylinder (or see Example 3 of Section 4. the cross section of the airfoil in the z plane is mapped onto the circular cylinder |Z | = a in the Z plane by the transformation Z =z+ z2 − a2.7) . ω) = 4π |x| 1− iκ0 x j Y j |x| . y2 ) = Re[w(z)]. Thus. Y3 = y3 .6.6.6 Compact Green’s Function for Cylindrical Bodies 61 Fig. y ∼ O(a). the compact Green’s function for a strip. (3.5). where w is the complex potential w(z) = − =− i 2 Z− a2 Z z2 − a2 − a2 √ z + z2 − a2 i z+ 2 = −i z 2 − a 2 . Because Z ∼ 2z as |z| → ∞ a uniform flow at unit speed in the y2 direction in the z plane at large distances from the airfoil corresponds to a uniform flow at speed 1 in the direction of the imaginary Z axis at large distances 2 from the cylinder.3. is given by −eiκ0 |x| ˆ G(x. (3.

Example Calculate the far-field velocity potential when 2 ∇ 2 + κ0 ϕ = f 2 ˆ ∂ [δ(x1 − L)δ(x2 )δ(x3 )] . The dipole source is orientated in the x2 direction and is positioned just to the right of the edge at y1 = a in Fig. Figure 3. 3. because ∇Y2 becomes very large there. The solution is given by the following form of Equation (3.6.3) ϕ(x.0. .3.0) i f 2 κ0 x2 eiκ0 |x| 4π|x|2 ∂Y2 ∂ y2 y=(L .0. 3. κ0 L 1.4 depicts the streamline pattern of the flow past the strip defined by the velocity potential Y2 (y).6.6.6. This is an indication that edges can be important sources of noise when located in the near field of a dipole or quadrupole (or any higher order multipole) source. −∞ < x3 < ∞. ∂ ∂Y2 = Re −i ∂ y2 ∂ y2 = Re √ z z2 − a2 z2 − a2 . ∂ x2 on the airfoil L > a.62 3 The Compact Green’s Function Fig. z = y1 + i y2 . x2 = 0. from (3. where ∂ϕ ˆ =0 ∂ x2 −a < x1 < a. ω) = − f 2 ˆ ˆ ∂G (x.4.0) where.7). The streamlines crowd together and change very rapidly near the sharp edges. y. ω) ∂ y2 ≈− y=(L .5.

1− iκ0 x j Y j |x| = −eiκ0 |x| 4π |x| 1− iκ0 x · Y |x| −1 iκ0 |x|− iκ0 x·Y |x| . |x| Now let X(x) denote the Kirchhoff vector for the body expressed in terms of x.7 Symmetric Compact Green’s Function Therefore. y.e. for a body of characteristic diameter . ϕ(x. 3. ω) ≈ − ˆ =− L i f 2 κ0 x2 eiκ0 |x| √ 2 2 − a2 4π |x| L i f 2 κ0 L cos eiκ0 |x| . 63 where = cos−1 (x2 /|x|) is the angle between the normal to the strip and the radiation direction (x/|x|) indicated in Fig. |x| → ∞.4.7.2) |x − Y| ≈ |x| − x·Y . when the dipole approaches the edge. let X j (x) = x j − ϕ ∗ (x). and is unbounded as L → a. that κ0 Y j −eiκ0 |x| ˆ G(x.3. To do this we first observe that. i. Y ∼ O( ).6. Y j (y) = y j − ϕ ∗ (y) ∼ O( ).. Hence.1) where on the last line we have used the usual far-field approximation (1.3. √ The amplitude of the sound is increased by a factor L/ L 2 − a 2 relative to that produced by the same dipole in free space.10) of the compact Green’s function can be recast to exhibit the reciprocal nature of the source and observer positions y and x. |x| → ∞.2) . 4π |x| (3. √ 4π|x| L 2 − a 2 |x| → ∞. therefore. j and. 3. e 4π |x| −eiκ0 |x−Y| . ω) ≈ 4π |x| ≈ ≈ 1.7 Symmetric Compact Green’s Function The definition (3. j (3.7.9.

4) where X = x − ϕ∗ (x).7.9.7. 4π |X − Y| (3.64 3 The Compact Green’s Function Then. When x is close to the body the source must be ˆ in the far field.2. y. ω) then determines the modification by the body of low frequency sound received by an observer near the body.6). (3. This is because for distant sources the amplitude of the sound scattered by a compact rigid object is O((κ0 )2 ) smaller than the incident sound. ω) ≈ . The approximation is valid for arbitrary source and observer locations provided that at least one of them lies in the far field of the body.7.4) is easily recalled because it is an obvious generalization of the free space Green’s function (3. ω) = . because of the symmetrical way in which x and y enter this formula we may now remove any restriction on the position of the coordinate origin. because ϕ ∗ (x) → 0 as |x| → ∞. ϕ ∗ is the velocity potential of j the incompressible flow that would be produced by rigid body motion of S at unit speed in the j direction. Y = y − ϕ∗ (y) are the Kirchhoff vectors for the body expressed respectively in terms of x and y. that is. When both x and y are in the far field (so that X ∼ x and Y ∼ y) predictions made with the compact Green’s function will be the same as when the body is absent.3) 1 x·Y 1 1    ≈ + ≈ |X − Y| |x| |x|3 |x| Thus. |x| → ∞. therefore. Our generalized definition clearly satisfies the reciprocal theorem. we also have |X| ∼ |x| as |x| → ∞. to the same approximation. j and. Also. This result is the basis of our revised definition of the Compact Green’s Function for the Inhomogeneous Helmholtz Equation −eiκ0 |X−Y| ˆ G(x.1) can be written −eiκ0 |X−Y| ˆ G(x. 4π |X − Y| Y ∼ O( ). from (1.7. is of quadrupole intensity (Lighthill 1978. Howe 1998a). G(x.2) and (1.9. y.3)  x·Y   |X − Y| ≈ |x| −  |x| when |x| → ∞. In applications it is necessary to remember also that it is valid for determining only the leading order approximation to the surface monopole and dipole sources induced on the body . (3. The definition (3. y. The components X j and Y j are the velocity potential of incompressible flow past the body having unit speed in the j direction at large distances from the body.

y.5) where X = x − ϕ∗ (x). y. 4π |X − Y| c0 (3. y.7. The maximum frequency of the vibrations must be small enough to ensure that the body (or its cross section.6.7.4). In practice this means that when used in ˆ calculations G(x.8 Low-Frequency Radiation from a Vibrating Body The compact Green’s function (3. t − τ ) = |X − Y| 1 δ t −τ − .8 Low-Frequency Radiation from a Vibrating Body 65 by neighboring sources in the fluid. However.3. Y substituted for x. With this understanding we can define the Compact Green’s Function for the Wave Equation G(x. y. in the case of vibrating a cylinder) is acoustically compact. 3. . its use is subject to the same restrictions as (3. 4π|X − Y| c0 This remarkable result is formally identical with the classical free space Green’s function (1. We can go further and use the formula (3. and it will be valid only when applied to time-dependent source terms producing sound whose wavelength is large compared to the characteristic body dimension . The argument follows closely the discussion of the vibrating sphere in Section 3. except that we now work directly with time dependent quantities. ω)e−iω(t−τ ) dω ∞ 1 2 |X − Y| 8π e −∞ −iω(t−τ − |X−Y| ) c 0 dω 1 |X − Y| δ t −τ − .6) relating Green’s functions for the wave equation and the Helmholtz equation to derive the compact approximation for Green’s function of the wave equation: G(x.7.1.2) with X. t − τ ) = ≈ = −1 2π ∞ −∞ ˆ G(x. Y = y − ϕ∗ (y) are Kirchhoff vectors for the body. ω) will normally be expanded only to first order in the Kirchhoff source vector Y(y).5) for the wave equation will now be used to give a complete theory of the low-frequency sound produced by a vibrating body.5. y. ϕ ∗ is the velocity potential of the incompressible flow that would be produced j by rigid body motion of S at unit speed in the j direction. The components X j and Y j are the velocity potential of incompressible flow past the body having unit speed in the j direction at large distances from the body.

t) = vn (x. τ )δ(s⊥ − ) δ t −τ − d 3 y dτ 4π |X − Y| c0 ( → +0). they illustrate the general procedure that should be adopted when using the compact Green’s function (in particular.1) distributed over S regarded as a rigid. S ( → +0) where ∂G (x.5). y. stationary surface. The velocity potential ϕ(x. t) = − =− ∞ −∞ ∞ −∞ fluid vn (y. (3. t − τ ) in (3. the velocity potential in the fluid (governed by Equation (3. t)δ(s⊥ − ) ( → +0) (3. t) ≈ − ∞ −∞ ∞ −∞ S fluid |X − Y| vn (y. 3. where s⊥ is distance measured in the normal direction from S into the fluid.2) At low frequencies the first approximation to the far-field sound is obtained by replacing G(x.1) vibrate with normal velocity vn (x. y. the technique of expanding to first order in Y): ϕ(x.1. τ )δ(s⊥ − )G(x. t). t − τ ) = 0 ∂ xn on S. t − τ ) d S(y) dτ.8. y. |x| → ∞ =− =− |X − Y| vn (y. The details are given below.8. τ )G(x. y. t − τ ) d 3 y dτ vn (y.66 3 The Compact Green’s Function Fig. 3. τ ) δ t −τ − d S(y) dτ.8. As before.8.1)) is the same as that generated by the distribution of volume sources q(x. Let the closed surface S (Fig. t) is given exactly by ϕ(x.1. τ )δ t − τ − |x| x · Y + d S(y) dτ c0 c0 |x| (X ∼ x as |x| → ∞) . 4π |X − Y| c0 ∞ −∞ S 1 4π |x| vn (y.2) by its compact approximation (3.7.8.

τ ) δ t − τ − |x| c0 xjYj d S(y) dτ.8. t − S |x| d S(y) c0 |x| Y j (y) d S(y). c0 xj ∂ 4π c0 |x|2 ∂t vn y. and it is only necessary to take i = 1 in (3. where n(y) is the surface normal directed into the fluid. vn (y. τ ) = n(y) · U(τ ) = n i (y)Ui (τ ). Making the substitution Y j = y j − ϕ ∗ (y) in the second integral we obtain an acoustic field of dipole j type.3. In terms of spherical polar coordinates (r.8. say. |x| → ∞.8. given by ϕ(x.8. ϑ.2). 3. 0). sin ϑ cos φ. and is nonzero only if the volume enclosed by S changes with time (i. t) ≈ − − 1 4π |x| vn y. It is then the most important component of the far field sound – 1 (because ∂/∂t ∼ ω the second integral is smaller by a factor ∼O(ω /c0 ) and Y j ∼ ).3) or (3.4).. φ) we have y = r (cos ϑ. Performing the integration with respect to τ : ϕ(x. only for a pulsating body). Then U = (U. j (3. 0. sin ϑ sin φ) . The monopole term vanishes for a rigid body executing small amplitude translational oscillations at velocity U(t). c0 |x| |x| c0 +δ t −τ − where the prime denotes differentiation with respect to time.8 Low-Frequency Radiation from a Vibrating Body =− 1 4π|x| ∞ −∞ S 67 vn (y. Then. t − S The first integral represents an omnidirectional monopole sound wave.e.8.3) S [n i y j − n i ϕ ∗ ] dS. t) ≈ − =− xj ∂Ui 4πc0 |x|2 ∂t xj ∂Ui 4πc0 |x|2 ∂t t− t− |x| c0 |x| c0 n i (y)Y j (y) dS(y) S (3.4) Example: The vibrating sphere Consider a rigid sphere of radius a centred at the origin and oscillating in the x1 direction at velocity U (t) (Fig.

j . |x| (3.8. defined by the surface integral Mi j = −ρ0 S n i ϕ ∗ d S. sin ϑ cos φ. |x| → ∞.68 3 The Compact Green’s Function Fig. n1Y j d S = S 3a 3 2 (cos ϑ. sin ϑ sin φ) cos ϑ sin ϑ dϑ dφ S = 2πa 3 . 0.3) becomes ϕ(x.2. therefore. t) ≈ −a 3 cos θ ∂U (t − |x|/c0 ).8. 3. sin ϑ cos φ. (3.8. j = 2.5 using the solution derived from the Helmholtz equation.5) which is the result already obtained in Section 3. Y≡y 1+ a3 2|y|3 = 3a (cos ϑ. sin ϑ sin φ) 2 on the sphere and n 1 = cos ϑ Hence. Therefore. 3. 2c0 |x| ∂t and x1 = cos θ. j = 1.8. 3 and.1 Far Field Pressure Produced by a Vibrating Body A more general and illuminating discussion of the low-frequency sound produced by a vibrating rigid body can be given in terms of the added mass tensor Mi j (Batchelor 1967).

8.8 Low-Frequency Radiation from a Vibrating Body 69 The Condition (3. In general. The acoustic pressure is given in the far field by p = −ρ0 ∂ϕ/∂t (see Section 1.8. (3. and applying the divergence theorem as follows: j ∂ϕ ∗ ∂ϕi∗ ∗ j ϕ j − ϕi∗ ∂ yn ∂ yn dS = fluid S+ (ϕi∗ ∇ 2 ϕ ∗ − ϕ ∗ ∇ 2 ϕi∗ ) d 3 y ≡ 0. the equation of motion of the body can be written Fi (t) = Mi j (mδi j + Mi j ) dU j = Fi .8. j j The integration over 1967) because vanishes as the surface recedes to infinity (Batchelor ∗ ϕi.4) the sound pressure produced by a rigid compact body executing small amplitude translational oscillations at velocity U(t). and Mi j = −ρ0 S n i ϕ ∗ d S = −ρ0 j S ∂ϕi∗ ∗ ϕ d S ≡ −ρ0 ∂ yn j S ϕi∗ ∂ϕ ∗ j ∂ yn d S = M ji . Let us now apply these concepts to determine from (3. t) = xj ∂ 2 Ui 2 ∂t 2 4πc0 |x| t− |x| c0 ρ0 S n i y j d S − ρ0 S ni ϕ∗ d S . in addition to that of the body.4.9) satisfied by ϕ ∗ on S implies that Mi j = M ji . because n i j can be replaced in the integrand by ∂ϕi∗ /∂ yn .4) it can be verified that when the body translates at velocity U(t) without rotation in an ideal. j |x| → ∞. dt The added mass tensor determines the effective mass of fluid dragged along by the body in its accelerated motion. this means that when an external force Fi acts through its centre of mass. a couple must also be applied to the translating body to counter a rotational torque also exerted on the body by the fluid (see Batchelor (1967) for further discussion). incompressible fluid.3).6) The final integral is deduced from the second by referring to Fig. must also be overcome by the force F when the body accelerates. recalling that ∇ 2 ϕ ∗ = ∇ 2 ϕi∗ = 0. (3.3. 3.7) dt For a body of mass m. By evaluating the net force on S produced by the unsteady surface pressure (or by the method described below in Section 4.3.1. (3. it exerts a force on the fluid in the i direction given by dU j . The inertia of this fluid.8.8) . however. j (y) ∼ O 1 |y|2 as |y| → ∞. and therefore p(x.

the acoustic pressure can be expressed in either of the forms p(x.8) is just the added mass tensor Mi j . For a sphere of radius a oscillating at speed U (t) in the x1 direction m 0 = 4 πa 3 ρ0 3 Therefore.1) X = x − ϕ∗ (x) Y = y − ϕ∗ (y) The vector components X j (x) and Y j (y) are the velocity potentials of .5). Thus.8. (3. 3.8. (3.10) c0 where the second line follows from (3.9) where m 0 is the mass of the fluid displaced by the body. The second term in the brace brackets of (3.8. c0 and Mi j = 1 m 0 δi j 2 which is equivalent to (3.8. y.8. ∂ yi (3. t) ≈ = ∂ 2U j xi 1 m 0 δi j + m 0 δi j 4π c0 |x|2 2 ∂t 2 ρ0 a 3 cos θ ∂ 2 U 2c0 |x| ∂t 2 t− |x| . t − τ ) = |X − Y| 1 δ t −τ − 4π |X − Y| c0 Kirchhoff vectors for the body.1 Compact Bodies and Cylindrical Bodies of Compact Cross Section General Form G(x. c0 t− |x| .7).70 3 The Compact Green’s Function The first integral is evaluated by applying the divergence theorem. t) ≈ = ∂ 2U j xi (m 0 δi j + Mi j ) 2 2 4π c0 |x| ∂t xi 4π c0 |x|2 m0 ∂ 2 Ui ∂ Fi + 2 ∂t ∂t t− t− |x| c0 |x| . |x| → ∞. |x| → ∞.9 Compact Green’s Function Summary and Special Cases 3. where Fi is the force exerted by the body on the fluid in the i direction.9.9. p(x. which transforms it into an integral over the volume Vs of the body: ρ0 S n i y j dS = ρ0 Vs ∂yj 3 d y = ρ0 Vs δi j ≡ m 0 δi j .

6. 3. with centre at origin Circular cylinder of radius a coaxial with the x3 -axis Strip airfoil −a < x1 < a.6) and (3.1. variable chord airfoil illustrated in Fig.9. with y2 normal to the plane of the airfoil and y3 in the spanwise direction. 3. For a cylindrical body of compact cross section parallel to the x3 direction. x2 = 0.9.1). ϕ ∗ is the velocj ity potential of the incompressible flow that would be produced by rigid body motion of S at unit speed in the j direction. we take X 3 = x3 . −∞ < x3 < ∞ X1 x1 1 + x1 1 + a3 2|x|3 a2 2 2 x1 +x2 71 X2 x2 1 + x2 1 + a3 2|x|3 a2 2 2 x1 +x2 X3 x3 1 + x3 x3 a3 2|x|3 x1 √ Re(−i z 2 − a 2 ) z = x1 + i x2 incompressible flow past the body having unit speed in the j direction at large distances from the body (special cases are listed in Table 3. The coordinate axes are orientated as in Fig.6. and the chord 2a ≡ 2a(y3 ) is a slowly varying function of y3 .1. 3. Standard Special Cases Body Sphere of radius a.7) for a rigid strip can be generalized to include the finite span.2 Airfoil of Variable Chord The compact Green’s function defined by (3.9.3. The potential Y2 of flow past the airfoil in the y2 direction may then be approximated locally by the formula for an airfoil of uniform chord 2a(y3 ).9 Compact Green’s Function Summary and Special Cases Table 3.9. . Y3 = y3 . 3. Fig.9.6.3 for the strip airfoil. The airfoil span is assumed to be large.1.

δ t −τ − 4π|¯ − y| x c0 Fig. Y2 = Re − i z 2 − a(y3 )2 . |y3 | < 1 L 2 . |y3 | > 1 L y2 .9. a first approximation to the compact Green’s function (3.2) Y3 = y3 .9. . 3. 3. When the projection or cavity is absent the Green’s function with vanishing normal derivative on the wall is G 0 (x.72 3 The Compact Green’s Function Therefore.9. midchord 3. 2 z = y1 + i y2 . y.9. This model has been found to give predictions within a few percent of those based on the exact value of Y2 (y) in the case of an airfoil of elliptic planform whose aspect ratio = airfoil span > 5.3 Projection or Cavity on a Plane Wall Let the plane wall be rigid and coincide with x2 = 0 (Fig. t − τ ) = |x − y| 1 δ t −τ − 4π |x − y| c0 + |¯ − y| x 1 .1) for an airfoil of span L occupying the interval − 1 L < y3 < 1 L is obtained by taking 2 2 Y1 = y1 .2. (3.2).9.

∗ Y3 = y3 − ϕ3 (y) ∗ X 3 = x3 − ϕ3 (x) . in the x3 direction simply by setting Y3 = y3 . To complete this discussion of compact Green’s function. The figure illustrates the case for a projection. y. X 3 ). Let |x| → ∞ (noting that |¯ | = |x|) and x expand G 0 near the projection to first order in y (i.9 Compact Green’s Function Summary and Special Cases 73 ¯ where x = (x1 .9.3.e. y. Y2 = y2 . X 2 = x2 . this is obtained simply by replacing the factor 2(x1 y1 + x3 y3 ) c0 |x| by 2(x1 Y1 + x3 Y3 ) . c0 |x| ∗ ∗ where Y1 = y1 − ϕ1 (y).3) where ∗ Y1 = y1 − ϕ1 (y). X 3 = x3 . 2(x1 y1 + x3 y3 ) δ c0 |x| We require a corrected expression that has vanishing normal derivative (as a function of y) on the wall and on the projection.. ∗ X 1 = x1 − ϕ1 (x). t − τ ) ≈ ≈ 1 |x| x·y + δ t −τ − 4π|x| c0 c0 |x| 1 |x| 2δ t − τ − 4π|x| c0 + +δ t −τ − ¯ x·y |x| + c0 c0 |x| t −τ − |x| c0 . It may now be verified that (in the usual notation) the required compact Green’s function is G(x. −x2 . (3. say. ¯ − Y| c0 4π |X (3. Y3 = y3 − ϕ3 (y) are the velocity potentials of horizontal flows past the projection that are parallel to the wall and have unit speeds respectively in the y1 and y3 -directions as |y| → ∞. but the following discussion applies without change to compact (but nonresonant) wall cavities.4) ¯ and X = (X 1 . Assume first that the origin is close to the projection. These formulae can be used also for a two-dimensional projection or cavity that is uniform. we now give without proofs a selection of useful examples. x3 ) is the image of the observer position x in the plane wall.9. −X 2 . t − τ ) = |X − Y| 1 δ t −τ − 4π |X − Y| c0 ¯ |X − Y| 1 δ t −τ − + . By inspection. correct to dipole order) G 0 (x. .

for |x − y3 i3 | → ∞ and κ0 y1 + y2 (3. To small compared to the acoustic wavelength. ω) + G 1 (x.9. y. r0 sin θ0 . 2 2 where. if i3 is a unit vector in the x3 direction (parallel to the edge). ω) = −1 eiκ0 |x−y3 i3 | . 3. √ r0 sin(θ0 /2).9. π 2πi |x − y3 i3 |3/2 √ r sin(θ/2).3) but are of limited use in applications. ω) are known for a rigid half-plane x1 < 0. y = (r0 cos θ0 .5) 1.9. However.4 Green’s Function for a Half-Plane (Howe. y. 1975a) ˆ Analytical representations of the exact Green’s function G(x. for κ0 (y1 + y2 ) 2 do this. we introduce cylindrical polar coordinates x = (r cos θ. 4π |x − y3 i3| √ κ0 ϕ ∗ (x)ϕ ∗ (y) iκ0 |x−y3 i3 | −1 ˆ 1 (x. (3. Then. y.74 3 The Compact Green’s Function Fig. x3 ).7) . r sin θ.9. Fig.6) and ϕ ∗ (x) = ϕ ∗ (y) = (3.3. 3. we can define a compact Green’s function for a source at y whose distance from the edge is 2 2 1 1. y. y.9.9. 3. x2 = 0 (which is infinite in the x3 direction. ω) + · · · . ω) = √ G e . y3 ). ˆ ˆ ˆ G(x. ω) = G 0 (x. y. that is. ˆ G 0 (x.

10) . Z = y2 + i y1 . The y-dependent part of the compact Green’s function is √ G(x. π |x| (3. 2 c0 ∂t 2 where G = 0 for t < τ.9. y2 ) is close to the edge of the half-plane in Fig.4).9. where conditions are uniform in the x3 direction. (3. sin θ) (and ˆ ˆ similarly for ϕ ∗ (y)).9.6) over −∞ < y3 < ∞.9) where x = (x1 . t − τ ) ≈ G 0 (x. 3.6 Two-Dimensional Green’s Function for a Plane with an Aperture A rigid plane x1 = 0 is pierced by a two-dimensional aperture occupying −a < x2 < a (Fig. y. y.1. t − τ ) ≈ − c0 sgn(x1 ) χ(t − τ − |x|/c0 ) Re ln √ √ t − τ − |x|/c0 π 2π |x| Z + a Z2 −1 a2 .6) to calculate G(x. y.9. (3.3.9. t − τ ) + · · ·. t − τ ) is the first term in the expansion that involves y. 3. y.8)) is applicable for a source at y = (y1 .3 the corresponding compact Green’s function is obtained by integrating (3. t − τ ) ≈ ϕ ∗ (x)ϕ ∗ (y) δ(t − τ − |x|/c0 ). The observer at x = (x1 .9. using the method of stationary phase for 2 2 κ0 x1 + x2 → ∞ (see Example 2 of Section 5. The component G 0 of G represents the radiation from a ˆ point source at y when scattering is neglected. 1975a) The Green’s function for the wave equation in two dimensions.9.7). x2 ) is in the acoustic far field.2).9.9. and then using the Formula (3. t − τ ) + G 1 (x. 3. In particular G 1 (x. x2 ) = r (cos θ.9. y = (y1 .5 Two-Dimensional Green’s Function for a Half-Plane (Howe.9 Compact Green’s Function Summary and Special Cases 75 ϕ ∗ (x) is a velocity potential of incompressible flow around the edge of the halfplane expressed in terms of polar coordinates (x1 . y2 ) and ϕ ∗ is defined as in (3. 3. and is found to be G 1 (x. |x| → ∞. y. G 1 is the first correction due to presence of the half-plane. satisfies 1 ∂2 − ∇ 2 G = δ(x1 − y1 )δ(x2 − y2 )δ(t − τ ). x2 ). y2 ) well within an acoustic wavelength of the aperture on either side of the plane.8) When a line source at y = (y1 . The two-dimensional compact Green’s function (the solution of (3.

76 3 The Compact Green’s Function Fig. t − τ ) = |x1 − y1| c0 H t −τ − . we have G(x. 3.7 Green’s Function for Long Waves in a Rigid Walled Duct (Howe. . For a uniform duct with an acoustically . provided the cross-sectional area is uniform. . 1975b) Only plane waves can propagate in a cylindrical duct of cross-sectional area A when the characteristic wavelength of sound is large compared with the √ diameter ∼ A. (3.5a). .9. |x − y| 2A c0 √ A. y.11) where H is the Heaviside step function.9. When this condition is satisfied the corresponding compact Green’s function satisfies the one-dimensional wave equation. Note the definition Z = y2 + i y1 . even if the source region is highly three dimensional. [ln( aξ 2 /4c0 t)]2 + π 2 2 and = 1. 3. where χ(t) = H (t) 0 ∞ ln( aξ 2 /4c0 t)e−ξ dξ .4.9. 3.781072. Taking the x1 direction along the axis of the duct (Fig.9.

y. the geometry of the entrance can be arbitrary. such as the neck in Fig. 3.9. several diameters from the entrance.9.5b.9. Take the coordinate origin in the entrance plane of the duct. there are two cases: (i) Propagation within the Duct This is applicable for the case shown in Fig.8 Compact Green’s Function for a Duct Entrance (Howe. Then. involving a source at y near the duct entrance and an observer at x within the duct (or vice versa). t − τ ) = A.6a. 3. with the negative x1 axis lying along the axis of the duct.9.6a.9. However. |x − y| H t −τ − 2A c0 √ G(x. the compact Green’s function becomes |X 1 − Y1 | c0 . Within the duct.3.9 Compact Green’s Function Summary and Special Cases 77 Fig.5. 3.9. when the . compact section of variable cross section. (3.b) The typical geometry is illustrated in Fig. and not necessarily that of the uniform cylinder shown in the figure. 3.12) where X 1 (x) and Y1 (y) are the velocity potential of incompressible flow in the duct having unit speed at large distances from the neck. 3. the cross-sectional area is uniform and equal to A. 1998a.

9.6. y. 1945) of the duct opening (≈ 0.13) −H t − τ + ϕ ∗ (x) + ϕ ∗ (y) c0 where the velocity potential ϕ ∗ (y) describes incompressible flow from the duct. (3. 3.9. t − τ ) = (|X(x) − Y(y)| − [ϕ ∗ (x) + ϕ ∗ (y)]) 1 .9.14).61R √ for an unflanged circular cylinder of radius R = A/π ). δ t −τ − 4π |X − Y| c0 (3. y. (ii) Propagation in Free Space (Fig.78 3 The Compact Green’s Function Fig.15) where ϕ ∗ is defined as in (3. (3.9. and satisfies √ when |x1 | A within the duct. Y(y) denote the Kirchhoff vector whose i component is the velocity potential of flow past the stationary surface formed by the duct entrance having unit speed in the i direction at large distances from the entrance outside the duct (they become exponentially small . ϕ ∗ (x) ≈ x1 − √ ≈ −A/4π |x| when |x| A outside the duct. and X(x). 3.9.14) in which is the end correction (Rayleigh. characteristic acoustic wavelength is large compared to the duct diameter.6b) When either the source or observer is located at a large distance from the duct entrance in free space G(x. t − τ ) ≈ c0 2A H t −τ − |ϕ ∗ (x) − ϕ ∗ (y)| c0 .9. G(x.

Y3 (y)). ∂ x1 where ∂ϕ =0 ∂ xn on 2 2 x1 + x2 1 2 = a. Problems 3 1. This limiting form of G can be used to calculate the low-frequency free space radiation generated by internal sources far from the entrance. 2. G(x. Y2 (y).16) This represents a monopole wave centered on the duct entrance. for the sound radiated by an azimuthally orientated dipole adjacent to a compact.Problems 3 79 with distance |x1 | or |y1 | into the duct). for the sound radiated by a radially orientated dipole adjacent to a rigid circular cylinder of compact cross section. Use the compact Green’s function to solve 2 ∇ 2 + κ0 ϕ = f 1 ˆ ∂ [δ(x1 − L)δ(x2 )δ(x3 )]. ∂ x2 where ∂ϕ =0 ∂ xn on |x| = a. X 3 (x)). the source compresses the fluid in the duct mouth producing a sound wave in the duct whose reaction on the mouth causes a volume flux equal to the monopole source strength. 4π|x| (3. y. Y(y) ≡ (y1 − ϕ ∗ (y). |x| → ∞. Use the compact Green’s function to solve 2 ∇ 2 + κ0 ϕ = f 2 ˆ ∂ [δ(x1 − L)δ(x2 )δ(x3 )] . If the source coordinate y1 → −∞ within the duct. ϕ ∗ (y) account for the additional. . For a uniform. weak monopole sound generated by a source near the duct entrance. rigid sphere. The amplitude of this monopole is of the same order as the usual dipole sound determined by the compact Green’s function. X 2 (x). thin-walled cylindrical duct we can take X(x) ≡ (x1 − ϕ ∗ (x). The terms ϕ ∗ (x).9. t − τ ) = 1 δ(t − τ − (|x| − y1 )/c0 ).

q0 = constant translates at constant velocity U past a fixed rigid sphere of radius a < h whose center is at the origin. S(ξ ) Y1 = A 0 y1 dξ . Show that when M = U/c0 1. ∂ x3 4. 7. The point source q(x.9.1.5 at constant. ∂ x2 f3 ∂ [δ(x1 − L)δ(x2 )δ(x3 )]. ∂ x2 f 2 = constant translates at constant velocity U past a fixed rigid cylinder of radius a < h whose axis coincides with the x3 axis. Repeat Question 2 for the dipoles f2 ∂ [δ(x1 − L)δ(x2 )δ(x3 )] . Determine from Equation (3. t) = q0 δ(x1 −U t)δ(x2 )δ(x3 ). If the cross-sectional area of the duct is denoted by S(x1 ). 3. The constant strength dipole q(x. use the approximations X1 = A 0 x1 |x| . (q0 = constant) convects along the axis of symmetry of the necked duct shown in Fig. S(ξ ) to calculate the acoustic pressure radiated from the neck during the passage of the source.80 3 The Compact Green’s Function 3. In incompressible flow the velocity potential generated by a distribution of sources q(x. c0 dξ . low Mach number speed U . |x| |x| where [t] = t − 5. The volume source q(x. where S(x1 ) → A. the far-field acoustic potential determined by Equation (3. . t). t) near a rigid body is determined by the solution of ∇ 2 ϕ = q(x. t) = f 2 ∂ (δ(x1 − U t)δ(x2 − h)δ(x3 )). x1 → ±∞. 6. t) = q0 δ(x1 − U t)δ(x2 − h)δ(x3 ).1) is given by ϕ≈ f 2 Ma 2 2π|x|(h 2 + U 2 [t]2 )3 x1 h x2 U [t] (3U 2 [t]2 − h 2 ) + (3h 2 − U 2 [t]2 ) .1.1) the far field acoustic pressure p = −ρ0 ∂ϕ/∂t given that M = U/c0 1.

A rigid body translates without rotation in the j direction at velocity U j (t) in an ideal. 4π |X − Y| 8. j In a fixed reference frame. t) ≈ 2ρ0 a 3 cos θ ∂ 2 U (t − |x|/c0 ). In the undisturbed state it lies in the plane ∗ 2 2 x1 = 0 with its center at the origin. the pressure can be calculated from Bernoulli’s equation: p ∂ 1 + + (∇ )2 = 0. show that the acoustic pressure generated by the motion is given by p(x. A compact rigid disc of radius a executes small amplitude vibrations at velocity U (t) normal to itself.7) for the force exerted on the fluid by the body. ∂t ρ0 2 Use these results to prove formula (3. 9. |x| → ∞. |x| . y. t − τ ) = −δ(t − τ ) . Show that the velocity potential of the fluid motion is = U j ϕ∗.8. If ϕ1 (x) = ∓(2/π ) a 2 − x2 − x3 on the 2 2 faces x1 = ±0. 3π c0 |x| ∂t 2 cos θ = x1 . incompressible fluid at rest at infinity.Problems 3 81 Show that the monopole and dipole components of the solution at large distances from the body (in the hydrodynamic far field) can be calculated using the following incompressible limit of the compact Green’s function G(x. x2 + x3 < a of the disc.

because V (∇ϕ)2 d 3 x 82 . = − ρ0 ϕ 2 2 S ∂ xn S (4.1). . 4.1. This formula implies that if S is suddenly brought to rest (Un → 0) the motion everywhere in the fluid ceases instantaneously. . a portion of fluid having any motion that it could not acquire by fluid pressure transmitted from its boundary. the kinetic energy T0 of the flow is T0 = 1 1 ρ0 (∇ϕ)2 d 3 x = ρ0 (div(ϕ∇ϕ) − ϕ∇ 2 ϕ) d 3 x 2 2 V V ∂ϕ 1 1 d S ≡ − ρ0 ϕUn d S.1. There are no sources within the instantaneous region V occupied by the fluid. The motion generated from rest by ‘fluid pressure transmitted from its boundary’ can be described by a velocity potential ϕ such that v(x..1 Kelvin’s (1867) Definition Kelvin was responsible for much of the pioneering work on the mechanics of incompressible flow.1 Vorticity and the Kinetic Energy of Incompressible Flow 4.1. where ϕ ∼ 2 O(1/|x| )). where Un is the normal component of velocity on S. To understand this consider the ideal (i. 4. where ∇ 2 ϕ = 0. ∂ϕ = Un ∂ xn on S. He gave the following definition of a vortex in a homogeneous incompressible fluid. t) = ∇ϕ. .1) where the divergence theorem has been used to obtain the second line (there is no contribution from the surface at infinity in Fig.4 Vorticity 4. Therefore. inviscid) incompressible flow produced by arbitrary motion of a solid body with surface S (Fig.1.1.e.

1.1.1.2) = − ρ0 ϕUn d S + ρ0 2 2 2 S V V . and signals generated by changes in the boundary conditions propagate at the finite speed of sound.4.1 Vorticity and the Kinetic Energy of Incompressible Flow 83 Fig. This unphysical behavior is never observed in a real fluid because (i) no fluid is perfectly incompressible. If ϕ is taken to be defined as above (for ideal flow) then. (4. can vanish only if ∇ϕ ≡ 0. real fluid we write v = ∇ϕ + u. because div u = 0 and the normal component u n = n · u = 0 on S. For an incompressible. and define the vorticity ω by ω = curl u ≡ curl v. 4. the kinetic energy becomes T = 1 1 ρ0 (∇ϕ + u)2 d 3 x = ρ0 ((∇ϕ)2 + 2∇ϕ · u + u 2 ) d 3 x 2 2 V V 1 div(ϕu) d 3 x = ρ0 ((∇ϕ)2 + u 2 ) d 3 x + ρ0 2 V V 1 2 2 3 = ρ0 ((∇ϕ) + u ) d x − ρ0 ϕu n d S 2 V S 1 1 1 u 2 d 3 x ≡ T0 + ρ0 u 2 d 3 x. and (ii) diffusion of vorticity from the boundary supplies irrecoverable kinetic energy to the fluid.

the flow described by the velocity potential ϕ stops instantaneously.2 The Vorticity Equation Let v A denote the fluid velocity at a point A at x.1.2) also establishes Kelvin’s theorem that T ≥ T0 : the kinetic energy of the real flow (for which u = 0) always exceeds that of the corresponding ideal. 2 represents an irrotational distortion of the fluid in the neighborhood of A. Equation (4. the last term. In other words. consisting of a translation at velocity v A together with a rotation at angular velocity 1 ω. 2 2 where ei j is the rate-of-strain tensor (2. The first two terms on the second line represent motion of A and B as a rigid body. If we consider a small spherical fluid particle with center at A. For a tube of small cross-sectional area δS the product . This is consistent with our conclusion above regarding kinetic energy. but that associated with the rotational velocity u persists. being a gradient. irrotational flow. it will rotate at angular velocity ω/2. the distortion corresponds to a deformation into an ellipsoid whose principal axes correspond to the principal axes of ei j . The velocity v B at a neighbouring point B at x + δx can then be written (Goldstein.3) and the gradient in the second line is taken with respect to δx. 1960) v B ≈ v A + (δx · ∇)v = v A + 1 ω ∧ δx + 1 ∇(ei j δxi δx j ). the irrotational motion represents the least possible disturbance that can be produced in the fluid by the moving boundary.84 4 Vorticity When the surface motion is arrested. 4. vortical motions proceed irrespective of whether or not the fluid continues to be driven by moving boundaries or other external agencies. inasmuch as the conservation of angular momentum suggests that vorticity is associated the intrinsic kinetic energy of the flow. If a spherical fluid particle is suddenly solidified without change of angular momentum. The vorticity may therefore be regarded as a measure of the angular momentum of a fluid particle. A vortex line is tangential to the vorticity vector at all points along its length.1. so that ω may be defined as twice the initial angular velocity of the solid sphere when an infinitesimally small sphere of fluid with center at A is suddenly solidified without change of angular momentum (but this is not true for arbitrarily shaped volume elements). once established. Vortex lines that pass through every point of a simple closed curve define the boundary of a vortex tube. The crucial difference between rotational and irrotational flows is that. and determines the motion that persists in an incompressible fluid when the boundaries are brought to rest.

2.1) where Ω is the angular velocity of S. and is constant because div ω = div(curl v) ≡ 0.2.4) (4. we first use the identity curl curl A = grad div A − ∇ 2 A to write the momentum equation (1. The vector ω ∧ v is sometimes called the Lamb vector. We shall show that vorticity is transported by convection and molecular diffusion. It follows that vortex tubes and lines cannot begin or end within the fluid.3) is the total enthalpy in homentropic flow. ∂t 3 where B= dp 1 2 + v ρ 2 (4. Therefore an initially confined region of vortex loops can frequently be assumed to remain within a bounded region.2 The Vorticity Equation ω δS is called the tube strength.4. 3 .2. ∂t in which case dissipation occurs only where ω = 0.5) . (4. (4.2.2.2) the momentum equation can be cast into Crocco’s form ∂v 4 + ω ∧ v + ∇ B = −ν curl ω − ∇(div v) . In the absence of body forces F. 85 and the divergence theorem therefore implies that ω · dS = 0 for any closed surface. (4. The no-slip condition (Batchelor 1967) requires the velocity at a boundary to be the same as that of the boundary. A vortex line must therefore form a closed loop. on the latter of which ω · dS = 0. or end on a rotating surface S at which n · ω = 2n · Ω. When the fluid is incompressible (or when the term in div v representing the small effect of compressibility on viscous dissipation is neglected) Crocco’s equation reduces to ∂v + ω ∧ v + ∇ B = −ν curl ω.3) for homentropic flow in the form ∂v + (v · ∇)v + ∇ ∂t By using the vector identity (v · ∇)v = ω ∧ v + ∇ 1 2 v 2 dp ρ 4 = −ν curl ω − ∇(div v) .2. and in particular for the surface formed by two cross sections of the tube and the tube wall separating them.

Consider a fluid particle at A in Fig. the fluid particles and the vortex line through A and B have deformed and convected in the flow in the Fig. 4.7) (4.86 4 Vorticity The curl of (4.2. that is. Thus. During this time. the vortex line through A lies along the relative vector s(n + (n · ∇)v δt) from A to B .2. Dt (4.2.1. and consider a neighboring particle at B a small distance s from A in the direction n. and curl(ω ∧ v) ≡ (v · ∇)ω + ω div v − (ω · ∇)v − v div ω = (v · ∇)ω − (ω · ∇)v. therefore the vorticity equation can also be written Dω = (ω · ∇)v + ν∇ 2 ω. Let the vorticity at A be ω = ωn.2.1 with velocity v at time t. A has moved a vector distance v δt to A and B has moved to B whose position relative to A is s(n+(n · ∇)v δt).3) and the relation curl curl ω ≡ −∇ 2 ω yield the vorticity equation for a Stokesian fluid of constant shear viscosity: ∂ω + curl(ω ∧ v) = ν∇ 2 ω. sn is the position of B relative to A. Therefore. ∂t For an incompressible fluid div ω = div v = 0. and the velocity at B is v + s(n · ∇)v. At time t the points A and B lie on the vortex line through A. the term (ω · ∇)v in the vorticity equation causes the vorticity of the fluid particle initially at A to change from ωn at A to ω(n + (n · ∇)v δt) at A .2. 4. After a short time δt.6) The terms on the right represent the mechanisms that change the vorticity of a moving fluid particle in incompressible flow: (i) (ω · ∇)v. . where n is a unit vector.

where it can subsequently be convected by the flow. they are rotated and stretched in a manner determined entirely by the relative motions of A and B. it would start to diffuse into the fluid if the fluid were suddenly endowed with viscosity. but the amount of the vorticity available for diffusion from the surface is independent of ν. In an ideal fluid the slipping of the flow over the surface creates a singular layer of vorticity at the surface called a vortex sheet whose strength is determined by the tangential velocity difference between the surface and the ideal exterior flow. ∂t Vorticity is generated at solid boundaries.2. It should be understood that viscosity merely serves to diffuse the vorticity into the fluid from the surface. The equation then reduces to the classical diffusion equation ∂ω = ν∇ 2 ω.7) can be neglected. The circulation with respect to a closed material contour C is defined by = C v · dx = S curl v · dS ≡ S ω · dS. in particular near solid boundaries. Very close to a stationary wall the velocity becomes small and nonlinear terms in the vorticity equation (4.7)) vortex lines are therefore said to move with the fluid. When ν = 0 the motion in homentropic flow evolves in such a way that the circulation around the moving contour remains constant: D D = Dt Dt v · dx = C C ∇ − dp 1 2 + v · dx ≡ 0. When a vortex tube is stretched.2. (ii) ν∇ 2 ω: Molecular Diffusion of Vorticity This term is important only in regions of high shear. The magnitude of ω increases in direct proportion to the stretching of vortex lines. and viscosity is responsible for its diffusion into the body of the fluid. ρ 2 (4. In the absence of viscosity (when ν∇ 2 ω does not appear on the right of (4. where S is any two-sided surface bounded by C.4. This vorticity stays on the surface. The rate of diffusion would depend on the value of ν. . It follows that vorticity can neither be created nor destroyed in a body of inviscid and homentropic fluid.8) This is Kelvin’s circulation theorem.2. in their new positions A and B continue to lie on the same vortex line. the cross-sectional area δS decreases and therefore ω must increase to preserve the strength of the tube. and does not generate the vorticity.2 The Vorticity Equation 87 same way.

and s⊥ is distance measured in the normal direction from the sheet. (4.2. it can be assumed that curl v± = 0.3 The Biot–Savart Law In an unbounded fluid the velocity v can always be expressed in terms of scalar and vector potentials ϕ and A such that v = ∇ϕ + curl A. 4. t) = 0 with unit normal n across which the normal components of velocity are equal (n · v− = n · v+ ). 4.9) where ∇ H ≡ ∇ H ( f ) = −∇ H (− f ) = nδ(s⊥ ). Let f > 0 respectively on the ± sides of the surface.1 Vortex Sheets A vortex sheet is a useful model of a thin layer of vorticity when viscous diffusion can be neglected. The equations determining ϕ and A are found by taking in turn the divergence .2. We approximate the layer by a surface f (x. where div A = 0. In a real fluid the vorticity would diffuse out from the sheet and it could not therefore persist indefinitely. 2 where v± are evaluated just above and below the sheet. 4.10) 4. on either side. In an ideal fluid the sheet is subject only to convection and stretching by the flow at the local mean velocity. and we can set v = H ( f )v+ + H (− f )v− Hence. Near < the sheet.2) across which the velocity changes rapidly from v− to v+ . ω = ∇ H ∧ (v+ − v− ) = n ∧ (v+ − v− )δ(s⊥ ).2. (4. Imagine a thin shear layer (Fig.88 4 Vorticity Fig.2. but the tangential components are discontinuous (n ∧ v− = n ∧ v+ ). which is v = 1 (v+ + v− ).2.2.

6).1) the following approximation in the hydrodynamic far field: v(x. unbounded flow which is at rest at infinity.3) .3. t) d 3 y. so that it may be assumed that ω → 0 as |x| → ∞.6) (i. t) = curl ω(y. t)) d 3 y = 0.2) in either of the following equivalent forms v(x. by the incompressible limit of (3. t) + y j ωi (y. 4π |x − y| The velocity is then given by the Biot–Savart formula v(x.1) This is a purely kinematic relation between a vector v that vanishes at infinity and ω = curl v. By using this result and the expansion (1. The divergence theorem then shows that ωi (y. t) d 3 y = − yi ω j (y. t) d 3 y . 4π |x − y| (4.e. (4. t)) d 3 y = 0. t)n j d S(y) ≡ 0. 4π |x| 1 2 y ∧ ω(y. t) d 3 y . ∇ 2 A = −curl v ≡ −ω.2.4.3) for |x| → ∞ we derive from (4. an initially confined region of vorticity will tend to remain within a bounded domain. 89 We can take ϕ = 0 for incompressible.2) Furthermore.3. t) d 3 y ∼ O 1 |x|3 . This can be used to express (4.. the divergence theorem also implies that div(yi y j ω(y. where the surface (with inward normal n) is large enough to contain all the vorticity. |x| → ∞.3 The Biot–Savart Law and curl (using the formula curl curl A = grad div A − ∇ 2 A): ∇ 2 ϕ = div v. (4. |x| → ∞. Because vorticity is transported by convection and diffusion. t) ≈ curl curl I 4π |x| = grad div where I = I .4. when κ0 = 0) to obtain A= ω(y. t) ≈ curl xj 4π |x|3 y j ω(y.3.3. and therefore that (yi ω j (y.9. To find A we use the Green’s function for Laplace’s equation determined by (1.3.

2)) T = ρ0 x · (ω ∧ v)(x. Lighthill (1978. But H ( f )v + H (− f )U = ∇ϕ + curl A.3.4) The following representation can also be derived (using (4. Now.3.4).2 Incompressible Flow with an Internal Boundary Let the rigid body in Fig. but curl U = 2Ω. t) vanish on S. (div A = 0). in both the fluid and solid (where it equals U(x. Then H ( f )v + H (− f )U is the velocity everywhere. t) d 3 x. The vector I is called the impulse of the vortex system. 1986) uses G.90 4 Vorticity (see Question 2 of Problems 4).3. 4. and Ω(t) is its angular velocity. (4. (Batchelor (1967) denotes I by P/ρ0 . the no-slip condition on S implies that div(H ( f )v + H (− f )U) = ∇ H ( f ) · (v − U) ≡ 0 curl(H ( f )v + H (− f )U) = H ( f )ω + H (− f )2Ω. .3.1 have volume fluid at rest at infinity with velocity and move in an incompressible U = U0 + Ω ∧ (x − x0 (t)).1.2. (4. t)). These formulae supply alternative representations of v in the hydrodynamic far field (where the motion is entirely irrotational) in terms of either the vector potential A = curl (I/4π|x|) or the scalar potential ϕ = div (I/4π |x|). In the usual way let f (x.3.6) where U0 = dx0 /dt is the velocity of its center of volume x0 (t).) 4. t) · ω(y.1 Kinetic Energy Using the Biot–Savart formula it can be verified that the kinetic energy of an unbounded (three-dimensional) incompressible flow is given in terms of the vorticity by T = ρ0 8π ω(x. and is an absolute constant in an unbounded flow (see Section 4. |x − y| (4. t) 3 3 d x d y. with f > 0 in the fluid. The body has constant volume (div U = 0).5) 4.

and the velocity everywhere is given by the following modification of the Biot–Savart formula (4.3) remain valid provided the integration includes the region occupied by the body (where ω = 2Ω). during which time the velocity potential at a large distance r from the Fig.1): v(x.3. The formula is also applicable in inviscid flow.3 The Biot–Savart Law 91 Hence.7) where V is the volume occupied by the fluid. t) = curl V ω(y.1.1.3. but the contribution from the bound vorticity in the vortex sheet on the surface of the body must be included in the integrals. . 4. Vortex lines may be imagined to continue into the solid. where a puff of air is ejected from the tube and directed at the flame of a candle. As for an unbounded flow. This formula predicts that v = U when x lies in the region occupied by the body.4.3. and that the air is forced out at constant speed V by impulsive movement of the piston over an axial distance L. Suppose the tube has radius R.3. 4π |x − y| (4. Similarly. In an ideal fluid the motion outside is irrotational and resembles at large distances from the exit a radially symmetric source flow. 4. the identity curl (H ( f )v + H (− f )U) d 3 x = 0 implies that v ∼ O(1/|x|3 ) as |x| → ∞. 4. the asymptotic representations (4. This flow persists only while the piston is moving. ϕ ≡ 0.3. t) d 3 y + curl 4π |x − y| 2Ω(t) d 3 y .3.3 Blowing Out a Candle (Lighthill 1963) An amusing illustration of the significance of vorticity is depicted in Fig.

Take V = 10 m/s.1)) at speed estimated by Kelvin to equal Vt ∼ 4π R0 ln 8R0 σ − 8R0 1 VL ln ≈ 4 8π R0 σ − 1 .12 cm. vorticity leaves the tube within a circular cylindrical vortex sheet at the periphery of the slug. Vϕ ≈ 0. The circulation of these rings per unit length of the jet is V . and t ≈ 0.6 cm. .2R is the radius of the vortex ring and σ ∼ 0. The air leaves the tube in the form of a jet. The ring arrives at the flame after a time t ∼ /Vt . however. Vj ≈ 4. The sheet may be pictured as a succession of vortex rings of radius R and infinitesimal core radii. 4 where R0 ∼ 1.5 cm.2R0 is the radius of its core (assumed to be of circular cross section). vorticity is generated at the tube wall. and = 0. L = 1 cm. The total circulation ejected from the tube 2 during the time L/V in which the piston moves is therefore = 1 L V . whose displacement from the tube forces the potential flow ϕ. 4R0 If the flame is extinguished it is because the vortex jet blows away the hot combusting gases from newly vaporized wax. R = 0. 2 Shortly after leaving the tube the cylindrical vortex rolls up to form a vortex ring of circulation which translates by self-induction (as determined by the Biot–Savart law (4. In its absence the flame would barely flicker under the influence of blowing by the potential velocity field Vϕ . According to this sequence of events. the candle is only blown out because of the presence of the vortex. 4r so that the air blows against the flame at distance at speed Vϕ ∼ V R2 .3 m.92 4 Vorticity exit resembles that produced by a monopole of strength q = π R 2 V : ϕ∼− V R2 .0007 m/s. 4 2 In reality. σ ≈ 0. and they translate at the local mean air velocity on the sheet equal to 1 V . In addition. and the exiting fluid is initially contained within a cylindrical slug of air of length L. The air on the axis of the vortex ring at its center forms a localized jet with velocity on the centerline equal to Vj ∼ VL .4 m/s.13 s. The following numerical estimates confirm this conclusion. across which the axial velocity changes from V within the jet to 0 outside. Then. R0 ≈ 0.2 m/s.3. Vt ≈ 2.

so that v(x.4.3.4 Surface Force in Incompressible Flow 4. t) d 3 x = F + V p(x. 4. (4. t) is defined by the Biot–Savart integral (4. (4. where the vector potential A(x. With reference to Fig. and m 0 is the mass of fluid displaced by the body.4 Surface Force in Incompressible Flow Expressed in Terms of Vorticity 93 We now derive the following formula for the force F exerted on an incompressible fluid by a rigid body with surface S whose centre of volume has velocity U0 : F + m0 ρ0 d dU0 dI = ρ0 ≡ dt dt 2 dt x ∧ ω(x. t) d 3 x = V+ V+ curl A d 3 x = − n ∧ A dS → − n ∧ curl I(t) d S. The fluid is assumed to be at rest at infinity.1. t) d 3 x − V+ p(x. 4π |x| . Subtracting these equations and extending the volume integral to include the volume occupied by the rigid body (where v d 3 x = U0 ). t) d 3 x.3). which includes the region occupied by the body.3) implies that A = curl(I(t)/4π|x|) on . t) dS m dU = F −F dt where U is the velocity of the centre of mass of the body. and let V+ denote the interior of including the volume of the body. The global equations of motion are m d dU + ρ0 dt dt v(x. m = mass of the body.3. t) = curl A. Let V denote the fluid between a large closed surface containing all of the vorticity and the surface S of the body. (4. we can also write F + m0 dU0 d = ρ0 dt dt v(x. The center of volume of the body is assumed to be in motion at velocity U0 (t). let F = external force applied to the body to maintain its motion. t) dS.2) Now let v(x.1) taken over V+ .3. including any contributions from bound vorticity within S. Then.1.1) where I is the impulse defined by the integral in (4. but in general the body may also be rotating at some time dependent angular velocity Ω.4.4.

By the divergence theorem. because {curl curl − ∇div}(I(t)/4π|x|) = −∇ 2 (I(t)/4π |x|) ≡ 0 for |x| > 0. 4.1). p → −ρ0 ∂ϕ/∂t on . ideal incompressible fluid in the absence of vorticity (Fig.1. where ϕ = div(I(t)/4π |x|) (see (4.1). 4.2) can therefore be written ρ0 d dt −n ∧ curl I(t) 4π |x| + n div I(t) 4π |x| d S.1 Bound Vorticity and the Added Mass Consider the particular case of a rigid body accelerating without rotation at velocity U(t) in an otherwise unbounded.4.4. On the sphere n = −x/|x|.4. − p(x. . (4. but arbitrary surface can be replaced by an integration over the surface of a large sphere |x| = R.3.2) reduces to the desired representation (4. 4. the integral is therefore just equal to I(t).8) that force exerted on the fluid can be written Fi = Mi j dU j .4. We have seen previously (Section 3. dt Fig. Thus.94 4 Vorticity Similarly.3)). Hence. the integral in this expression over the large. t) dS → ρ0 d dt ϕn d S = ρ0 d dt n div I(t) d S. and the integrand equals I(t)/4π R 2 .4.4. 4π |x| The right-hand side of (4.

including the region occupied by the body.4. The identities x ∧ curl A = 2A + ∇(x · A) − ∂ (x j A).3) therefore imply that Fi = −m 0 dUi d + ρ0 dt dt dUi d + ρ0 = −m 0 dt dt U j (x j − ϕ ∗ ) j ∂H 3 d x ∂ xi S U j (x j − ϕ ∗ )n i d S. j Now the vector A = U j (x j − ϕ ∗ )∇ H vanishes except on the surface S of the j body.1) accordingly gives the force in the form F = −m 0 dU ρ0 d + dt 2 dt x ∧ curl{U j (x j − ϕ ∗ )∇ H } d 3 x. . we can take v = U j ∇ϕ ∗ .4. the required formula for the velocity is v = U j H ( f )∇ϕ ∗ + U j H (− f )∇x j . j But ρ0 S x j n i d S = ρ0 δi j ≡ m 0 δi j . j Therefore.8.4 Surface Force in Incompressible Flow 95 where Mi j is the added mass tensor (3. j (where ∇ H = ∇ H ( f ) = −∇ H (− f )) Equation (4.4.4.6). To calculate the bound vorticity we need an expression for the velocity everywhere in space. by introducing a control surface f (x.1). ∂x j (·)∇ H d 3 x = S (·) dS (4. but the slipping of the ideal flow over S generates a singular distribution (a vortex sheet) of bound vorticity that must be used to evaluate the integral. t) = 0 that coincides with the surface S of the body. There is no vorticity in the fluid. This result will now be derived from the integral formula (4. In the fluid. where v ≡ U. with f > 0 in the fluid and f < 0 within S. j and the vorticity is ω = curl{U j H ( f )∇ϕ ∗ + U j H (− f )∇x j } j = −U j ∇ H ∧ ∇(x j − ϕ ∗ ) j ≡ curl {U j (x j − ϕ ∗ )∇ H }.

multiply Crocco’s homentropic momentum equation (4. even in the inviscid limit there is no contribution to the integral from the surface vortex sheet forming the bound vorticity. and ρ0 S − ϕ ∗ n i d S = Mi j . t) = 0 enclosing S.4. vrel = v − U.4). which are relatively small at large Reynolds numbers.1) we introduce the usual control surface f (x. Therefore. (4. and Mi j = M ji = −ρ0 S n j ϕi∗ d S is the added mass tensor.8). This vorticity is produced both by motion of S and by relative motion between S and the fluid induced by free vorticity in the flow. Now vrel = 0 on S.4) where vrel is the fluid velocity relative to the translational velocity of S.2.4.96 where 4 Vorticity = volume contained by S. associated with the added mass.4) represents the inviscid component of the force. We consider only the important special case of a body in translational motion without rotation at velocity U(t). 4. The first term on the right of (4.4.2 Force Exerted on an Incompressible Fluid by a Moving Body The integral in (4. because ∇ X i and the relative Lamb vector ω ∧ vrel are orthogonal on S.5) by H ≡ H ( f ). t) is the Kirchhoff vector already encountered in the definition of the compact Green’s function (Section 3.8. indeed. and show that the ith component of the force F exerted on the fluid can also be written Fi = Mi j dU j − ρ0 dt ∇ X i · ω ∧ vrel d 3 x − η V S ∇ X i · ω ∧ dS. the final term arises from frictional effects on S. Dt ∂t . with f > 0 in the outer fluid region. The contribution from free vorticity is furnished by the volume integral. To derive this formula from (4. and therefore the contribution to the volume integral from vorticity close to and on S is negligible. force on fluid in irrotadU tional flow ≡ Fi = Mi j dt j . Using the formula ∂H DH ≡ + v · ∇ H = 0. j where Mi j is the added mass tensor (3. any attempt to recast dI/dt must be strongly influenced by both the shape and motion of S. Thus. and take the curl of the resulting equation.4.1) defining the value of dI/dt can be transformed to remove the strong dependence of the integrand on the bound vorticity on S. X i = xi − ϕi∗ (x. X i represents the velocity potential of an ideal flow past S that has unit speed in the i direction at large distances from S (it depends on t because a fixed coordinate system is being used).4.

where the last line follows by use of the identities (4. d dt x ∧ ω(x.5) ∇xi · ω ∧ dS. The surface integral S Bn i d S can be eliminated by recalling that ∂ϕ ∗ ∂ϕi∗ ≡ n j i = ni ∂ xn ∂x j on S. adopting suffix notation.5) Bn i d S = S V div ϕi∗ ∂v d 3x + ∂t V ∇ϕi∗ · ω ∧ v d 3 x −ν V div(∇ϕi∗ ∧ ω) d 3 x.4.4.4. ∇ 2 ϕi∗ = 0. t) d 3 x = =− − −ν =2 x∧ d dt x ∧ (H ω) d 3 x = x∧ ∂ (H ω) d 3 x ∂t 97 ∂ (∇ H ∧ U) d 3 x − ∂t x ∧ curl ((∇ H · U)U) d 3 x x ∧ curl (H ω ∧ v) d 3 x x ∧ (∇ H ∧ ∇ B) d 3 x − x ∧ curl (H curl ω) d 3 x dU +0+2 dt B dS − 2 S V ω ∧ v d 3 x − 2ν S ω ∧ dS. Thus. Hence.2. Then.4 Surface Force in Incompressible Flow and the no-slip condition on S. d Ii 1 d ≡ dt 2 dt (x ∧ ω)i d 3 x = dUi + dt −ν S Bn i d S − S V ∇xi · (ω ∧ v) d 3 x (4. The first and last integrals on the right are transformed further by the divergence . using Crocco’s equation (4. Then. because ∇ϕi∗ ∼ O(1/|x|3 ) as |x| → ∞. we find ∂ ∂ (H ω) = − (∇ H ∧ U) − curl((∇ H · U)U) − ∇ H ∧ ∇ B ∂t ∂t − curl(H ω ∧ v) − ν curl(H curl ω). because ω = 0 within S. the divergence theorem shows that S Bn i d S = − V div(∇ϕi∗ B) d 3 x ≡ − V ∇ϕi∗ · ∇ B d 3 x.3).

4. The necessity for such a term is vividly illustrated by the Stokes drag on a sphere. (4. Thus. The second.7) where vrel = v − U.6) But the identity ∇ X i · ω ∧ U = div(U(v · ∇ X i ) − v(U · ∇ X i ) − (v · U)∇ X i ) implies that d Ii = dt V ∇ X i · ω ∧ U d 3 x = 0. we find ∇ X i · ω ∧ v d 3x − ν V S dUi Mi j dU j + − dt ρ0 dt ∇ X i · ω ∧ dS. substituting for d Ii = dt Bn i d S in (4. (because X i = xi − ϕi∗ ) the net contribution of the normal pressure forces on S is represented in (4. so that (4. 0). The ith component of the viscous skin friction is −η S (ω ∧ dS)i ≡ −η S ∇xi · ω ∧ dS.5).4) is now obtained by substituting from (4.4. Equation (4. along the x1 axis.4) is the force necessary to accelerate the added mass of the body.4) by the terms −ρ0 V ∇ X i · ω ∧ vrel d 3 x + η S ∇ϕi∗ · ω ∧ dS.6) can also be written ∇ X i · ω ∧vrel d 3 x−ν V S dUi Mi j dU j + − dt ρ0 dt ∇ X i · ω ∧dS (4. 4.1) (recalling that m 0 = ρ0 ).8. At very small Reynolds numbers Re = aU/ν 1 .7) into (4.4.4.4. d 3x = ∂t ρ0 dt where Mi j = M ji = −ρ0 For the last −ν V n j ϕi∗ d S is the added mass coefficient of (3. ∇ϕi∗ · ω ∧ dS. viscous component is comparable in magnitude to the skin friction. 0.3 Stokes Drag on a Sphere The first term on the right-hand side of (4.6). U > 0. and is produced by the pressure field established by the surface shear stress.4.4.4.98 theorem.4. for the first div ϕi∗ S 4 Vorticity V Mi j dU j ∂v . Let the sphere have radius a and translate at constant velocity U = (U.4. div(∇ϕi∗ ∧ ω) d 3 x = ν S S Thus.

Because n 1 = n · ∇ϕ1 on S we find. Both the pressure and the vorticity therefore satisfy Laplace’s equation ∇ 2 p = 0.4. and is given by the final integral on the right of (4.5). This interpretation of Dp as the component of drag attributable to the normal pressure forces on the sphere can be confirmed directly using the creeping flow ∗ approximation (4. using the divergence theorem. where Ds and Dp are the respective components of the Stokes drag on the sphere produced by the skin friction and the viscous surface pressure. and therefore ω = curl 3aU .4. The pressure drag is therefore equal to half the skin-friction drag.8) in a reference frame moving with the sphere.9) The net force F1 on the fluid is in the x1 direction.4. This yields C = 3a/2.2.4. The value of C is most easily found by substituting this expression for ω into the Biot–Savart formula (4. ω must be a linear function of U ∧ x: the identity curl curl(U/ |x|) = grad div(U/|x|) and Equation (4. and the condition that p should vanish at large distances from the sphere supplies the dipole solution p = Cη U U·x ≡ −Cη div . which (for incompressible flow) reduces to the creeping flow equation ∇ p = −η curl ω (4. |x| > a.1) and evaluating the right-hand side at the centre x = 0 of the sphere.8) imply that ω = C curl (U/|x|) ≡ C(U ∧ x)/|x|3 (|x| > a). and Ds = η S (ω ∧ dS)1 = −4π ηU a. It is equal in magnitude to Ds + Dp . By symmetry p must vary linearly with η and U · x. |x| > a. For the sphere ∗ ϕ1 = −a 3 x1 /2|x|3 . Dp = − S pn 1 d S ≡ − S ∗ p∇ϕ1 · dS = V ∗ ∇ p · ∇ϕ1 d 3 x = −η V ∗ curl ω · ∇ϕ1 d 3 x = −η S ∗ ∇ϕ1 · ω ∧ dS. .3. ∇ 2 ω = 0. Dp = −η S ∗ ∇ϕ1 · ω ∧ dS = −2π ηU a.8). |x|3 |x| where C is a constant. and we readily calculate F1 = 6π ηU a. where v ≡ U.4 Surface Force in Incompressible Flow 99 the inertial terms ω ∧ v and ∇( 1 v 2 ) can be discarded from Crocco’s equation 2 (4.4.4. Similarly.4). 2|x| (4.

z = x + iy is regular (analytic) in a region D of the z-plane. y). y) = (X (x. Y ). y). and define a (conformal) transformation Z = f (z) of D into a region D in the plane of Z = X + iY . Y (x. ∂ 2ϕ ∂ 2ϕ + 2 = 0. The results will be applied in later chapters to investigate simple models of sound production by vortices interacting with surfaces. incompressible flows and its application to determine the equation of motion of a line vortex in such flows. the solution to the original problem in D can be found . 2 ∂x ∂y ∂ 2ψ ∂ 2ψ + = 0 in D.8) and the identity div(A ∧ B) = curl A · B − A · curl B have been used on the second line.5. y)). These results have the following significance. 4. which is regular in D. y) + iψ(x. The real and imaginary parts ϕ(x. 2 ∂x ∂ y2 Let f (z) be regular in D. y) are solutions of Laplace’s equation.100 4 Vorticity where (4. ψ(x. with derivative w (z) = f (z)W ( f (z)). Then.4. y) = (X (x. ∂2 ∂2 + = 0. If it is possible to solve the latter problem. In other words. y)). y) + iψ(x. 4. ∂ X2 ∂Y 2 ∂2 ∂2 + = 0 in D . y) and ψ(x. y). (X. y) = W( f (z)). The solution of Laplace’s equation within a given two-dimensional bounded region D is equivalent to the solution of Laplace’s equation within the transformed region D .5 The Complex Potential The remainder of this chapter is devoted to a brief outline of the complex potential representation of two-dimensional. Let W(Z ) be regular in D with real and imaginary parts (X. ∂ X2 ∂Y 2 The transformation Z = f (z) permits us to define a corresponding function w(z) ≡ ϕ(x. For corresponding points in D and D we have ϕ(x. the solutions and of Laplace’s equation in D are also solutions of Laplace’s equation in D. Y (x.1 Laplace’s Equation in Two Dimensions Suppose that w(z) = ϕ(x. Y ).

This will be illustrated by consideration of two methods based on the theory of complex variables. Difficulties may arise at isolated points where f (z) = 0 and at points where f (z) ceases to be regular.5.4.e. y) does not change with time. U = real constant: ϕ = U x. y) = constant. y) are solutions of Laplace’s equation and satisfy the Cauchy–Riemann equations: ∂ψ ∂ϕ = . If v = (u.5 The Complex Potential 101 by transforming back to the z plane. and the fluid particles travel along a fixed system of streamlines each of which is a member of the family of curves ψ(x. . The velocity v = ∇ϕ = (∂ϕ/∂ x. The fact that w(z) is a regular function of z can greatly simplify the solution of many problems. The function ψ is called the stream function. ∂ϕ/∂ y). 0). that the streamlines intersect the equipotentials ϕ = constant at right angles. then the complex velocity w (z) = ∂ϕ ∂ϕ −i ≡ u − iv ∂x ∂y is also regular. incompressible fluid in planes parallel to the x y plane can be investigated by introducing the complex potential w(z) = ϕ(x. Both ϕ(x. 4. v). i. ∂y ∂x which imply that ∇ϕ · ∇ψ = 0. A catalog of flows can therefore be constructed by studying the properties of arbitrarily selected w(z). Thus. ∂x ∂y ∂ϕ ∂ψ =− . y). ψ = U y. v = (U. y) and ψ(x.2 Hydrodynamics in Two Dimensions Irrotational motion of an ideal. but these can usually be dealt with by careful examination of the behavior of the transformation near such points.. Method 1 The real and imaginary parts of every regular function w(z) determine the velocity potential and stream function of a possible flow. y) + iψ(x. Example 1 w = U z. For steady motion the velocity at (x.

5.1. Fig. . U = real constant. and the motion becomes uniform at speed U parallel to the x axis. a > 0.102 4 Vorticity The motion is uniform at speed U along streamlines parallel to the x direction. ϕ = U sin θ r + a2 r . Example 3 w = −iU z − a2 z . ϕ = U cos θ r + r r .1. U = real constant. w = U r eiθ + a 2 −iθ a2 e . The motion therefore represents steady flow in the x direction past a rigid cylinder of radius a with centre at the origin (Fig.5.5. In terms of the polar form z = r eiθ . 4. c.. |z| > a > 0.1) At large distances from the origin w → U z. 4.5. The radial component of velocity a2 ∂ϕ = U cos θ 1 − 2 ∂r r vanishes at r = a. Example 2 w=U z+ a2 z .2) describes potential flow in the y direction past a rigid cylinder of radius a with center at the origin.6). |z| > a. (4.f. Section 3. (4. Thus.

5. z = r eiθ . and ds is the element of arc length on C. When the source is situated at z 0 = x0 + i y0 w= 1 ln(z−z 0 ). The flow is radially outward from the origin along streamlines θ = constant. The streamlines are circles centered at z = 0. where C is any simple closed curve enclosing the origin with outward normal n. and the flow speed is ∂ϕ/r ∂θ = /2πr in the anticlockwise direction (for > 0). 2π 2π Example 5 The function w= −i ln z. In particular.2). 2π represents the flow produced by two unit point sources located at z 0 = x0 + i y0 ∗ and z 0 = x0 − i y0 (Fig.5 The Complex Potential Example 4 The function w= 1 ln z. The motion is symmetric with respect to the x axis. 4. at speed ∂ϕ/∂r = 1/2πr . 2π 2π 103 is regular except at z = 0. and the contour is traversed in the positive direction (with the interior on the left). z = r eiθ . ∇ϕ · n ds = C 0 2π ∂ϕ r dθ = 1. . and ∂ϕ/∂ y = 0 on y = 0. ∂r The origin is therefore a simple source of unit strength. 2π ϕ= 1 (ln r1 + ln r2 ) . Therefore.4. ψ = . The circulation C v · dx = . The origin is a singularity of the flow where fluid is created at a rate equal to C ∇ϕ · n ds. where C is any contour encircling the vortex once. When the vortex is at z 0 = x0 + i y0 w= Example 6 The function w= 1 ∗ (ln(z − z 0 ) + ln(z − z 0 )). and describes the irrotational flow outside a line vortex of strength concentrated at z = 0.ψ = − ln r. 2π ϕ= 1 θ ln r. 2π −i ln(z − z 0 ). 2π ϕ= 1 1 ln |z − z 0 | = ln (x − x0 )2 + (y − y0 )2 . 2π 2π is regular except at z = 0. taking C to be a circle of radius r . in the region y > 0 the potential also describes the flow produced by a point source at z 0 adjacent to a rigid wall at y = 0 (the presence of the wall is said to be accounted for by an image source). 2π ϕ= θ .

Example 7 The function w= −i i ∗ ln(z − z 0 ) + ln(z − z 0 ). z 0 = x0 − i y0 (Fig. 4. 4.5.5. The stream function ψ = Im w = 0 on the x axis.5. and cannot therefore cause it to translate.3). In the region y > 0 the potential describes the flow produced by a vortex of strength at z 0 adjacent to a rigid wall at y = 0 (which is accounted for by an equal and opposite image vortex).104 4 Vorticity Fig. 4. The mean value of the local rotational flow produced by the self-potential of each vortex (Example 5) vanishes on the vortex axis. on which ∂ϕ/∂ y = 0. . Each vortex translates parallel to the wall at speed u = /4π y0 determined by the velocity potential of its image. 2π 2π represents the flow produced by two line vortices of circulations ± respectively ∗ at z 0 = x0 + i y0 . Method 2 The flow past a system of rigid boundaries in the z plane is represented by means of a conformal transformation Z = f (z) by an equivalent flow in the Z plane.2.3. The transformation is usually chosen to simplify the boundary Fig. which is therefore a streamline of the flow.

5 The Complex Potential 105 conditions. β . thereby permitting the solution in the Z plane to be found in a relatively straightforward manner. if Z = Z 0 is the image of a vortex of strength at z = z 0 . The streamlines of the flow are the parabolas √ θ r cos 2 = constant.. i. Example 8 Derive the following formula for the velocity potential of irrotational flow around the edge of the rigid half-plane x < 0. The complex potential of flow in the positive X direction parallel to the boundary Y = 0 in the Z plane corresponds to flow around the edge of the half-plane in the clockwise sense. vθ ) = ∂ϕ 1 ∂ϕ . √ The transformation Z = i z maps the z plane cut along the negative real axis (so that −π < arg z < π) onto the upper half of the Z plane. In the z plane this becomes √ √ θ w = iU z ≡ −U r sin 2 √ θ + iU r cos . 2π The vortex in the z plane therefore maps into an equal vortex at the image point in the Z plane. θ): √ θ ϕ = α r sin . and plot the streamlines. y = 0 in terms of polar coordinates (r. y = ±2β 1 − x . and has the general representation W = U Z . the complex potential in the neighborhood of Z 0 (where Z − Z 0 ≈ f (z 0 )(z − z 0 )) is determined by W(Z ) = w(z) = −i ln(z − z 0 ) + terms finite at z 0 2π Z − Z0 −i ln = + terms finite at Z 0 2π f (z 0 ) = −i ln(Z − Z 0 ) + terms finite at Z 0 . where U is real. Point source and vortex singularities of the flow are preserved under the transformation. 2 2 This satisfies the rigid wall condition on the half-plane because the component of velocity normal to the wall is vθ .4. which vanishes at θ = ±π. 2 − π < θ < π.e. The polar representation of the velocity is therefore v = (vr . ∂r r ∂θ −U = √ 2 r θ θ sin . cos . 2 α = a real constant. Indeed.

The streamline for β = 0 corresponds to the upper and lower surfaces of the half-plane. β being a positive constant. 4.6 Motion of a Line Vortex In two-dimensional incompressible.5.7) reduces to Dω3 = 0. inviscid flow in planes parallel to x3 = 0 the vortex lines are all parallel to the x3 direction.4. The flow velocity becomes infinite like 1/ r as r → 0 at the sharp edge. 4. 4.106 4 Vorticity Fig. Dt A line vortex is therefore convected without change at the local velocity at its .5. and the vorticity equation (4.4. When U > 0 fluid particles travel along the parabolic streamlines around the edge in the clockwise direction.2. as shown in Fig. where x < β. which maps into the streamline Y = 0 on the √ surface of the wall in the Z plane.

subtracting the self-potential from w(z) we find.e. x02 (t)) of the vortex at time t. For a vortex of strength at z = z 0 (t) in the plane of z = x1 + i x2 .2) The complex velocity of the vortex is W (z 0 ) ≡ {W (z)}z=z0 . Thus. F(z) are regular functions of z in the neighborhood of the vortex core at z = z 0 .2) this becomes d x02 i ζ (z 0 ) d x01 −i =− + F (z 0 ).. near the vortex.6. In applications the complex potential w(z) usually arises in the form w(z) = − i ln(ζ (z) − ζ (z 0 )) + F(z). ∗ d x01 d x02 dz 0 ≡ −i = W (z 0 ).3) The real and imaginary parts of this equation supply two nonlinear first-order ordinary differential equations for the position (x01 (t). dt dt 4π ζ (z 0 ) (4. In particular. dt dt dt Using (4.1) where ζ (z). . when |z − z 0 | is small we have ζ (z) = ζ (z 0 ) + (z − z 0 )ζ (z 0 ) + (z − z 0 )2 ζ (z 0 ) + · · · .6. 2π (4. i. W (z) = w(z) + =− i ln(z − z 0 ) 2π i i ln(ζ (z) − ζ (z 0 )) + ln(z − z 0 ) + F(z) 2π 2π i 1 ln ζ (z 0 ) + ζ (z 0 )(z − z 0 ) + F(z).6. 2 where the primes denote differentiation with respect to z.6. and this potential must be removed from the complex potential w(z) before calculating the convection velocity of the vortex. 2π But the rotational flow around the core induced by the vortex cannot induce motion in itself. ≈− 2π 2 (4. the velocity becomes infinite as the core is approached because of the singular velocity induced by its self-potential − i ln(z − z 0 ).4.6 Motion of a Line Vortex 107 core.

4.6. Let the vortex at z 0 (t) map into a vortex at ζ = ζ0 (t). 2 n k4 = h f ∗ z 0 + k3 . in which case w= −i i ∗ ln(ζ − ζ0 ) + ln(ζ − ζ0 ). 2π 2π . n Assume that at time tn the vortex is at z 0 (tn ) = z 0 . − π < arg z < π.4) maps the fluid region −π < arg z < π into the upper half Im ζ > 0 of the ζ plane (Fig.5. 6 Example 1 Calculate the trajectory of a line vortex of strength > 0 adjacent to a rigid half-plane lying along the negative real axis (x1 < 0.1a). Let us consider integration by means of a fourth-order Runge–Kutta algorithm.6.6.6. Write the equation of motion (4. 1 n k2 = h f ∗ z 0 + k1 . we evaluate n k1 = h f ∗ z 0 . 2 1 n k3 = h f ∗ z 0 + k2 . 4.108 4 Vorticity 4.6. dt 4π ζ (z 0 ) and let h be a suitably small integration time step (which need not be constant). The integration is started from a prescribed point on the trajectory through which the vortex is required to pass. as described in Example 7 of Section 4. Fig. The transformation √ ζ = i z. The velocity potential w(ζ ) of the motion in the ζ plane is found by introducing an image ∗ vortex of strength − at ζ = ζ0 (t). 2π 2π In the z plane this becomes w(z) = − i i ln(ζ (z) − ζ (z 0 )) + ln(ζ (z) − ζ ∗ (z 0 )). where f (z 0 ) = − + F (z 0 ).6. and then find n+1 n z 0 = z 0 + 1 (k1 + 2k2 + 2k3 + k4 ).3) in the form dz 0 i ζ (z 0 ) = f ∗ (z 0 ). x2 = 0.1b). To determine the complex n+1 position z 0 at time tn+1 = tn + h. (4.3) numerically. z = x1 + i x2 .1 Numerical Integration of the Vortex Path Equation In most cases it is necessary to integrate equation (4. The time and space variables should first be nondimensionalized with respect to convenient time and length scales defined by the problem (several examples are discussed in Chapter 8).

6. 2 dr dθ d x02 ≡ sin θ + r cos θ =− (cos θ + 1). the equation of motion (4.3) becomes d x02 i d x01 i −i = .6. 4. dt 8πr 2 that is. Let z 0 = r eiθ .1). Then the real and imaginary parts of the equation are dr dθ d x01 ≡ cos θ − r sin θ = dt dt dt 8πr sin θ + tan θ .1.6. + √ √ √ dt dt 8π z 0 4π z 0 [ z 0 + ( z 0 )∗ ] This can be integrated in closed form.6 Motion of a Line Vortex 109 Fig. Hence. dr θ =− tan .5) . dt dt dt 8πr Therefore. which is of the form (4. r 1 dθ = 2 cot θ dr 2 dθ =− dt 4πr 2 (4.4.6.

6. where time is measured from the instant at which θ = 0.6.6). we find sec2 1 θ 2 dθ =− dt 4π . (4. (4. Substituting for r in the second of equations (4. . . Thus. (for > 0) the vortex starts above the half-plane at t = −∞ at x01 = −∞. 1 r = sec θ . initially at speed U parallel to the plane.6. θ = 2 tan−1 − t 8π 2 2 . Thus. θ = 2 tan−1 − x02 = Ut .7) 1 − (U t/ )2 1 + (U t/ )2 −2U t/ 1 + (U t/ )2 where U = 8π . The constant length is equal to the distance of closest approach of the vortex to the edge of the half-plane. 2 = constant. and proceeds along a symmetrical path below the half-plane.110 4 Vorticity Fig. x02 = 2 and translates towards the edge. It crosses the x1 axis at t = 0 at x01 = . which occurs at θ = 0. Thus.2.6) This is the polar equation of the trajectory plotted in Fig.5). 4. Collecting together these results we have r = x01 = 1+ Ut 2 .2. .6.6. 4. The dependence of r on t is now obtained by substituting into (4.6.

3. The complex potential is ob∗ tained by placing an image vortex − at the inverse point z = a 2 /z 0 together with a vortex + at the center of the cylinder. − a2 dθ = . 4. Then w(z) = − a2 i i ln(z − z 0 ) + ln z − ∗ 2π 2π z0 − i ln z.6.4. Example 2: Vortex motion outside a cylinder A vortex is located at z 0 = r eiθ outside a rigid cylinder of radius a(< r ) with center at the origin (Fig.1) ζ ≡ z). ≡ dt 2π (r 2 − a 2 ) 2π z 0 2π z 0 (r 2 − a 2 ) By multiplying by z 0 and adding the complex conjugate equation we see that r = constant. 2π The first term on the right is the self-potential of the vortex (in the notation of (4. 2πr (r 2 − a 2 ) (4.6. 4.6 Motion of a Line Vortex 111 Fig.8) i a 2 e−iθ dθ d −iθ e = .6. There is no net circulation around the cylinder. so that the equation of motion of the vortex is ∗ ∗ i z0 i dz 0 i a2 = − . dt 2πr 2 (r 2 − a 2 ) and (for > 0) the vortex trajectory is a circle traversed in the clockwise direction at speed v0 = a2 .3).6. ≡ −ir e−iθ dt dt 2πr (r 2 − a 2 ) . and r Therefore. The two interior vortices ensure that the total circulation around the cylinder vanishes.

4. t) + y j ωi (y. show that U = 3V when the mass of the air within the bubble is neglected. t) d 3 y . Assume the fluid is at rest at infinity and that there is no net circulation around the strip.7) takes the form D Dt ω ρ = ω · ∇ v. 9. x2 = 0. t) d 3 y = ∇ 1 4π |x| ∧ 1 2 y ∧ ω(y.3). 7. rigid strip of width 2a. homentropic flow (where div v = 0) the vorticity equation (4. Deduce the formulae (4. Calculate the unsteady lift and drag exerted on a rigid circular cylinder of radius a produced by a parallel line vortex of circulation in the presence of a uniform mean flow normal to the cylinder. A rigid sphere of radius a translates at constant velocity U = (U. 10. Calculate the path of a line vortex of strength that is parallel to a rigid strip occupying −a < x1 < a. where the coordinate origin is taken at the center of the sphere. Determine the unsteady force on the strip. If the acoustic particle velocity near the bubble would equal V(t) in the absence of the bubble. when the induced component of the motion of produced by image vortices in the cylinder is neglected). 6. Assume the fluid is at rest at infinity and that there is no net circulation around the cylinder.3. 0). 5. along the x1 axis.112 4 Vorticity Problems 4 1. 3.2. U > 0. −∞ < x3 < ∞. ρ 2. Assume the motion is ideal and that the net circulation around the cylinder vanishes. A gas bubble in water is set into translational motion at velocity U(t) by sound whose wavelength greatly exceeds the bubble radius. to deduce the Stokes drag formula D = 6π ηU a.e. 8. t)) d 3 y = 0 to show that 1 4π|x|3 (x · y)ω(y.. Calculate the added mass coefficients Mi j for an infinite. Use the creeping flow approximation ω = curl (3aU/2|x|). Use the relation (yi ω j (y. 0. Calculate the added mass coefficients Mi j for an infinite. Show that in inviscid. rigid cylinder of radius a. Repeat Question 5 under the assumption that the vortex is convected solely by the mean flow (i. . Calculate the path of a line vortex of strength that is parallel to a rigid elliptic cylinder of semi-major and minor axes respectively equal to a and b.

Show that the vortex traverses a path with polar representation r sin 2θ = constant. Calculate the trajectory of a line vortex of strength adjacent to the rigid half-plane x1 < 0. provided the fluid is at rest at infinity. 14. the vortex being parallel to the edge of the corner. Deduce that a line vortex at z = z 0 (t) traverses a path determined by the equation ∗ i dz 0 =− dt 4π 2 z0 z0 2z 0 a2 − 2 2 z0 + a2 − z0 + a2 + a2 .Problems 4 113 11. 13. . x2 = 0 in the presence of a uniform mean flow at speed U in the positive x1 direction. Show that the transformation ζ = z 2 /a 2 + 1. A line vortex of strength is adjacent to a rigid right-angle corner whose sides lie along the positive x1 and x2 axes. 12. Calculate the trajectories of a vortex pair consisting of two parallel line vortices of strengths ± moving under their mutual induction towards a rigid plane parallel to the line of centers of the vortices. a > 0 maps the upper z plane cut by a thin rigid barrier along the imaginary axis between z = 0 and z = ia onto the upper ζ plane.

1 The Role of Vorticity in Lighthill’s Theory At low Mach numbers in unbounded. Hence.1 consisting of vorticity of characteristic length . t) = curl ω(y.1.3). where the characteristic frequency ∼u/ .1) To examine this in more detail.2) M= u . Put v = u + ∇ϕ.2) can be approximated by means of the Biot–Savart induction formula (4. where |x| ∼ .3. 2. homentropic flow the value of Lighthill’s quadrupole source (2.2.5 Vortex Sound 5. c0 . u involves the whole incompressible component of velocity. ρ Dt But p − p0 ∼ ρ0 u 2 in the eddy.1. Dt ρ Dt ρc Dt Hence. consider the acoustically compact eddy of Fig. u(x.2. 4π |x − y| (5. Because div u = 0. 114 (5. ρ0 u 3 1 Dρ 1 Dp u Dp ∼ . in order of magnitude ∇ϕ = O(u M 2 ) within the eddy.1): Ti j ≈ ρ0 u i u j . and the continuity equation becomes ∇ 2ϕ + 1 Dρ = 0. = 2 ∼ M 2. Thus. and u ∼ O(1/|x|3 ) as |x| → ∞ (see Section 4. and take the coordinate origin within the eddy. the scalar potential ϕ describes compressible motions. t) d 3 y .

1) in the form p(x. t) = p1 (x.1 The Role of Vorticity in Lighthill’s Theory Now write ∂ 2 (u i u j ) = div(ω ∧ u) + ∇ 2 ∂ xi ∂ x j 1 2 u 2 115 (5. t).9. t) = c0 (ρ − ρ0 ) of Lighthill’s equation given by (2.2. using (1.1. 2 c0 c0 |x| When retarded time variations x · y/c0 |x| within the eddy are neglected the identity (5. t) = p2 (x.3).2. d 3y ∼ c0 |x| |x| → ∞.1. To estimate the value of the integral in (5. where.1. t) + p2 (x. because u ∼ O(1/|y|3 ) as |y| → ∞.6) and (1. t) = −ρ0 xi ∂ 4πc0 |x|2 ∂t ∂2 ρ0 2 4πc0 |x| ∂t 2 (ω ∧ u)i y.8) as |x| → ∞. t − c0 |x| ∂t c0 The order of magnitude of p2 (x.1.3) and the divergence theorem imply that ω ∧ u d 3 y ≡ 0. t − |x| ρ0 u 2 M 2 . p1 (x. t − |x| x·y d 3 y. t) ≈ −ρ0 xi x j ∂ 2 2 4πc0 |x|3 ∂t 2 yi (ω ∧ u) j y.5.1. t − + We now find p1 (x. t − + d 3 y.9. Because div v ∼ O(M 2 ) within the source region.6) |x| c0 +···. + c0 c0 |x| (5. x·y ∂ |x| (ω ∧ u) y.5) x·y 1 2 |x| u y. t) is estimated by using the momentum equation (4.3) 2 and express the solution p(x.4) (5. we can write ∂u +∇ ∂t ∂ ∂t d p 1 2 ∂ϕ + v + ρ 2 ∂t 1 2 u + div u 2 = −ω ∧ u − ω ∧ ∇ϕ − ν curl ω.4) it is therefore necessary to expand the integrand to the next higher approximation in the retarded time: (ω ∧ u) y. (5. Take the scalar product with u d p 1 2 ∂ϕ + v + ρ 2 ∂t = −u · ω ∧ ∇ϕ − νu · curl ω = −u · ω ∧ ∇ϕ + ν(div (u ∧ ω) − ω2 ) .1. t − |x| x·y + c0 c0 |x| = (ω ∧ u) y.

where also ω = 0. using the estimate (5.1.5) of this equation. t) d 3 y = − 2 (u · ω ∧ ∇ϕ + νω2 )(y.1. in Chapter 2.2 The Equation of Vortex Sound Lighthill’s equation (2. The contributions from the divergence terms vanish because u( d p/ρ + 1 v 2 + ∂ϕ/∂t) tends to zero at least as fast 2 as 1/|y|3 as |y| → ∞. t) d 3 y ∼ 2 3 u M2 + u . we find p2 (x. Equation (2. the principal effect of 3 this term is to attenuate the sound once it has been generated and is propagating to a distant observer in the source-free region of the flow.116 5 Vortex Sound and integrate over the whole of space. and therefore that p2 p1 in turbulent flow where M We conclude that the component div(ρ0 ω ∧ v) of the Lighthill quadrupole is principal source of sound at low Mach numbers. but is of no particular interest when studying sound generation mechanisms.1.5). in which the viscous term 4 ν∇(div v) is neglected. 5. Hence. however.) Thus.7) 2 3 where Re = u /ν typically exceeds 104 in turbulent flow. The two terms on the right-hand side nominally represent the dissipation of the turbulent motions respectively by acoustic radiation and by viscous damping. when retarded time variations are neglected in (5.2.2. (We have already seen.12) can be recast in a form that emphasizes the prominent rˆ le of vorticity in the production of sound by taking the total enthalpy o B= dp 1 2 + v ρ 2 2 as the independent acoustic variable. In the following we shall actually use the Approximation (4.2) ∂ ∂t 1 2 u (y. The total enthalpy occurs naturally in Crocco’s form (4. |x| Re 1 and Re ∂ 2 (ρ0 vi v j ) ∂ xi ∂ x j 1. All viscous stresses can be ignored in a high Reynolds number source flow except possibly within surface boundary layers on bodies .5) that a more accurate estimate of the radiation damping is 2 u 3 M 5 . Indeed. t) ∼ |x| ρ0 u 2 M 4 + ρ0 u 2 M 2 . in place of Lighthill’s c0 (ρ −ρ0 ).1. Re (5.2. This attenuation can be significant in applications.3) of the momentum equation.

ρ 2 Differentiating with respect to time and using Crocco’s equation (4.2.5) by the density ρ and take the divergence div ρ ∂v ∂t + ∇ · (ρ∇ B) = −div(ρω ∧ v). B=− ∂ϕ ∂t in regions where ω = 0.5).4) (5. we have ∂B ∂v 1 ∂p = − v· ρ ∂t ∂t ∂t ∂B − v · (−∇ B − ω ∧ v − ν curl ω) = ∂t DB + νv · curl ω. (5.5). t) is the velocity potential that determines the whole motion in the irrotational regions of the fluid. ρ ∂t Dt 5. But surface friction is dominated by the vorticity term −ν curl ω. and at large distances from the acoustic sources perturbations in B represent acoustic waves.2.2.2. In irrotational flow Crocco’s equation (4.1 Reformulation of Lighthill’s Equation Multiply Crocco’s equation (4. If the mean flow is at rest in the far field. ∂t In other words.2) To calculate the pressure in terms of B elsewhere in the flow. we use the definition dp 1 = B − v2.2.5) reduces to ∂v = −∇ B. the acoustic pressure is given by p = ρ0 B ≡ −ρ0 ∂ϕ .1) where ϕ(x. which is retained in (4. = Dt The small viscous correction can be ignored in high Reynolds number source flows.3) .2. (5.5.2. where p and B can be taken to be related by 1 ∂p DB = . ∂t (5.2 The Equation of Vortex Sound 117 immersed in the flow.2.2. B is therefore constant in steady irrotational flow.

2.118 5 Vortex Sound The first term on the left is expressed in terms of B by using the continuity equation in the form div v = − and writing div ρ ∂v ∂t = ∇ρ · ∂ ∂v + ρ div v ∂t ∂t ∂ 1 Dρ ∂v −ρ = ∇ρ · ∂t ∂t ρ Dt = ∇ρ · = −ρ = −ρ = −ρ ∂ ∂v −ρ ∂t ∂t 1 ∂ρ ρ ∂t 1 ∂p ρc2 ∂t 1 DB c2 Dt . as in the case of Lighthill’s equation. the mean velocity .2. ρ ρ (5.5) The vortex source on the right-hand side vanishes in irrotational regions. and the right-hand side of (5.3) has been used on the last line. and if there are no moving boundaries. the total enthalpy B is constant. if ω = 0 everywhere.2 Sound Waves in Irrotational Mean Flow Let an irrotational mean flow be defined by the velocity potential ϕ0 (x). and there are no sound waves propagating in the fluid. 1 ∂ρ ρ ∂t − ∂v · ∇ρ − ρv · ∇ ∂t 1 ∂ρ ρ ∂t 1 Dρ . when the source region is very extensive it will not normally be permissible to neglect the interaction of the sound with the vorticity through which it propagates.5) may be identified as the analytical representation of the acoustic sources.2.2. Substituting into (5. 5. If acoustic waves cannot enter from infinity.2.4) and dividing by ρ. ρ Dt D Dt D Dt D Dt where Equation (5. In an unbounded fluid U = constant. we obtain the desired vortex sound equation for homentropic flow D Dt 1 D c2 Dt − 1 1 ∇ · (ρ∇) B = div(ρω ∧ v). with mean velocity U = ∇ϕ0 . it follows that the (homentropic) flow can generate sound only if moving vorticity is present. The differential operator on the left describes propagation of the sound through the nonuniform flow.

2 The linearized version of this equation describes the propagation of small amplitude sound waves determined by ϕ (x. because the mean flow does not depend on time. It can be shown that the general.3 Vortex Sound at Low Mach Numbers When the characteristic Mach number M is small the local mean values of the density and sound speed are related to their uniform respective values ρ0 and . and set ϕ(x. In homentropic flow the mean density and sound speed can be expressed in terms of the variable mean velocity U(x). either internally by an airfoil. nonlinear equation satisfied by ϕ is 1 ∂ 2ϕ 1 D + 2 2 ∂t 2 c c Dt 1 ∂ 1 (∇ϕ)2 + 2 2 c ∂t 1 (∇ϕ)2 − ∇ 2 ϕ = 0.2. say. t). ρ where c ≡ c(x) and ρ ≡ ρ(x) are the local sound speed and density in the steady flow. t).5). t) = ϕ0 (x) + ϕ (x. when ω = 0 the linearized ˙ equation for B = −∂ϕ /∂t ≡ −ϕ is more easily derived from (5. rather than ϕ. However. ˙ ρ (5. The linearized ˙ equation then becomes ∂ + U·∇ ∂t 1 c2 ∂ + U·∇ ∂t − 1 ∇ · (ρ∇) ϕ = 0.2. Dt ∂t Furthermore. we can take the perturbation potential ϕ . t).2. but the mean velocity is always single-valued). or externally by the walls of a duct of variable cross section (ϕ0 (x) can be multiple-valued if the boundaries are multiply connected. but the linearized equation is obtained merely by replacing these coefficients by their values in the absence of the sound. which becomes D Dt 1 D c2 Dt − 1 ∇ · (ρ∇) ϕ = 0.2 The Equation of Vortex Sound 119 can vary with position only if the fluid is bounded.5.6) The coefficients of the differential operators in this equation are functions of both mean and perturbation quantities. 5. and ∂ D ≈ + U·∇ . Consider an irrotational disturbance ϕ (x. as the acoustic variable.

5.5) can therefore be simplified by (a) taking c = c0 .2. and (b) by neglecting nonlinear effects of propagation and the scattering of sound by the vorticity. x2 ) = ±s ≡ ±(s1 (t). .8) 5.7) and in the far field the acoustic pressure is given by the linearized approximation p(x. ρ0 The vortex sound equation (5.2.2.120 5 Vortex Sound c0 at infinity by relations of the form c ∼ 1 + O(M 2 ). c0 ρ ∼ 1 + O(M 2 ). and ρ = ρ0 . 5. Fig.2. t).4 Example 1 (Powell 1963): Sound Generation by a Spinning Vortex Pair Two parallel vortex filaments each of circulation and distance 2 apart rotate about the x3 axis midway between them (Fig. t) ≈ ρ0 B(x. (5. provided the Mach number is small enough for the motion to be regarded as incompressible.2. 2 c0 ∂t 2 (5. s2 (t)) = ± (cos t. Their positions at time t are ¯ x = (x1 . sin t). The production of sound is then governed by the simpler equation 1 ∂2 − ∇ 2 B = div(ω ∧ v).1.2.1) at angular velocity = /4π 2 .

(2.9) .9. we can write in the acoustic far field. Hence. because k ∧ (k ∧ s) = −s. x x If this is expanded in powers of the radius of the circular orbit (and it can be verified that this is equivalent to expanding the acoustic pressure in powers of 1) the ith component of the first nonzero term is M = U/c0 (ω ∧ v)i ≈ ∂ (2 ¯ ∂x j si (t)s j (t)δ(¯ )). ω∧v=− s(t)[δ(¯ − s) − δ(¯ + s)]. y2 ). by setting ξ = y3 − x3 . |x − y| ¯ y = (y1 .1)) B= ∂2 1 ¯ ¯ 4π ∂ x i ∂ x j 2 (si s j ) t − |x − y| c0 δ(¯ ) d 3 y y . 1 p≈ ρ0 ¯ ¯ xi x j ∂2 2 2πc0 ∂t 2 ∞ −∞ (si s j ) t − (r 2 + ξ 2 ) 2 c0 1 dξ (r 2 + ξ 2) 2 3 . x so that the vortex sound source is equivalent to the quadrupole div(ω ∧ v) ≈ ∂2 (2 ¯ ¯ ∂xi ∂x j si (t)s j (t)δ(¯ )). where B ≈ p/ρ0 .f..7): ¯ −x j ∂ ∂ . Thus.2.2. In the acoustic far field. (5. r → ∞. where U = c0 . x The solution of the vortex sound equation (5. we use (1.5.2 The Equation of Vortex Sound The vorticity distribution is ω = k(δ(¯ − s) + δ(¯ + s)). The vortex convection velocities are v = ± k ∧ s(t) at ¯ x = ±s(t).2. x x 121 where k is a unit vector in the x3 direction.7) for this quadrupole source is (c. parallel to the vortices. ≈ 1 2 + (x − y )2 ) 2 ∂t ¯ ∂x j c0 (r 3 3 2 2 where r = (x1 + x2 ) 2 is the perpendicular distance from the centroid of the vortices (the x3 axis).

Taking the time . (5. therefore. introducing polar coordinates x = r (cos θ.122 In this formula (si s j )(t) = 2 5 Vortex Sound 2 1 + cos 2 t sin 2 t sin 2 t . sin θ) cos 2 [t] − sin 2 [t] − π . 1 − cos 2 t but the constant terms in the matrix can be omitted because of the time derivatives in (5.e.9) can now be performed by the approximate method described below in Example 2 in the limit that r/c0 → ∞.10) = −4 π ρ0 U 2 M 3/2 cos 2θ − 2 r r c0 π .9).9) becomes p≈ 3 −ρ0 2 π c0 2 π c0 r 1 2 cos 2θ − 2 t− t− r c0 + + π 4 r → ∞. in the limit in which the radial distance r greatly exceeds the acoustic wavelength ∞ −∞ (si s j ) t − 2 (r 2 + ξ 2 ) 2 c0 1 2 1 dξ (r 2 + ξ 2) 2 π 4 π 4 3 ≈ 2r 2 π c0 r cos 2 [t] − sin 2 [t] − sin 2 [t] − −cos 2 [t] − π 4 π 4 .2. The sound power must now be calculated by considering the integral p2 dS ρ0 c0 over the surface of a large circular cylinder r = constant.2. ¯ where [t] = t − r/c0 . c0 (5. 4 √ The amplitude of the sound decreases like 1/ r (instead of 1/r ) because the waves are spreading cylindrically in two dimensions. Hence.2. 4 sin 2 [t] − π 4 −cos 2 [t] − π 4 cos θ sin θ 1 2 2 cos 2θ − 2 [t] + and. i. sin θ) we find 2 ¯ ¯ xi x j 2r 2 2 π c0 r π c0 r π c0 r 1 2 1 2 cos 2 [t] − sin 2 [t] − π 4 π 4 sin 2 [t] − −cos 2 [t] − π 4 π 4 π 4 π 4 ij = = 2 2 (cos θ.2. The integration in (5..

then I ≡ ∞ f −∞ ξ r eiκ0 √ r 2 +ξ 2 dξ = r ∞ −∞ f (µ)eiκ0 r √ 1+µ2 dµ.11). 5. Thus. and the main contribution to the integral is from the neighborhood of that value of µ where the oscillations are stationary. f (µ) can be replaced by f (0). π κ0r → ∞. r c0 → ∞. (5. 1 2 e4.2. iπ (r 2 + ξ 2 ) 2 cos 2 t− − i sin 2 c0 −∞ √2 2 ∞ dξ i2 r +ξ = e−2i t e c0 3 2 + ξ 2) 2 (r −∞ ≈ 1 r2 πc0 r 1 2 ∞ 1 (r 2 + ξ 2 ) 2 t− c0 1 dξ (r 2 + ξ 2) 2 3 e −i [2 (t − r ) c0 − π] 4 . we can show that the acoustic power per unit length of the vortices ∼ ρ0 U 3 M 4 . . In particular. and √ 2 2 eiκ0 r 1+µ ≈ eiκ0 r +iκ0 r µ /2 .2. As κ0r → ∞ the exponential factor oscillates increasingly rapidly.2 The Equation of Vortex Sound 123 average. I =r ∞ −∞ f (µ)eiκ0 r 2π κ0 r √ 1+µ2 dµ ≈ r f (0)eiκ0 r ∞ −∞ eiκ0 r µ /2 dµ 2 = r f (0)eiκ0 r which yields (5.5 Example 2 Show that ∞ f −∞ ξ r eiκ0 √ r 2 +ξ 2 dξ ≈ r f (0) 2π κ0 r 1 2 ei (κ0 r + 4 ) . In the first approximation. The integrand is therefore expanded about this point.2. This occurs at µ = 0.11) Put ξ = µr . This differs by a factor of the Mach number M from the power radiated by a compact body of three-dimensional turbulence. and is characteristic of the acoustic power produced by two-dimensional regions of turbulence in an unbounded fluid.5.

5.1). 4 3 3 ≈ ∞ 1 r2 sin 2 π c0 r cos 2 π 4 −∞ (r 2 + ξ 2 ) 2 t− c0 π c0 r 1 2 ≈ 1 r2 sin 2 t− 5.2. ∞ 5 Vortex Sound cos 2 −∞ t− 1 2 (r 2 + ξ 2 ) 2 c0 t− 1 1 dξ (r 2 r c0 + ξ 2) 2 − dξ (r 2 r c0 + ξ 2) 2 − π . Multiply equation (5.7) by H ≡ H ( f ) and Fig. 5.3 Vortex–Surface Interaction Noise The small Mach number vortex sound equation (5. such that f (x) > 0 according as x lies without or within S+ . The development here is analogous to the derivation in Section 2. The body is assumed < to be within S+ . and S+ will subsequently be allowed to shrink down to coincide with the body surface S.2. Introduce a stationary.124 Hence.1.7) is now applied to determine the sound generated by vorticity in the neighborhood of a fixed body whose surface S may be vibrating at small amplitude (Fig.3. . closed control surface S+ on which f (x) = 0.3.3 of Curle’s equation.

3) ∂v + ν curl ω ∂t ∂v + ν div(∇ H ∧ ω).3.2) The sources on the right of this equation are either concentrated on the control surface S+ or lie in the fluid outside S+ .5). When x lies in the exterior region these surface terms take account of the presence of the solid body inside S+ . (5.1 the fluid occupies the region V outside the surface S of the solid body.5. y. if the body is absent (so that S+ is filled with fluid). Using Crocco’s equation (4. The source terms involving ∇ H are concentrated on the control surface. ∂t (5.7) becomes 1 ∂2 − ∇ 2 (H B) = −div(B ∇ H ) − ∇ H · (∇ B + ω ∧ v) + div(H ω ∧ v). We use the transformations H ∇ 2 B ≡ H div (∇ B) = div(H ∇ B) − ∇ H · ∇ B = ∇ 2 (H B) − div(B∇ H ) − ∇ H · ∇ B. the control surface S+ ( f (x) = 0) therefore lies within V .3. (5.3 Vortex–Surface Interaction Noise 125 form the inhomogeneous wave equation for the new variable H B.2. In Fig.3. the surface sources constitute a representation ‘to the outside world’ in f > 0 of the various hydrodynamic or acoustic processes that may be occurring within S+ . including the region within S+ where H B ≡ 0. The solution in this region can therefore be found by using any Green’s function G(x. and H div(ω ∧ v) = div(H ω ∧ v) − ∇ H · ω ∧ v. they completely determine B outside this control surface.3. where G = 0 2 c0 ∂t 2 for t < τ for x and y anywhere within the fluid. t − τ ) that satisfies 1 ∂2 − ∇ 2 G = δ(x − y)δ(t − τ ). 2 c0 ∂t 2 This equation is formally valid everywhere.2. . we can make the substitution ∇ H · (∇ B + ω ∧ v) = −∇ H · ≡ −∇ H · Hence the vortex sound equation becomes 1 ∂2 ∂v − ∇ 2 (H B) = −div(B∇ H ) + ∇ H · 2 ∂t 2 ∂t c0 + div(H ω ∧ v) − ν div(∇ H ∧ ω).1) (5. Then. 5.

t) = ∞ −∞ V G(x. which is understood to vary over the range −∞ < τ < ∞.4) H ( f (y))(ω ∧ v)(y. Let us illustrate the procedure for the first term in the brace brackets of the integrand G{−div(B∇ H )} d 3 y = − V V {div(G B∇ H ) − B∇G · ∇ H } d 3 y G B∇ H · dS + B∇G · ∇ H d 3 y V = S+ = 0+ S+ B∇G · dS B(y. ∂y where for brevity we have omitted the integration sign for τ . y. . There are no contributions from S and because ∇ H = 0 everywhere except on S+ . y. t − τ ) + G(x. for points x within the fluid the solution of (5. y. ∂ yn ≡ S+ where all vector operators are with respect to the y dependence. Those involving ∇ H vanish except on the control surface S+ .3. and is a large. closed ‘surface at infinity’ where ω = 0. The general solution in the region f > 0 outside S+ accordingly becomes B(x.3). where all of the source terms within the brace brackets are functions of y and τ . τ ) − V ∂vn ∂G (y. y. t − τ ) · dS(y) dτ. y.3. t − τ ) −div(B∇ H ) + ∇ H · ∂v + div(H ω ∧ v) ∂τ − ν div(∇ H ∧ ω) d 3 y dτ. t) = S+ B(y. The divergence terms are removed by application of the divergence theorem. t − τ ) ∂ yn ∂τ ∂G (x.3) is H B(x. τ ) ∂G (x.126 5 Vortex Sound Thus. τ ) · ω(y. τ ) ∧ S+ +ν ∂G (x. t − τ ) d S(y). and then using the formula (·)∇ H d 3 y = V S+ (·) dS (see Section 2. t − τ ) d 3 y dτ ∂y (5. τ ) dS(y) dτ (x. y.

5. it should also be noted that the reciprocal theorem implies that the normal derivative conditions ∂G (x. recall that the control surface S+ was taken to be fixed in space. When S+ shrinks down to S the implication is that S is also fixed in space. are always satisfied simultaneously. In connection with this. the normal velocity vn can still be nonzero if the surface of the body is vibrating at small amplitude. Green’s function takes full account of the influence of the body on the efficiency with which these sources generate sound. t − τ ) = 0 ∂ xn respectively for y.3.3. y. where is the characteristic length scale of the turbulence or body and v is a typical velocity. The contribution to the sound from surface friction (the first surface integral on the right of (5. t) = − V (ω ∧ v)(y.4) vanishes). t) by p(x. The second.5)) is nominally of order 1 Re 1.8. ν relative to the contribution from the volume vorticity (the first integral). ∂ yn ∂G (x. ∂y ∂τ S ∂G where (x. and in the important case in which the body does not vibrate the acoustic far . surface integral involving the surface vorticity is the contribution from frictional forces on S. t)/ρ0 .3 Vortex–Surface Interaction Noise 127 We now choose G to have vanishing normal derivative on the surface S of the body. x on S. Re = v . y. and the general solution in the fluid becomes B(x. t − τ ) (y. τ ) S ∧ ∂G ∂vn (x.5) ∂ yn In the acoustic far field (|x| → ∞) we can replace B(x. y. To interpret the final term. τ ) · ∂G (x. When this is done the control surface S+ is allowed to shrink down onto S (whereupon the first term in the first integral of (5. t − τ ) = 0. t − τ ) = 0 on S. At high Reynolds numbers the surface term can therefore be discarded. y. y. t − τ ) d 3 y dτ + ν ∂y ω(y.3. y. (5. This means that fluid can flow through the surface. t − τ ) · dS(y) dτ + G(x. However. and this term in the solution is actually identical with that given previously in (3.2) for a vibrating body in the absence of vortex sources. τ ) dS(y) dτ. The first integral represents the production of sound by vortex sources distributed within the fluid.

4 Radiation from an Acoustically Compact Body When the surface S is acoustically compact the compact Green’s function (3. where the prime denotes differentiation with respect to t.5).128 field is then given by p (x.5) and performing the integrations with respect to τ . When |x| → ∞ and the origin is within or close to S. t) = − ρ0 5 Vortex Sound (ω ∧ v)(y. In this case. τ ) · V ∂G (x. We shall. The first term in this approximation. we find in the acoustic far field (where B = p/ρ0 ) p(x.8 by expanding Green’s function to first order in the retarded time across S: G(x. clearly makes no contribution to the first two integrals in (5. ∂y (5.3. therefore.9. therefore. y. t − τ ) = ≈ |X − Y| 1 δ t −τ − 4π |X − Y| c0 |x| 1 δ t −τ − 4π |x| c0 + xjYj δ 4πc0 |x|2 t −τ − |x| . which is independent of y. Substituting into (5. ∂t where the large square brackets ([ ]) denote that the enclosed quantity is to be evaluated at the retarded time t − |x|/c0 . It makes a contribution to the final surface integral only if the volume of the body is pulsating. . in particular we shall assume that S vibrates as a rigid body. When this happens the resulting monopole radiation from the body is usually large compared to all other sources.5) in the far field. c0 |x| → ∞. we proceed as already described in Section 3. t) ≈ −ρ0 x j ∂ 4π c0 |x|2 ∂t − S (ω ∧ v) · ∇Y j d 3 y − ν S ω ∧ ∇Y j · dS(y) (5. t − τ ) d 3 y dτ.4.1) can be used to evaluate the general solution (5. ignore this possibility. the first approximation in the Green’s function expansion can again be discarded.3.6) 5.1) ∂Un Y j d S(y) . and consider only surface vibrations for which the volume of S is constant. and Un is the normal component of velocity of vibration of S.3.3. y.

dt Reference to Equation (4.4 Radiation from an Acoustically Compact Body 129 When the body executes translational oscillations at velocity U(t) we have Un = Ui n i . and Mi j is the added mass tensor of the body (see (3.4.2) (respectively the first and second integrals) for turbulence of length scale and velocity v are estimated respectively by ρ0 v 2 M |x| and ρ0 v 2 M 1 v .3) where F(t) is the unsteady force exerted on the fluid by the body. c0 |x| → ∞.5. This is just our earlier conclusion (2.4. where n i is the ith component of the surface normal directed into the fluid. in high Reynolds number turbulent flows the surface frictional contribution to the dipole force F can usually be neglected.4.4. Then ρ0 S ∂Un dUi Y j d S = ρ0 ∂t dt S (n i y j − n i ϕ ∗ ) d S j dUi .4) shows that this can also be written p(x.2) derived from Curle’s equation. For a nonvibrating compact body the principal component of the acoustic pressure in the far field is therefore .1) can therefore be written p(x.6)).2) − (m 0 δi j + Mi j ) dUi . The relative contributions from the volume and surface distributions of vorticity in (5. and is equivalent to the solution (3.8. dt = (m 0 δi j + Mi j ) where if the body has volume .4. t) ≈ −x j ∂ ρ0 4πc0 |x|2 ∂t (ω ∧ v) · ∇Y j d 3 y − η S ω ∧ ∇Y j · dS(y) (5. The solution (5. with the addition of the fluid-displacement effect of the vibrating body.10) obtained in the absence of vorticity.4. then m 0 = ρ0 is the mass of fluid displaced by the body.8. t) ≈ xj ∂ Fj 4πc0 |x|2 ∂t t− |x| c0 + m 0 x j ∂ 2U j 4π c0 |x|2 ∂t 2 t− |x| . (5. |x| Re ν Thus. Re = .

3. To do this we first write the Kirchhoff vector in the form Y = Y⊥ + ky3 . t − τ ) = ≈ |X − Y| 1 δ t −τ − 4π |X − Y| c0 |x − ky3 | 1 δ t −τ − 4π |x − ky3 | c0 + ≈ x j Y⊥ j δ 4π c0 |x − ky3 |2 t −τ − |x − ky3 | c0 |x − ky3 | 1 δ t −τ − 4π |x| c0 + x j Y⊥ j δ 4π c0 |x|2 t −τ − |x − ky3 | . when a stationary cylindrical body interacts with high Reynolds number flow at low Mach number. |x| → ∞.3). c0 (5. Then. Y⊥ = (Y1 (y).2) can be discarded as before. the compact Green’s function in (5.4. |x| → ∞. |x| → ∞. t) ≈ −ρ0 x j ∂ 4πc0 |x|2 ∂t (ω ∧ v) y.6.3) The sound is produced by dipole sources orientated in the lift and drag directions . Y2 (y). (5. 0).5. the monopole term in (5. If the vorticity extends over an extensive spanwise section of the body it may be important to account for differences in the retarded times of the sound produced at different spanwise positions. t − |x| · ∇Y j (y) d 3 y. and the acoustic pressure given by (5.5 Radiation from Cylindrical Bodies of Compact Cross Section An important special case occurs when vorticity interacts with a cylindrical (or approximately cylindrical) surface S of compact cross section (such as the strip airfoil of Fig.1) where k is a unit vector in the x3 direction. t − |x − ky3 | · ∇Y⊥ j (y) d 3 y.6) is expanded as follows: G(x. because variations in the spanwise source position are not necessarily small compared to the acoustic wavelength.5.4) 5. c0 (5.3. 3.5.5. t) ≈ −ρ0 x j ∂ 4π c0 |x|2 ∂t 5 Vortex Sound (ω ∧ v) y. y.2) For example.6) becomes p(x.130 given by p(x. c0 (5.

t − Equation (4.2) ρ0 x j ∂ 2 I j 4πc0 |x|2 ∂t 2 ρ0 x j ∂ 2 8πc0 |x|2 ∂t 2 (y ∧ ω) j y. |x| → ∞ c0 |x| d 3 y.3. including the bound vorticity on S.1). t) d 3 y.2) is the generalized vorticity.4) and (1.9)). where is the length scale of the interaction region (the body). Indeed.2) is valid only for a body in translational motion whereas (5. (5. It is the velocity potential of a hydrodynamic dipole that will be recognized as the acoustic near field of an outgoing acoustic dipole representing sound production by the flow (see Equations (1.6 Impulse Theory of Vortex Sound An interesting formula for the sound generated by vorticity near a compact body can be derived directly from the representation (4.5. t) ≈ −ρ0 ≈ = ∂ ∂x j 1 ∂Ij (t − |x|/c0 ) 4π |x| ∂t t− |x| . 2).4.6. (5.7.6.2) involving the Kirchhoff vector. This approximation is applicable also to a thin airfoil of large but finite span. t) = div I(t) 4π |x| where I(t) = 1 2 y ∧ ω(y. t) defines the incompressible motion in the irrotational region far from the body.3).1). where bound vorticity occurs only in the surface integral of the frictional contribution to the sound.7. that ω in (5. But.6. t) = −ρ0 ∂ϕ/∂t. and ϕ(x. Note.1. 4.4.1) This expression for ϕ(x. .2) is applicable for a body executing any combination of translations and rotations (Fig. 5.6.6.1) by I(t − |x|/c0 ).3) of the velocity v(x. and this procedure therefore leads to the following formula for the sound in terms of the vorticity: p(x.1) shows that this is equivalent to the compact approximation (5. t) ≈ ∇ϕ when |x| . This should be contrasted with the representation (5. c0 (5. and in cases where the chord of the airfoil is a slowly varying function of y3 (such as the elliptic airfoil of Fig. 3. t) in the hydrodynamic far field in terms of the impulse I(t).4. The acoustic dipole is found simply by replacing I(t) in (5.4. however.6 Impulse Theory of Vortex Sound 131 only ( j = 1.9. At large distances from the body (where the undisturbed fluid is stationary) the pressure p(x. v(x.

132 5 Vortex Sound The impulse I is constant for vorticity in an unbounded fluid (when compressibility is ignored). namely p(x. analogous to the first order moment in (5. M¨ hring (1978) has shown that it is also possible to express the quadrupole o sound as a third-order time derivative of a second-order moment of the vorticity.6.6). |x| → ∞. v2 ) = − 1 r (sin θ + sin(θ − t/2). Kirchhoff’s spinning vortex: A columnar vortex parallel to the x3 axis has elliptic cross section defined by the polar equation r = a{1 + cos(2θ − t/2)}.6. (5. j = 1. − cos θ + cos(θ − t/2)). 2 ∂ xi ∂ x j . The ellipse rotates at angular velocity 1 . t) ≈ ρ0 x i x j ∂ 3 2 12πc0 |x|3 ∂t 3 yi (y ∧ ω) j (y. We know that the sound is now generated by quadrupole sources and that it can be represented in terms of the vorticity as in (5. where 1 and is the uniform vorticity in the core. and the velocity distribution within the core 4 is given by v = (v1 . i. t − |x|/c0 ) d 3 y.2) (see Problems 5).1. 2 Show that to first order in the vortex is equivalent to the two-dimensional quadrupole div(ω ∧ v) ≈ ∂2 (Ti j δ(x1 )δ(x2 )).3) Problems 5 1.

Show that p≈ ρ0 (3 cos2 2 8c0 |x| − 1) ∂2 ∂t 2 n Xn n 2 d Rn . Coaxial vortex rings: Use Equation (5.2. |x| → ∞. and iθ is a unit vector in the azimuthal direction. incompressible fluid conservation of energy and momentum implies that n Rn n Rn d Xn d Rn − Xn dt dt ρ0 (3 cos2 2 12c0 |x| 2 n Rn X n .Problems 5 where Ti j = π 8 2 4 133 a cos( t/2) sin( t/2) sin( t/2) −cos( t/2) π . Use these equations to show that p≈ where S(t) = n − 1) d3 S . = constant.7) to calculate the sound produced by the unsteady motions of an acoustically compact system of N vortex rings coaxial with the x1 axis. dt where is the angle between the observer direction and the positive x1 axis and the term in square braces is evaluated at τ = t − |x|/c0 . dt 3 |x| → ∞. n 2 n Rn = constant. θ. where U = 1 a and M = U/c0 . x1 ) are cylindrical polar coordinates. . Rn (t) being the vortex ring radius. X n (t) its location in the x1 direction. 2 2. 4 and that the acoustic pressure is p≈− 8 2πa ρ0 U 2 M 3/2 cos 2θ − r 2 t− r c0 + r c0 → ∞. where (r. In an ideal. Take the vorticity of the nth vortex to be ω n = n δ(x1 − X n (t))δ(r − Rn (t))iθ .

1.3) for the acoustic pressure generated by a o compact region of vorticity in an unbounded fluid. show that p≈ = ρ0 R 2 (3 cos2 − 1) d 3 X 2 dt 3 12c0 |x| ρ0 U 2 M 2 R(3 cos2 − 1) 8π 3 |x| . coaxial with the x1 axis. 2b R. – can be derived by integrating the three-dimensional Green’s function 1 |x − y| δ t −τ − 4π |x − y| c0 over −∞ < y3 < ∞. .134 5 Vortex Sound 3.1. where R is the mean radius of the ring. Assume that the x1 coordinate X (t) of the vorticity centroid satisfies dX 16R 1 3(a − b) = cos 2 t . M= 4. c0 = π(a + b)2 . whose core has elliptic cross section of major and minor axes 2a. ln − + dt 4π R a+b 4 2(a + b) In the notation of Question 2. |x| → ∞ . Derive M¨ hring’s formula (5.7) permits the second integral on the right to be discarded. and use the identity y ∧ curl A = 2A + ∇(y · A) − ∂ (y j A) ∂yj to deduce that the integral in (5. 2 The result now follows by noting that the estimate (5.6) can be written yi (ω ∧ v) j d 3 y = − 1 ∂ 3 ∂t 1 yi (y ∧ ω) j d 3 y + δi j 3 1 2 3 v d y. Calculate the sound produced by a vortex ring of total circulation .6. where G = 0 2 c0 ∂t 2 for t < τ. Take the cross product of y with the high Reynolds number vorticity equation ∂ω/∂t + curl (ω ∧ v) = 0 (expressed in terms of y and t as independent variables). multiply by yi . t− |x| c 0 a−b 2 |x| t− cos 2 a+b π(a + b) c0 where U = a+b . U . 5. The free space Green’s function in two dimensions – the solution of 1 ∂2 − ∇ 2 G = δ(x1 − y1 )δ(x2 − y2 )δ(t −τ ).

t − τ ) = H (t − τ − |x − y|/c0 ) 2 2π (t − τ )2 − (x − y)2 c0 135 . Use the result of Problem 6 to derive the Solution (5.Problems 5 Deduce that G(x. Show that yi (ω ∧ v) j dy1 dy2 ≈ − 1 ∂ 2 ∂t yi (y ∧ ω) j dy1 dy2 . t − τ ) ≈ H (t − τ − |x − y|/c0 ) . x = (x1 . Consider sound production by a compact distribution of vorticity in an unbounded two-dimensional flow (independent of x3 ).10) for the sound produced by a spinning vortex pair.2. τ ) dτ . Use the result of Problem 6 to solve Problem 1. 2. y2 ). √ t − τ − |x|/c0 |x| → ∞. where |x − y| ≈ c0 (t − τ ) G(x. x2 ). y. and that near the wavefront. where the vorticity ω is parallel to the k direction (the x3 axis). t) ≈ ρ0 xi x j ∂ 3 2 4πc0 |x|2 ∂t 3 ρ0 x i x j 2 4πc0 |x|2 t−|x|/c0 dy1 dy2 yi (y ∧ ω) j (y. 8. √ 2π 2|x − y|/c0 (t − τ ) − |x − y|/c0 √ 6. 7. where i. j = 1. Deduce M¨ hring’s (1980) two-dimensional representation o p(x. y = (y1 . τ ) dτ 2 (t − τ )2 − |x|2 c0 t−|x|/c0 −∞ ≈ c0 ∂ 3 2|x| ∂t 3 dy1 dy2 −∞ yi (y ∧ ω) j (y. y. .

1) by first determining a suitable representation of G in two dimensions. and the function G 2 will therefore satisfy the Green’s function equation 1 ∂2 − ∇ 2 G 2 = δ(x1 − y1 )δ(x2 − y2 )δ(t − τ ). Let G2 = ∞ −∞ G(x. y2 and τ . the integration with respect to the spanwise coordinate y3 involves only the Green’s function. t − τ ) d 3 y dτ ∂y (6. y.1. τ ) · V ∂G (x. y. Conditions are assumed to be uniform in the x3 direction. Also.2) For two-dimensional problems G is a function of y3 − x3 .1. (6.3) obtained by integrating the three-dimensional Equation (3. and may be performed prior to any further calculations of the sound. because (ω ∧ v)(y.1. t) = − ρ0 (ω ∧ v)(y.4) over −∞ < y3 < ∞. In two dimensions. so that only the y1 and y2 components of the gradient ∂G/∂y contribute to the integral. x2 = y2 . t − τ ) dy3 . parallel to the vorticity. Both the vorticity convection velocity v and the Lamb vector ω ∧ v are parallel to the x1 x2 plane.1 Compact Green’s Function in Two Dimensions In this chapter. (6.6) to determine sound produced by two-dimensional interactions of rectilinear vortices with a stationary solid boundary. We shall derive the two-dimensional analogue of the general solution p (x. τ ) depends only on y1 .1. 136 . G 2 represents the field generated by a uniform line source parallel to the x3 axis extending along the whole of the line x1 = y1 . we apply the general high Reynolds number solution (5. 2 c0 ∂t 2 where G 2 = 0 for t < τ.3.6 Vortex–Surface Interaction Noise in Two Dimensions 6.

2 = y1. We can therefore take G2 ≈ = ¯ x·Y 4π c0 ∞ −∞ δ ∞ t −τ − δ t −τ − |¯ |2 + ξ 2 x c0 (|¯ |2 x dξ + ξ 2)    ¯ x·Y ∂  H (t − τ − |¯ |/c0 ) x . and the corresponding two-dimensional compact Green’s function can be found by integrating over −∞ < y3 < ∞. Y1. + ξ 2) ¯ x·Y 4πc0 δ t −τ − |¯ |2 + ξ 2 x c0 Only the second term on the right depends on y and therefore contributes to the radiation integral (6. t − τ ) = |X − Y| 1 δ t −τ − .2 − ϕ1.1 Compact Green’s Function in Two Dimensions 137 Similarly. Y3 = y3 . the compact Green’s function for a cylindrical body (with generators parallel to x3 ) G(x. 4π |X − Y| c0 ∗ ∗ X 1.2 (x).1. is a function of y3 – x3 . x ¯ where x · Y = x1 Y1 + x2 Y2 is independent of ξ . we have G2 ≈ 1 4π ∞ −∞ δ t −τ − ¯ x·Y |¯ |2 + ξ 2 x + c0 c0 |¯ |2 + ξ 2 x dξ |¯ |2 + ξ 2 x as |¯ | → ∞. X 3 = x3 . x2 ) and let |¯ | = (x1 + x2 ) 2 → ∞.6. = 2π c0 ∂t  (t − τ ) c2 (t − τ )2 − |¯ |2  x 0 |¯ |2 + ξ 2 x dξ 2 + ξ 2) c0 (|¯ | x 0     ¯ x x · Y ∂  H (t − τ − |¯ |/c0 )  = √ x 2π c0 ∂t    (|¯ |2 + ξ 2 ) ∂ |¯ |2 +ξ 2  √ x 2 ∂ξ c 2 2 0 ¯ x·Y ∂ 2π c0 ∂t ξ= c0 (t−τ ) −|¯ | x . y.2 (y). 2 2 1 ¯ x Set ξ = y3 − x3 .1. To use this to evaluate (6.2 = x1.1) the δ function must be expanded to first order in Y G2 ≈ 1 4π + ∞ −∞ δ t −τ − ∞ −∞ |¯ |2 + ξ 2 x c0 dξ |¯ |2 + ξ 2 x (|¯ |2 x dξ .2 − ϕ1. Taking the origin of coordinates within the cylindrical body.1). x = (x1 .

and at a later time t sound is received from those source points whose distance from x is equal to c0 (t − τ ). c0 for t − τ ∼ |x| . (6. y. and therefore after a time delay |x|/c0 . and drop the overbar on x and the subscript 2 on G 2 and soforth.2) is handled by the two-dimensional version of the compact Green’s function (3.1.5) √ t − τ − |x|/c0 (see Question 1 of Problems 6). The special case of a cylindrical body adjacent to a plane.138 6 Vortex–Surface Interaction Noise in Two Dimensions We shall henceforth in this chapter regard all space vectors as two-dimen¯ sional.4) can be approximated further by expanding about the wavefront (where t −τ = |x|/c0 ). G has an infinite peak at the wavefront where t − τ − |x|/c0 = 0 followed by a slowly decaying tail.3). but the observer at x receives sound continuously after the passage of this wavefront.9. which contains most of the acoustic energy. The far-field representation (6. 2π c0 ∂t  (t − τ ) c2 (t − τ )2 − |x|2  0 (6. y2 ). |x| → ∞. t − τ ) ≈ . y. Just to the rear of the wavefront 2 (t − τ ) c0 (t − τ )2 − |x|2 ≡ (t − τ ) c0 (t − τ ) + |x| c0 (t − τ ) − |x| ≈ Therefore. 3. rigid wall at x2 = 0.6) . |x| → ∞. which is nonzero only on a spherically expanding wavefront. generated at more distant sections of the infinitely long line source. t −τ ) ≈ |x| 2|x| c0 (t − τ ) − |x|. such as x = (x1 . c0 ∂ x·Y √ 3 2π 2c0 |x| 2 ∂t H (t − τ − |x|/c0 ) .1. At any point x in the far field the first sound arrives from the nearest point on the line source of (6. the wavefront arrives at time τ + |x|/c0 . √ t − τ − |x|/c0 (6. (6. The dipole component of the two-dimensional compact Green’s function then becomes     x·Y ∂ H (t − τ − |x|/c0 ) G(x. after propagating along a ray perpendicular to the source over a distance equal to |x|. t − τ ) ≈ x1 Y1 ∂ √ 3 2 ∂t π 2c0 |x| H (t − τ − |x|/c0 ) . The procedure described above yields the following expression for the dipole component of the two-dimensional compact Green’s function G(x.4) In contrast to the three-dimensional Green’s function.1.1. |x| → ∞. y = (y1 .4) becomes G(x.1.1. y.3). or of a cylindrical wall cavity or projection from a wall (see Fig.9. x2 ).

y2 ) is the velocity potential of incompressible flow past the cylinder in a direction parallel to the wall (with unit speed at large distances from the body). In these two-dimensional problems the vorticity ω is directed along the x3 axis.2 Sound Generated by a Line Vortex Interacting with a Cylindrical Body The sound produced by two-dimensional vortex motion at low Mach number M ∼ v/c0 near a stationary.5) of the cylinder in the absence of the wall.1.1) (ω ∧ v · ∇Y j )(y.2 Sound Generated by a Line Vortex 139 where Y1 ≡ Y1 (y1 .5).2. and the effect of the wall is to generate an equal image dipole that just doubles the magnitude of the sound relative to the corresponding dipole (6.4. |x| → ∞. p(x. The acoustic pressure is determined by the two-dimensional version of (6. dt If the motion elsewhere is irrotational.1) using the compact Green’s function (6.2) where F j is the force per unit length of the cylinder exerted on the fluid in the j direction.6. τ ) dy1 dy2 . Let k be a unit vector in this direction and consider a line vortex of strength whose position and translational velocity are x = x0 (t). viz.2.2. we have ω = kδ(x − x0 (t)) . 6. out of the plane of the paper in Fig. this can also be written p(x. According to the inviscid form of the Formula (4. 6.4) applied to a stationary body. t) ≈ xj ∂ √ 3 2π 2c0 |x| 2 ∂t t−|x|/c0 −∞ F j (τ ) dτ .1. G represents the field of a dipole orientated parallel to the wall and perpendicular to the cylinder axis. √ t − τ − |x|/c0 (6.1. rigid cylindrical body of diameter has characteristic wavelength ∼ /M . |x| → ∞. v= dx0 (t).1 and parallel to the generators of the cylinder. t) ≈ −ρ0 x j ∂ √ 3 2π 2c0 |x| 2 ∂t × t−|x|/c0 −∞ √ dτ t − τ − |x|/c0 (6.

2. dt (6.4) 6.1) yields the following general formula for the acoustic pressure as |x| → ∞: p(x. so that ω ∧ v = k ∧ vδ(x − x0 (t)) ≡ k ∧ dx0 (t)δ(x − x0 (t)). Let the cylinder have radius a.1. the vortex will traverse the circular orbit discussed in Section 4.2.140 6 Vortex–Surface Interaction Noise in Two Dimensions Fig. Then.6 (Example 2). t) ≈ = −ρ0 x j ∂ √ 3 2π 2c0 |x| 2 ∂t −ρ0 x j ∂ √ 3 2π 2c0 |x| 2 ∂t t−|x|/c0 −∞ t−|x|/c0 −∞ k∧ dx0 dτ (τ ) · ∇Y j (x0 (τ )) √ dτ t − τ − |x|/c0 √ x0 (τ ) d x01 ∂Y j d x02 ∂Y j − dτ ∂ y2 dτ ∂ y1 dτ .3) and (6. 6.1 Example 1: Sound Produced by Vortex Motion near a Circular Cylinder Assume there is no mean flow. If > 0 the vortex moves in the . and let the vortex strength be sufficiently small for the local motion to be considered incompressible.2.2.2. and take the coordinate origin at the centre of the cylinder. the vortex path have radius r0 . t − τ − |x|/c0 (6.

4) becomes p(x.8) when r is replaced by r0 .2 at the speed given by (4. t) ≈ x j r0 ∂ ρ0 √ 3 2π 2c0 |x| 2 ∂t t−|x|/c0 −∞ ∂Y j dτ (x0 (τ )) √ . and k∧ dx0 = dt k ∧ (k ∧ x0 ) = − x0 .2.6. − a2 .5) √ 2 2 where r = y1 + y2 is the radial distance from the cylinder axis.2.1 supplies the components of the two-dimensional Kirchhoff vector for the cylinder: Y1 = cos ϑ r + a2 r .2. 6.6. Table 3. 6.2.2. ∂r t − τ − |x|/c0 (6.2 Sound Generated by a Line Vortex 141 Fig. (6. 2 2 2πr0 r0 − a 2 x0 = r0 (cos t. Y2 = sin ϑ r + a2 r . clockwise direction in Fig. . v= = dx0 (t) = dt k ∧ x0 (t).9. Then. sin t). Therefore.

2. the acoustic amplitude has the doublelobed directivity pattern illustrated in Fig.6) where U = | |r0 is the vortex speed. The increased amplitude in two dimensions is a consequence of the infinite extent of the vortex source parallel to the cylinder. sin θ) we find so that xj ∂Y j a2 (x0 (τ )) = |x| 1 − 2 ∂r r0 cos(θ − τ ).1b for a dipole. The reader can confirm that the instantaneous force exerted on the fluid by the cylinder lies in the direction of the vector x0 (t) . 1. √ The acoustic waves decay like 1/ |x| with distance. sin ϑ). by introducing polar coordinates for x x = |x|(cos θ. At any particular retarded time t −|x|/c0 . which is appropriate for energy spreading two dimensionally in cylindrically diverging waves. Thus. t) ≈ ρ0 r0 1 2 2π (2c0 |x|) 1− a2 2 r0 ∂ ∂t t−|x|/c0 −∞ cos(θ − τ ) dτ . the peaks of these lobes at a fixed distance |x| from the cylinder rotate in the clockwise direction at angular velocity | | following the orbiting vortex. t) ≈ ρ0 | | 2 r0 2(2π c0 |x|) 2 1 2 3 1− a2 2 r0 2 sin θ − a2 1− 2 r0 2 t− |x| π − c0 4 t− |x| π − c0 4 .5) becomes p(x. which is smaller by √ a factor M when M 1. √ t − τ − |x|/c0 Hence. y2 ) = r (cos ϑ. In three dimensions the pressure would be proportional to ρ0 U 2 M.7. xj ∂Y j a2 = |x| 1 − 2 ∂r r cos(θ − ϑ) and (6. and √ have the characteristic dipole amplitude proportional to ρ0 U 2 M.2. (6.142 6 Vortex–Surface Interaction Noise in Two Dimensions where (y1 . using the formula t−|x|/c0 −∞ cos(θ − τ ) dτ = √ t − τ − |x|/c0 π | | 1 2 cos θ − t− |x| π − c0 4 the pressure becomes p(x. but with a phase lag of π/4 radians. = ρ0 U √ M πr0 r0 2|x| a sin θ − |x| → ∞. Because < 0.

2. 4. (6. |x| → ∞. The wavelength is therefore of order r0 r0 × c0 = v M r0 for M = v c0 1.2 Example 2: Sound Produced by Vortex Motion near a Half-Plane (Crighton 1972) The trajectory of a line vortex of strength interacting with a rigid half-plane is shown in Fig. θ0 ) the characteristic frequency ∼v/r0 . (6. This is applicable when the distance r0 from the edge of the source at (y1 . Thus.6. 6. t) ≈ −ρ0 sin(θ/2) √ π |x| ×δ t − τ − = k∧ dx0 (τ ) · ∇ϕ ∗ (y)δ(y − x0 (τ )) dτ |x| dy1 dy2 dτ c0 |x| → ∞.8) −ρ0 sin(θ/2) dx0 · ∇ϕ ∗ .2. where v is the vortex translational velocity.1. sin θ). the coordinates being defined as in Fig. For a line vortex at (r0 . y. which can be written G 1 (x.2.6.2 Sound Generated by a Line Vortex 143 joining the center of the cylinder to the vortex. adopting the notation of (6. k∧ √ dt π |x| where on the second line the term in the square brackets is evaluated at the retarded position x0 (t − |x|/c0 ) of the vortex.9). we find p(x. The radiation peak therefore also lags by π/4 the peak in the retarded surface force.2.7)). 6. δ t −τ − √ c0 π |x| √ ϕ ∗ (y) = r0 sin(θ0 /2). y2 ) = r0 (cos θ0 . 4.9. sin θ0 ) is much smaller than the acoustic wavelength. Now ϕ ∗ is the velocity potential of an ideal flow around the edge of the half-plane in the anticlockwise sense (with streamlines as in Fig.2.3).2.2 for ideal motion at low Mach number. so that low Mach number motion is sufficient to ensure that the wavelength of the sound is much larger than the vortex distance from the edge. The sound generated by the vortex is calculated using the two-dimensional compact Green’s function (3.7) where x = |x|(cos θ.2. It is .6.1) in two dimensions (Green’s function being given by (6. t − τ ) ≈ sin(θ/2)ϕ ∗ (y) |x| .3) and applying (6.

where ϕ ∗ and the stream function ψ ∗ satisfy the Cauchy–Riemann equations (see Section 4.5) ∂ψ ∗ ∂ϕ ∗ = . . 6.144 6 Vortex–Surface Interaction Noise in Two Dimensions Fig.2. dt dt dt dt The acoustic pressure can therefore be put in the form p(x.2.3. and therefore that dx0 dx0 dx0 dx0 k∧ · ∇ϕ ∗ = − ∧ k · ∇ϕ ∗ = − · k ∧ ∇ϕ ∗ = − · ∇ψ ∗ . ∂ y2 ∂ y1 where [Dψ ∗ /Dt] is evaluated at the retarded position of the vortex. the real part of the complex potential √ w = ϕ ∗ + iψ ∗ = −i z.9) ∂ϕ ∗ ∂ψ ∗ =− . |x| → ∞. t) ≈ ρ0 sin(θ/2) dx0 ρ0 sin(θ/2) · ∇ψ ∗ ≡ √ √ dt π |x| π |x| Dψ ∗ . z = y1 + i y2 . ∂ y1 ∂ y2 A simple calculation shows that k ∧ ∇ϕ ∗ = ∇ψ ∗ . Dt (6.

|x| → ∞.3).6. where r0 .4. t−|x|/c0 where is the distance of closest approach of the vortex to the edge (where it crosses the x1 axis at time t = 0 in Fig.2. θ0 1 dr0 Dψ ∗ =− √ cos Dt 2 r0 dt 2 √ r0 θ0 sin + 2 2 dθ0 . 4.9) to form a qualitative picture of the influence of vortex shedding on sound generation. 6. Performing the calculations we find (see Fig. 6. the actual edge-generated sound depends on the rate at which the trajectory of the vortex cuts across the streamlines of this ideal edge flow. 6.4) ρ0 2 p(x.2. The stream function ψ ∗ is constant on each of the parabolic streamlines of the ideal flow around the edge defined by ϕ ∗ (Fig. dt . t) ≈ (4π )2 1 2 |x| sin θ 2 t/8π 2 [1 + ( t/8π 2 )2 ]5/4 .2. A vortex that translated along one of these streamlines would be silent. θ0 are given by (4.7) (in which r is replaced by r0 and θ by θ0 ).6. 6. This is found as follows √ θ0 ψ ∗ = − r0 cos 2 Therefore.6.2).3 Influence of Vortex Shedding We can use Equation (6. Let the circulation of the vortex in .2.3 Influence of Vortex Shedding 145 Fig.

146

6 Vortex–Surface Interaction Noise in Two Dimensions

Fig. 6.2.3 be in the indicated anticlockwise sense, so that fluid near the edge is induced to flow in a clockwise direction around the edge, as implied by the dashed curve in the figure. When the Reynolds number is large, inertial forces actually cause the flow to separate from the edge, resulting in the release of vorticity of opposite sign from the edge into the wake. Let us assume for simplicity that this shed vorticity rolls up into a concentrated core of strength s . Equation (6.2.9) then supplies the following prediction for the net acoustic pressure p(x, t) ≈ ρ0 sin(θ/2) √ π |x| Dψ ∗ Dt + Dψ ∗ Dt , |x| → ∞,
s

s

where the derivatives are evaluated at the retarded positions of and s respectively. Both vortices translate across the curves ψ ∗ = constant in the direction of decreasing ψ ∗ , and the derivatives therefore have the same sign. Hence, because and s have opposite signs, sound produced by the shed vortex will tend to cancel the edge-generated sound attributable to the incident vortex alone. This conclusion is applicable to a wide range of fluid–structure interactions. A typical interaction involves a bounded region of vorticity, called a ‘gust,’ swept along in a nominally steady mean flow. The localized velocity field of the gust is determined by the Biot–Savart formula (4.3.1). At high mean flow speeds it is sometimes permissible to neglect changes in the relative configuration of the vorticity distribution during its convection past an observation point, the vorticity is then said to be frozen (at least temporarily) and the induced velocity is steady in a frame translating with the gust. If the mean flow carries the gust past the surface S of a stationary body, the free field induced velocity determined by the Biot–Savart integral is said to produce an upwash velocity on S; the actual velocity consists of the upwash velocity augmented by the velocity field required to satisfy the no-slip condition on S. (In an ideal fluid only the normal component of the upwash velocity is cancelled on S.) When a gust convects past a stationary airfoil the high Reynolds number surface force (responsible for the sound) is given by (see (4.4.4)) Fi = −ρ0
V

∇Yi (y) · (ω ∧ v)(y, t) d 3 y,

Yi = yi − ϕi∗ (y).

(6.3.1)

The vector ∇Yi is the velocity of an ideal flow past the airfoil that has unit speed in the i direction at large distances from the airfoil. It is singular (or very large) at the edges of the airfoil. These singularities have the following significance, when the vorticity length scale is small compared to the airfoil chord the

6.3 Influence of Vortex Shedding

147

principal contribution to the integral is from vorticity in the neighborhoods of the singularities. For example, for the strip airfoil of Fig. 3.6.3 Y2 = Re(−i z 2 − a 2 ), z = y1 + i y2 ,

and ∇Y2 becomes infinite at the leading and trailing edges z = ∓a. An incident, small-scale gust convecting in the y1 direction in a mean flow at speed U would in practice induce shedding from the trailing edge at z = a. When this shedding is ignored the force calculated from (6.3.1) has two principal components, respectively from gust elements near the leading and trailing edges. To calculate the overall force, however, it is necessary to include the contribution from the shed vorticity, which affects the motion only near the trailing edge when the length scale of the wake vorticity is small. In the linearized treatment of this case (discussed in more detail below), when both the gust and wake vorticity are taken to convect at the same mean velocity U , it is known from unsteady aerodynamics that the force component produced by the wake is equal and opposite to that generated by the gust at the trailing edge (Sears 1941). The effect of this cancellation can be approximated without calculating any details of the shed vorticity. This is accomplished by formally deleting the trailing edge singularity from ∇Y2 , and then ignoring the contribution to the integral (6.3.1) from the shed vorticity. To understand this observe that, because the value of the integral is dominated by vorticity near the edges, it is only the behaviors of Y2 near these edges that must be retained in the integrand, and Y2 can therefore be replaced by the leading order terms in its expansions about the edges. For the strip airfoil of Fig. 3.6.3, we would write √ √ √ √ √ √ Y2 = Re(−i z − a z + a) ∼ Re( 2a z + a) + Re(−i 2a z − a). (6.3.2) The last term is singular at the trailing edge; it is deleted and the following approximation is used in (6.3.1) with the wake vorticity ignored: √ √ Y2 ∼ Re( 2a z + a), where the branch cut for z = +∞. √ (6.3.3)

z + a is taken along the real axis from z = −a to

6.3.1 Example: Surface Force Produced by a Periodic Gust To illustrate the procedure consider incompressible flow parallel to the airfoil of Fig. 6.3.1 at speed U in the x1 direction, in which a time harmonic vortex

148

6 Vortex–Surface Interaction Noise in Two Dimensions

Fig. 6.3.1.

sheet of vorticity ω I = γ kδ(x2 − h)e−iω(t−x1 /U ) , h > 0, ω > 0,

is convected past the airfoil at perpendicular distance h, where γ is the circulation per unit length of the sheet. The vortex sheet can be regarded as an elementary model of a periodic wake behind a small diameter circular cylinder upstream of the airfoil. The gust upwash velocity induces the shedding of vorticity ω S from the trailing edge of the airfoil. When the reduced frequency ωa/U is large the hydrodynamic wavelength 2πU/ω of the gust and wake is much smaller than the airfoil chord, and the surface force is produced primarily by the gust interaction with the leading edge at x1 = −a. The net force F2 (per unit span) on the fluid in the x2 direction can therefore be calculated from (6.3.1) by setting ω = ω I , where ω I ∧ v = γ U jδ(x2 − h)e−iω(t−x1 /U ) , (j being a unit vector in the x2 direction) and by replacing Y2 by the right-hand side of (6.3.3): F2 = −ρ0 γ U
∞ −∞

∂Y2 (y)δ(y2 − h)e−iω(t−y1 /U ) dy1 dy2 ∂ y2

≈ −ρ0 γ U 2a = −ρ0 γ U a

Re
−∞
1 2

i 2 y1 + i h + a √

e−iω(t−y1 /U ) dy1 (6.3.4)

πU 2iωa

e−ωh/U −iω(t+a/U ) .

The force can also be calculated exactly from linearized thin airfoil theory with proper account taken of vortex shedding. This is the gust loading problem

6.3 Influence of Vortex Shedding

149

of classical aerodynamics (Sears 1941). The linear theory wake is treated as a vortex sheet downstream of the edge, whose elements convect at the mean stream velocity U. The strength of the vortex sheet is determined by imposing the Kutta condition that the pressure (and velocity) should be finite at the edge (Crighton 1985). For arbitrary values of the reduced frequency ωa/U it is found that F2 = πiρ0 γ U aS ωa −ωh/U −iωt e , U (6.3.5)

where S(x) is the Sears function, which is defined in terms of the Hankel (1) (1) functions H0 and H1 by S(x) = 2 πx
(1) H0 (x) (1) + i H1 (x)

.

(6.3.6)

In the limit of high reduced frequency S ωa ∼ U iU 2π ωa
1 2

e−iωa/U ,

and the substitution of this into (6.3.5) yields the prediction (6.3.4) determined by the leading edge singularity of Y2 . The plots in Fig. 6.3.2 of the real and imaginary parts of S(ωa/U ) and its asymptotic limit show that the approximation (6.3.4) and the exact value (6.3.5) of the surface force agree when ωa/U > 1.

Fig. 6.3.2.

h that is. A line vortex of strength parallel to the airfoil span convects at the mean flow velocity at a constant distance h above the airfoil (Fig. Suppose the vortex passes above the midchord of the airfoil at time t = 0. when no account is taken of vortex shedding.4.4 Blade–Vortex Interaction Noise in Two Dimensions A rigid. This is the approximation of linearized thin airfoil theory.1) v = U i.4. 6. Let us first consider the potential flow interaction of the vortex and airfoil. two-dimensional airfoil of chord 2a occupies −a < x1 < a. x2 = 0 in the presence of a uniform mean stream at speed U in the positive x1 direction.4. which is assumed to consist of a vortex sheet stretching along the x1 axis from x1 = a to x1 = +∞. when the influence on the vortex trajectory of the induced velocity (∼ / h) of image vortices in the body of the airfoil is negligible. because it requires vorticity shed there to be swept over the rigid surface of the airfoil on which it cannot influence the force because ω ∧ v · ∇Y2 ≡ 0. .1. The acoustic pressure Fig. which is applicable when U.1). 6. then ω = kδ(x1 − U t)δ(x2 − h).150 6 Vortex–Surface Interaction Noise in Two Dimensions Linear theory does not permit the corresponding force component at the leading edge to be removed by vorticity production at the edge. ω ∧ v = U jδ(x1 − U t)δ(x2 − h). 6. As the vortex passes the airfoil new vorticity is shed from the trailing edge into the airfoil wake. (6. Hence. where i and j are unit vectors in the x1 and x2 directions.

so that (6.2) t−|x|/c0 −∞ where = cos−1 (x2 /|x|) is the angle between the radiation direction x and the normal to the airfoil (the x2 axis). z = y1 + i y2 . The radiation produced when a vortex passes very close to the airfoil (so that h a) is likely to be particularly intense. Thus.4 Blade–Vortex Interaction Noise in Two Dimensions generated when the wake is ignored is given by (6. the characteristic frequency ω∼ U h and the reduced frequency ωa a ∼ U h 1. and calculate their individual contributions by using the local approximation (6. and (6. We may therefore regard the leading and trailing edges as independent sources of sound. h) √ . 151 Thus.4. The sound can be attributed to a dipole source orientated in the x2 direction. ∇Y1 = i and ω ∧ v · ∇Y1 ≡ 0. Y2 = Re (−i z 2 − a 2 ). The dominant interactions occur as the vortex passes the edges. make the substitution µ = .3. t) ≈ = −ρ0 U x2 ∂ √ 3 2π 2c0 |x| 2 ∂t −ρ0 U cos ∂ √ 1 2π 2c0 |x| 2 ∂t t−|x|/c0 −∞ ∂Y2 dτ (U τ.2. h) √ .6. ∂ y2 t − τ − |x|/c0 ∂Y2 dτ (U τ.2.1) reduces to p(x. (6. produced at the leading edge (x1 = −a) we take √ √ Y2 ∼ Re ( 2a z + a). |x| → ∞.4.2). t − τ − |x|/c0 √ t − τ − |x|/c0 and To evaluate the integral. where the time scales of the motions ∼h/U .1) with Y1 = y1 . For the acoustic pressure pLE . say.2) becomes −ρ0 U cos ∂ ≈ √ 1 2π 2c0 |x| 2 ∂t ×√ t−|x|/c0 pLE Re −∞ √ i 2a 2(U τ + i h + a) 2 1 dτ . ∂ y2 t − τ − |x|/c0 |x| → ∞.

The corresponding nondimensional pressure signature √ 1 a 2 ρ0 U M cos pLE 4πa |x| is plotted in Fig. The pressure field Fig. Then. (6. pLE −ρ0 U cos ≈ √ 2π c0 ρ0 U 2 cos = √ 4π c0 a |x| a |x| 1 2 1 2 ∂ ∂t ∞ ∞ Re 0 i (U [t] + i h + a − U µ2 ) 2 i 3 1 dµ Re 0 (U [t] + i h + a − U µ2 ) 2 where dµ.3) where M = U/c0 .2 as the solid curve when h/a = 0. c0 [t] = t − The additional substitution µ = 1/ξ transforms the integrand into an exact differential.152 6 Vortex–Surface Interaction Noise in Two Dimensions perform the differentiation with respect to time. leading finally to pLE ≈ a 2 ρ0 U 2 cos √ 4π c0 |x| √ ρ0 U M cos a = 4πa |x| 1 ∞ Re 0 1 2 iξ [(U [t] + i h + a)ξ 2 − U ] 2 U [t] a 3 dξ +1 2 U [t] a +1 + h 2 a . |x| → ∞. . 6.4. |x| .2.4.2. 6.4.

4. say.4. To determine pTE the calculation described above for pLE is repeated after setting √ √ Y2 = Re(−i 2a z − a) in (6. at high reduced frequencies the sound pressure pTE . . (6. with characteristic frequency ω ∼ U/ h.4) This is large at the retarded times during which the vortex is close to the trailing edge. generated by the potential flow interaction of the vortex with the trailing edge is cancelled by that produced by the wake vorticity.6. According to Section 6. even though they are produced by the vortex interacting with geometrically identical airfoil edges.4.2 is therefore representative of the whole of the radiation produced by the blade–vortex interaction. 6. 6. The leading and trailing edge generated components pLE and pTE have different waveforms.2.2) determines the acoustic pressure at the retarded time [t] in terms of interactions between the vortex and the airfoil at all earlier retarded times.4.4. according to which.3. when the contribution from the wake is ignored (which is equal and opposite to pTE ) the overall acoustic pressure signature is given nondimensionally by ( pLE + pTE ) ρ0 U √ M cos 4πa a |x| 1 2 . Thus. leading to pTE ≈ −ρ0 U cos √ 4π c0 ×√ a |x| 1 2 ∂ ∂t t−|x|/c0 Re −∞ 1 (U τ + i h − a) 2 1 dτ t − τ − |x|/c0 √ −ρ0 U M cos = 4πa a |x| 1 2 h a U [t] a −1 2 + h 2 a . additional contributions to the sound continue to be received indefinitely in time from more distant parts of the source. after the first arrival of sound from the nearest point on the source. the solid curve in Fig.4 Blade–Vortex Interaction Noise in Two Dimensions 153 is generated predominantly as the vortex passes the leading edge of the airfoil at the retarded time [t] = − a/U .2). it is a further consequence of the two-dimensional character of the acoustic sources. which is plotted as the broken line curve in Fig. This is because the integral in (6. |x| → ∞.

−∞ < x3 < ∞. −∞ < x3 < ∞ in fluid at rest at infinity. 3. examine the production of sound for different values of the nondimensional parameter /U h. A line vortex of strength is parallel to a rigid airfoil occupying −a < x1 < a.1. Starting from the formula G≈ ¯ x·Y ∂ 2π c0 ∂t ∞ 0 δ t −τ − |¯ |2 + ξ 2 x c0 dξ . in the presence of a mean flow at speed U in the x1 direction. Investigate the production of sound by the low Mach number motion of a line vortex of strength that is parallel to a rigid circular cylinder of radius a whose axis coincides with the x3 coordinate axis (c. Example 2). Assume that there is no net circulation around the cylinder. There is no net circulation around the airfoil.f. When U / h. The vortex is in periodic motion around the airfoil under the influence of image vortices in the absence of a mean circulation around the airfoil. (|¯ |2 + ξ 2 ) x derive the far-field approximation (6. 4. x2 = 0.11). A line vortex of strength is parallel to a rigid airfoil occupying −a < x1 < a. and show that it can be attributed to two dipole sources orientated in the x1 and x2 directions. Section 4. The vortex is initially far upstream of the airfoil at a vertical stand-off distance h above the plane of the airfoil. If the motion occurs at very small Mach number. and applying Formula (5.2. 2. Explain the significance of these sources in terms of the corresponding components of the unsteady force between the fluid and airfoil. Calculate the sound produced when the motion occurs at a very small Mach number. estimate the influence on the sound of vortex shedding from the trailing edge of the airfoil. calculate the sound produced when the vortex passes the airfoil for different values of the nondimensional velocity ratio /U h.6. If the vortex is initially far upstream of the cylinder at a distance h from the x1 axis. .5) for the dipole component of the two-dimensional compact Green’s function by writing δ t −τ − |¯ |2 + ξ 2 x c0 1 = 2π ∞ e −∞ −iω(t−τ − √ |¯ |2 +ξ 2 x c0 ) dω.. x2 = 0.154 6 Vortex–Surface Interaction Noise in Two Dimensions Problems 6 1. and that there is a mean flow past the cylinder which has speed U in the x1 direction when |x1 | a.

Discuss the forces exerted on the barrier by the flow. . There is a low Mach number mean potential flow over the barrier that has speed U parallel to the wall at large distances from the barrier.Problems 6 155 5. thin rigid barrier of length d at right angles to a plane wall at x2 = 0. If the distance of the vortex from the wall is h when the vortex is far upstream of the barrier. A line vortex of strength traverses a path of the kind illustrated in the figure past a two-dimensional. Explain what happens when /h U . calculate the sound produced as the vortex passes the barrier for different values of /U h. and how they contribute to the radiation.

and the airfoil regarded as a rigid lamina in the plane x2 = 0. and the angle of attack. The Mach number M = U/c0 is sufficiently small that convection of sound by the flow can be ignored.1). 2 c0 ∂t 2 (7. twist. homentropic flow past a stationary rigid airfoil (Fig.5) becomes 1 ∂2 − ∇ 2 B = div(ω ∧ U).1.7 Problems in Three Dimensions 7. or as tip vortices responsible for the mean lift. either in response to excitation by the gust. by requiring the gust-induced velocity. When convection of sound by the flow is neglected. quadrupoles are neglected and vorticity convects as a frozen pattern of vortex filaments at the undisturbed mean stream velocity U = (U. with x3 along the span and x2 vertically upward. thickness. only the gust vorticity and additional vorticity shed when the gust encounters the airfoil contribute to the acoustic radiation to first order. and the perturbation velocities caused by airfoil thickness. the linearized form of the vortex sound equation (5.1 Linear Theory of Vortex–Airfoil Interaction Noise Consider an inhomogeneous field of vorticity. 0). The undisturbed flow has speed U in the x1 direction. camber. The vortex sound source div(ω∧v) includes vorticity in the gust together with any vorticity shed from the airfoil. the wake vorticity is confined to a vortex sheet downstream of the trailing edge. to be small. When div(ω ∧ v) is expanded about the undisturbed mean flow.1. 0. In this approximation. In particular. The problem can be linearized by assuming that u U . a gust. camber. convected in high Reynolds number. and angle of attack may ignored. where curl u = ω.1) 156 . and the airfoil chord can be assumed to be acoustically compact. 7.2. twist. In other words. that is. where the origin is at a convenient point within the airfoil.

t) ≈− ρ0 (ω ∧ U)(y. and the Kirchhoff vector Y by Y1 = y1 .1. |x| → ∞. t) = p(x.3) where = cos−1 (x2 /|x|) is the angle between the radiation direction and the normal to the airfoil. Equation (5. t − τ ) d 3 y dτ . with solution B(x. high Reynolds number frozen gust ω(x−Ut) ≡ ω(x1 −U t.1 Linear Theory of Vortex–Airfoil Interaction Noise 157 Fig.4. y. x3 ) is swept past the airfoil of Fig.2) where ∂G/∂ y2 = 0 on both sides (y2 = ±0) of the projection of the airfoil planform onto the y1 . At sufficiently small Mach numbers G may be approximated by Green’s function for an airfoil of compact chord. with both the leading and trailing edges at right angles to the mean flow (so that ∂Y2 /∂ y3 ∂Y2 /∂ y2 ). ∂y (7. and the origin is taken in the airfoil within the interaction region.1. τ ) · ∂G (x. |x| → ∞.4. Thus.4) reduces to ∂ ∂t ω3 ∂Y2 ∂Y2 − ω2 ∂ y2 ∂ y3 d 3 y.7. x2 . because p(x.1. t) ≈ ∗ Y2 = y2 − ϕ2 (y). t−|x|/c0 −ρ0 U cos 4πc0 |x| (7. The planform in the interaction . ω d 3 y ≡ 0. y3 plane. Y3 = y3 .1.1. 7.4) with the convection velocity v replaced by U. Let the interaction occur at an inboard location where the chord may be regarded as constant. 7. The sound produced when a localized.1 is therefore given by (5.

t) ≈ −ρ0 U cos 4π c0 |x| ∂ ∂t ω3 ∂Y2 ∂ y2 d 3 y. 7.1. ∂ y2 where −F2 is the unsteady airfoil lift during the interaction when the motion is regarded as incompressible. Let the vortex have circulation and be orientated with its axis in the direction of the unit vector n. such that 2a is equal to the local chord of the airfoil. c0 (7.1. |x| → ∞.158 7 Problems in Three Dimensions Fig.1. 7. and the vorticity ω3 includes contributions from the impinging gust together with any shed into the vortex sheet wake.2. t) ≈ ∂ F2 cos 4πc0 |x| ∂t t− |x| . According to Equation (5.3) (in which dU j /dt = 0 for a stationary airfoil). 7. t−|x|/c0 (7. (7.9. Then. Any point x on the vortex can then be represented in the parametric .1. Choose the origin on the airfoil midchord such that the axis of the vortex passes through the origin at time t = 0.4.2) for constant a ≡ a(y3 ).5) F2 (t) = −ρ0 U ω3 (y. |x| → ∞. t) ∂Y2 (y) d 3 y. as indicated in Fig.2 Blade–Vortex Interactions in Three Dimensions The calculations can be performed explicitly for a gust in the form of a rectilinear line vortex.4) which reveals that only the spanwise component of vorticity contributes to the production of sound.2.2. 7. The mean flow speed is sufficiently large that the vortex can be assumed to maintain its rectilinear form after being cut by the leading edge of the airfoil.1. and Y2 can be approximated as in (3.2. region is then locally the same as that of the two-dimensional airfoil of Fig.3) becomes p(x. this result can also be expressed in the form p(x.

0 < φ < 2π. 0) + sn. The influence of the shed vorticity can be formally included by the procedure described in Sections 6. by recalling the Relation (7.2 it will be seen that the last line of (7.1 define the orientation of the unit vector n = (sin θ cos φ.1) where s is distance measured along the vortex from its point of intersection with the plane of the airfoil.4) becomes √ i 2a −n 3 ρ0 U cos ∂ p(x. t) ≈ Re δ(s⊥ ) √ d 2 s⊥ ds 4πc0 |x| ∂t 2 y1 + i y2 + a = = = −n 3 ρ0 U cos √ 4 2πc0 |x| n 3 ρ0 U 2 cos √ 8 2π c0 |x| −n 3 ρ0 U 2 cos √ 4 2πc0 |x| √ i a ∂ Re ds √ ∂t U [t] + s(n 1 + in 2 ) + a −∞ √ ∞ i a Re ds 3 −∞ (U [t] + s(n 1 + in 2 ) + a) 2 √ i a Re 1 (U [t] + s(n 1 + in 2 ) + a) 2 (n 1 + in 2 ) ∞ t−|x|/c0 ∞ . φ in Figure 7.2. with the branch cut for the square root taken along the z axis from z = −a to z = +∞. Because of vortex shedding from the trailing edge. z = y1 + i y2 . where the polar angles θ.2) where [t] = t − |x|/c0 is the retarded time. . Thus.2.4 by expanding Y2 about its singularity at the leading edge.2.2) is zero when U [t] + a < 0.7. −∞ (7.2. 0 < θ < π. by setting √ √ Y2 ∼ Re( 2a z + a). −∞ < s < ∞. ω = nδ(s⊥ ). sin θ sin φ.2. 159 (7. 0. By referring to Fig. cos θ).1).2 Blade–Vortex Interactions in Three Dimensions form x = (U t. Equation (7.3 and 6.2.1. Then. most of the sound is generated when the vortex is cut by the leading edge. 7. that is. if s⊥ denotes vector distance measured in the normal direction from the vortex axis.

the acoustic pressure is found . π R2 2 as a function of distance s⊥ from the vortex axis.2. At later times the integration along the vortex axis over the infinite range −∞ < s < ∞ must be split.2.2. (7. If. say.3. The waveform is illustrated by the dotted curve in Fig. the acoustic pressure becomes p(x. +0 < s < ∞.3) The pressure pulse accordingly begins with a singular peak at the instant at which the vortex is severed by the leading edge of the airfoil at the retarded time U [t]/a = −1. because the square root in the last line of (7. t) ≈ ρ0 U M cos 2 π |x| 3 2 |sinφ| H tan θ U [t] a U [t] a +1 +1 . for example. for example. when n 2 > 0 the square root is real and positive on the upper surface (s = +0) and real and negative at s = −0.2) is discontinuous across the airfoil. the vorticity is assumed to be distributed according to the Gaussian formula ω(x) = ne−(s⊥ /R) . which is a plot of |sinφ| H p(x. 7. before the vortex is cut by the leading edge of the airfoil. t) = 3 U M cos /|x|) 2 π tan θ 2 U [t] a U [t] a +1 +1 (ρ0 for θ = 85◦ . The infinite singularity in the pressure is absent for a vortex of nonzero core radius R. 7.2.2. into the two parts −∞ < s < −0. φ = 90◦ . Hence.160 7 Problems in Three Dimensions Fig. as indicated in the figure.

α= 2a| sin φ| R U [t] a +1 . and I± 1 are modified Bessel functions of the first kind. t) | sin φ| 2 ≈ U M cos /|x|) 8 tan θ 3 (ρ0 a πR 1 2 (α). when vortex shedding is ignored).e. for R a. The large negative peak produced as the vortex crosses the trailing edge (at U [t]/a = 1) is cancelled by an equal and opposite contribution generated by the wake.. (7.2.2.3. It is an odd function of the retarded time [t].2 Blade–Vortex Interactions in Three Dimensions 161 Fig. The broken-line curve in Fig. and differs negligibly from the line vortex prediction when U [t]/a > −1.2.4) for R = 0.2. The reader can easily show that. 7. |x| → ∞. The pressure signature 4 predicted by (7.2. θ = 85◦ . to be given by (Howe 1998a) p(x. 7.4) where (α) = |α| 2 I− 1 4 1 α2 8 + sgn(α)I 1 4 α2 8 e−α 2 /8 .1a. φ = 90◦ is plotted as the solid curve in Fig. when the finite size of the vortex core is .3.3 represents the pressure signature produced by the potential flow interaction between the finite core vortex and airfoil (i.7. 7.

3.1.9.3. The mean velocity at flow which is in the x1 direction at speed U for |x| x can therefore be written U = U ∇ X 1 (x).1) where X 1 (x) is the x1 component of the Kirchhoff vector for the sphere. 7.1) X i = xi 1 + a3 . dt ∂ x2 ∂ X1 d x3 =U (x). as illustrated in Fig. The part of the vortex that passes close to the sphere must evidently be deformed to pass around the sphere. however. more a) are unaffected and remain parallel to the distant parts of the vortex (at |x3 | x3 direction during the whole of the interaction. to include the influence of vortex shedding in a satisfactory manner.2) Suppose a line vortex of strength is initially far upstream of the sphere and parallel to the x3 axis at a distance h above the plane x2 = 0. dt ∂ x3 . To illustrate the procedure. It is not generally possible. The vortex is convected toward the sphere by the mean flow. which has the general form (Table 3.162 7 Problems in Three Dimensions ignored. which shows the motion in the plane x3 = 0. t) ≈ − ρ0 U M cos 2 2 π |x| 3 U [t] |sinφ| H 1 − a . the potential flow. 2|x|3 (7. consider a rigid sphere of radius a with center at the coordinate origin in the presence of a low Mach number irrotational mean a. trailing edge generated pressure pulse is given by p(x. dt ∂ x1 ∂ X1 d x2 =U (x).3. (7. The shape of the vortex at time t is determined by the solution of the equations ∂ X1 d x1 =U (x). by assuming that each element of the vortex core is convected along a streamline of the steady undisturbed mean flow at the local mean velocity. tan θ [t] 1 − Ua 7.3 Sound Produced by Vortex Motion near a Sphere The sound generated when a nominally rectilinear vortex is swept past a compact rigid body can also be treated in a linearized fashion. except perhaps for streamlined body shapes that are amenable to treatment by the strip theory of unsteady aerodynamics. the vortex element initially on x3 = 0 remains on this plane of symmetry as it convects past the sphere along a mean streamline. The shape of the distorted vortex will be symmetric with respect to the mid-plane x3 = 0.

dT ¯2 ¯2 ¯2 2 x1 + x2 + x3 2 ¯ ¯ ¯ −3x1 x3 d x3 = dT 2 ¯ ¯2 ¯2 2 x1 + x2 + x3 5 2 ¯ ¯ ¯ −3x1 x2 d x2 = dT ¯2 ¯2 ¯2 2 x1 + x2 + x3 5 2 .6) by starting the integration at T = −10. 0 where x3 is the initial spanwise location of the vortex element.3 Sound Produced by Vortex Motion near a Sphere 163 Fig.1. . say. by the Runge–Kutta method described in Section 4. x2 = h. These are solved (for example. 0 x3 = x3 t → −∞. for each element of the vortex. If the undistorted parts of the vortex (at |x3 | a) are assumed to convect across the plane x1 = 0 at time t = 0. a ¯ ¯n x3 = x3 at T = −10. . 7.3. ¯ x2 = h . a ¯ x= x . In terms of the nondimensional variables T = Ut . It can be safely assumed that the sphere has no perceptible influence on vortex elements initially located ¯ ¯ at |x3 | > 10.7. and N is a suitably large integer. 0 ≤ n ≤ N . ¯n where x3 = 10n/N . Because the motion is symmetric about x3 = 0 the solutions are required only for the N + 1 vortex elements with respective the initial positions ¯ x1 = T . these equations are to be integrated subject to the initial conditions x1 = U t. a the equations of motion of a point on the vortex are found to be ¯ ¯2 ¯2 ¯2 d x1 x2 + x3 − 2x1 = 1+ 5 .

2. In reality. 7. |x| → ∞. t − |x| c0 · ∇Y j (y) d 3 y. Figure 7. The distortion of the vortex first becomes evident at about T = −2. and by viscous diffusion of vorticity from the vortex and from the surface of the sphere.4. The sound generated during this potential flow interaction can be calculated using the Formula (5. The hairpin loop is formed because the translation velocities of vortex elements close to the sphere are small in the neighborhood of the stagnation points just in front and just to the rear of the sphere. t) ≈ −ρ0 x j ∂ 4πc0 |x|2 ∂t (ω ∧ v) y.2. the accelerated motion over the upper surface of the sphere is insufficient to counteract the formation of the loop.3. of course. none of which is accounted for in the present calculation. the motion would be strongly influenced by large self-induced velocities. (7. by image vorticity in the sphere.3.164 7 Problems in Three Dimensions Fig.2 illustrates successive calculated positions of the vortex with increasing values of the time T = U t/a for the case h/a = 0.3. .3) where v = U ∇Y1 (y).4) when the sphere is compact: p(x.

s⊥ is the vector distance measured in the normal direction from the local axis of the vortex.3 Sound Produced by Vortex Motion near a Sphere 165 There is no unsteady drag contribution to (7. they illustrate how the sound level decreases as the initial standoff distance h of the vortex increases relative to the radius a of the sphere. ¯ s= s .5) is divergent. and therefore there will be no contribution from j = 3. d 3 y = d 2 s⊥ ds.3. suitable for numerical evaluation. ˆ Now the integral in (7.4) where = cos−1 (x2 /|x|) is the angle between the observer direction x and the x2 axis.5) where the integrand is evaluated at the retarded position of the distorted vortex. write s ω = δ(s⊥ )ˆ. The integral (7. because the contributions ¯ at larger values of s are the same for all retarded times. c0 (7. there can be no net side-force on the sphere because of the symmetric form of the vortex. the interaction produces an unsteady lift force in this direction which is responsible for the sound. Typical plots of the calculated nondimensional pressure (7. To evaluate the integral. The infinite ¯ contributions to the integral from large values of s are equal at successive retarded locations of the vortex. ∂ p(x.7. 7.3 for two values of h/a.5) are shown in Fig.3. The integral can therefore be evaluated numerically by restricting the range ¯ of integration to a finite interval.3.3.3) from j = 1 because ω ∧ ∇Y1 · ∇Y1 ≡ 0.3. say. −10 < s < 10. that is. however. ˆ where s is a unit vector locally parallel to ω. and disappear on differentiation with respect to T . . t) =− U M cos /4π |x| ∂T ∞ −∞ ρ0 ¯ s [ˆ · ∇Y1 ∧ ∇Y2 ] d s. Similarly.3. t) ≈ −ρ0 U cos 4πc0 |x| ∂ ∂t (ω · ∇Y1 ∧ ∇Y2 ) y. and give no contribution to the sound when differentiated.4) can then be cast in the following nondimensional form. but a consequence of the formal operations used in the application of the compact Green’s function. The sound is accordingly produced by a dipole source orientated in the x2 direction. t − |x| d 3 y. and s is distance measured along the vortex in the direction of ω. c0 (7. The divergence is not real. |x| → ∞. a M= U . because s · ∇Y1 ∧ ∇Y2 → 1 as ¯ s → ± ∞.3. which has the representation p(x.

Their effects become pronounced when the train speed U exceeds Fig. 7.3. 7. most of which flows over the train and out of the tunnel portal. In a long tunnel the compression wavefront can experience nonlinear steepening that is ultimately manifested as a loud.4.4. 7. In addition inaudible low-frequency pressure fluctuations called infrasound (at frequencies ∼10–20 Hz) are radiated from the tunnel portal into the open air when the train enters and leaves the tunnel. impulsive bang or ‘crack’ (called a micro-pressure wave) radiating out of the distant tunnel exit.166 7 Problems in Three Dimensions Fig. All of these waves are indicated schematically in Fig. 7.4 Compression Wave Generated When a Train Enters a Tunnel A train entering a tunnel pushes aside the stationary air.3.1. . but the build-up of pressure just ahead of the train propagates into the tunnel as a compression wave at the speed of sound.1.

7. to ensure that flow separation does not occur. ¯ and speed of sound in the air respectively by p .4 Compression Wave Generated When a Train Enters a Tunnel 167 Fig.2). The aspect ratio h/L of the nose is taken to be sufficiently small. circular cylindrical duct of radius R and cross-sectional area A = π R 2 (Fig. Denote the pressure. and the blockage A0 /A ≤ 0.2. Let the train be travelling at constant speed U in the negative x1 direction. ρ 0 .4.5) D Dt 1 D c2 Dt − 1 1 ∇· (ρ∇) B = div(ρω ∧ v). In this . about 200 km/h (125 mi/h). 7.2.4. with B ≈ p/ρ0 ≡ ( p − p0 )/ρ0 .4. ρ and c. where the origin O is at the center of the tunnel entrance plane. so that the x1 axis coincides with the axis of the tunnel. In practice the Mach number M = U/c0 does not exceed 0. density. the air flow may be regarded as homentropic. when in particular the micro-pressure wave and the infrasound can cause vibrations and annoying structural rattles in neighboring buildings.2. If heat transfer and frictional losses are neglected during the initial stages of wave formation. and the compression wave can be calculated using the vortex sound equation (5. The formation of the compression wave can be studied in terms of the simpler problem involving an axisymmetric train entering axisymmetrically a semiinfinite.1) The air in the compression wave region ahead of the train may be regarded as ¯ linearly perturbed from its mean state. The cross section of the train is assumed to become uniform with constant area A 0 = π h 2 at a distance L from the nose of the train. They vary with position and time within the tunnel. where h is the uniform maximum train radius. c0 . 7. ρ ρ (7. and their corresponding undisturbed values are p 0 .4. and the train profile sufficiently streamlined.

3). The two terms on the right-hand side involving ∇ H respectively represent monopole and dipole sources distributed over the moving surface f (x1 + U t.4. ∂t ∂t ρ ρ where U = (−U.4.2). 0. Thus.4.2) 1 1 div(Hρω ∧ v) − (∇ B + ω ∧ v) · ∇ H − div(ρ B∇ H ). multiply (7.3. if the nonlinear terms on the left of (7.2) (which affect the propagation of the compression wave) are also ignored. the equation finally reduces to ∂ 1 ∂2 (U · ∇ H ) + div (v U · ∇ H ) − ∇ 2 (H B) = 2 ∂t 2 ∂t c0 − div p 1 + v 2 ∇ H + div(H ω ∧ v).168 7 Problems in Three Dimensions simple model the vorticity ω vanishes everywhere except within the outer shear layer of the exit flow of the air displaced when the train enters the tunnel (see Fig. (7. ρ0 2 where the relation ∂ H ( f )/∂t = −U · ∇ H ( f ) has been used. and the source approximated further by ∂ (U · ∇ H ) + div (v U · ∇ H ) − div ∂t p 1 + v 2 ∇ H + div(H ω ∧ v). with f < 0 inside S (in the region occupied by the train) and f > 0 outside.4. 0). When frictional losses are neglected Crocco’s equation (4. x2 . and the influence of the train on its surroundings can be represented in terms of monopole and dipole sources on S.2. x2 . The compressibility of the air adjacent to S and within the very low Mach number exterior flow from the tunnel portal can be neglected when M(A 0 /A)2 1 (Howe et al. x3 ) = 0.3) ρ0 2 . In the usual way. so that the source terms can be written 1 1 ∂ ∂H (U · ∇ H ) − v · ∇ − div (ρ B∇ H ) + div(Hρω ∧ v). ρ ρ This is a generalization of Equation (5. Let f ≡ f (x1 + U t.4.1) by H ≡ H ( f ) and rearrange (noting that D H/Dt = 0) to obtain D Dt = 1 D c2 Dt − 1 ∇ · (ρ∇) (H B) ρ (7. 7. x3 ) = 0 be a control surface S contained within the fluid that just encloses the moving train. 2000). The surface is fixed relative to the train.5) reduces to ∂v/∂t = −∇ B − ω ∧ v.

7. √ 2 2 To do this. consider a system of cylindrical coordinates in which r = x2 + x3 is the perpendicular distance from the axis of the train.3. The control surface equation f (x1 + U t.3) by ∂ ∂ (U · ∇ H ) (x.1 Linear Theory When the blockage A 0 /A is small it is sufficient to retain only the first monopole source on the right-hand side of Equation (7. x3 ) = 0 can be written r = f¯(x1 + U t). we can collapse the monopole source distribution over the surface of the train into a line source concentrated on its axis.4 Compression Wave Generated When a Train Enters a Tunnel 169 Fig. 7. This source can be simplified when the aspect ratio h/L 1 by introducing a slender body approximation.4.4.3) the rate at which air is displaced by a section of the train of length d x1 is ∂ f¯ (x1 + U t) d x1 U 2π f¯(x1 + U t) d f¯(x1 + U t) = U 2π f¯(x1 + U t) ∂ x1 ∂AT ≡U (x1 + U t) d x1 . x2 . ∂ x1 Thus. 7. ∂ x1 When h/L 1. t) ≈ ∂t ∂t U ∂AT (x1 + U t)δ(x2 )δ(x3 ) . where AT (s) = π f¯2 (s) is the cross-sectional area of the train at distance s from the nose.4.4. As the train moves (to the left in Fig.3).4. and the nose is assumed to cross the tunnel entrance plane (x1 = 0) at t = 0. ∂ x1 . 7. and approximate the monopole on the right-hand side of Equation (7. U ∂AT (x1 + U t) = monopole source strength per unit length of the train.

0) + U [t])} dy1 .5) where the prime on AT denotes differentiation with respect to the argument. before the onset of nonlinear steepening. y1 .13) for a duct entrance G(x. 0.4. so that the characteristic thickness of the wavefront ∼R/M R.170 7 Problems in Three Dimensions The source strength is proportional to the rate at which the train cross section changes with distance along the train. This occurs over a time ∼R/U .4.9. at x within the tunnel. . ∂ x1 (7. (7. t − τ ) ≈ c0 |ϕ ∗ (x) − ϕ ∗ (y)| H t −τ − 2A c0 −H t −τ + ϕ ∗ (x) + ϕ ∗ (y) c0 .4. during and just after tunnel entry. as the train nose enters the tunnel. 0. The monopole in this equation does not depend on time when viewed in a reference frame moving at the uniform subsonic speed U of the train. and is nonzero only in the vicinity of the train nose (and also the tail). The corresponding approximation of Equation (7. Question 4 of Problems 1 when q0 (t) = constant). and [t] = t + (x1 − )/c0 is the effective retarded time. 0.4. ahead of the train where B = p/ρ0 . we have p≡ p t+ = ρ0 U c0 2A x1 c0 ∞ −∞ ≈ ρ0 ∂ ∂t ∞ U −∞ ∂AT (y1 + U τ )G(x. Thus. t − τ ) dy1 dτ ∂ y1 {AT (y1 − Mϕ ∗ (y1 . 0. Because nonlinear propagation terms have been ignored. y.4) can therefore be solved by using the compact Green’s function (3. It is therefore applicable within the region several tunnel diameters ahead of the train. The compression wave is produced when the near field of the source interacts with the tunnel portal. where ϕ ∗ (x) is the velocity potential of a uniform incompressible flow out of the tunnel portal that has unit speed far inside the tunnel (see (3. 0) + U [t]) − AT (y1 + Mϕ ∗ (y1 .9. this approximation determines the initial form of the compression wave profile.4) where B → p/ρ0 in the linear acoustic region ahead of the train.f.14)). The source therefore creates only a nonacoustic near field when travelling within the tunnel or in free space far from the tunnel entrance (c. Equation (7..3) is therefore ∂ 1 ∂2 − ∇ 2 (H B) = 2 ∂t 2 ∂t c0 U ∂AT (x1 + U t)δ(x2 )δ(x3 ) .

4.5) (see Equation (3. 0) dy1 . s ≥ L. and may be calculated by temporarily considering a train of semi-infinite length. The train nose profiles include the cone. (1993) to investigate the compression wave.7.5) is small.4 illustrates schematically an experimental arrangement used by Maeda et al. by expanding to first order in Mϕ ∗ and integrating by parts.5) are from the vicinities of the nose and tail of the train. to be p= ρ0 U 2 A0 . and the projection speed U ≈ 230 km/h (M ≈ 0. that p≈ ρ0 U 2 A ∞ −∞ ∂AT ∂ϕ ∗ (y1 + U [t]) (y1 . 1. 0.2.4.147 m.7) This extrapolation of the linear theory to finite values of M turns out to be applicable for M < 0.4. The data points in the figure are measurements (made at the point labelled T) of the pressure gradient d p/dt 1 m from the entrance for these three different . and (7. with no restriction on Mach number. and the paraboloid and ellipsoid of revolution.4 (Howe et al.4. 2000). ∂ y1 ∂ y1 M2 1. s L2 L L 2− s L .6) After the nose has passed into the tunnel. 0. the term Mϕ ∗ in the arguments of AT in (7. the blockage A 0 /A = 0. (7.9.4. where the cross-sectional area AT is changing. Figure 7. 0.4.188).4.14)). axisymmetric model trains are projected into and along the axis of a tunnel consisting of a 7-m long circular cylinder of internal diameter 0. ∂ y1 ∂ y1 (7. A(1 − M 2 ) because this is attained when ϕ ∗ (y1 . and in the particular case in which the Mach number is small enough that terms ∼O(M 2 ) are negligible.6) can be extrapolated to finite Mach numbers by writing p≈ ρ0 U 2 A(1 − M 2 ) ∞ −∞ ∂AT ∂ϕ ∗ (y1 + U [t]) (y1 . 0) dy1 . s. with respective cross-sectional areas given by AT (s) = A0 s2 . Wire-guided.6) predicts the overall (linear theory) pressure rise to be p ≈ ρ0 U 2 A 0 /A. 0) ≈ y1 − in (7. But the linear theory. 0 < s < L. This implies that the Approximation (7.4. and we then find. ∂ϕ ∗ /∂ y1 = 1 in the region occupied by the nose. The nose aspect ratio h/L = 0.4 Compression Wave Generated When a Train Enters a Tunnel 171 The main contributions to the Integral (7.116. asymptotic pressure rise can also be calculated exactly. The compression wave is generated as the nose enters the tunnel. During the formation of the wave.

172

7 Problems in Three Dimensions

Fig. 7.4.4.

nose profiles. The solid curves are predictions of Equation (7.4.7), evaluated using the following formulae for ∂ϕ ∗ /∂ y1 (Howe 1998b): 1 1 ∂ϕ ∗ (y) = − ∂ y1 2 2π Z(ξ ) = 1 π
∞ ∞

I0
0

ξr R

2K 1 (ξ ) I1 (ξ )

1 2

sin ξ

y1 + Z(ξ ) R

dξ,

ln
0

K 1 (µ)I1 (µ) K 1 (ξ )I1 (ξ )

dµ , µ2 − ξ 2

2 2 where r = y2 + y3 < R and I0 , I1 , and K 1 are modified Bessel functions. The linear theory underpredicts the maximum observed pressure gradients by about 8%. The agreement with experiment can be greatly improved by including contributions from the surface dipoles in Equation (7.4.3) (which in a first approximation are determined by the drag force exerted on the nose of the train by the linear theory pressure rise) and, to a lesser extent, by including the vortex sound generated by the tunnel exit-flow vorticity (the final source term on the right of (7.4.3)).

Problems 7 1. The term ω2 ∂Y2 /∂ y3 in the Representation (7.1.3) of the sound produced by a gust interacting with a thin airfoil accounts for the influence of changes in

Problems 7 the airfoil chord 2a(y3 ) over the interaction region. Show that when da (y3 ) dy3 1

173

the Formula (7.2.3) for the sound produced by a line vortex is given in a first approximation by p(x, t) ≈ ρ0 U M cos 2 π |x|
3 2

|sinφ| sin θ da dy3 H
0 U [t] a U [t] a

× cos θ − sin θ cos φ

+1 +1

,

where da/dy3 is evaluated at y3 = 0, where the vortex is cut by the airfoil. Show that this result is identical with that given by (7.1.4) provided that in (7.1.4) ω3 is interpreted as the component of the vorticity parallel to the local leading edge of the airfoil and the convection velocity U is replaced by its component normal to the local leading edge. 2. A vortex ring orientated with its axis parallel to the +x1 axis is convected in a low Mach number mean flow at speed U in the x1 direction past the edge of the rigid half-plane x1 < 0, x2 = 0, −∞ < x3 < ∞. Use the compact Green’s function G(x, y, t − τ ) =

ϕ ∗ (x)ϕ ∗ (y) 1 √ 2π 2 2πic0 |x − y3 i3 |3/2

∞ −∞

ωe−iω(t−|x−y3 i3 |/c0 ) dω,

where ϕ is defined as in (3.9.6), to calculate the sound produced as the vortex passes the edge when the influence of the half-plane on the motion of the ring is ignored.

3. Calculate the sound produced within and outside a semi-finite circular cylindrical rigid pipe when a vortex ring exhausts axisymmetrically from the open end. Neglect the influence of the pipe walls on the motion of the vortex and ignore any change in the vortex radius at the exit. 4. Determine the (quadrupole) sound produced by the head-on collision of two equal ring vortices. Estimate the sound generated when a ring vortex is incident normally on a plane wall.

174

7 Problems in Three Dimensions

5. Use the Green’s function (3.9.15) and Equation (7.4.4) to determine the infrasound generated by a train entering a tunnel modeled by the unflanged, circular cylindrical duct in Fig. 3.9.6b. Assume that the train travels along the axis of the duct and show that the acoustic pressure at the far field point x outside the tunnel is given approximately by p(x, t) ≈ ρ0 U 2 M 4π |x| ×
∞ −∞

1−

x1 |x|

∂AT ∂ 2ϕ∗ (y1 + U [t]) 2 (y1 , 0, 0) dy1 , |x| → ∞, ∂ y1 ∂ y1

where [t] = t − |x|/c0 .

8
Further Worked Examples

8.1 Blade–Vortex Interactions in Two Dimensions The linear theory of the low Mach number, two-dimensional interaction of a line vortex with an airfoil was discussed in Section 6.4. The interaction will now be examined in more detail, including also the influence of image vortices on the motion. The general problem to be considered is depicted in Fig. 8.1.1, which shows a vortex of strength moving in the neighbourhood of a rigid airfoil of chord 2a occupying −a < x1 < a, x2 = 0. There is no mean circulation about the airfoil. We shall consider cases with and without a mean flow in the x1 direction and examine the influence of vortex shedding from the trailing edge.

8.1.1 Equation of Motion of the Vortex At time t let the vortex be at x ≡ (x1 , x2 ) = x0 (t), and translate at velocity v0 = If we set z = x1 + i x2 , z 0 = x01 + i x02 , the transformation ζ = z + a z2 −1 a2 (8.1.1) dx0 (t). dt

maps the fluid region in the z plane of the airfoil into the region |ζ | > 1 in the ζ plane. The upper and lower faces of the airfoil (x2 = ± 0) respectively transform into the upper and lower halves of the unit circular cylinder |ζ | = 1, and the vortex maps into an equal vortex at ζ = ζ0 (Fig. 8.1.2). In the absence of mean flow (U = 0), and when there is no mean circulation about the cylinder (and therefore about the airfoil), the complex potential of the motion is ob∗ tained by placing an image vortex − at the inverse point ζ = 1/ζ0 together with 175

8. 2π i 1 i − ln ζ (z) − ln ζ (z) + U z.1.1.6.2. w(ζ ) = − 1 i i ln(ζ − ζ0 ) + ln ζ − ∗ 2π 2π ζ0 − i ln ζ. The two interior vortices ensure that the total circulation around the cylinder vanishes. . w(z) = − where i ln(ζ (z) − ζ (z 0 )) + F(z).1. 8.176 8 Further Worked Examples Fig. 2π The velocity potential of the motion in the z plane is given by setting ζ = ζ (z). Because a mean flow in the x1 direction is unaffected by the airfoil. so that the corresponding equation of motion Fig. Then.1). Then. a vortex + at the center of the cylinder. F(z) = ∗ 2π ζ (z 0 ) 2π This is of the form given in (4. we can include its contribution by adding the complex potential U z.

Instead.6.1.4): p(x. but we shall not do this. the strengths . z = y1 + i y2 .1 Blade–Vortex Interactions in Two Dimensions of the vortex at z 0 is found from (4.1.2) takes no account of the influence of vortex shedding. dt dt dt 4π ζ (z 0 ) 177 that is ∗ i dz 0 Z 2 = −1+ + U.1.2). (8. This would lead to a solution in terms of the Sears function (6. because it limits the discussion to linearized motions.4) By defining the radiation angle Fig.3) where the Kirchhoff vector for the strip airfoil has the components (Table 3.3) and the Formula (6.8.3.6).2.1. 8. we shall apply the method discussed in Section 6. In a linearized calculation (in which image effects in the airfoil are neglected) this could be done by assuming shed vorticity to lie in a thin vortex sheet downstream of the trailing edge at x1 = a.1. Y2 = Re(−i z 2 − a 2 ).2.2 Formula for the Acoustic Pressure The sound produced by the low Mach number motion of the vortex is calculated from (6.3) to be ∗ dz 0 d x01 d x02 i ζ (z 0 ) ≡ −i =− + F (z 0 ).4.1. a Equation (8. According to Curle’s theory (Section 2. t − τ − |x|/c0 d x01 ∂Y j d x02 ∂Y j − dτ ∂ y2 dτ ∂ y1 x0 (τ ) (8. where Z = . we can write p(x. (8. t) ≈ ρ0 sin ∂ √ 2π 2c0 |x| ∂t × ∂ ∂t t−|x|/c0 −∞ t−|x|/c0 −∞ for an observer at x in the far field as in dτ d x02 ρ0 cos (τ ) √ − √ dτ t − τ − |x|/c0 2π 2c0 |x| dτ .2) √ √ dt |ζ0 |2 − 1 4πa Z 2 − 1 Z2 − 1 z0 ζ0 = Z + Z 2 − 1.1) Y1 = y1 .9. √ t − τ − |x|/c0 d x01 ∂Y2 d x02 ∂Y2 − dτ ∂ y2 dτ ∂ y1 x0 (τ ) The two integrals in this formula represent the acoustic fields of dipole sources. where the effects of vortex shedding are modelled by deleting singularities from the compact Green’s function. as in Section 6.3.1. t) ≈ t−|x|/c0 −ρ0 x j ∂ √ 3 2π 2c0 |x| 2 ∂t −∞ dτ ×√ . 8.

6) Im W(Z ) where [t] = t − |x|/c0 is the retarded time. W(Z ) is singular at both the leading and trailing edges (Z = ±1).1.4 that the influence of vortex shedding from the trailing edge could be estimated by deleting the singularity that occurs at the edge from the Green’s function and ignoring the shed vorticity.1. other things being equal. The first is aligned with the airfoil chord (the mean flow direction) and represents the influence of suction forces at the leading and trailing edges (Batchelor 1967). Introduce the shorthand notation W= −i Z d (−i z 2 − a 2 ) = √ dz Z2 − 1 (8.6) is dominated by contributions from the neighbourhoods of the singularities. 6. Only the second integral in (8. t) ≈ ∂ ρ0 a sin √ 2π 2c0 |x| ∂t + cos [t] ≡ −a Im W(Z ) x0 (τ ) dZ dτ .2) and (8.1. d x01 ∂Y2 d x02 ∂Y2 − dτ ∂ y2 dτ ∂ y1 and the acoustic pressure becomes p(x.4. Im −∞ [t] −∞ dZ dτ √ dτ [t] − τ dZ dτ √ dτ [t] − τ . the second component F2 is equal and opposite to the unsteady lift experienced by the airfoil during the interaction. This is the case illustrated in Fig. and it is understood that Z = Z (τ ). When the standoff distance h a it was argued in Section 6.178 8 Further Worked Examples of these dipoles are determined by the unsteady force (F1 .6) for the vortex motion and the acoustic pressure will now be applied to several different special cases.5) evaluated at the vortex. 8. (8. because the second integral in (8.1.2). By deleting the . In general the integrals must be evaluated numerically using the solution of the equation of motion (8. Equations (8.6) contributes to the sound (because d Z /dτ = U/a is real and F1 ≡ 0).3 Linear Theory In the linearized approximation the vortex is swept past the airfoil along a trajectory parallel to the x1 direction at precisely the uniform mean flow speed U .1. Then.1.1. and the trailing edge singularity corresponds to the singularity of W(Z ) at Z = 1. are therefore the most significant sources of sound at high frequencies.1.1. which. F2 ) exerted on the fluid (per unit span) by the airfoil.

8)) is plotted as the solid curves in Fig.8) The nondimensional acoustic pressure signature (the right-hand side of (8. and √ changing the integration variable to ξ = 1/ t − τ − |x|/c0 . we then recover the result (6.1 Blade–Vortex Interactions in Two Dimensions 179 contribution from the trailing edge we are asserting that all of the sound is produced by the interaction of the vortex with the leading edge.4. ρ0 U √ p(x.1.1.8.0. Making this substitution in (8. which can be written. (8.5. so that Z = U τ/a + i h/a. 8.1. . 0.6). 8. |x| → ∞. Near this edge 1 W(Z ) ≈ √ √ .3).1. 1.2.3.1. t) M cos (a/|x|) 1 2 4πa ≈ U [t] a U [t] a +1 2 +1 + h 2 a . Fig. measuring time from the instant that the vortex crosses the midchord x1 = 0 of the airfoil.1.3 for h/a = 0. 2 Z +1 (8.7) √ where the branch cut for Z + 1 runs along the real axis from Z = −1 to Z = +∞.

in terms of the Sears function (6.1. 1 |x| → ∞. a 4πaU in terms of which (8. and must be determined by numerical integration of Equation (8.3.1.1. (8. which in the present case can be shown to predict that √ p(x. h = 0.2).10) which can be solved for Z by Runge–Kutta integration (Section 4.3. when the characteristic reduced frequency λ = ωa/U of the motion is relatively small.2) becomes d Z∗ i =√ dT Z2 − 1 √ Z Z2 −1 −1+ 2 |ζ0 − 1 |2 + 1.1.8) is remarkably good even when h/a is as large as unity. (8. t) M cos (a/|x|) 1 2 ρ0 U 4πa ≈ √ ∞ 2π Re 0 (iλ) 2 S(λ)e−λ{h/a+iU [t]/a} dλ. T = Ut . 8. The upper part of Fig. This force also determines the low Mach number acoustic radiation by Equation (6. say L = 10a.2. 8.9) The corresponding pressure signatures are plotted as the dotted curves in Fig.4 shows a calculated trajectory for = 0.8) is valid. 8.3 that the linearized problem of determining the unsteady force F2 exerted on the fluid when an incompressible. the integration is started at a large distance L upstream of the airfoil midchord.2.180 8 Further Worked Examples It was pointed out in Section 6.6). by prescribing the initial position of the vortex to be Z = −L/a + i h/a.1.1.4 Nonlinear Theory When account is taken of image vortices in the airfoil the trajectory of the vortex in the neighbourhood of the airfoil is no longer parallel to the mean flow direction. If the initial standoff distance is h at x1 = −∞. a .1.2.1.2) (because F1 ≡ 0). and might be expected to lie outside the range for which (8.6). sinusoidal gust convects past the airfoil can be solved exactly with full account taken of vortex shedding.1. To do this it is convenient to introduce a dimensionless velocity ratio and time T defined by = . The agreement with the approximate theory of Equation (8.

The influence of vortex shedding into the wake is included by using the approximation (8.1. 8.1 Blade–Vortex Interactions in Two Dimensions 181 Fig.7) for W(Z ). The nonlinear influence of the image vorticity is to shift the initially rectilinear trajectory of the vortex away from the airfoil in the direction of the vortex force ω ∧ U (U = U i). v(T )) by dZ ˆ ˆ = u(T ) + iv(T ). where T = a . where x02 ∼ 0.71U.1.2 U ∼U 1+ x02 /a 0.8. The vortex is closest to the airfoil at U t/a = 0. where time is measured from the instant that the vortex passes the midchord of the airfoil.6). and this ˆ ˆ is done by defining a dimensionless vortex convection velocity (u(T ). ˆ dT Uτ ˆ .1. The integrals must be evaluated numerically. and where convection by the images increases the translation speed of the vortex from U to approximately U+ =U+ 0.28a.28 = 1. 4π x02 The sound generated as the vortex passes the airfoil is given by (8.4.

8.182 Then. the smoothing influence of shedding at a sharp edge acts to remove the blips. t) + .1.1. Vortex shedding should smooth out the pressure signatures at the retarded times when the vortex is close to the trailing edge.1. But the calculated pressures exhibit blips shown as dotted curves in the figure. t) M sin (a/|x|) 1 2 4πa and ρ0 U √ p2 (x.1. their nondimensional forms ρ0 U √ p1 (x. the effect of shedding was not included in the calculation of the vortex trajectory. at which time the . The final integrals are easily evaluated numerically when the path of the vortex has been determined. However. the vortex would strike the leading edge of the airfoil at U [t]/a = −1. These arise because. t) M cos (a/|x|) 2 4πa 1 are plotted in Fig. because the source terms must be set to equal zero as soon as [T ] − λ2 reduces to the nondimensional time at which the computation of the vortex path begins (where the vortex is sufficiently far upstream that it effectively produces no sound by interaction with the airfoil).11) ˆ where T = U t/a. The components p1 (x. √ √ 1 1 U M(a/|x|) 2 4πa ρ0 U M(a/|x|) 2 4πa (8. t). t) M(a/|x|) 2 4πa [T ] −∞ ∞ 0 1 ≈ 22 3 d sin dT d dT ˆ ˆ v(T ) d T ˆ [T ] − T + cos [T ] −∞ ˆ ˆ Im(W(Z )(u + iv))(T ) d T ˆ [T ] − T = 2 2 sin + 2 2 cos ≈ ρ0 3 v([T ] − λ2 ) dλ ∞ d Im(W(Z )(u + iv))([T ] − λ2 ) dλ dT 0 p1 (x.11) correspond respectively to the dipole sound produced by the unsteady suction and lift forces.5). The upper limit of integration is actually finite. t) p2 (x. 8.1. t) of (8. [T ] = U [t]/a. An interesting nonlinear interaction occurs when the initial standoff distance of the vortex h = 0 (Fig. obtained by interpolating smoothly between the calculated pressures on either side of the blips.4. and the pressure signatures have profiles similar to those depicted by the solid curves in the figure. although our calculation has accounted for vortex shedding in evaluating the dipole source strengths (by means of the approximation (8. ρ0 U √ 1 8 Further Worked Examples p(x. p2 (x. In the linearized approximation.7)). and the integration variable T has been reˆ placed by λ = [T ] − T .

8) is infinite.5 illustrates this for the same value of the velocity ratio = /4πaU = 0.5. 8.15 = 2.1. The upper part of Fig. The corresponding suction.1.and lift-dipole acoustic pressures p1 and p2 shown in the figure are also greatly increased.5 Periodic Vortex Motion When there is no mean flow (U = 0) the characteristic velocity and dimensionless time become V = 4πa . The maximum convection velocity of the vortex (at U t/a = 0) is now more than twice the mean stream velocity: U+ 4π(0.15a) =U 1+ 0.2 considered above. 8. 8. T = Vt .1.2 0.1.3U. linear theory acoustic pressure (8.1 Blade–Vortex Interactions in Two Dimensions 183 Fig. This singular event does not occur because the vortex trajectory is deflected around the airfoil by the image vorticity (for a rounded nose the possibility of additional vortex shedding from the leading edge may be ignored).8. a .

for the case where the trajectory passes through the point labelled 0.1.2) reduces to i d Z∗ =√ dT Z2 − 1 √ Z Z2 − 1 −1+ 2 |ζ0 − 1 |2 . An orbiting vortex motion of this kind cannot be realized in practice (because of diffusion from the vortex core and the continual shedding of additional vorticity from the airfoil). the nondimensional . 8. A typical orbit is plotted in the upper half of Fig.1. By writing Vτ ˆ T = a and dZ ˆ ˆ = u(T ) + iv(T ) ˆ dT in the general formula (8. where x01 = −2a.6. The calculated period is T0 ≡ V t0 /a ≈ 35.1. The solutions are closed trajectories orbiting the airfoil periodically. but it is still instructive to calculate the sound produced by the motion.184 8 Further Worked Examples Fig.84.6 for > 0. and the vortex equation of motion (8.6) for the acoustic pressure.1. 8. x02 = 0.

1.1.12) now becomes √ 4 2π √ T0 ∞ n=1 √ ˆ [T ] − T / T0 .8. The function W(Z ) in the integrand is given by (8.1 Blade–Vortex Interactions in Two Dimensions 185 suction and lift acoustic pressures are found to be given by the following modified form of (8. 2πnT T0 dT. ˆ [T ] − T (8. 2 2n . the right- −an n sin 0 ∞ sin 2πn ∞ [T ] − λ2 T0 [T ] − λ2 T0 dλ dλ . that when T is measured from Z = −2.5) in the absence of vortex shedding.12) where M = V /c0 . the suction and dipole source strengths have period T0 .1. Im(W(Z )(u + iv))(T ) sin By making the change of integration variable λ = hand side of (8. bn can be calculated by using the numerical solution for the orbit to evaluate an = bn = 2 T0 2 T0 T0 0 T0 0 v(T ) cos 2π nT T0 dT.6. t) p1 (x. as indicated in Fig. and possess Fourier series expansions of the form v(T ) = ∞ an cos n=1 2π nT T0 . 8. It follows by inspection and from the numerical solution. t) √ √ 1 + 1 2 M(a/|x|) 2 M(a/|x|) 2 ρ0 V 1 ρ0 V2 ≈ 22 d sin dT [T ] −∞ ˆ ˆ v(T ) d T ˆ [T ] − T + cos [T ] −∞ ˆ ˆ Im(W(Z )(u + iv))(T ) d T . Im(W(Z )(u+iv))(T ) = ∞ bn sin n=1 2πnT T0 . + bn n cos 0 cos 2πn The integrals are evaluated from the real and imaginary parts of ∞ 0 1 1 2 e2πin{[T ]/T0 −λ } dλ = √ e{2n[T ]/T0 − 4 }πi . where the coefficients an .11) p2 (x.1.1.

2 Parallel Blade–Vortex Interactions in Three Dimensions We now examine to what extent the simple two-dimensional methods of the previous section can be adapted to wings of finite span and variable chord for problems of the kind shown in Fig. |x| → ∞. 8. t) 1 2 p1 (x. both have similar orders of magnitude.186 8 Further Worked Examples Hence. The general representation of the sound produced by vortex–airfoil interactions is discussed in Section 7. when Fig. the suction and lift force dipole fields are given respectively by √ 2π 1 ≈ −√ T0 M sin (a/|x|) 2 p2 (x. The corresponding nondimensional pressures are plotted in Fig.1.2.6 (taking the first 26 terms in the series). 8. 8.1.2. 8.1. t) ρ0 V 2 ρ0 V2 √ 2nπt π an n sin − t0 4 n=1 ∞ √ 2π ≈ √ T0 M cos (a/|x|) √ 2nπt π . . and exhibit rapid variations at the retarded times at which the vortex is directly above and below the airfoil.1. bn n cos − t0 4 n=1 ∞ where [ ] denotes evaluation at the retarded time t − |x|/c0 .

2. |y3 | < 1 L 2 y2 . For an elliptic airfoil of span L (between − 1 L < x3 < 1 L). |y3 | > 1 L 2 . (8. |x| → ∞. t) ≈ −ρ0 x j ∂ 4πc0 |x|2 ∂t (ω ∧ v) y.8. For an airfoil of compact chord and span the acoustic pressure produced by the interaction is given by Equation (5. 0). as indicated in the side view of Fig. A spanwise line vortex of strength is swept past the airfoil at an initial standoff distance h above the airfoil. orientated as illustrated in Fig. and we shall write ˆ a(y3 ) = a 1− 2 4y3 1 . |y3 | < L . The general solution is applicable to airfoils of arbitrary span.2) Vorticity is shed into the wake of the airfoil in accordance with the Kutta condition of unsteady aerodynamics. the Kirchhoff vector 2 2 Y has the components Y1 = y1 . For the rectangular ˆ ˆ airfoil a(y3 ) ≡ a = constant.2 Parallel Blade–Vortex Interactions in Three Dimensions 187 the airfoil chord can be regarded as compact. but we shall consider only the case where the span is compact. so that sound is generated primarily as the vortex passes over the leading edge of the airfoil.1 at zero angle of attack to a mean flow at speed U in the x1 direction. Y2 = ˆ Re(−i z 2 − a(y3 )2 ).2.2. ˆ where 2a(y3 ) is the airfoil chord at the spanwise location y3 . this can be dealt with in a first approximation by ignoring the shed vorticity and deleting the trailing edge singularity of .1) It is assumed that the section of the line vortex that interacts with the airfoil remains rectilinear. Y3 = y3 .4): p(x. z = y1 + i y2 .4. 2 L 2 (8. 8. t − |x| c0 · ∇Y j (y) d 3 y.1. As before. for the elliptic airfoil a(y3 ) assumes a maximum value of a at y3 = 0. This smooths out conditions at the trailing edge. Consider a planar airfoil of either rectangular or elliptic planform. predictions for a noncompact span will be intermediate between those discussed here and those in Section 8.2. x02 .1b. where x0 = (x01 . 8. with the representation ω = kδ(x1 − x01 (t))δ(x2 − x02 (t)). When h = 0 it will be necessary to take account of nonlinear interactions with the airfoil.

t) ≈ ρ0 cos ∂ 4πc0 |x| ∂t × ∂ ∂t L 2 |y3 | < 1 L.4) . ˆ (8.1) becomes p(x. where d x02 /dt = 0 because of nonlinear interactions with the airfoil.1a between the x1 and x2 directions and the radiation direction. 8.2. by using the following modification of the x2 component of Y: ˆ ˆ Y2 = Re( 2a(y3 ) z + a(y3 )). Then.1 Linear Theory When there is no back-reaction of the airfoil on the vortex the convection velocity of the vortex is equal to the mean stream velocity d x01 = U. Note that ‘infinite’ contributions to the integrals from |y3 | > L/2 are constant because ω ∧ v is constant for |y3 | > L/2.2. z 0 (t) = x01 (t) + i x02 (t). The first term on the right is the suction force dipole. Section 7. It is assumed to be nonzero only over the section − 1 L < y3 < 1 L 2 2 of the vortex.f. (8.2.3) reduces to p2 (x.188 8 Further Worked Examples Green’s function.2. dt d x02 = 0.3) √ dt z 0 (t) + a(y3 ) ˆ −L 2 L 2 where . and have been discarded (c. and quantities in square braces are evaluated at the retarded time [t] = t − |x|/c0 .3). t) 1 ≈− 3 ρ0 U M cos (L/|x|)/4πa 22 1 2  Im  U [t] a ˆ a a  3 2 −1 2 + ˆ a a h +ia  d y3 . are respectively the angles shown in Fig. The second term is the conventional lift dipole radiation. t) + p2 (x. and if the vortex crosses the midchord of the airfoil at time t = 0 (8. t) ≡ p1 (x. 8..2.2. (8. aligned with the airfoil chord. 2 −L 2 d x02 ρ0 cos dy3 + √ dt 4 2π c0 |x| √ ˆ dz 0 a(y3 ) Im dy3 |x| → ∞. dt The radiation is produced entirely by the lift dipole. whose strength is determined by the x2 component of the vortex convection velocity.

8.2 Nonlinear Theory When the standoff distance h = 0.2. image vorticity in the airfoil prevents the vortex from impinging on the leading edge.2. 8. The profiles are qualitatively similar to the corresponding plot in Fig. 8. ˆ ˆ where y 3 = y3 /L.2. . If the leading edge of the airfoil is suitably rounded (so that no additional vortex shedding occurs) this case can be treated for a rectangular airfoil by assuming that only the section of the vortex within the span − 1 L < x3 < 1 L of the airfoil is affected in this way.2. The acoustic pressure signatures (the left-hand side of (8. and 2 2 that the distorted path can be approximated by that for locally two-dimensional flow. and is given by (8. For a rectangular airfoil the integral evaluates to Im U [t] h +1+i a a −3 2 .2. The peak amplitude is larger and the acoustic pulse is of smaller duration ∼h/U for the rectangular airfoil because different sections of the vortex interact with the leading edge of the elliptic airfoil at different times during a total interaction time ∼ a/U > h/U .4)) for the rectangular and elliptic airfoils are plotted in Fig. and causes the trajectory to be locally deflected above the airfoil (for > 0). a/a = 1 for the rectangular airfoil.2 for a vortex standoff distance h = 0. although in three dimensions the amplitude decreases much more rapidly with increasing retarded distance of the vortex from the leading edge.2.3 for an airfoil of infinite span.2) for the elliptic airfoil.8.2 Parallel Blade–Vortex Interactions in Three Dimensions 189 Fig. 8.1.2a.

8.2 when the vortex is released upstream with h = 0. 2 Z +1 Then. . the motion of the section of the vortex within the airfoil span (− 1 L < 2 x3 < 1 L) is governed by Equation (8.3 for a velocity ratio = 0.10) (where ζ0 is defined in terms of z 0 2 as in (8.2.1. where [ ] denotes evaluation at the retarded time t − |x|/c0 .3. t)  ≈ [Im (W(Z )(u + iv))]  U M cos (L/|x|)/4πa ∂T |x| → ∞. and the suction and lift dipole radiation pressures are given by dv p1 (x. a dZ = u(T ) + iv(T ).1. The upper part of the Fig. dT 1 W(Z ) = √ √ .190 Let = . a Z= z0 . 8. t) ≈ U M cos (L/|x|)/4πa dT      ρ0 ρ0  ∂ p2 (x. 8 Further Worked Examples 4πaU T = Ut . These nondimensional pressures are plotted in Fig.1)).2.

8. and the vortex maps into an equal vortex at ζ = ζ0 . The wall coincides with the plane x2 = 0. and the spoiler extends along the x2 axis from x2 = 0 to x2 = a > 0 for −∞ < x3 < ∞. 1976) involving a line vortex near a thin vertical spoiler is illustrated in Fig.3.1. Fig. . The mean flow is parallel to the real axis in the ζ plane.1. and is assumed to convect over it in a low Mach number. is parallel to the spoiler.5 for the infinite span airfoil.4). Define z = x1 + i x2 .3.1. 8..8. small acoustic blips spuriously predicted during the passage of the vortex past the trailing edge have been removed (c. 8. The vortex ω = kδ(x − x0 (t)). it is the same as that depicted in Fig.1. 8. The three-dimensional acoustic pulses are narrower than those predicted in two dimensions.3 Vortex Passing over a Spoiler 191 figure shows the path followed by those sections of the vortex inboard of the airfoil tips. Fig. that is. x02 . A simple canonical interaction (Kasoev. by the unsteady wall drag.3 Vortex Passing over a Spoiler The sound produced when vorticity interacts at low Mach number with surface irregularities on a nominally plane. The left and right faces of the spoiler (x1 = ∓ 0) transform respectively into the intervals −1 < ζ < 0 and 0 < ζ < 1 of the real ζ axis.3. rigid wall is produced by dipoles orientated in the plane of the wall. where x0 = (x01 . irrotational mean stream having uniform speed U in the x1 direction. The transformation ζ = z2 +1 a2 (8. z 0 = x01 + i x02 .f. 0). As in that case. 8.1) maps the fluid region onto the upper half Im ζ > 0 of the ζ -plane.

= U . dt dt dt 4π ζ (z 0 ) that is.1). t) ≈ = −ρ0 x1 ∂ √ 3 π 2c0 |x| 2 ∂t −ρ0 x1 ∂ √ 3 π 2c0 |x| 2 ∂t t−|x|/c0 −∞ t−|x|/c0 −∞ k∧ dτ dx0 (τ ) · ∇Y1 (x0 (τ )) √ dτ t − τ − |x|/c0 dτ . and is given by w(ζ ) = − i i ∗ ln(ζ − ζ0 ) + ln(ζ − ζ0 ) + U aζ. The equation of motion of the vortex at z 0 is therefore (see (4.1.6. d Z∗ = −i dT where Z= z0 . V The compact Green’s function for this problem (applicable when the acoustic wavelength ∂) is given by (6. (8.6). 2π 2π Hence.3. a V = 4πa .4) .192 8 Further Worked Examples with complex potential U aζ . so that the analogue of Equation (6. a 1 2Z Z − 2 .4) for the far-field acoustic pressure becomes p(x.3) d x01 ∂Y1 d x02 ∂Y1 − dτ ∂ y2 dτ ∂ y1 x0 (τ ) where the Kirchhoff vector Y1 = Re(aζ ) = aRe( Z 2 + 1 ) at z = z0. The complex potential of the whole flow in the ζ plane is obtained by introducing an image vortex of strength − at the ∗ complex conjugate point ζ = ζ0 . √ t − τ − |x|/c0 (8. 2π which is in the form (4.3.2) +√ Z (Z 2 + 1) Z + 1 − |Z 2 + 1| Z2 + 1 T = Vt . (8.2.3)) ∗ d x01 d x02 i ζ (z 0 ) dz 0 ≡ −i = − + F (z 0 ). 2π i ln(ζ (z) − ζ (z 0 )∗ ) + U aζ (z). setting ζ = ζ (z) the motion in the z plane is defined by w(z) = − where F(z) = i ln(ζ (z) − ζ (z 0 )) + F(z).3.6.

dt This force vanishes.98V when U = 0 to 3. The vortex path equation (8. the corresponding nondimensional acoustic pressures (8. taking the initial position of the vortex to be several spoiler heights a upstream.3. Following the procedure of Section 8.3.3) to obtain the acoustic pressure in the form p(x.6) are evaluated numerically. t) 1 2 ρ0 V M sin √ aπ 2 √ a |x| 1 2 ∂ ∂T [T ] −∞ Im W(Z ) dZ ˆ dT ˆ dT ˆ [T ] − T . ρ0 V 2 M sin (a/|x|) √ p(x. because in that case dx0 = U ∇Y1 (x0 ) dt and k ∧ ∇Y1 · ∇Y1 ≡ 0. introduce the notations dZ = u(T ) + iv(T ). given (per unit span) by F1 = −ρ0 ω ∧ v · ∇Y1 dy1 dy2 = −ρ0 k ∧ dx0 · ∇Y1 (x0 ).8. and (ii) U = V ≡ /4πa.5) ˆ evaluated at the vortex.3.3.2) and the acoustic pressure integral (8. .75a for the two cases (i) of no mean flow. The convection velocity at this point is also increased from about 1. 8. The upper part of Fig. and this is responsible for more than doubling the amplitude and the effective frequency of the sound. The effect of mean flow is to draw the trajectory marginally closer to the spoiler as it passes the tip of the spoiler where the interaction is strongest. and make the substitution T = V τ/a in (8. dT W= d Z ( z2 + a2 ) = √ dz Z2 + 1 (8. in the linearized approximation in which the vortex is assumed to translate at the local mean stream velocity.3. ≈ 22 5 ∂ ∂T ∞ 0 Im(W(Z )(u + iv))([T ] − λ2 ) dλ.1. and therefore no sound is generated. (8.3.95V when U = V .6) are plotted in the lower part of the figure. U = 0.6) where [T ] = V [t]/a is the nondimensional retarded time and M = V /c0 .2 shows the vortex trajectories when the initial distance of the vortex from the wall is h = 0.3 Vortex Passing over a Spoiler 193 The radiation is produced by the unsteady drag force F1 exerted on the fluid by the spoiler. t) ≈ that is.3. where time is measured from the instant that the vortex passes the spoiler. where its motion is unaffected by the spoiler.

2π .4. with no mean circulation about the cylinder.1): w(z) = − a2 a2 i i i ln(z −z 0 )+ ln z − ∗ − ln z + U z + 2π 2π z0 2π z . Set z = x1 + i x2 and let the vortex of strength have the complex position z 0 = x01 + i x02 at time t.f.. (8.2. 8. Let the cylinder have radius a and be coaxial with the x3 axis. and let there be an irrotational mean flow at speed U past the cylinder in the x1 direction. The complex potential w(z) is found by placing an ∗ image vortex − at the inverse point z = a/z 0 within the cylinder.4 Bluff Body Interactions: The Circular Cylinder Low Mach number.194 8 Further Worked Examples Fig. Section 8.3. two-dimensional interactions of a line vortex with a circular cylinder provide an interesting contrast to the sharp-edge problems discussed above.1) The velocity potential governing the motion of the vortex at z 0 is obtained by deleting the self-potential − i ln(z − z 0 ). 8. and by adding the potential for the uniform mean flow past the cylinder (c. a vortex + at the centre to make the circulation vanish.

z = y1 + i y2 . say. a 2πa a dZ dz 0 =V ≡ V (u + iv). t) ≈ t−|x|/c0 −ρ0 x j ∂ √ 3 2π 2c0 |x| 2 ∂t −∞ dτ ×√ . Equation (8. dt dT 8. The integrals must be evaluated numerically using the numerical . p2 . c0 ˆ dT ˆ [T ] − T . V = . and making the change of integration variable T = V τ/a. V a t− The subscripts j = 1. V 195 (8.3) where the components of the Kirchhoff vector can be written (see Section 4.4) ˆ evaluated at z 0 . Y2 = Re −i z − a2 z .4): p(x.5) Y1 = Re z + By defining W1 = d dz z+ a2 z ≡1− d 1 a2 .4. produced by drag and lift dipoles. F2 ) exerted on the fluid (per unit span) by the cylinder.1 The Acoustic Pressure The far-field sound produced by the vortex is calculated from (6. 2 in this formula respectively correspond to the acoustic pressures p1 .4.4.4.4. Z2 = U .4 Bluff Body Interactions: The Circular Cylinder Hence we arrive at the equation of motion i d Z∗ = + dT Z (|Z |2 − 1) where and Z = 1− 1 .3) can be written √ ρ0 V M x j ∂ p(x.2) z0 Vt . c0 [T ] = [T ] −∞ ˆ Im(W j (u + iv))(T ) |x| . (8. T = . t) ≈ √ 3 2π 2a|x| 2 ∂ T where M= V . whose strengths are determined by the force (F1 . W2 = −i z − Z2 dz z ≡ −i 1 + 1 Z2 a2 z . t − τ − |x|/c0 d x01 ∂Y j d x02 ∂Y j − dτ ∂ y2 dτ ∂ y1 x0 (τ ) (8.2.8.

4.1 illustrates the typical nondimensional waveforms produced when V ≡ /2πa = 2U and for h/a = ±0.4. time being measured from the instant that the vortex crosses x1 = 0. Figure 8.4. The amplitude of the sound decreases rapidly with increasing distance of closest approach of the vortex to the cylinder. 8.1. The calculation begins at time T . t) 1 ρ0 V 2 M sin (a/|x|) 2 ρ0 V 2 M cos (a/|x|) √ p2 (x. say. by taking the initial position of the vortex a is sufficiently to be far upstream of the cylinder at z 0 = −L + i h. The upper limits of integration are then finite because the source terms vanish as soon as [T ] − λ2 < T . t) 1 2 ≈ 22 ≈ 22 1 1 ∂ ∂T ∂ ∂T ∞ 0 ∞ 0 Im(W1 (u + iv))([T ] − λ2 ) dλ. where L large that the source strengths are negligible for T < T (Fig. 8.4. in which case √ p1 (x. Im(W2 (u + iv))([T ] − λ2 ) dλ. solution of Equation (8. near the cylinder the translational velocity of the vortex is increased because the .2) for the vortex path.1).196 8 Further Worked Examples Fig. This is done by making the ˆ further change of integration variable λ = [T ] − T .7.

is incident symmetrically on a circular cylinder.8. In cases where U V . 8. 8. semicircular projection on a rigid wall (Fig. consisting of a vortex at z 0 accompanied by an image of strength − at ∗ z 0 .2) can be treated by the method used for the spoiler in Section 8.4. 8. and the drag ∼ (ω ∧ U ∇Y1 ) · ∇Y1 ≡ 0.4. the lift dipole will tend to predominate because convection by the image vortices can then be neglected in a first approximation. and also because of the increased influence of the image vorticity. The velocity potential of the unsteady motion is given by augmenting the complex potential (8. the lift dipole vanishes identically. In this case. 2π Fig. The problem is equivalent to that in which a vortex pair.3.4. .2 Wall-Mounted Cylinder The case of ideal motion of a vortex translating past a cylindrical.1) by the terms a2 i i ∗ ln(z − z 0 ) − ln z − 2π 2π z0 + i ln z.4 Bluff Body Interactions: The Circular Cylinder 197 mean flow velocity is larger.2.4.

the equation of motion becomes d Z∗ =i dT where Z = 1 Z − Z∗ + + Z − Z∗ (|Z |2 − 1)(Z 2 − 1) V = 2πa . Z2 (8. ρ0 V 2 M sin (a/|x|) √ p(x. dT evaluated at the vortex. 8. t − τ − |x|/c0 (8.5) and the acoustic pressure integral (8.4.4.4. when the vortex is assumed to convect passively at the local velocity of the undisturbed mean stream. and the far-field acoustic pressure by p(x.1. which vanishes in the linearized approximation.6). set dZ = u(T ) + iv(T ).4. Then. Then.4.198 8 Further Worked Examples which correspond to the net potential produced by the image. (8.4.1.5) z0 .2 shows the vortex trajectories when the . a The compact Green’s function is given by (6.4. (8.4. V 1− 1 . and M = V /c0 .9) must be evaluated numerically. As before. The upper part of Fig. t) 1 2 W1 = d dz z+ a2 z =1− 1 Z2 (8.4. The vortex path equation (8. taking the initial position of the vortex to be several cylinder radii a upstream where its motion is unaffected by the cylinder. t) ≈ = −ρ0 x1 ∂ √ 3 π 2c0 |x| 2 ∂t −ρ0 x1 ∂ √ 3 π 2c0 |x| 2 ∂t t−|x|/c0 −∞ t−|x|/c0 −∞ k∧ dx0 dτ (τ ) · ∇Y1 (x0 (τ )) √ dτ t − τ − |x|/c0 √ x0 (τ ) d x01 ∂Y1 d x02 ∂Y1 − dτ ∂ y2 dτ ∂ y1 dτ . [T ] = V [t]/a is the nondimensional retarded time (T = 0 when the vortex is at x1 = 0).7) The radiation is produced by the unsteady drag force exerted on the fluid by the cylinder.6) where the Kirchhoff vector Y1 = Re z + a2 z .9) where the angle is defined as in Fig. T = Vt . 8.8) ≈ 22 3 ∂ ∂T ∞ 0 Im(W1 (u +iv))([T ]−λ2 ) dλ. a = U .

8. 4 (8.5 Vortex Ring and Sphere Perhaps the simplest low Mach number.5. Let a sphere of radius a be placed with its centre at the origin in the presence of a uniform mean flow at speed U in the x1 direction. U = 0.07V when U = V .5.1) 4πr0 Fig.1. 1967) u (r0 . 8. A vortex ring of radius r0 (t) and circulation is coaxial with the x1 axis and translates in the positive x1 direction under the influence of the mean flow. this is responsible for the increased acoustic amplitude and for more than doubling the effective frequency.5. 8. The vortex convection velocity at y1 = 0 is increased from about 1. self-induction and image vorticity in the sphere (Fig.3 for the sharp-edged spoiler. and (ii) U = V .23V when U = 0 to 3.5 Vortex Ring and Sphere 199 initial standoff distance of the vortex from the wall h = 0. We shall assume the vortex core is circular (and remains circular throughout the interaction) with radius σ (t) r0 . The waveforms and these general conclusions are qualitatively similar to those discussed in Section 8. σ ) = ln 8r0 σ − 1 . 8. three-dimensional vortex– surface interaction amenable to analysis is the axisymmetric motion of a ring vortex over a sphere. inviscid. .5a for the two cases (i) of no mean flow.1). The self-induced velocity of the ring (in inviscid flow) is parallel to the x1 -axis at speed u given approximately by Kelvin’s formula (Batchelor.

5) . 2 K( ) = 0 dµ 1− 2 sin2 µ . then at any time t 2 (2πr0 )π σ 2 = (2π h)π σ0 . 2 2 r0 + x01 x01 = a 2 x01 . i.4) The core radius σ decreases when r0 increases.3) where ± = (r ∓ r0 )2 + (x1 − x01 )2 . π 2 = E( ) = 0 − −+ − π 2 + + . x1 ) (Batchelor. Ting and Klein. E( ) are respectively complete elliptic integrals of the first and second kinds. 1− sin2 µ dµ. where r denotes perpendicular distance from the x1 axis.5. σ (t) = σ0 h r0 (t) so that the self-induced velocity (8. x01 ). and K ( ).2) where the planes of symmetry of the ring vortex and its image cut the x1 axis respectively at x01 (t). 4 (8.5. The radius r0 (t) and axial position x01 (t) of the ring vortex are then determined by the equations of motion 1 ∂ψ dr0 =− (r0 .e. dt r0 ∂r (8. r0 = a 2 r0 . The image vorticity consists of a coaxial ring vortex whose circulation radius r0 . x1 ) = a Ur  1− 2 2 r 2 + x1 2 3 3 2  + 2π ( + + − ){K ( ) − E( )}.1) becomes u = 8h r0 (t) ln σ0 h 3 2 4πr0 − 1 . x01 (t). and axial location x01 are given by =− 2 2 r0 + x01 a 1 2 .. The motion of the vortex produced by the combined induction by the image and the mean flow can be expressed in terms · of the Stokes stream function ψ( r . σ ) + (r0 .200 8 Further Worked Examples . because the vortex lines move with the fluid particles. 1991)  ψ(r.5. 2 2 r0 + x01 (8. dt r0 ∂ x 1 d x01 1 ∂ψ = u (r0 . x01 ).5. If r0 = h and σ = σ0 are the initial values when the vortex ring is far from the sphere. 1967. (8.5.

a V = 2πa . In both cases the integration is started five sphere diameters upstream with the following initial values for the vortex ring radius and core radius.2.5. . h = 0. T = Vt .6). R2 + X 2 X = X .2 illustrates the sections in the vertical plane of symmetry of the sphere of two typical vortex trajectories predicted by Equations (8. R . X ) + ln dT R ∂R 2R σ0 1− 1 (R 2 + X 2 ) 2 3 x01 .6) R2 = 2 − (R 2 + X 2 ) × ( ˆ + + ˆ − ){K ( ) − E( )}. a R= r0 .5. dR 1∂ =− (R. V aR h 1 2 3 2 − 1 . σ0 = 0.7) The solid and broken-line curves in the figure correspond respectively to = 0 Fig. Figure 8. 4 (8. dT R ∂X where dX 1∂ 1 8h = (R.5. ˆ± = R = (R ∓ R )2 + (X − X )2 . a = U .5. X ). 8. R2 + X 2 = ˆ− − ˆ+ ˆ− + ˆ+ .5 Vortex Ring and Sphere 201 The equations of motion of the vortex are cast in nondimensional terms by defining X= Then.8.8a.05h.5. (8.

8.5.1. (8. |x| → ∞.5.x01 ) . (r0 . locally tangential to the vorticity ω and orientated in the clockwise direction when the vortex ring is viewed from upstream.202 8 Further Worked Examples (no mean flow) and = 3.5. 8.1) of the Kirchhoff vector makes a nontrivial contribution to (8.5. |x| → ∞.4. the mean flow velocity U = U ∇Y1 is absent because (ω ∧ U ∇Y1 ) y. The production of sound is therefore a nonlinear event – the source explicitly involves only the self-induced velocity and the velocity induced by the image vortex. as indicated in Fig. although the convection speed of the ring past the sphere is greatly increased.9. The latter value is chosen to make the mean stream velocity U approximately the same as the self-induced velocity u at large distances from the sphere. t − |x| c0 · ∇Y1 (y) ≡ 0. t − |x| c0 · ∇Y j (y) d 3 y.9) ˆ where θ is a unit azimuthal vector. equation (5.8).5. the amplitude and characteristic frequency of the sound both increase with U .5. t) ≈ −ρ0 x j ∂ 4π c0 |x|2 ∂t (ω ∧ v) y.8) For the purpose of evaluating the integral we may neglect the finite core size of the vortex.8) and evaluating the integral. t) ≈ −ρ0 cos 2c0 |x| ∂ r0 ∂t d x01 ∂Y1 dr0 ∂Y1 − dt ∂r dt ∂ y1 .9) into (8. (8.5. This has a relatively small effect on the trajectory. Substituting (8. we find p(x. However. and set ˆ ω = θδ(r − r0 (t))δ(x1 − x01 (t)).1 Acoustic Pressure When the sphere is acoustically compact. The force on the sphere is in the mean flow direction – the effective acoustic source is the unsteady drag – and only the component  Y1 = y1 a3 1+ 2|y|3 ≡ y1 1 + a3 2 2 r 2 + y1 3 2   (from Table 3.4) gives p(x.

7) considered above for the vortex ring trajectories in Fig. dT where M = V /c0 .5 Vortex Ring and Sphere 203 Fig. Expressing this result in nondimensional form.5. 8.8.5. where the quantity in the square braces is evaluated at the retarded position of the vortex ring.5.5. The thick solid curve is the pressure profile in the .6). and R and X are the solutions of the vortex equations of motion (8. t) ≈π ρ0 V 2 M cos (a/|x|) ∂T 3R 2 X 2(R 2 + X 2) 2 2(R 2 5 dX dT + X 2) 2 5 + 1+ R 2 − 2X 2 R dR . 8. 8. 8.5.3 are for the same the initial conditions (8.2.5. and is the angle between the radiation direction and the x1 axis illustrated in the upper part of Fig.3.3. we have ∂ p(x. The nondimensional acoustic pressure signatures plotted in Fig.

1 depicts a simple model of such a source.6. 8. The rigid wall coincides with the plane x1 = 0.1) Let the initial separation of the vortices at x1 = − ∞ be 2h. when the selfinduction velocity u ≈ U at large distances from sphere. and dt dT (8. 1975) 3i Z 2i d Z∗ = 2 + .5.6 Vortex Pair Incident on a Wall Aperture Hydrodynamic motion in the vicinity of an aperture in a large thin wall generally produces an unsteady volume flux through the aperture. consisting of vortices of strengths ± at the respective complex positions z 0 = x01 + i x02 and ∗ z 0 = x01 − i x02 is incident on the aperture from the left (x1 = −∞).204 8 Further Worked Examples absence of mean flow (U = 0). To integrate the equation. The motion is evidently symmetric with respect to the x1 axis. 8. which is acoustically equivalent to a monopole source when the aperture is compact. √ √ 3 dT Z + 1 (Z 2 + 1) 2 {Z / Z 2 + 1 − (Z / Z 2 + 1)∗ } Vt z0 . and is pierced by a two-dimensional slit aperture of width 2a whose centerline extends along the x3 axis. The upper part of Fig. the thin-line curves in the figure give the pressure signature and retarded positions for U = 3V . we can set z 0 = − L + i h at a convenient initial (but arbitrary) time . and the transformation ζ =√ z z2 + a2 (z = x1 + i x2 ) maps the region Im z > 0 cut along the upper section x2 > a of the wall onto the upper half of the ζ plane. The positions of the vortex ring in this case at several different retarded times V [t]/a are marked on the thick curve in the upper part of Fig. By the usual method. Both the amplitude and frequency of the sound are increased because of the increased convection velocity of the vortex past the sphere. we accordingly obtain the equation of motion of the vortex pair in the form (Karweit. Similarly.6. T = a a 4πa dZ dz 0 =V ≡ V (u + iv). 8. V = . A vortex pair aligned with the x3 axis. where Z = .3 (time being measured from the instant that the ring crosses the centre of the sphere).

385 the vortex pair passes through the aperture in the manner indicated in Fig. T = T .6 Vortex Pair Incident on a Wall Aperture 205 Fig.1. t − τ )≈ − √ √ a t − τ − |x|/c0 π 2π|x| ˜ z2 −1 a2 .8. ∂y (8.2) 3 where G is the compact Green’s function (3.9. as illustrated for h/a = 0. ˜ z = y2 + i y1 . (8. 8. For larger values of h/a the trajectories of the two vortices separate. When h/a is smaller than 2/3 2 ≈ 0.6.35. The acoustic pressure in the far field is given by p(x.6. 8.6. t) ≈ −ρ0 ω∧v· ∂G 2 d y dτ. where L a. y. the vortices travel along symmetric paths parallel to the wall on either side of the aperture.10) for the wall aperture √ ˜ c0 sgn(x1 ) χ (t − τ − |x|/c0 ) z Re ln + G(x.6.6.3) .1 for h/a = 0.

where k is a unit vector in the x3 direction (out of the plane of the paper in Fig. ˆ [T ] − T [T ] = V [t] .6. (8.1). 8. ˆ ˜ Z =i Z ∗ M= V . t) 7 ˆ [T ] − T we can write ∞ 0 22 1 ≈ √ πM ρ0 V 2 sgn(x1 )(a/|x|) 2 ˜ Re(W ∗ (Z )(u + iv))([T ] − λ2 )χ (λ2 ) dλ. c0 a |x| 1 2 [T ] −∞ ˜ ˆ Re(W ∗ (Z )(u + iv))(T ) ˆ ˆ ˆ χ([T ] − T ) d T . t) ≈ √ πM × 5 1 ˜2 − 1 Z .2). ˆ |x| → ∞. ω = kδ(y1 − x01 )δ(y2 − x02 ) − kδ(y1 − x01 )δ(y2 + x02 ).6. [ln( Mξ 2 /4λ2 )]2 + π 2 2 . by setting λ = p(x. [ln( aξ 2 /4c0 t)]2 + π 2 2 = 1.4) where χ(λ ) = ˆ 2 0 ∞ ln( Mξ 2 /4λ2 )e−ξ dξ .781072. T = a we find 2 2 ρ0 V 2 sgn(x1 ) p(x. If we define ˜ W(Z ) = and put Vτ ˆ in the integral (8.6.3) is contained entirely in the logarithmic term. The dependence on source position y in (8. a Therefore. χ (T ) = χ (t). When vortex shedding from the aperture edges is ignored.206 and χ (t) = H (t) 0 ∞ 8 Further Worked Examples ln( aξ 2 /4c0 t)e−ξ dξ .6. which represents the velocity potential of the ideal flow that would be produced through the aperture (from left to right) by a uniform pressure drop across the wall.

03 for the far-field acoustic pressure signatures plotted in Fig.. We have taken M = 0. forcing fluid through the aperture into the region x1 > 0. When h/a = 0. The maximum acoustic pressure amplitude is found to occur when h/a just exceeds the critical value (∼0. In each case. in air this would imply that V ∼10 m/sec. a decrease in the characteristic frequency of the sound).6. 8. which occurs when the vortices pass close to the edges of the aperture. the time origin has been adjusted to correspond approximately with the peak in the radiated acoustic pressure.6 the vortices do not penetrate the aperture but are deflected by the wall. directed toward the wall. where the vortices pass through the aperture. .8.e. 0.35.6 Vortex Pair Incident on a Wall Aperture 207 √ As before. when the vortex trajectories pass very close to the aperture edges. where T is the nondimensional initial time from which the motion of the vortex pair is calculated. Numerical results are illustrated in the figure for h/a = 0. the upper limit of integration in (8.4) is actually λ = [T ] − T .6. Further increases of h/a beyond 0.35. The resistance of the wall to this flow causes the pressure just to the left of the wall aperture to rise.6 result in a gradual reduction in the amplitude of the sound.6. and a corresponding increase in the width of the acoustic pulse (i. The radiation therefore has the characteristics of an acoustic monopole source for x1 > 0 and a sink for x1 < 0.385). The flow induced by the vortex pair approaching the wall forms a localized two-dimensional jet between the vortices. this produces a relatively larger pressure rise than for h/a = 0. c0 4πac0 This is just the self-induced convection Mach number of the vortex pair when separated by a distance 2a. The value of the integral depends weakly on the characteristic Mach number M= V ≡ .1.

.

Goldstein.P. Aeroacoustics.G. 1992.. and Ffowcs Williams.E. J. 1976. 1983. P. Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society of London A264: 321–342. Crighton.G. D. Modern Methods in Analytical Acoustics (Lecture Notes).. Basic principles of aerodynamic noise generation. G. Radiation from vortex filament motion near a half plane.E. Ffowcs Williams. M.E. Journal of Fluid Mechanics 40: 657–670. Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society of London A255: 469–503. J. Lectures on Fluid Mechanics. Ffowcs Williams. F. M. Journal of Fluid Mechanics 66: 791–816. The noise from turbulence convected at high speed. New York: McGraw-Hill. and Leppington. Ffowcs Williams.G. Journal of Fluid Mechanics 110: 129–147. S. 1967. Interaction between a vortex filament and an approaching rigid sphere. Annual Reviews of Fluid Mechanics 17: 411–445. Dowling.S.. Sound and Sources of Sound. Ffowcs Williams. M. Proceedings of the Royal Society of London A231: 505–514. and Hall. J. Cannell. D. Heckl.. and Ffowcs Williams.Bibliography Batchelor.G.E.K. 1973. 1974. Sound generation by turbulence and surfaces in arbitrary motion.L. Dowling. London: Springer-Verlag. J.H. Contributions to the theory of aerodynamic sound with 209 . J. Crighton.R. An Introduction to Fluid Dynamics.E. 1963.E. The influence of solid boundaries upon aerodynamic sound. Radiation from line vortex filaments exhausting from a two-dimensional semi-infinite duct. Ffowcs Williams. New York: Interscience. 1972. J. 1975a. 1970. The Kutta condition in unsteady flow. Sound production at the edge of a steady flow. A. Cambridge: University Press. 1985.E. 1981. Chichester: Ellis Horwood. L. and Hawkings. Progress in Aerospace Sciences 16: 31–96. J.G. Howe. 1960. Dhanak. Journal of Fluid Mechanics 51: 357–362. Crighton. Aerodynamic sound generation by turbulent flow in the vicinity of a scattering half-plane. 1955. N. D. Goldstein. 1969. D. 1975.P. A. Curle. D.E. Crighton. Journal of Fluid Mechanics 58: 65–80. M.

Proceedings of the International Conference on Speedup Technology for Railway and Maglev Vehicles. 1998a. 1. Karweit. 2. 1975. and sound produced by the normal chopping of a rectilinear vortex.. E.M. Journal of the Acoustical Society of America 103: 83–98. Journal of Fluid Mechanics 206: 131–153.. T. Kelvin. M. . Proceedings of the Cambridge Philosophical Society 52: 317–321.. Howe. 1963.. Lighthill. 1932. Transactions of the Royal Society of Edinburgh 25: 217–260. On vortex sound at low Mach number. Howe. Sound radiation from a linear vortex over a plane with a projecting edge. Modelling low Mach number noise. Fluid Mechanics. 1987. 2001. M. Oxford: Pergamon. A. M¨ hring. Lord. O. 1956.. Aerodynamic noise and the plane boundary. Kasoev. K. Iida.S. M. Chs.. Japan 22–26 November) pp. Theoretical and experimental investigation of the compression wave generated by a train entering a tunnel with a flared portal.W.J. S. Horace. Journal of Fluid Mechanics 67: 579–610. M. 1975b.. Journal of Fluid Mechanics 71: 625–673. Soviet Physics Acoustics 22: 71–72.210 Bibliography application to excess jet noise and the theory of the flute. 1980. Howe. and Klein. L. Proceedings of the Royal Society of London A370: 407–415. The compression wave produced by a high-speed train entering a tunnel. Howe. 6th ed. Oxford: Clarendon Press. Fukuda. On unsteady surface forces. M. K. Motion of a vortex pair approaching an opening in a boundary. M. M. J. Waves in Fluids.J. 1978. Interaction of a slender vortex with a rigid sphere: Dynamics and far field sound.S. T.. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Milne-Thomson. 315–319. Part I: General theory. Physics of Fluids 18: 1604–1606. M¨ ller. Mechanics of Sound o Generation in Flows. 5th ed. and Uchida. An Informal Introduction to Theoretical Fluid Mechanics. Journal of Engineering Mathematics 41: 367–400. London: Macmillan.D. 1960. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Lamb. Proceedings of the Royal Society A454: 1523–1534. Proceedings of the Royal Society of London A211: 564–587. pp. The generation of sound by aerodynamic sources in an inhomogeneous steady flow. Lighthill.S. On sound generated aerodynamically. Edited by E. M. 1952. D. 1998b. Journal of Fluid Mechanics 425: 111–132. Laminar Boundary Layers.S. W. Matsumura.-A. 1978. Hydrodynamics. Effect of shape of train nose on compression wave generated by train entering tunnel. Moore.. Berlin: Springer-Verlag. On vortex motion. M. u Powell. and Maeda. Edited by L. Iida.J. Lighthill. 1958. 1986.G. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. M. 1993. Acoustics of Fluid–Structure Interactions. M¨ hring. Theoretical Hydrodynamics. James.S. Rosenhead. T. 2nd ed. Landau. Maeda. Oxford: University Press. T. M. 1976.J. and Lifshitz. L. W. L. Howe. Nakatani.M. Lighthill.M. 85–96. M. 2000. An Introduction to Fourier Analysis and Generalised Functions. 1980. The velocity of a vortex ring with a thin core of elliptical cross-section. Lighthill. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Ting. The image system of a vortex element in a rigid sphere. Journal of Fluid Mechanics o 85: 685–691. 1998. Howe. 1989. M. Vorticity and the theory of aerodynamic sound. Japan Society of Mechanical Engineers (Yokohama.S. Knio. 1867. 1968. R. Lighthill. Journal of the Acoustical Society of America 32: 962–990.

Powell.Bibliography 211 Powell. Lecture Notes in Physics. Ting. Rayleigh. 1963. and Klein. L. New York: Springer-Verlag. AGARD Report No. Lord. Viscous vortical flows. Some aspects of non-stationary airfoil theory and its practical applications. Saffman. 374. 1964. 1941. Theory of Sound. Journal of the Aeronautical Sciences 8: 104–108. . Journal of the Acoustical Society of America 36: 177–195. W.R. Vol. 466. 1945. A. A. 1991. 1993. Sears. 2 vols. Theory of vortex sound. New York: Dover. P. Mechanisms of Aerodynamic Sound Production.G. Vortex Dynamics. R. Cambridge: University Press.

.

178.Index acoustic wave number. 64 definition for wave equation. 60 sphere. 186 blockage. 11 circulation. 94 relation to bound vorticity. 175 linear theory. 25 airfoil theory. 100 circular cylinder. 105 strip 61. 58 cylindrical bodies. elliptic. 101 compression wave. definition. 2 linearized. 32 differential equation. 35 conformal transformation. 5 control surface. 63 two-dimensional. application to creeping flow. 30. 128 turbulence eddies. 77. theory. 52 airfoil of variable chord. 38 compact Green’s function. 167 bluff body. 180. 49. two-dimensions 150. 43 added mass tensor. 88 used to calculate sound source. 143. 72 wall projection. 187. 103 complex velocity. 91 causality. 99 formula. continuity equation. 18 body. 71 circular cylinder. 72 complex potential. 94 sphere. 80 for incompressible flow. 149 Crocco’s equation. 114 with bound vorticity. 70 half-plane. acoustic. 69. 35 integral equation. 77. 41 bubble. 25 Biot-Savart. 76 wall aperture. 32 creeping flow. 166 compressive stress. 103 vortex. blowing out. preliminary definition. 188 nonlinear. 58 definition for Helmholtz equation. 68 contribution to surface force. definition. 65 duct (tunnel) entrance. 112 candle. 154 uniform duct. 53 symmetric. 100 half-plane. 74 rigid strip. 148 compact. acoustically. 148 airfoil. 99 Crighton. in sound field. solid. 87 Kelvin’s theorem. 5 with source. 105 source. 1 acoustic analogy. 75 wall cavity. definition. 87 per unit length of wake. 190 analogy. 91 boundary. 36. 91 blade-vortex interactions. 194 bound vorticity. 136. 70 aerodynamic sound. 189 three-dimensions. 170 duct with neck. 81 general form. 187 rectangular. 85 Curle. linearized. generated by train. 36 213 . 102 half-plane. 158.

38 far field. 179 special cases. see also compact Green’s function definition. 204 Kasoev. 159. 96 infrasound. of vorticity. 147 role of bound vorticity. 100 leading edge. 54 Kraichnan-Phillips theorem. acoustic. 136 Laplace equation axisymmetric. 85. 45 inhomogeneous equation. 15 in Curle’s equation. 53 polar from. 199 theorem on kinetic energy. 182. 39 Kutta condition. 60 rigid strip. 148 ideal acoustic medium. Kutta condition. definition. 4 flux. 171 . 2 values for air and water. 28 equation reformulated in terms of vorticity. 82. 54 near edge. 45 free-space. 25 eighth power law. 82 in terms of vorticity. 44 Green’s function. 32 intensity. 191. 61 singularities of. 5 Mach number. 158 lift dipole. 12 for Helmholtz equation. 148 vortex. 1 acoustic analogy. definition. 19 irrotational flow. 166. 29 Maeda. equation. 149 Fraunhofer approximation. definition. 182. 35 in Helmholtz equation. 117 stress tensor. 32 of quadrupole radiation.214 decibel. 131 incompressible fluid. 94 Sears’ formula. 89 in terms of impulse. 18 kinetic. 44. 149 see also singularities Lamb vector. 96 lift. 19 calculation of. 185 lift. 185 produced by gust. 7. 27 impedance. 4 delta function Fourier integral for. 195 near compact sphere. 4 Lighthill’s equation. equation. 4 far field. 87 dipole. 82 formula for vortex ring speed. 89 wavelength. sound waves in. 178. 12. 28 linear. transformation using Heaviside function. definition. 60 two dimensions. 90 theory of vortex sound. 94 formula for translating body. 92. acoustics. impulse formula. 146. 32 Helmholtz. definition. time harmonic. 188. 190. 14 directivity. 25. 195 efficiency. acoustic. 27 momentum equation. 195 Lighthill. 90. 195 far field form. 93 added mass contribution. 17 acoustic. 62 drag. see total enthalpy entropy. 188. 57 homentropic. 84 Kirchhoff spinning vortex. 45 lift. 90 enthalpy. 156 Heaviside unit function. 21 fluid volume. 90 Kelvin’s theorem on. 16 drag. 46 gust. 87 definition of vorticity. 52 circular cylinder. 3 diffusion. 191 Kelvin. 43 in three dimensions. 84 kinetic energy. 174 integrals. pressure. 32 of surface dipoles. 21 Green’s function. 4 Index hydrodynamic. 89 Ffowcs Williams. 29 Force. 71 sphere. 190. 37 end correction. 78 energy. 48 impulse. 20 hydrodynamic. 132 Kirchhoff vector. 146. circulation theorem. 150 suction. 29 equation. 118 Karweit. 96. 9 density. 93.

117 tunnel. 48 noncompact. added mass. 14 Reynolds number. 22 image in plane wall. 85 nonlinear steepening in tunnel. 39 in Helmholtz equation. 108. 3 volume source. 3 kinematic. 17 no slip condition. definition. vortex. 180. 178. 156. vortex sound formula. 57. 89 potential. 132. definition. definition. 187 specific heats. 174 turbulent nozzle flow.Index micro-pressure wave. 175. 166 M¨ hring. 149 self potential. 107 singularities. ratio. 183 three-dimensional. 180. 19 quadrupole. 179. 200 Stokesian fluid. 107 shedding. 28 in Lighthill tensor. 78 reciprocal. 147 Sears function. 159. 106. 186 two-dimensional. 28 viscous. 13 retarded time. 18 in terms of impulse. theorem. 12 in Helmholtz equation. 36 Reynolds stress. 46. 190 surface. definition. 38 power. 195. 65. 161. 129 vibrating sphere. 166. 45 Lighthill’s. definition. definition for homentropic flow. acoustic particle. 11. 185 dipole. 9 pulsating. 116 in terms of velocity potential. 173. 26. 117 relation to pressure. 28 radiation condition. 3 stress tensor Lighthill’s. 13 rate of strain tensor. 84 Rayleigh. 84. 120 stationary phase. 145. 67 slender body approximation. 88 potential flow interaction. 9. 15 far field form. 164 Powell. 6 vibrating body. 146. 199 modelled by point source. 4 speed of sound. 92. 135 o momentum equation. 159 tube. 19. 7 sphere. velocity. 9 potential. 162. 13 in Curle’s equation. deleting from Green’s function. 44 monopole. 37 215 test function. drag. 15 vortex-airfoil interaction. 189 periodic. 10. 27 monopole. 56 low frequency radiation from. 6 values for air and water. 150 vortex. 27 momentum flux tensor. 85 linearized. 67 vibrating. 163 Sears. 11 total enthalpy. 35 Navier-Stokes equation. 68 interacting with a vortex. 67 viscosity. 182. 166 plane wave. 6 vector. 26 suction force. 47 end correction. 84 . compact. 199 self potential. 5 Reynolds’ form. acoustic. 98 stream function. 148 retarded potential. 3 Crocco’s form. 158. 16. 103 equation of motion. 198. 75 Stokes. 133 complex potential. 25 velocity. 85 acoustic variable. 3 values for air and water. 108 outside cylinder. 192. 160 line. 150. 188 nonlinear. 5. definition. 50 reduced frequency. 16. coaxial rings. 178. 9 impulsive. 188. 5 dipole. 9 thermodynamics. hydrodynamic. 111 ring. Second Law. 7. 3 near field. 36 impedance. 127 problem for compact Green’s function. 57. 29 linear. definition. definition. 169 spinning vortex pair. 29 Runge-Kutta integration. 204 finite core. 158 motion near half-plane. 23 point source. linear theory.

150 wall drag. 6 in irrotational mean flow. 143. 120 from spoiler. 197 vorticity. 194 for nonvibrating body. 148 vortex sheet. 88. 148 wave number. 204 in terms of surface force. 162 Index vortex near spoiler. 7 hydrodynamic. 127 high Reynolds number form. 91 equation. 84 equation for Stokesian fluid. 191 from vortex interacting with cylinder. 120 vortex-surface interaction noise. cylinder. 17. 119 for cylindrical bodies. 191 wave equation classical acoustics. 87 source of sound. 10 wavelength acoustic.216 vortex pair. 120 vortex sheet. 199 from wall aperture. 129 vortex sound equation. at low Mach numbers. 191 wall mounted cylinder. 43 . 150 vortex sound. 93. 128 influence of vortex shedding. bound. 162. 13 radially symmetric. 87. 173 from vortex near sphere. 118 linearized. 7. 143 vortex near sphere. 82 molecular diffusion. 204 spinning. 114 wake. 156 low Mach number approximation. 118 inhomogeneous. 116. 86 in force formulae. 130. 139 from vortex near half-plane. 96 Kelvin’s definition. 130 from spinning vortices. 6 for pressure. 43 at 1 kHz. 91 wake. 124 general formula.

You're Reading a Free Preview

Download
scribd
/*********** DO NOT ALTER ANYTHING BELOW THIS LINE ! ************/ var s_code=s.t();if(s_code)document.write(s_code)//-->